Douglass Houghton Hall (DHH) Bathroom Renovations...31-18-01 / DHH Bathroom Renovations 00 01 10 - 2 March 18, 2021 TABLE OF CONTENTS Division 2 – Technical Specifications 02 41

Douglass Houghton Hall (DHH)

Bathroom Renovations

MTU Job No. 31-18-01

March 18, 2021

31-18-01 / DHH Bathroom Renovations

00 01 10 - 1 March 18, 2021

TABLE OF CONTENTS

DHH Bathroom Renovations

MTU Job No. 31-18-01

Division 0 - Procurement

00 01 01 Cover Page

00 01 10 Table of Contents

00 11 13 Invitation to Bid

00 42 00 Bid Proposal Form

00 52 00 Draft Agreement

00 60 00 Project Schedule

Division 1 – General Requirements

01 00 00 General Requirements

1.1 Instruction to Bidders

1.2 General Conditions

01 00 01 Supplementary General Conditions

01 00 02 Payment Procedures

01 00 03 AIA Document G702 Sample

01 00 04 AIA Document G703 Sample

01 00 08 Substantial Completion Notice

01 00 10 Final Completion Checklist

01 00 12 Guaranty

01 00 14 Consent of Surety to Final Payment

01 00 16 Sworn Statement

01 00 18 Full Unconditional Waiver

01 00 20 Certificate of Final Completion

01 00 22 Change Order

01 10 00 Summary

01 21 00 Allowances

01 23 00 Alternates

01 25 00 Substitutions

01 25 01 CSI Form 13.1A

01 30 00 Administrative Submittals

01 31 00 Project Management and Coordination

01 33 00 Submittal Procedures

01 40 00 Quality Requirements

01 50 00 Temporary Facilities

01 60 00 Product Requirements

01 70 00 Execution and Closeout Requirements

01 70 10 Final Cleaning

01 74 19 Construction Waste Management and Disposal

01 78 23 Operation and Maintenance Data

01 78 39 Project Record Documents


00 01 10 - 2 March 18, 2021

TABLE OF CONTENTS

Division 2 – Technical Specifications

02 41 19 Selective Demolition

04 22 00 Concrete Unit Masonry

07 14 16 Cold Fluid-Applied Waterproofing

07 84 13 Penetration Firestopping

07 92 00 Joint Sealants

08 12 13 Hollow Metal Frames

08 14 16 Flush Wood Doors

08 51 13 Aluminum Windows

08 71 00 Door Hardware

08 83 00 Mirrors

09 22 16 Non-Structural Metal Framing

09 29 00 Gypsum Board

09 30 13 Ceramic Tiling

09 51 13 Acoustical Panel Ceilings

09 65 13 Resilient Base And Accessories

09 67 23 Resinous Flooring

09 91 23 Interior Painting

10 21 13.19 Plastic Toilet Compartments

10 21 16.19 Plastic Shower And Dressing Compartments

10 28 00 Toilet, Bath, And Laundry Accessories

12 36 61.16 Solid Surfacing Countertops

22 05 17 Sleeves and Sleeve Seals For Plumbing Piping

22 05 18 Escutcheons for Plumbing Piping

22 05 23.12 Ball Valves For Plumbing Piping

22 05 29 Hangers And Supports For Plumbing Piping And Equipment

22 05 53 Identification For Plumbing Piping and Equipment

22 07 19 Plumbing Piping Insulation

22 11 16 Domestic Water Piping

22 13 16 Sanitary Waste And Vent Piping

22 13 19 Sanitary Waste Piping Specialties

22 42 13.13 Commercial Water Closets

22 42 16.13 Commercial Lavatories

22 42 23 Commercial Showers

23 01 30.52 Existing HVAC Air Distribution System Cleaning

23 31 13 Metal Ducts

23 33 00 Air Duct Accessories

23 34 16 Centrifugal HVAC Fans

23 37 13 Diffusers, Registers, And Grilles

26 05 19 Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors And Cables

26 05 29 Hangers And Supports For Electrical Systems

26 05 33 Raceway And Boxes For Electrical Systems

26 05 44 Sleeves And Sleeve Seals For Electrical Raceways And Cabling

26 05 53 Identification For Electrical Systems


00 01 10 - 3 March 18, 2021

TABLE OF CONTENTS

26 09 23 Lighting Control Devices

26 27 26 Wiring Devices

26 28 13 Fuses

26 28 16 Enclosed Switches And Circuit Breakers

26 29 13 Enclosed Controllers

26 51 19 Led Interior Lighting

31 10 00 Site Clearing

31 20 00 Earth Moving

32 92 00 Turf and Grasses

Appendix

DHH Asbestos Report

END OF CONTENTS


00 11 13 - 1March 18, 2021

INVITATION TO BID

INVITATION TO BIDMICHIGAN TECHNOLOGICAL UNIVERSITY

HOUGHTON, MICHIGAN 49931

PROJECT: Douglass Houghton Hall (DHH) Bathroom RenovationsMichigan Technological University Project #31-18-01

PREBID MEETING: A mandatory prebid walk-through for interested contractors will be held on March 24, 2021 at 2:00 PM local time at the Douglass Houghton Hall. Meet in Lot 8 on the east side of DHH. Other contractors, specifically mechanical and electrical, are encouraged to attend. State-mandated COVID-19 safety protocols will be followed.

DUE DATE: Until 2:00 PM local time on April 13, 2021, the Owner will receive sealed proposals for the work as herein set forth at the offices of:

Ms. Julie HeikkinenFacilities Management 100 Facilities Building - Waterfront1400 Townsend DriveMichigan Technological UniversityHoughton, MI 49931

at which time and place all proposals will be publicly opened and read aloud. State-mandated COVID-19 safety protocols will be followed.

DOCUMENTS: Bidding documents consisting of proposal forms, plans, specifications, and other pertinent data will be available on March 18, 2021. These documents can be viewed and downloaded on that date from the Facilities Management web site at the following address: http://www.mtu.edu/facilities/admin-planning/projects/bid/ Please contact project manager, Jared Hyrkas, at OHM Advisors ([email protected] or 906.482.0535) with any technical questions.

PROPOSALGUARANTEE: All bidders submitting bids in excess of $50,000 must provide a certified check or

bank draft payable to Michigan Technological University, or a satisfactory Bid Bond executed by the Bidder and surety company, in an amount equal to but not less than five percent (5%) of the maximum proposal amount.

PRE-QUALIFICATION: The Contractor for this project must be Pre-qualified for work on Michigan Technological University’s campus per the Facilities Admin & Planning pre-qualification process prior to submitting bids.

CONTRACT SECURITY: The successful bidders will be required to furnish a satisfactory performance bond and labor and material payment bond in amounts each of one-hundred percent (100%) of the accepted bid.

EQUAL EMPLOYMENTOPPORTUNITY: All bidders shall comply with current Federal and State Equal Employment

Opportunity requirements. Michigan Technological University is an equal opportunity educational institution/equal opportunity employer, which includes providing equal opportunity for protected veterans and individuals with disabilities. MTU reserves the right to reject any or all bids and to waive any informality or irregularity in any bid received.

http://www.mtu.edu/facilities/admin-planning/projects/bid/

mailto:jared.hyrkas@

BID PROPOSAL FORM


00 42 00 - 1March 18, 2021

BID PROPOSAL FORM

MICHIGAN TECHNOLOGICAL UNIVERSITYHOUGHTON, MICHIGAN 49931

Ms. Julie HeikkinenFacilities ManagementMichigan Technological University1400 Townsend DriveHoughton, MI 49931-1295

The Project consists of renovations to all Douglass Houghton Hall bathrooms and toilet rooms. Reference the project bid documents for details.

Having carefully read the specifications and drawings dated March 18, 2021 for Michigan Technological University DHH Bathroom Renovations, the undersigned agrees to perform the work in accordance with the Contract Documents and the proposed schedule for Project No. 31-18-01.

Our lump sum base bid price to furnish and install all materials to perform the specified work as noted in the bid documents is:

$ (Bid price in numbers and words)

ALLOWANCES: Include allowances for specific work noted in Section 01 21 00. Note that the base bid is to include this work as indicated on the Construction Documents. Refer to Section 01 21 00 Allowances for additional information.

ALTERNATE PRICES: The Undersigned submits for consideration by Michigan Tech, the following Alternate Prices. If the Alternate Price is accepted by Michigan Tech, the variation becomes part of the Contract and the amount quoted is added to the Lump Sum Base Bid Price. Refer to Section 01 23 00 Alternates for additional information.

ALTERNATE NO. 1 – Remove and replace bathroom aluminum windowsOur Alternate No. 1 bid price to furnish and install all materials to perform the specified work as noted in the bid documents is:

$ (Alternate No. 1 price in numbers and words)

ALTERNATE NO. 2 – Clean existing ductwork to be reusedOur Alternate No. 2 bid price to furnish and install all materials to perform the specified work as noted in the bid documents is:


ALTERNATE NO. 3 – Provide masonry wall behind showers in three of the large bathroomsOur Alternate No. 3 bid price to furnish and install all materials to perform the specified work as noted in the bid documents is:


BID PROPOSAL FORM


00 42 00 - 2March 18, 2021

BID PROPOSAL FORM

ALTERNATE NO. 4 – Provide Aqua PEX-a piping in lieu of copper for all new domestic water pipingOur Alternate No. 4 bid price to furnish and install all materials to perform the specified work as noted in the bid documents is:


Bidder acknowledges receipt of the following addenda:

Addendum No. Dated: Addendum No. Dated: Addendum No. Dated: Addendum No. Dated:

The undersigned has used the proposal of the following subcontractors to complete the bid and plans to employ the firms listed below for the work: (include list of subs you determine are important to the project).

Mechanical:

Electrical:

Flooring:

Final Cleaning:

Other:

The undersigned also certifies that they have been designated as Pre-Qualified for bidding work at Michigan Technological University per the Facilities Admin & Planning pre-qualification process.

Contractor:

Name: Date: (Signature)

Name: (Print)

Title:

Contact Information (Phone and email): Sealed proposals will be received at Facilities Management, Bldg. 44, on the waterfront of Michigan Technological University, Houghton, Michigan until 2:00 PM on April 13, 2021.


00 52 00 - 1 March 18, 2021

DRAFT AGREEMENT

Owner/Contractor Agreement (Draft)

Owner: Michigan Tech University, 1400 Townsend Dr., Houghton, MI

Project: Douglass Houghton Hall (DHH) Bathroom Remodel

Project #: 31-18-01

Contract for: General Construction

Contractor:

Construction Start Date: (Determine start date) or Date of Notice to Proceed

Contract Completion Date: (Determine completion date) or Date of Final Payment

This Agreement, is authorized and made to be effective as of this Xth day of (month and year) between Michigan Technological University, a Michigan constitutional corporation located in Houghton, Michigan, (the “University”) and < >, (the “Contractor”), a corporation located at < >, for contract services to be provided by the Contractor to the University for, and in connection with, the following described project located at the University’s campus in Houghton, Michigan. The Contractor and the Owner, agree as follows:

ARTICLE 1 - THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS

The Contract Documents consists of this Agreement, Conditions of the Contract (General,

Supplementary and other Conditions), Specifications, Construction Plans/Drawings, etc. as

listed in this Agreement and Modifications issued after execution of this Agreement; these form

the Contract, and are as fully a part of the Contract as if attached to this Agreement or repeated

herein. The Contract represents the entire and integrated agreement between the parties hereto

and supersedes prior negotiations, representations or agreements, either written or oral. An

enumeration of the Contract Documents other than Modifications, appears in Article 6.

ARTICLE 2 - SCOPE OF THE WORK

The Contractor shall furnish all of the materials and perform all of the Work shown on the

Drawings and described in the Specifications for 31-18-01 for the DHH Bathroom Renovations

Project prepared by OHM Advisors, 424 Hancock Street, Hancock, Michigan 49930.

The Project consists of renovations to the bathrooms and toilet rooms in Douglass Houghton

Hall as specified in the construction documents.


00 52 00 - 2 March 18, 2021

DRAFT AGREEMENT

ARTICLE 3 – SCHEDULE AND LIQUIDATED DAMAGES

The Work to be performed under this Contract shall begin on or about May 3, 2021, and shall be

substantially completed on or before the August 6, 2021.

It is mutually agreed that Michigan Tech shall withhold from the Contractor, as liquidated

damages and not as penalty, the sum of $1,000.00 for each calendar day for each uncompleted

toilet room that the Work remains incomplete beyond the project substantial completion date.

ARTICLE 4 - PROGRESS PAYMENTS

Michigan Tech shall make payments as provided in Articles 1.2.14 of the General Requirements

(2015) and 01 00 02 Payment Procedures and conditions set forth and agreed upon herein:

Based upon Applications for Payment submitted to Michigan Tech by the Contractor and

Certificates for Payment issued by Michigan Tech, Michigan Tech shall make payments on the

Total Contract Amount to the Contractor as provided below and elsewhere in the Contract

Documents.

The period covered by each Application for Payment shall be one month ending on the last day

of each month.

Each Application for Payment and Conditional Waiver and Release on Progress Payment shall

be based upon schedule of values consistent with format of AIA Documents G702, G703. The

schedule of values (G703) shall allocate the entire Total Contract Amount among the various

portions of the Work and supported by such data to substantiate its accuracy as Michigan Tech

may require. This schedule of values, unless objected to by Michigan Tech, shall be used as a

basis for reviewing the Contractor’s Application for Payment.

Applications for Payment shall indicate the percentage of completion of each portion of Work as

of the end of the period covered by the Application for Payment. The amount of each

Application for Payment (progress payment) shall be computed by:

1) Multiply the percentage complete of each portion of the work by the share of the Total

Contract Amount allocated to that portion of the Work in the schedule of values, less retainage

of ten (10%). Pending final determination of cost to Michigan Tech of changes in the Work,

changes for amounts not in the dispute may be included per Section 1.2.8 of the General

Requirements. The Total Contract Amount must be adjusted to reflect the changes in the Work

by Change Order, then payment shall be allocated as to the completed portion of the Work in

the adjusted schedule of values, less retainage of ten (10%).


00 52 00 - 3 March 18, 2021

DRAFT AGREEMENT

2) The portion of the Total Contract Amount that is materials and equipment delivered and

suitably stored off-site at a location agreed upon in writing by Michigan Tech for subsequent

incorporation in the completed construction may be included in the Application for Payment.

3) The amount of the Application for Payment requested shall not include any previous

payments made by Michigan Tech.

4) The amount of the Application for Payment requested shall not include any previous amounts

that Michigan Tech has withheld or a nullified Application for Payment.

5) Michigan Tech shall review the Application for Payment and if acceptable, sign it; thus it will

become a Certificate of Payment.

6) Provided an Application for Payment and Conditional Waivers and Release for the Progress

Payment are received by Michigan Tech, Michigan Tech shall make payment to the Contractor

not later than thirty (30) days after receipt of the Application for Payment.

ARTICLE 5 - ACCEPTANCE AND FINAL PAYMENTS

Final Payment, constituting the entire unpaid balance of the Total Contract Amount, shall be

made by Michigan Tech to the Contractor when (1) the Contract has been fully performed by the

Contractor except for the Contractor’s responsibility to correct nonconforming Work as provided

in Subparagraph 1.2.12 of the General Conditions and to satisfy other requirements, if any,

which necessarily survive final payment; and (2) a Final Certificate for Payment has been issued

by Michigan Tech.

1) The Contractor must request in writing that Michigan Tech issue a notice of Substantial

Completion. Upon receipt of written notice that the Work is ready for inspection and acceptance,

Michigan Tech shall promptly inspect the Work.

2) If the Work for each set of buildings has been Substantially Completed and accepted,

Michigan Tech shall issue upon request by the contractor, a notice of Substantial Completion

and a Final Completion Checklist as necessary. Upon completion of the Final Completion

Checklist to the satisfaction of Michigan Tech, Michigan Tech shall complete a Certificate of

Completion for the set of buildings as listed.

3) When Michigan Tech finds the work is sufficiently complete per the Final Completion

Checklist and Contract Documents in their entirety, Michigan Tech shall promptly issue the

Certificate of Final Completion that states that the Work provided in this Contract is complete.

Contractor shall issue a Final Pay Request along with all required close out documents. Final

payment shall be due thirty (30) days after the Contract is fully performed and the Final

Payment request is received.


00 52 00 - 4 March 18, 2021

DRAFT AGREEMENT

ARTICLE 6 - THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS

The Contract Documents, together with this Agreement, form the Contract, and they are as fully

a part of the Contract as attached:

• Specifications for the project dated March 18, 2021 as listed in the Table of Contents

• Drawings for this project dated March 18, 2021 as listed on the Cover Sheet

• Any Addendum issued prior to the bid date

The Contractor’s signature on this Agreement indicates that the Contractor has read and will

comply with each of these documents.

The Contract Lump Sum is based on and including the following Alternates:

To be determined prior to the contract signing.

ALTERNATE NO. 1 – Remove and replace bathroom aluminum windows

ALTERNATE NO. 2 – Clean existing ductwork to be reused

ALTERNATE NO. 3 – Provide masonry wall behind showers in three of the large bathrooms

ALTERNATE NO. 4 – Provide PEX piping in lieu of copper for all new domestic water piping

The amount shown below shall be both in words and in figures. In case of discrepancy, the

amount shown in words shall govern.

Contract Lump Sum

____________________________________________________ $ ______________

The amounts agreed to for Allowances are as follows:

IN WITNESS, WHEROF, each of the parties has caused this Contract to be executed by its duly

authorized representatives on the date first mentioned above.

FOR THE CONTRACTOR

____________________________________________/___________________

Signature Date

Name and Title ____________________________________________________________

FOR MICHIGAN TECHNOLOGICAL UNIVERSITY

_______________________________________ Date______________________

Gregg R. Richards,

Interim Exec. Director of Facilities Administration & Planning

00 60 00 PROJECT SCHEDULE


00 60 00 - 1 March 18, 2021

PROJECT SCHEDULE

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Project Schedule and Milestone Concerns

1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS

A. Section 01 10 00 - Summary: Contract descriptions, description of alterations work, work by others, future work, occupancy conditions, use of site and premises, work sequence.

B. Section 01 20 00 - Price and Payment Procedures: Applications for payment, Schedule of Values, modifications procedures, closeout procedures.

1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. See Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.

B. Contractor’s Schedule: As soon as practical after award of the contract, the contractor shall develop their own project schedule indicating the steps needed to achieve the Owner’s overall Project Schedule. Submit to the Owner for review and approval.

1. Maintain project schedule and update every two weeks. Submit updates to Owner with each pay request.

PART 2 PRODUCTS – NOT USED

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 MAINTAINING OVERALL PROJECT SCHEDULE

A. Michigan Tech spring semester ends on April 30, 2021. Students will be out of DHH dorm building by May 2, 2021.

B. Asbestos-containing material is to be abated during the week of May 3, 2021, by others. This work is to be contracted directly between the Owner and the asbestos abatement Contractor. Asbestos-containing abatement required for the project will be performed concurrently with and shall be coordinated with, the Bathroom Renovations Contractor.

C. Work under this contract can start on May 3, 2021 as long as it doesn’t interfere with any asbestos abatement work.

D. The substantial completion date for this project is August 6, 2021. The final completion date for the project is August 19, 2021.

E. Michigan Tech student orientation begins on August 23, 2021 with student move-in beginning on August 20, 2021.

3.02 LIQUIDATED DAMAGES A. It is mutually agreed that Michigan Tech shall withhold from the Contractor, as liquidated

damages and not as penalty, the sum of $1,000.00 per calendar day for each uncompleted

toilet room that the Work remains incomplete beyond the project substantial completion

date.

END OF SECTION 00 60 00


01 00 00 - 1 March 18, 2021

GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

01 00 00 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 1.1. INSTRUCTION TO BIDDERS 1.1.1. PREPARATION OF PROPOSALS: All proposals shall include supplying all materials, equipment, and labor, and shall be submitted on the attached proposal form. The forms are to be filled out in ink or typewritten, with the bidder's authorized agent's signature in longhand. Each proposal shall be delivered in an opaque sealed envelope marked with the project name, Bid No., and bidders name. 1.1.2. BID FORM: No telephonic, telegraphic or digital facsimile (FAX) bid or telephonic, telegraphic or digital facsimile (FAX) modification of a bid will be considered. No bids received after the time fixed for receiving them will be considered. Late bids will be filed unopened. 1.1.3. BID GUARANTEE: Each proposal for which the base bid exceeds $50,000.00 shall be accompanied by either a certified or cashier's check on an open, solvent bank or a bid bond with an authorized surety company in the amount of 5% of the base bid, payable to Michigan Technological University, as a guarantee of good faith. If the successful bidder fails to furnish satisfactory bonds and insurance as required by the General Conditions within 7 days after notice of award, such guarantee shall be forfeited to the Owner as liquidated damages and the Owner shall be entitled at its sole option to immediately cancel, revoke, withdraw, or rescind its award. The guarantees of the three lowest bidders will be retained until the bond and insurance of the Contractor have been approved by the University. The guarantees of all other bidders will be returned within 10 days after the bid opening. 1.1.4. REJECTION OR WITHDRAWAL: The Owner reserves the right to accept or reject any or all proposals, in whole or in part, and also herein reserves the right to waive any informalities or irregularities in any or all proposals and to make such award as it deems, in its sole discretion, to be in the best interest of the Owner. No bid may be withdrawn within 60 days after opening date without forfeiting bid security. 1.1.5. CONTRACT: Upon acceptance of any proposal by the Owner, a purchase order will be issued incorporating the accepted proposal and upon the Contractor furnishing satisfactory proof of compliance with all bond and insurance requirements will constitute the Contract. The Contract shall not be binding upon the Owner until the Contractor has furnished the Owner's Facilities Management Department satisfactory certification of compliance with the insurance and bond requirements under General Conditions and the Owner may withdraw or cancel its purchase order at any time prior to receipt of all such certifications. 1.1.6. TAXES: The Contractor shall include all applicable Michigan sales and use taxes currently imposed by Legislative enactment and as administered by the Michigan Department of Treasury, all applicable local or state permit, license or inspection fees, and all Federal taxes or fees applicable, and no additional payment over and above the bid amount shall be allowed for the same. 1.2. GENERAL CONDITIONS 1.2.1. DEFINITIONS UNIVERSITY OR OWNER - Michigan Technological University EXECUTIVE DIRECTOR OF FACILITIES ADMINISTRATION & PLANNING – Gregg R. Richards DIRECTOR OF ENGINEERING SERVICES – Gregg R. Richards CONTRACTOR - The Bidder whose proposal is accepted by the

University. CONTRACT DOCUMENTS - This document, a purchase order, drawings, and specifications. 1.2.2. CONFLICT AND OMISSIONS: The intent of the Contract Documents is to provide everything necessary for the proper execution of the work. In case of conflict among or ambiguity in the Contract Documents the Contractor shall immediately notify the Director of Engineering Services and the work shall not proceed until a decision has been agreed upon by all parties concerned. Any adjustment or interpretation by the Contractor without such agreement shall be at his own risk and expense. No work stoppage by the Contractor will extend the time for completion. 1.2.3. ROYALTIES, PATENTS, NOTICES, AND FEES: The Contractor shall give all notices and pay all royalties and fees, shall defend all suits or claims for infringement of any patent rights and shall save the Owner harmless from loss on account thereof, and shall comply with all laws, ordinances, and codes applicable to any portion of the work. 1.2.4. EXAMINATION OF PREMISES: The Contractor shall become familiar with local and on-site conditions affecting the job and the cost thereof, shall take independent measurements and make an examination and determination of all physical conditions affecting the work, and be responsible for the correctness of same even if they differ from those anticipated or indicated in the Contract. The Contractor shall be held to have made such examinations prior to bid submission and no allowances will be made in his behalf nor will any additional expenses be recoverable by reason of any error, omission, or misunderstanding on the part of the Contractor even if such actual conditions differ from those anticipated or indicated in the Contract. If any part of the Contractor's work depends for proper results upon existing work or the work of another contractor the Contractor shall examine such work and notify, before commencing work, the Director of Engineering Services of all defects or conditions that will affect the results. Failure to so notify will constitute acceptance of the conditions and render the Contractor responsible and liable for the results of any such defects or conditions which would have been revealed by complete examination and testing. 1.2.5. MOVING MATERIALS: If at any time it becomes necessary for the operation of the University to move materials temporarily located which are to enter into the final construction the Contractor furnishing the material shall, when so directed and without expense to the Owner, move them to another location. 1.2.6. MATERIALS AND WORKMANSHIP: All materials and workmanship shall be first-class in every respect and, unless otherwise specified, all materials and equipment shall be new and of the latest design. Should any disputes arise as to the quality and fitness of workmanship, equipment, materials or items, the decisions shall rest strictly with the University, and shall be based upon the requirements of the Contract Documents. The Contractor shall, if requested by the University, furnish evidence as to kind and quality of materials, at no additional cost to the University. 1.2.7. EMPLOYEES AND SUPERINTENDENCE: The Contractor shall enforce good order among his employees and shall not employ on the work any negligent, disorderly, intemperate or unfit person, or anyone not skilled in the work assigned. All work shall be performed in a skillful and workmanlike manner. The Contractor, or an authorized representative, shall be at the site at all times, and shall have the plans and specifications available.


01 00 00 - 2 March 18, 2021


1.2.8. EXTRA WORK AND CHANGES IN WORK: The Owner, without invalidating the Contract, may order extra work or make changes by altering, adding to or deducting from the work, the Contract sum being adjusted accordingly. All such work shall be executed under the conditions of the original contract except that any claim for extension of time caused thereby shall be adjusted at the time of ordering such change. In giving instructions, the Owner shall have authority to make minor changes in the work, not involving extra cost, and not inconsistent with the purposes of the work, but otherwise, except in an emergency endangering life or property, no extra work or change shall be made unless in pursuance of a written order from the Owner and no claim for an addition to the Contract sum shall be valid unless as ordered. When so directed, the Contractor shall promptly submit his itemized estimate and proposal for such extra work or changes, as well as separate unit prices on work for both additions to and deductions from the Contract. Adjustments in the Contract sum for any such extra work or change shall be determined by one or more of the following methods: Method Number 1: By an acceptable estimate and lump sum proposal from the Contractor. Method Number 2: By unit prices stated in the Contract or subsequently agreed upon. Method Number 3: By actual cost of all labor and materials and a percentage or fixed fee for all other charges, such as overhead, profit, insurance, taxes and bonds. On any change which involves a net credit to the Owner, no allowance for overhead and profit shall be figured. If none of the foregoing methods is agreed upon, the Contractor, upon receipt of an order as hereinbefore stated, shall proceed with the work. In such case and also under Method Number 3, the Contractor shall keep and present in such form as the Owner may direct, a correct account of the cost, together with vouchers. In any case, the Owner shall certify to the amount including the specified allowance for overhead and profit, due the Contractor. The allowable fee for added work by Contractor's own forces shall not exceed 15% of additional cost and his fee on work performed by Subcontractors shall not exceed 7 ½% of additional cost. Quotations by Subcontractors at all times shall be subject to these same limitations. 1.2.9. OTHER CONTRACTS: The Owner may let other contracts in connection with the work and the Contractor shall properly connect and coordinate all work with the work of such other contractors. The Owner shall not be liable for any damages or increased cost occasioned by the failure of other contractors to execute their work as may be anticipated by these Contract Documents. No contractor shall commit any act which will interfere with the performance of the work by any other contractor. 1.2.10. INSURANCE: No work connected with this Contract shall be started until the Contractor has submitted evidence, satisfactory to the Owner, depicting insurance coverage in accordance with the following:

1. Worker's Disability Insurance

The Contractor shall procure and shall maintain, during the life of this contract, Worker's Disability Insurance in work on the project under this Contract.

In case any such work is sublet, the Contractor shall require the Subcontractor similarly to provide Worker's Disability Insurance for all of the latter's employees engaged in such work unless such employees are covered by the protection afforded by the Contractor's Worker's Disability Insurance. In case any class of employees engaged in hazardous work on the project under this Contract is not protected under the Worker's Disability Statute, the Contractor shall provide and shall cause each Subcontractor to provide Employer's General Liability Insurance for the protection of all such employees not otherwise protected.

2. General Liability Insurance

The Contractor shall carry, from the beginning of this Contract until completion of the same, general liability in the amount of $1,000,000 for each occurrence and $2,000,000 aggregate.

3. Property Insurance

The Contractor shall carry, from the beginning of this Contract until completion of the same, $100,000 for each property accident other than the property covered by this Contract.

4. Builders' Risk Insurance

The Contractor will assume all risk of loss for the first $100,000 on any single occurrence of damage to property of Owner or any third party, including the subject of this contract. This may be effected by purchase of insurance or by self-insurance, and must be primary and non-contributory. The Owner will assume all risk of loss for property damage in excess of $100,000 for any single occurrence.

5. Worker’s Compensation/Employer’s Liability The Contractor shall carry, from the beginning of this

Contract until completion of the same, Worker’s Compensation Employer’s Liability in accordance with Statutory required by the State and $500,000 per accident.

6. Automobile Liability

The Contractor shall carry, from the beginning of this Contract until the completion of the same, $1,000,000 in automobile insurance for each occurrence and the State Required Personal Injury Protection benefits.

Partial payments shall not relieve the Contractor from full responsibility for any claim which may result from any cause, including fire or any other casualty, until completion of the Contract and final payment. Any casualties shall not relieve the Contractor from performing the Contract. Contractor will indemnify and hold harmless the University from and against all claims, judgements, liability and expense of any nature due to bodily injury, personal injury or damage to property arising out of, on account of or in connection with contractors (or any employee, subcontractor or agent of contractor) performance of the work or activity pursuant to the contract.


01 00 00 - 3 March 18, 2021


1.2.11. BONDS: The successful Contractor of a project for which the base bid exceeds $50,000.00 shall furnish in form and with sureties acceptable to the Owner, a performance bond and a labor and material bond, each in the amount of 100% of the Contract sum, as security for the faithful performance of all Work under the Contract, and payment of all charges in connection therewith. The cost of the aforesaid bonds shall be paid by the Contractor and included in the Contract Sum. No work connected with the Project shall be started until the Contractor has placed bonds, in proper form, on file with the University. 1.2.12. NONCOMPLIANCE WITH CONTRACT-TERMINATION: The Owner, at its option, may order suspension of the Work in whole or in part for such time as it deems necessary because of the failure of the Contractor to comply with the contractual requirements. The contract completion date shall not be extended on account of any such suspension order by the Owner. In the event the Owner orders an suspension of the work, the Contractor shall not be entitled to any costs or damages resulting from such suspension; the Owner shall not in any manner be liable or responsible for such costs or damages. The rights of the Owner provided in this clause are in addition to any other rights or remedies provided under this Contract or by law. In addition to all other rights and remedies contained herein, or at law or equity, the Owner may terminate this Contract when any default is not stopped immediately and corrected within a reasonable length of time after notification by the Owner. In the event of such termination the Owner may complete the contracted work and the Contractor and his surety will be liable for any excess cost occasioned by the Owner. In such case the Owner may take possession of and utilize in completing the work such necessary materials and equipment as may be on the Site. 1.2.13. GUARANTEE: The Contractor shall provide a written guarantee warranting all work under this Contract against faulty workmanship and defective materials, and to make good, at his own expense and promptly upon request by the Owner, all defective work and all damage to other work caused by such defective work, for 1 year from the date of signing of the Owner's Notice of Completion of Contract Work form. The provisions of this express warranty shall not affect or impair any of the Owner's rights under any other applicable, implied, or expressed warranties. 1.2.14. PAYMENT: Payment for the work will be made in one sum at the completion of the contract except that partial payments aggregating 90% of the value of the completed work may be made at monthly intervals. If the contractor expects to request partial payments he shall submit a schedule of costs and quantities of the various parts of the work aggregating the total contract sum. When applying for partial or full payments, the Contractor shall submit a statement based upon this schedule, itemized and supported as the Director of Facilities Management may require and a Sworn Statement and Conditional Waiver and Release on Progress Payment setting forth the amounts due each subcontractor, supplier, and laborer. Retainage will be 10% of the amount due to the contractor until the project is substantially complete, at which time the retainage may be reduced. Upon issuance of Certificate of Final Completion by the Owner, Contractor may submit for 100% payment. The Contract will not be considered complete until the work has been finally accepted by the Director of Facilities Management and the following have been furnished: (1) the required guarantee, and (2) a sworn statement that all payrolls, material bills, and other indebtedness connected with the work have been paid, including such lien waivers as the Owner may request.

No presence, inspection, supervision, testing, or monitoring by the Owner or by any agent or representative thereof shall relieve the Contractor of responsibility for compliance with the terms of and performance pursuant to this Contract and the Contract Documents; nor shall any such conduct of the Owner or its agents or representatives constitute or be interpreted as constituting a waiver of any rights whatsoever or serve to stop them from requiring full performance by the Contractor. 1.2.15. NON-DISCRIMINATION CLAUSE: In connection with the performance of work under this Contract, the Contractor agrees as follows: 1. The Contractor will not discriminate against any

employee or applicant for employment because of race, religion, color, national origin, age, sex, height, weight, or marital status. The Contractor will take affirmative action to insure that applicants are employed and that employees are treated during employment without regard to their race, religion, color, national origin, age, sex, height, weight, or marital status. Such action shall include, but not be limited to, the following: employment upgrading; demotion or transfer; recruitment advertising; layoff or termination; rates of pay or other forms of compensation; and selection for training, including apprenticeship.

2. The Contractor will, in all solicitations or advertisements

for employees placed by or on behalf of the Contractor, state that all qualified applicants will receive consideration for employment without regard to race, religion, color, national origin, age, sex, height, weight, or marital status.

3. The Contractor or his collective bargaining

representative will send, to each labor union or representative of workers with which he has a collective bargaining agreement or other contract or understanding, a notice advising the said labor union or worker's representative of the Contractor's commitments under this section.

4. The Contractor will comply with all published rules,

regulations, directives, and orders of the Michigan Civil Rights Commission relevant to Article 6, 1976 PA 453, as amended, which may be in effect prior to the taking of bids for any individual State project.

5. The Contractor will furnish and file compliance reports

within such time and upon such forms as provided by the Michigan Civil Rights Commission; said forms may also elicit information as to the practices, policies, program, and employment statistics of each Subcontractor as the Contractor himself, and said Contractor will permit access to his books, records, and accounts by the Michigan Civil Rights Commission, and/or its agent, for purposes of investigation to ascertain compliance with this Contract and with rules, regulations, and orders of the Michigan Civil Rights Commission relevant to Article 6, 1976 PA 453, as amended.

6. In the event that the Civil Rights Commission finds, after

a hearing held pursuant to its rules, that a contractor has not complied with the contractual obligations under this agreement, the Civil Rights Commission may, as part of its order based upon such findings, certify said findings to the State Administrative Board of the State of Michigan, which the Board may order the cancellation of the Contract found to have been violated, and/or declare


01 00 00 - 4 March 18, 2021


the contractor ineligible for future contracts with the State and its political and civil subdivisions, departments, officers, and including the governing boards of institutions of higher education, until the contractor complies with said order of the Civil Rights Commission. Notice of said declaration of future ineligibility may be given to any or all of the persons with whom the contractor is declared ineligible to contract as a contracting party in future contracts. In any case before the Civil Rights Commission in which cancellation of an existing contract is a possibility, the contracting agency shall be notified of such possible remedy and shall be given the option by the Civil Rights Commission to participate in such proceedings.

7. The Contractor will include, or incorporate by reference,

the provisions of the foregoing paragraphs "1" thru "6" in every subcontract or purchase order unless exempted by the rules, regulations, or orders of the Michigan Civil Rights Commission and will provide in every subcontract or purchase order that said provisions will be binding upon each subcontractor or seller.

1.2.16 PERMITS, FEES AND NOTICES: The Contractor Secure and pay for all permits, fees, and licenses required by State or Local governments necessary for the proper execution and completion of the work. The Contractor shall specifically secure Houghton County permits for Electrical, Mechanical and Plumbing work and schedule work inspections as required for approval. The Contractor shall give all notices and comply with all laws, ordinances, rules, regulations, and orders of any public authority bearing on the performance of the work. The University retains full jurisdiction of construction on campus and will make final determination of all permits that may be required. 1.2.17. USE OF SERVICES: The Contractor may use the Owner's water and power by contacting Michigan Tech Facilities Management for arrangements. 1.2.18. SCHEDULING: The Contractor shall meet with the Michigan Technological University Project Manager as follows: (1) prior to the start of work; (2) to schedule any interruption of University services; and (3) monthly, or as directed, to review the progress of work. At the time work is commenced on the project, the Contractor shall prepare a progress schedule showing the dates for the commencement and completion of the various stages of construction. This schedule shall be coordinated with the Owner's required use of the facilities and other contractors construction schedules, and shall be arrived at in consultation with the Director of Engineering Services and approved by all affected parties. The Contractor shall furnish sufficient forces and construction plant and equipment to insure protection and progress of the work in accordance with the schedule. Any changes in the work schedule are to be approved in advance by the Director of Engineering Services. 1.2.19. TEMPORARY CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES: All temporary construction facilities shall be neatly constructed and arranged on the Site in an orderly manner. Suitable weather tight storage sheds, with raised floors, of capacity required to contain all materials which might be damaged by storage in the open shall be provided.

Construction equipment and other facilities such as ladders, ramps, etc., shall be strong, substantial, safe, and suitable for the purpose intended and shall comply with all University, Federal, State, and local requirements so as to maintain adequate and safe temporary access to all existing facilities. Temporary walkways, bridges, etc., shall be built with proper handrails, curbs, etc. The Contractor will assume all risk of loss for any damage or destruction to the Contractor's temporary office, equipment, shanties, protective fence, scaffolding, staging, and all other miscellaneous materials and items owned or rented by the Contractor or any subcontractor used in the performance of this contract. A temporary dust-proof enclosure of the work area, including existing machines and equipment, must be erected and maintained throughout the length of the project where required in the various Divisions herein. 1.2.20. CLEANLINESS OF THE WORK: The work and any public or private property occupied by the Contractor shall be kept in a neat and orderly condition at all times. Waste materials, rubbish, and debris shall be removed daily. At the completion of the work all the Contractor's temporary buildings, equipment, tools, surplus or waste materials, and rubbish of every nature shall be removed from all occupied public and private premises and such premises shall be restored, as nearly as practicable, to the original condition. Such restoration shall be subject to the approval of the Director of Engineering Services. Debris removed from the site must be disposed of in a licensed landfill as required by the Solid Waste Management Act, 1978 PA 614, as amended, being MCLA 299.402; MSA 13.29(1) and the administrative rules applying to the Act contained in the Michigan Administrative Code R 299.4101. The Contractor shall provide the Director of Engineering Services with written, dated verification that all debris removed has been disposed of in a licensed landfill. Any cost incurred by the Owner as a result of the failure of the Contractor to comply with this paragraph will be a charge against the Contractor. All exposed surfaces of the work shall be left clean and free from all mud, grease, stains, or other extraneous materials. The streets and service roads occupied or used by the Contractor shall be continuously kept clean of waste materials and refuse resulting from the work operations. Should the Contractor be negligent in the duties of maintaining proper cleanliness, the Owner will take steps to cause the required cleaning to be done and will deduct the cost thereof from any monies due the Contractor. The elevators, if used, shall not be overloaded and suitable protection for the walls, floor, and ceiling shall be provided during use. Any damage to the elevators must be repaired to the Facilities Management Manager of Planning, Engineering, and Construction satisfaction. 1.2.21. FIRE PROTECTION DURING CONSTRUCTION: The Contractor shall have on the Site at all times fire protection equipment as required by applicable codes and ordinances, MISOHSA, and requirements of the Owner's insurance carriers. Prior to start of work, the Contractor shall be knowledgeable and proficient in Hot Work safety and in the Owner’s Hot Work policies, procedures and requirements. The Contractor shall faithfully follow the Owner’s Hot Work Policy, which regulates any temporary operation involving open flames or producing heat and/or sparks. The Contractor shall designate a Fire Safety Supervisor and Fire Watch for each Hot Work operation. The Fire Safety Supervisor


01 00 00 - 5 March 18, 2021


shall not permit a hot work operation to proceed unless and until the provisions and required precautions checklist of the Owner’s Hot Work permit are adequately addressed. The Fire Watch shall monitor the Hot Work area during and after the hot work operation to take measures to prevent fires and to respond to fires if they start. During all construction operations in occupied building space, the Contractor shall construct and maintain a one-hour fire resistance separation between the part of the building under construction and the occupied part of the building, per the Life Safety Code NFPA 101, Section 1-3.11, 1997 Edition. 1.2.22. PARKING AND USE OF ROADS: Immediately after the award of the Contract, the Contractor shall consult with the Director of Engineering Services to determine authorized parking and access to the Site, routing of all construction vehicles, and re-routing of other traffic during construction, and shall organize the work in relation thereto. At the beginning of the field work, the Contractor shall post signs limiting construction parking, if available, to the construction area. Parking for worker's cars is not guaranteed and is the Contractor's responsibility. During construction, when use of roads or sidewalks is restricted by construction work, the Contractor shall erect temporary barricades, post notices and warning lights, and when required during working hours, direct traffic to prevent congestion. The Contractor shall maintain such as long as temporary work requires and then remove from the public areas. 1.2.23. SAFETY PRECAUTIONS: During the progress of the work, the Contractor shall maintain adequate facilities for the protection and safety of all persons and property. All local, state, and federal laws, ordinances, rules, and regulations pertaining to the kind, use, and loading of all apparatus and equipment shall be complied with. Work shall be done to conformance with "General Safety Rules and Regulations for the Construction Industry" published by the Department of Labor, Construction Safety Standards Commission, Lansing, Michigan 48926. The contractor will immediately report all accidents involving persons and property to the University Public Safety Dept. A copy of the accident report must be filed with the Public Safety Dept. The contractor shall conduct safety meetings during the progress of work. A copy of the minutes of these meetings must be submitted to the University. Contractor shall acknowledge Owner’s Safety Requirements. 1.2.24. SUBSTITUTIONS: 1. The materials, products, and equipment described in the Bidding Documents establish a standard of required function, dimension, appearance, and quality to be met by any proposed substitution. 2. No substitution directly related to an "or equal" clause or similar language in the contract documents will be considered unless written request for approval has been submitted by the Bidder and has been received by the University at least ten days prior to the date for receipt of bids. Each such request shall include the name of the material or equipment for which it is to be substituted and a complete description of the proposed substitute including drawings, cuts, performance, and test data and any other information necessary for an evaluation. A statement setting forth any changes in other materials, equipment, or work that incorporation of the substitute would require shall be included. A burden of proof of the merit of the proposed substitute is upon the

proposer. The University's decision of approval or disapproval of a proposed substitution shall be final. 3. If the University approves any proposed substitution, such approval will be set forth in an Addendum. Bidders shall not rely upon approvals made in any other manner. After receipt of bids, the University will consider a request for substitution only for the following reasons: 1. Products listed are no longer available. 2. Where the specified product or method cannot be provided within the Contract Time. However, the request will not be considered if the product or method cannot be provided as a result of the Contractor's failure to pursue the work promptly or to coordinate the various activities properly. 3. Where the specified product or method cannot receive necessary approval by a governing authority and the requested substitution can be approved. 4. Where a substantial advantage is offered to the University, in terms of cost, time, energy conservation, or other consideration of merit, after deducting offsetting responsibilities the University may be required to bear. These additional responsibilities may include such considerations as additional compensation to the Architect for redesign and evaluation services, the increased cost of other work by the University or separate contractors, and similar considerations. 5. When the specified product or method cannot be provided in a manner which is compatible with other materials of the work, and where the contractor certifies that the substitution will overcome the incompatibility 6. When the specified product or method cannot be properly coordinated with other materials in the work, and where the Contractor certifies that the proposed substitution can be properly coordinated. 7. When the specified product or method cannot receive a warranty as required by the Contract Documents and where the Contractor certifies that the proposed substitution receive the required warranty. 1.2.25. SUBCONTRACTS: The Contractor shall, as soon as practicable after the execution of the contract, notify the Owner in writing of the names of proposed subcontractors for the work. If the Contractor submits a list of proposed subcontractors prior to the execution of the contract, the Owner must be notified in writing of any change of subcontractor after the contract is executed. The Contractor will not employ any subcontractor that the Owner may, within a reasonable time, object to as incompetent or unfit. The Contractor agrees to be fully responsible to the Owner for the acts and omissions of his subcontractors and of persons either directly or indirectly employed by them, as he is for persons directly employed by him. Nothing contained in the contract documents shall create any contractual relationship between any subcontractor and the Owner. Should material or workmanship, or parties furnishing same prove objectionable under the provisions of the contract, or should violations of the contract exist at the building or elsewhere, and continue after the contractor has received from the Owner a reasonable warning, then, upon request of the Owner, such objectionable parties shall be dismissed, removed, and excluded


01 00 00 - 6 March 18, 2021


from the building or work. Such work shall be remedied and continued by others satisfactory to the Owner. 1.2.26. RELATIONS OF CONTRACTOR AND SUBCONTRACTOR: The Contractor agrees to bind every subcontractor and every subcontractor agrees to be bound by the terms of the Contract Documents as applicable to his work, unless specifically noted to the contrary in a subcontract approved in writing by the Owner. 1.2.27. UNIVERSITY RULES AND REGULATIONS: The Contractor shall comply with all laws, ordinances, rules, regulations, and orders of the Owner, and be responsible for and shall direct his employees to conduct themselves so as not to interfere with or disrupt the University educational activities. The Contractor, Subcontractors, and their employees and suppliers shall not use or interfere with the Owner's existing accesses, drives, walks, and roads except as specifically indicated or by prior arrangement with the Owner. The Contractor shall confine his activities, equipment, and personnel to the area within the construction limits, except for minor operations as noted and by prior arrangement with the permission of the Owner. Existing areas disturbed outside the scope of the work shall be restored to their original state. 1.2.28. COMPLIANCE WITH ALL APPLICABLE LAWS, RULES AND REGULATIONS: Notwithstanding any other specific provision herein, contractor (and any subcontractor) shall, at its sole expense, comply with all applicable federal, state, local and other laws, ordinances, rules and regulations in any manner applicable to the performance of the work or contractors’ activities in furtherance of or in connection with the work. Contractor will indemnify and hold harmless the University from and against any and all costs, claims, expenses or orders (including any penalties or fines assessed to University) incurred as a result of contractor’s failure to comply or contractor’s failure to perform any obligation imposed by the contract documents.

01 00 01 SUPPLEMENTARY GENERAL CONDITIONS


01 00 01 - 1 March 18, 2021

SUPPLEMENTAL GENERAL CONDITIONS

PART 1 PROTECTION – Contractor shall properly protect all new and existing work from

damage. Proper safety provisions shall be made at all times for the protection of all persons and property. Contractor shall contact "Miss Dig" for all underground construction work as required by Michigan Public Act No. 53, 1974 and amended by P.A. 204, 1975.

PART 2 SHOP DRAWINGS 2.01 The Contractor shall submit for approval a complete list of items that will require

shop drawings. 2.02 The Contractor shall check and verify all field measurements and submit; with such

promptness as to cause no delay in the Contractor's or any other contractor's work; electronic versions, checked and approved, of all shop or setting drawings and schedules where such submissions are stipulated in the various Divisions herein.

2.03 The University will check, with reasonable promptness, such drawings and

schedules only for conformance with design concept and compliance with information given in the Contract Documents. The drawings will be stamped by the University as follows:

"REVIEWED AND RELEASED" Indicates final action by the University and are released subject to meeting the requirements of the Contract Documents. "REVIEWED AS NOTED & RELEASED" Deficiencies as marked indicate the drawings and schedules are subject to corrections, however deficiencies are such that resubmittal is not required and item is released subject to meeting the requirements of the Contract Documents. "REVIEWED AS NOTED & RESUBMIT" Deficiencies as marked indicate the drawings and schedules are subject to corrections, however deficiencies are such that resubmittal is required. Item is released for shop drawing work only; item is released for corrections and resubmittal for final approval. "REJECTED AND RETURNED" Submittal does not meet the requirements of the Contract Documents and is rejected. Resubmittal of item meeting the Contract Document is required.

2.04 The University's approval of such drawings shall not relieve the Contractor from the responsibility for deviations from drawings and specifications unless he has, in accompanying letter, called the University's attention to such deviation at the time of submission and secured written approval. University's approval shall not relieve



01 00 01 - 2 March 18, 2021


the Contractor from responsibility for errors in shop drawings and schedules. PART 3 DEFINITIONS

A. Furnish: This term means procurement or fabrication of materials, equipment or components; or the performance of services to the extent indicated. Where used with respect to materials, equipment, or components, the term shall include delivery to and unloading at the Project site but is not intended to include the installation of the item, either temporary or final.

B. Install: This term means the placement of materials, equipment, or components including the receiving, unloading, transporting, storage, and installing; and the performance of such testing and finish work as is compatible with the degree of installation specified.

C. Provide: This term means to Furnish and Install, complete and in place, including all accessories, finishes, tests, and services as required to render the item so specified completely ready for use.

PART 4 AS-BUILT DRAWINGS – Each contractor shall record, legibly and to scale, all field

change and deviations from the contract drawings as they occur. This record shall be kept on a set of contract drawings. This set of drawings shall be turned over to the University prior to final payment.

PART 5 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS – The Contractor shall provide complete operation and maintenance instructions, manuals, and other information for all architectural, electrical, mechanical, elevator equipment, and other systems installed and/or provided as part of the Work by the Contractor under the Contract. The Contractor shall furnish three complete sets of manuals bound in suitable quick release three ring binders and one electronic copy. The intent of these manuals is that the University is provided with a complete operating and maintenance document for all significant systems, in a convenient, easy to use form.

PART 6 SCHEDULE OF VALUES – Within two weeks after start of job, the contractor shall

provide the University with an itemized schedule of values for each division and major subdivision of work. The will be done on AIA form G703.

PART 7 DOCUMENT CLARIFICATION – All inquiries regarding project specifications and

drawings shall be made to the Project Architect/Engineer listed on the Invitation to Bid.

PART 8 CONTRACT COMPLETION – Construction work shall follow the construction

schedule shown in Specification Section 00 60 00. Work for this contract is



01 00 01 - 3 March 18, 2021


expected to be substantially completed on or before August 6, 2021. PART 9 EQUAL EMPLOYMENT OPPORTUNITY – All bidders shall comply with current

Federal and State Equal Employment Opportunity requirements. PART 10 ASBESTOS - The Contractor shall not start any work in any area where asbestos

is suspected until an inspection has been completed by a qualified representative of the Owner and found to be safe. If asbestos is found, the Owner will address the situation under a separate contract. The Contractor is prohibited from using or supplying any asbestos containing materials for this project.

Any asbestos-containing material is to be removed by a certified asbestos abatement contractor. This work is to be contracted directly between the Owner and the asbestos abatement Contractor. Asbestos-containing abatement required for the project will be performed concurrently with the bathroom renovations Contractor.

PART 11 SUMMARY OF WORK 11.01 Perform all work indicated in the Contract Documents. 11.02 The Project consists of renovations to the bathrooms and toilet rooms in Douglass

Houghton Hall. 11.03 See Specification Section 01 10 00 Summary for a more detailed description of the

work. Part 12 COVID-19 SAFETY REQUIREMENTS 12.01 Contractor is required to create a project specific COVID-19 Preparedness and

Response Plan complying with all federal & state requirements and guidelines, including but not limited to, the most recent MiOSHA, DHHS and other regulatory agencies as well as current CDC Guidelines. This plan will need to be submitted and approved prior to commencing onsite work.

12.02 Masks must be worn at all times while in the building and working on the project.

Masks must cover the nose and mouth. END OF SECTION 01 00 01

DIV

ISIO

N 1

–

GE

NE

RA

L R

EQ

UIR

EM

EN

TS

01 00 02 PAYMENT PROCEDURES


01 00 02 - 1 March 18, 2021

PAYMENT PROCEDURES

PART 1 – GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY

A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements necessary to prepare and process Applications for Payment.

1.02 SCHEDULE OF VALUES

A. Coordination: Coordinate preparation of the schedule of values with preparation of Contractor's construction schedule. 1. Coordinate line items in the schedule of values with other required administrative forms and

schedules, including the following: a. Application for Payment forms with continuation sheets. b. Submittal schedule. c. Items required to be indicated as separate activities in Contractor's construction

schedule.

2. Submit the schedule of values to Michigan Tech at earliest possible date but no later than

seven days before the date scheduled for submittal of initial Applications for Payment. B. Format and Content: Use Project Specifications table of contents as a guide to establish line items for

the schedule of values. Provide at least one line item for each Specification Section. 1. Identification: Include the following Project identification on the schedule of values:

a. Project name and location. b. Michigan Tech. c. Michigan Tech's project number. d. Contractor's name and address. e. Date of submittal.

2. Arrange schedule of values consistent with format of AIA Documents G702, G703. 3. Provide a breakdown of the Total Contract Amount in enough detail to facilitate continued

evaluation of Applications for Payment and progress reports. Coordinate with Project Specifications table of contents. Provide multiple line items for principal subcontract amounts in excess of five percent of the Total Contract Amount. a. Include separate line items under Contractor and principal subcontracts for Project

closeout requirements in an amount totaling five percent of the Total Contract Amount and subcontract amount.

4. Round amounts to nearest whole dollar; total shall equal the Total Contract Amount.

a. Provide a separate line item in the schedule of values for each part of the Work where Applications for Payment may include materials or equipment purchased or fabricated and stored, but not yet installed.

b. Temporary facilities and other major cost items that are not direct cost of actual work-in-place may be shown either as separate line items in the schedule of values or distributed as general overhead expense, at Contractor's option.

5. Schedule Updating: Update and resubmit the schedule of values before the next Applications for Payment when Change Orders result in a change in the Total Contract Amount.

1.03 APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT

A. Each Application for Payment shall be consistent with previous applications and payments as certified by Michigan Tech and paid for by Owner. 1. Initial Application for Payment, Application for Payment at time of Substantial Completion, and

final Application for Payment involve additional requirements.

B. Payment Application Times: The date for each progress payment is indicated in the Agreement

between Michigan Tech and the Contractor. The period of construction work covered by each Application for Payment is the period indicated in the Agreement.

01 00 02 PAYMENT PROCEDURES


01 00 02 - 2 March 18, 2021

PAYMENT PROCEDURES

C. Application for Payment Forms: Use AIA Document G702 and AIA Document G703 as form for

Applications for Payment.

D. Application Preparation: Complete every entry on form. Notarize and execute by a person

authorized to sign legal documents on behalf of Contractor. Michigan Tech will return incomplete applications without action. 1. Entries shall match data on the schedule of values and Contractor's construction schedule.

Use updated schedules if revisions were made. 2. Include amounts of Change Orders issued before last day of construction period covered by

application.

E. Transmittal: Submit three signed and notarized original copies of each Application for Payment to

Michigan Tech by a method ensuring receipt within 24 hours. One copy shall include waivers of lien and similar attachments if required. 1. Transmit each copy with a transmittal form listing attachments and recording appropriate

information about application.

F. Waivers of Lien: With each Application for Payment, submit waivers of lien as indicated in the

Agreement.

G. Initial Application for Payment: Administrative actions and submittals that must precede or coincide with submittal of first Application for Payment include the following: 1. List of subcontractors. 2. Schedule of values. 3. Contractor's construction schedule (preliminary if not final). 4. Schedule of unit prices. 5. Submittal schedule (preliminary if not final). 6. List of Contractor's staff assignments. 7. Report of preconstruction conference. 8. Certificates of insurance and insurance policies.

H. Application for Payment at Substantial Completion: After Michigan Tech issues the Certificate of

Substantial Completion, submit an Application for Payment showing 100 percent completion for portion of the Work claimed as substantially complete. 1. Include documentation supporting claim that the Work is substantially complete and a

statement showing an accounting of changes to the Total Contract Amount

I. Final Payment Application: After completing Project closeout requirements, submit final Application for Payment with releases and supporting documentation not previously submitted and accepted, including, but not limited, to the following: 1. Evidence of completion of Project closeout requirements. 2. Insurance certificates for products and completed operations where required and proof that

taxes, fees, and similar obligations were paid. 3. Updated final statement, accounting for final changes to the Total Contract Amount. 4. Completion of the Final Completion Checklist. 5. Sworn Statements and Waiver of Liens indicating that all sub-contractors and vendors have been

paid. 6. Approval from Surety for Final Payment. 7. Signed Guarantee from date of Substantial Completion. 8. O&M manuals, both digital and hard copies. 9. All warranties required by the Specifications.


AP

PL

ICA

TIO

N A

ND

CE

RT

IFIC

AT

ION

FO

R P

AY

ME

NT

AIA

DO

CU

MEN

T G

702

PA

GE

ON

E O

F T

WO

PA

GE

S

TO O

WN

ER:

PRO

JEC

T:A

PPLI

CA

TIO

N N

O:

Dis

tribu

tion

to:

OW

NER

AR

CH

ITEC

TPE

RIO

D T

O:

CO

NTR

AC

TOR

FRO

M C

ON

TRA

CTO

R:

VIA

AR

CH

ITEC

T: PR

OJE

CT

NO

S:

CO

NTR

AC

T F

OR

: C

ON

TRA

CT

DA

TE:

CO

NT

RA

CT

OR

'S A

PP

LIC

AT

ION

FO

R P

AY

ME

NT

The

unde

rsig

ned

Con

tract

or c

ertif

ies t

hat t

o th

e be

st o

f the

Con

tract

or's

know

ledg

e,

App

licat

ion

is m

ade

for p

aym

ent,

as sh

own

belo

w, i

n co

nnec

tion

with

the

Con

tract

.in

form

atio

n an

d be

lief t

he W

ork

cove

red

by th

is A

pplic

atio

n fo

r Pay

men

t has

bee

nC

ontin

uatio

n Sh

eet,

AIA

Doc

umen

t G70

3, is

atta

ched

.co

mpl

eted

in a

ccor

danc

e w

ith th

e C

ontra

ct D

ocum

ents

, tha

t all

amou

nts h

ave

been

pai

d by

the

Con

tract

or fo

r Wor

k fo

r whi

ch p

revi

ous C

ertif

icat

es fo

r Pay

men

t wer

e is

sued

and

paym

ents

rece

ived

from

the

Ow

ner,

and

that

cur

rent

pay

men

t sho

wn

here

in is

now

due

.

1. O

RIG

INA

L C

ON

TRA

CT

SUM

$

0.00

CO

NTR

AC

TOR

:2.

Net

cha

nge

by C

hang

e O

rder

s $

0.00

3. C

ON

TRA

CT

SUM

TO

DA

TE (L

ine

1 ±

2)

$

0.00

By:

Dat

e:4.

TO

TAL

CO

MPL

ETED

& S

TOR

ED T

O$

0.00

D

ATE

(Col

umn

G o

n G

703)

Subs

crib

ed a

nd sw

orn

to b

efor

e m

e th

is__

____

____

day

of

____

____

____

_ ,

2009

5. R

ETA

INA

GE:

a.10

% o

f Com

plet

ed W

ork

$

0.00

Cou

nty

of: _

____

____

____

____

____

____

_

Sta

te o

f: _

____

____

____

____

____

__(C

olum

n D

+ E

on

G70

3)

b.%

of S

tore

d M

ater

ial

$

Not

ary

Publ

ic: _

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

___

(Col

umn

F on

G70

3)

Tot

al R

etai

nage

(Lin

es 5

a +

5b o

rM

y C

omm

issi

on e

xpire

s on:

___

____

____

____

____

____

____

__

Tota

l in

Col

umn

I of G

703)

$

0.00

AR

CH

ITE

CT

'S C

ER

TIF

ICA

TE

FO

R P

AY

ME

NT

6. T

OTA

L EA

RN

ED L

ESS

RET

AIN

AG

E $

0.00

In a

ccor

danc

e w

ith th

e C

ontra

ct D

ocum

ents

, bas

ed o

n on

-site

obs

erva

tions

and

the

data

(Lin

e 4

Less

Lin

e 5

Tota

l)co

mpr

isin

g th

e ap

plic

atio

n, th

e A

rchi

tect

cer

tifie

s to

the

Ow

ner t

hat t

o th

e be

st o

f th

e7.

LES

S PR

EVIO

US

CER

TIFI

CA

TES

FOR

Arc

hite

ct's

know

ledg

e, in

form

atio

n an

d be

lief t

he W

ork

has p

rogr

esse

d as

indi

cate

d,

PA

YM

ENT

(Lin

e 6

from

prio

r Cer

tific

ate)

$

0.00

the

qual

ity o

f the

Wor

k is

in a

ccor

danc

e w

ith th

e C

ontra

ct D

ocum

ents

, and

the

Con

tract

or8.

CU

RR

ENT

PAY

MEN

T D

UE

$0.

00is

ent

itled

to p

aym

ent o

f the

AM

OU

NT

CER

TIFI

ED.

9. B

ALA

NC

E TO

FIN

ISH

, IN

CLU

DIN

G$

0.00

R

ETA

INA

GE

(Lin

e 3

less

6)

AM

OU

NT

CER

TIFI

ED .

. . .

. . .

. . .

. $

CH

AN

GE

OR

DER

SU

MM

AR

YA

DD

ITIO

NS

DED

UC

TIO

NS

(Atta

ch e

xpla

natio

n if

amou

nt c

ertif

ied

diffe

rs fr

om th

e am

ount

app

lied.

Initi

al a

ll fig

ures

on

this

T

otal

cha

nges

app

rove

dAp

plic

atio

n an

d on

the

Con

tinua

tion

Shee

t tha

t are

cha

nged

to c

onfo

rm w

ith th

e am

ount

cer

tifie

d.)

i

n pr

evio

us m

onth

s by

Ow

ner

AR

CH

ITEC

T:

T

otal

app

rove

d th

is M

onth

By:

Dat

e:

T

OTA

LSTh

is C

ertif

icat

e is

not

neg

otia

ble.

The

AM

OU

NT

CER

TIFI

ED is

pay

able

onl

y to

the

Con

tract

or n

amed

her

ein.

Issu

ance

, pay

men

t and

acc

epta

nce

of p

aym

ent a

re w

ithou

t

NET

CH

AN

GES

by

Cha

nge

Ord

erpr

ejud

ice

to a

ny ri

ghts

of t

he O

wne

r or C

ontra

ctor

und

er th

is C

ontra

ct.

AIA

DO

CU

ME

NT

G70

2 · A

PP

LIC

ATI

ON

AN

D C

ER

TIFI

CA

TIO

N F

OR

PA

YM

EN

T · 1

992

ED

ITIO

N ·

AIA

· ©

1992

THE

AM

ER

ICA

N IN

STI

TUTE

OF

AR

CH

ITE

CTS

, 173

5 N

EW

YO

RK

AV

E.,

N.W

., W

AS

HIN

GTO

N, D

C 2

0006

-529

2

Users

may o

bta

in v

alid

ati

on

of

this

do

cu

men

t b

y r

eq

uesti

ng

a c

om

ple

ted

AIA

Do

cu

men

t D

401 -

Cert

ific

ati

on

of

Do

cu

men

t's A

uth

en

ticit

y f

rom

th

e L

icen

see.

AIA

DO

CU

ME

NT

G7

03

· C

ON

TIN

UA

TIO

N S

HE

ET

FO

R G

70

2 ·

19

92

ED

ITIO

N ·

AIA

· ©

19

92

TH

E A

ME

RIC

AN

IN

ST

ITU

TE

OF

AR

CH

ITE

CT

S, 1

73

5 N

EW

YO

RK

AV

EN

UE

, N

.W. W

AS

HIN

GT

ON

, D

.C. 2

00

06

-52

32

G703-1

992

CO

NTI

NU

ATI

ON

SH

EE

TAI

A D

OC

UM

ENT

G70

3 P

AG

E 2

O

F 2

P

AG

ES

AIA

Doc

umen

t G70

2, A

PPLI

CA

TIO

N A

ND

CER

TIFI

CA

TIO

N F

OR

PA

YM

ENT,

con

tain

ing

APP

LIC

ATI

ON

NO

:C

ontra

ctor

's si

gned

cer

tific

atio

n is

atta

ched

.A

PPLI

CA

TIO

N D

ATE

:In

tabu

latio

ns b

elow

, am

ount

s are

stat

ed to

the

near

est d

olla

r.PE

RIO

D T

O:

Use

Col

umn

I on

Con

tract

s whe

re v

aria

ble

reta

inag

e fo

r lin

e ite

ms m

ay a

pply

.A

RC

HIT

ECT'

S PR

OJE

CT

NO

:

AB

CD

EF

GH

IIT

EMD

ESC

RIP

TIO

N O

F W

OR

KSC

HED

ULE

DW

OR

K C

OM

PLET

EDM

ATE

RIA

LSTO

TAL

%B

ALA

NC

ER

ETA

INA

GE

NO

.V

ALU

EFR

OM

PR

EVIO

US

THIS

PER

IOD

PRES

ENTL

YC

OM

PLET

ED(G

÷ C

)TO

FIN

ISH

(IF V

AR

IAB

LEA

PPLI

CA

TIO

NST

OR

EDA

ND

STO

RED

(C -

G)

RA

TE)

(D +

E)

(NO

T IN

TO D

ATE

D O

R E

)(D

+E+F

) $0.0

0$0

.00

$0.0

0$0

.00

$0.0

0$0

.00

$0.0

0$0

.00

$0.0

0$0

.00

$0.0

0$0

.00

$0.0

0$0

.00

$0.0

0$0

.00

$0.0

0$0

.00

$0.0

0$0

.00

$0.0

0$0

.00

$0.0

0$0

.00

$0.0

0$0

.00

$0.0

0$0

.00

$0.0

0$0

.00

$0.0

0$0

.00

$0.0

0$0

.00

$0.0

0$0

.00

$0.0

0$0

.00

$0.0

0$0

.00

$0.0

0$0

.00

$0.0

0$0

.00

$0.0

0$0

.00

$0.0

0$0

.00

$0.0

0$0

.00

$0.0

0$0

.00

$0.0

0$0

.00

$0.0

0$0

.00

$0.0

0$0

.00

$0.0

0$0

.00

$0.0

0$0

.00

$0.0

0$0

.00

$0.0

0$0

.00

$0.0

0$0

.00

$0.0

0$0

.00

$0.0

0$0

.00

$0.0

0$0

.00

$0.0

0G

RA

ND

TO

TA

LS

$0.0

0$0

.00

$0.0

0$0

.00

$0.0

0$

$$

Users

may o

bta

in v

ali

dati

on

of

this

do

cu

men

t b

y r

eq

uesti

ng

of

the l

icen

se a

co

mp

lete

d A

IA D

ocu

men

t D

401 -

Cert

ific

ati

on

of

Do

cu

men

t's A

uth

en

ticit

y

01 00 08 Certificate of Substantial Completion


01 00 08 - 1 March 18, 2021

CERTIFICATE OF SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION

Project: Owner:

DHH Bathroom Remodel Michigan Technological University

1400 Townsend Drive

Houghton, MI 49931

Project Number: 31-18-01

Contract for: Contractor:

Contract Date:

Substantial Completion Date and Final Completion Checklist:

The Work performed under this Contract as reviewed by the Contractor is substantially

complete by the Contractor’s knowledge, information, and belief; the condition of the work is

sufficiently complete per Contract Documents and the Owner can occupy for intended use.

The Contractor requests that Michigan Tech issue a notice of Substantial Completion.

If necessary, any Remaining Items to be completed and/or corrected are included on the 01 00

10 Final Completion Checklist. The list does not alter the responsibility of the Contractor to

complete Work per Contract Documents.

By signing below, the Contractor acknowledges that they will complete and/or correct the

Remaining Items as documented on the Final Completion Checklist when issued.

______________________ ______________________ ______________________

Contractor Signature By Date

______________________ ______________________ ______________________

Owner Signature By Substantial Completion Date

The Date of Commencement of Warranties for all items, as established by the Contract

Documents, including those as listed below, is also the date of Substantial Completion Date

for the aforementioned Project.

______________________ ____________________ ______________________

Owner Signature By Date of Commencement of Warranties

01 00 10 Final Completion Checklist


01 00 10 - 1 March 18, 2021

FINAL COMPLETION CHECKLIST

Project: Owner:


1400 Townsend Drive

Houghton, MI 49931


Contract for: General Construction Contractor:

Contract Date:

General Items:

1. Provide specific product warranties as follows:

a.

2. Provide extra material as follows:

a.

3. Provided Guaranty (attached).

4. Provide Consent of Surety for final payment (attached).

5. Provide Sworn Statement (attached).

6. Provide Full Unconditional Waiver of Lien from Contractor and major suppliers (attached).

List of Remaining Items to be completed and/or corrected:

Space Items to Complete Date of

Completion

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

6.

7.

8.

9.

10.

01 00 12 GUARANTY


01 00 12 - 1 March 18, 2021

GUARANTY

The CONTRACTOR, as a condition precedent to final payment for the work, shall execute

this Guaranty to the OWNER, guaranteeing for one (1) year from the date of final payment,

to keep in good order and repair any defect in all the work completed under the Agreement.

This includes work which may develop during said period due to improper materials,

defective equipment, improper materials workmanship, or arrangements and in any work

which may be affected in correcting any repairs or defects. This Guaranty will be binding

upon the CONTRACTOR, his subcontractors and/or material suppliers and will be without

any expense to the OWNER.

The Date of Commencement for the Guaranty for all items, for the DHH Bathroom

Renovations Project as established by the Contract Documents, is

_____________________________.

OWNER: CONTRACTOR:

Print Print

Signature Signature

Date Date

SWORN STATEMENT 197

STATE OF MICHIGAN SWORN STATEMENT

County of } ss.

, being duly sworn,

deposes and says:

That is the (contractor)

(subcontractor) for an

improvement to the following described real property situated in

County,

Michigan, described as follows:

____________________________________________________________________________________

____________________________________________________________________________________

____________________________________________________________________________________

(Insert legal description of property)

That the following is a statement of each subcontractor and supplier and laborer with whom the (contractor)

(subcontractor) has (contracted) (subcontracted) for performance under the contract with the owner or lessee

thereof, and that the amounts due to the persons as of the date hereof are correctly and fully set forth opposite

their names, as follows:

Name of

subcontractor, supplier, or laborer

Type of

improvement furnished

Total

contract price

Amount already paid

Amount currently

owing

Accrued fringe

benefits contributions (if applicable)

Balance

to complete

________________________________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________________________

Totals over

That the contractor has not procured material from, or subcontracted with, any person other than those set forth

on the reverse side and owes no money for the improvement other than the sums set forth on the reverse side.

Deponent further says that he or she makes the foregoing statement as the (contractor) (subcontractor) or as

__________________________ of the (contractor) (subcontractor) for the purpose of representing to the owner

or lessee of the premises described on the reverse side and his or her agents that the property described on the

reverse side is free from claims of construction liens, or the possibility of construction liens, except as specifically

set forth on the reverse side.

WARNING: AN OWNER OR LESSEE OF THE PROPERTY DESCRIBED ON THE REVERSE SIDE MAY NOT RELY ON THIS SWORN STATEMENT TO AVOID THE CLAIM OF A SUBCONTRACTOR, SUPPLIER, OR LABORER WHO HAS PROVIDED A NOTICE OF FURNISHING TO THE DESIGNEE OR TO THE OWNER OR LESSEE IF THE DESIGNEE IS NOT NAMED OR HAS DIED.

_________________________________________ Deponent

Subscribed and sworn to before me this __________ day of ______________________________, 20 _____

_________________________________________ Notary Public

___________________________County, Michigan My Commission Expires: _____________________

01 00 18 FULL UNCONDITIONAL WAIVER


01 00 18 - 1 March 18, 2021

FULL UNCONDITIONAL WAIVER

My/our contract with to provide (other contracting party)

for the improvement of the property described as

Michigan Tech Project 31-18-01, having been fully paid and satisfied, with respect to our rights under the Payment / Lien Bond covering said Project and all of our rights to pursue payment under the Payment/Lien Bond No. issued by <<<name of prime contractor>>> as principal and <<<name of payment bond surety>>> as surety, together with any rights, demands, or causes of action we may have against <<<name of prime contractor>>> or <<<name of payment bond surety>>>, by signing this waiver, all my/our construction lien rights against such property are hereby waived and released.

(Printed Name of Lien Claimant)

(Signature of lien claimant)

Signed on: Address:

Telephone:

DO NOT SIGN BLANK OR INCOMPLETE FORMS. RETAIN A COPY.




01 00 20 - 1 March 18, 2021

CERTIFICATE OF FINAL COMPLETION

Project: Owner:


Douglass Houghton Hall 1400 Townsend Drive

Houghton, MI 49931


Contract for: General Construction Contractor:

Contract Date:

Substantial Completion Date ______________________

Final Completion Checklist Date ______________________

The Contractor certifies that the Work and all other requirements have been completed in

accordance with the Contract for Construction, including, but not limited to:

1. Submission and approval of all remaining change order proposals, claims, and Applications

for Payment

2. Submission of “as-built” plans and specifications, shop drawings, and other record

documents

3. Completion of all discrepancies. List of Remaining Items noted on the Final Completion

Checklist at the time of Substantial Completion:

a. Submission of all final closeout deliverables/document

b. Submission of Guaranty

c. Submission of Consent of Surety for Final Payment

d. Submission of Sworn Statement

e. Submission of Full Unconditional Waiver of Lien

The Contractor further certifies that:

4. No liens have been attached against the Project

5. No suits are pending by reason of Work on the Contract

6. All Workers’ compensation claims are covered by Workers’ Compensation Insurance as

required by law

7. All insurance required of the Contractor beyond final payment, if any, is in effect and will not

be cancelled or allowed to be expired without notice to the Owner

8. All public liability claims are adequately covered by insurance and that the Contractor shall

save, protect, defend, indemnify, and hold the Owner harmless from and against any and all

claims which arise as a direct or indirect result of any transaction, event occurrence, or

omission related to performance of the Work contemplated under said Contract



01 00 20 - 2 March 18, 2021

CERTIFICATE OF FINAL COMPLETION

Upon execution below, this project will be considered complete. This consideration does not

relieve the Contractor from its post-construction responsibilities, including correction of

discrepancies noted during the first year after Substantial Completion, warranty issues, latent

defects, and other requirements of the Contract or State law.

Name of Contractor: Notary Public: ____________________________________ Personally appeared before me this day of

known (or made known) to me to be the_____________________________(title) of_____________________________ (firm), who, being by me duly sworn, subscribed to the forgoing affidavit in my presence.

By: ________________________________ My Commission Expires: Authorized Representative

______________________________ (date)

________________________ _______________________ ______________________

Owner Owner Signature Final Completion Date


01 00 22 CONTRACT CHANGE ORDER


01 00 22 - 1 March 18, 2021

CHANGE ORDER

CONTRACTOR: CHANGE ORDER No. PROJECT: PROJECT No.: 31-18-01

OWNER: Michigan Technological University

1400 Townsend Dr., Houghton, MI, 49931

ARCHITECT:

Michigan Technological University

DATE OF ISSUE: EFFECTIVE DATE:

The Contractor is hereby directed to make the following changes in the Contract Documents.

Description:

Reason for Change Order:

Attachments: (List documents supporting change and justifying cost and time)

CHANGE IN CONTRACT PRICE:

Original Contract Price: $

CHANGE IN CONTRACT TIMES:

Original Contract Times: (calendar days or dates)

Net changes from previous C. O.’s No. to

$

Net changes from previous C. O.’s No. to (calendar days)

Contract Price Prior to this Change Order:

$

Contract Times prior to this Change Order: (calendar days or dates)

Net Increase (decrease) of this Change Order:

$

Net Increase (decrease) of this Change Order: (calendar days)

Contract Price with all Approved Change Orders:

$

Contract Times with all Approved Change Orders: (calendar days or dates)

ACCEPTED: (Contractor)

By: Date:

APPROVED: (Owner): Michigan Tech University

By: Date:

01 10 00 SUMMARY


01 10 00 - 1 March 18, 2021

SUMMARY

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 PROJECT

A. Project Name: Douglass Houghton Hall (DHH) Bathroom Renovations.

B. Owner's Name: Michigan Technological University.

C. The Project consists of renovations to all bathrooms and toilet rooms in the Douglass Houghton Hall residence building.

1.02 CONTRACT DESCRIPTION

A. A single prime contract based on a Stipulated Price.

1.03 DESCRIPTION OF WORK

A. Scope of demolition and removal work is shown on the drawings and specifications.

B. Disposal of removal items is by the General Contractor, except for minor items Michigan Tech Facilities Management may request.

C. The complete scope of the new work is shown on the drawings.

D. New work includes, but is not limited to removal and replacement of toilets, sinks, toilet partitions, toilet and bath accessories, acoustical ceiling system, flooring, interior doors and hardware, upgrades to plumbing and HVAC system, lighting and other electrical components, and carpentry work as indicated on the drawings.

E. Contractor shall be responsible for progress cleaning throughout the project duration and final cleaning prior to Michigan Tech re-occupancy.

1.04 WORK BY OWNER

A. Michigan Tech will award a separate contract for asbestos removal.

B. Michigan Tech will furnish the following toilet room accessories for installation by the Contractor: soap dispensers, toilet paper dispensers, and paper towel dispensers. Shower curtains and hooks will be furnished and installed by Michigan Tech. Reference toilet accessory schedule on drawing sheet A010.

1.05 OWNER OCCUPANCY

A. Michigan Tech will be occupying the housing employee residence apartments located in rooms 104, 114, and 114A during the entire construction period. All other areas of the building will be unoccupied during the construction period.

B. Cooperate with Michigan Tech to minimize conflict and to facilitate Michigan Tech's operations.

C. Refer to the schedule of work to accommodate Michigan Tech occupancy.

1.06 CONTRACTOR USE OF SITE AND PREMISES

A. Campus Restrictions: See the Michigan Technological University’s website for additional information on these items.

1. Firearms are prohibited on the campus of Michigan Technological University.

2. The campus is a tobacco, smoke, and vapor free site.

B. Construction Operations: Limited to areas immediately adjacent or in front of the buildings being work on.

C. Arrange use of site and premises to:

1. Limit use of Project site to work in areas indicated. Do not disturb portions of Project site beyond areas in which the Work is indicated.

a. Driveways, Walkways and Entrances: Keep driveways loading areas, and entrances serving premises clear and available to Owner, Owner's employees, and emergency vehicles at all times. Do not use these areas for parking or storage of materials.

1) Schedule deliveries to minimize use of driveways and entrances by construction operations.

01 10 00 SUMMARY


01 10 00 - 2 March 18, 2021

SUMMARY

2) Schedule deliveries to minimize space and time requirements for storage of materials and equipment on-site.

D. Provide access to and from site as required by law and by Michigan Tech:

1. Emergency Building Exits During Construction: Keep all exits required by code open during construction period; provide temporary exit signs if exit routes are temporarily altered.

2. Do not obstruct roadways, sidewalks, or other public ways without permit.

E. Time Restrictions:

1. There are no time restrictions for performing the work.

F. Utility Outages and Shutdown:

1. Limit disruption of utility services to hours the building is unoccupied.

2. Prevent accidental disruption of utility services to other facilities.

1.07 WORK SEQUENCE

A. Coordinate construction schedule and operations with Michigan Tech.


01 21 00 ALLOWANCES


01 21 00 - 1 March 18, 2021

ALLOWANCES

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Cash allowances.

B. Contingency allowance.

C. Inspecting and testing allowances.

D. Payment and modification procedures relating to allowances.

1.02 CASH ALLOWANCES

A. Costs Included in Cash Allowances: Cost of product to Contractor or subcontractor, less applicable trade discounts, less cost of delivery to site, less applicable taxes.

B. Costs Not Included in Cash Allowances: Product delivery to site and handling at the site, including unloading, uncrating, and storage; protection of products from elements and from damage; and labor for installation and finishing.

C. Architect Responsibilities:

1. Consult with Contractor for consideration and selection of products, suppliers, and installers.

2. Select products in consultation with Owner and transmit decision to Contractor.

3. Prepare Change Order.

D. Contractor Responsibilities:

1. Assist Architect in selection of products, suppliers, and installers.

2. Obtain proposals from suppliers and installers and offer recommendations.

3. On notification of which products have been selected, execute purchase agreement with designated supplier and installer.

4. Arrange for and process shop drawings, product data, and samples. Arrange for delivery.

5. Promptly inspect products upon delivery for completeness, damage, and defects. Submit claims for transportation damage.

E. Differences in costs will be adjusted by Change Order.

1.03 CONTINGENCY ALLOWANCE

A. Contractor's costs for products, delivery, installation, labor, insurance, payroll, taxes, bonding, equipment rental, overhead and profit will be included in Change Orders authorizing expenditure of funds from this Contingency Allowance.

B. Funds will be drawn from the Contingency Allowance only by Change Order.

C. At closeout of Contract, funds remaining in Contingency Allowance will be credited to Owner by Change Order.

1.04 INSPECTING AND TESTING ALLOWANCES

A. Costs Included in Inspecting and Testing Allowances: Cost of engaging an inspecting or testing agency; execution of inspecting and tests; and reporting results.

B. Costs Not Included in the Inspecting and Testing Allowances:

1. Costs of incidental labor and facilities required to assist inspecting or testing agency.

2. Costs of testing services used by Contractor separate from Contract Document requirements.

3. Costs of retesting upon failure of previous tests as determined by Architect.

C. Payment Procedures:


01 2100 - 2 March 18, 2021

ALLOWANCES

1. Submit one copy of the inspecting or testing firm's invoice with next application for payment.

2. Pay invoice on approval by Architect.

D. Differences in cost will be adjusted by Change Order.

1.05 ALLOWANCES SCHEDULE

A. ALLOWANCE NO. 1 Lump-Sum Existing Duct Seam and Joint Repairs Allowance: Include the sum of $10,000.00 to repair existing seams and joints to be determined as leaking upon performing a pressure test of the system as specified in Section 23 31 13 Metal Ducts and as shown on the drawings.

1. This allowance is to include all labor, materials, equipment, supervision, overhead and profit.


01 23 00 ALTERNATES


01 23 00 - 1 March 18, 2021

ALTERNATES

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Agreement, Section 00 52 00.


A. Administrative and procedural requirements governing Alternates. 1. The Owner reserves the right to accept or decline alternates. 2. The Owner reserves the right to accept, decline, and/or enter negotiations to modify Voluntary

Alternates proposed by the Contractor and/or any subcontractor.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Definition: An alternate is an amount proposed by bidders and stated on the Bid Form for certain work defined in the Bidding Requirements that may be added to, or deducted from, the Base Bid amount if the Owner decides to accept a corresponding change in the amount of construction to be completed, or in the products, materials, equipment, systems, or installation methods described in the Contract Documents. 1. The cost or credit for each alternate is the net addition to or deduction from the Contract Sum to

incorporate the Alternate into the Work. No other adjustments are made to the Contract Sum.

1.4 PROCEDURES

A. Coordination: Modify or adjust affected adjacent Work as necessary to completely and fully integrate that Work into the Project. 1. Include as part of each alternate, miscellaneous devices, accessory objects, and similar items

incidental to or required for a complete installation whether or not mentioned as part of the Alternate.

B. Notification: Immediately following the award of the Contract, notify each party involved, in writing, of the status of each alternate. Indicate whether alternates have been accepted, rejected, or deferred for later consideration. Include a complete description of negotiated modifications to alternates.

C. Execute accepted alternates under the same conditions as other Work of this Contract.

D. A Schedule of Product Alternates and a Schedule of Mandatory Alternates is included at the end of this Section. Specification Sections referenced in the Schedule contain requirements for materials necessary to achieve the Work described under each alternate. Also refer to the drawings. 1. Only principle items of Work are highlighted in each mandatory alternate. Include as part of each

alternate, miscellaneous devices, appurtenances, and similar items incidental to or required for a complete installation whether or not mentioned as part of the alternate.

2. Voluntary alternates, as proposed by the Bidder, are as shown on the Proposal Form submitted by such Bidder.

PART 2 SCHEDULE OF MANDATORY ALTERNATES

Alternate No. 1: Remove and Replace Bathroom Aluminum Windows Alternate No. 1 is to include all labor, materials, equipment, supervision, overhead and profit for removal of existing windows as depicted on the demolition drawings, and providing new windows as depicted in the architectural drawings and specifications.

Alternate No. 2: Clean Existing Ductwork to be Reused

Alternate No. 2 is to include all labor, materials, equipment, supervision, overhead and profit for cleaning the existing ductwork to be reused as depicted in the drawings and specifications.

01 23 00 ALTERNATES


01 23 00 - 2 March 18, 2021

ALTERNATES

Alternate No. 3: Provide Masonry Wall Behind All Showers (5) in Three of the Large Bathrooms

Alternate No. 3 is to include all labor, materials, equipment, supervision, overhead and profit for providing a 4” thick full height masonry wall behind the showers to push them further out into the room as depicted in detail 5 on drawing A111.

Alternate No. 4: Provide Aqua PEX-a piping in lieu of copper for all new domestic water piping Alternate No. 4 is to include all labor, materials, equipment, supervision, overhead and profit for providing PEX piping for all newly proposed domestic water (cold water, hot water, and circulating hot water) piping.


01 25 00 SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES


01 25 00 - 1 March 18, 2021

SUBSTITUTIONS


A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for substitutions. B. Related Requirements:

1. Section 01 60 00 Product Requirements for requirements for submitting comparable product submittals for products by listed manufacturers.

1.02 DEFINITIONS

A. Substitutions: Changes in products, materials, equipment, and methods of construction from those required by the Contract Documents and proposed by Contractor.

1.03 ACTION SUBMITTALS

A. Substitution Requests: Submit three copies of each request for consideration. Identify product or fabrication or installation method to be replaced. Include Specification Section number and title and Drawing numbers and titles. 1. Substitution Request Form: Use CSI Form 13.1A. 2. Documentation: Show compliance with requirements for substitutions and the following, as

applicable: a. Statement indicating why specified product or fabrication or installation cannot be provided,

if applicable. b. Coordination information, including a list of changes or revisions needed to other parts of

the Work and to construction performed by Owner and separate contractors that will be necessary to accommodate proposed substitution.

c. Detailed comparison of significant qualities of proposed substitution with those of the Work specified. Include annotated copy of applicable Specification Section. Significant qualities may include attributes such as performance, weight, size, durability, visual effect, sustainable design characteristics, warranties, and specific features and requirements indicated. Indicate deviations, if any, from the Work specified.

d. Product Data, including drawings and descriptions of products and fabrication and installation procedures.

e. Samples, where applicable or requested. f. Certificates and qualification data, where applicable or requested. g. List of similar installations for completed projects with project names and addresses and

names and addresses of architects, engineers, and owners. h. Material test reports from a qualified testing agency indicating and interpreting test results

for compliance with requirements indicated. i. Detailed comparison of Contractor's construction schedule using proposed substitution

with products specified for the Work, including effect on the overall Contract Time. If specified product or method of construction cannot be provided within the Contract Time, include letter from manufacturer, on manufacturer's letterhead, stating date of receipt of purchase order, lack of availability, or delays in delivery.

j. Cost information, including a proposal of change, if any, in the Contract Sum. k. Contractor's certification that proposed substitution complies with requirements in the

Contract Documents except as indicated in substitution request, is compatible with related materials, and is appropriate for applications indicated.

l. Contractor's waiver of rights to additional payment or time that may subsequently become necessary because of failure of proposed substitution to produce indicated results.

3. Michigan Tech's Action: If necessary, Michigan Tech will request additional information or

documentation for evaluation within seven days of receipt of a request for substitution. Michigan Tech will notify Contractor of acceptance or rejection of proposed substitution within 10 days of receipt of request, or seven days of receipt of additional information or documentation, whichever is later.

a. Forms of Acceptance: Change Order, Construction Change Directive, or Michigan Tech's

01 25 00 SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES


01 25 00 - 2 March 18, 2021

SUBSTITUTIONS

Supplemental Instructions for minor changes in the Work. b. Use product specified if Michigan Tech does not issue a decision on use of a proposed

substitution within time allocated. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Compatibility of Substitutions: Investigate and document compatibility of proposed substitution with related products and materials. Engage a qualified testing agency to perform compatibility tests recommended by manufacturers.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.01 SUBSTITUTIONS

A. Substitutions for Cause: Submit requests for substitution immediately on discovery of need for change,

but not later than 10 days prior to time required for preparation and review of related submittals.

1. Conditions: Michigan Tech will consider Contractor's request for substitution when the following

conditions are satisfied: a. Requested substitution is consistent with the Contract Documents and will produce

indicated results. b. Requested substitution will not adversely affect Contractor's construction schedule. c. Requested substitution has received necessary approvals of authorities having

jurisdiction. d. Requested substitution is compatible with other portions of the Work. e. Requested substitution has been coordinated with other portions of the Work. f. Requested substitution provides specified warranty. g. If requested substitution involves more than one contractor, requested substitution has been

coordinated with other portions of the Work, is uniform and consistent, is compatible with other products, and is acceptable to all contractors involved.

B. Substitutions for Convenience: Not allowed.

2.02 SUBSITUTIONS DURING THE PROJECT

A. After initial product selection and approval during the submission process, substitutions and changes to the product selection will not be permitted.


© Copyright 2013, CSI,

110 S. Union St., Suite 100, Alexandria, VA 22314 Page 1 of 2 Form Version: January 2013

CSI Form 13.1A

SUBSTITUTION

REQUEST

Project:

To:

Re:

Substitution Request Number:

From:

Date:

A/E Project Number:

Contract For:

Specification Title: Section: Page:

Description: Article/Paragraph:

Proposed Substitution: Manufacturer: Address: ZIP: Trade Name: Phone: Installer: Address: Phone:

History: ☐ New product ☐ 1-4 years old ☐ 5-10 years old ☐ More than 10 years old

Differences between proposed substitution and specified product:

☐ Point-by-point comparative data attached — REQUIRED BY A/E Reason for not providing specified item: Similar Installation:

Project: Architect:

Address: Owner:

Date Installed:

Proposed substitution affects other parts of Work: ☐ No ☐ Yes; explain Savings to Owner for accepting substitution: ($ ). Proposed substitution changes Contract Time: ☐ No ☐ Yes [Add] [Deduct] days.

Supporting Data Attached: ☐Drawings ☐Product Data ☐ Samples ☐ Tests ☐ Reports ☐

© Copyright 2013, CSI,

110 S. Union St., Suite 100, Alexandria, VA 22314 Page 2 of 2 Form Version: January 2013

CSI Form 13.1A

SUBSTITUTION

REQUEST

(Continued) The Undersigned certifies:

• Proposed substitution has been fully investigated and determined to be equal or superior in all respects to specified product.

• Same warranty will be furnished for proposed substitution as for specified product.

• Same maintenance service and source of replacement parts, as applicable, is available.

• Proposed substitution will have no adverse effect on other trades and will not affect or delay progress schedule.

• Cost data as stated above is complete. Claims for additional costs related to accepted substitution which may subsequently become apparent are to be waived.

• Proposed substitution does not affect dimensions and functional clearances.

• Payment will be made for changes to building design, including A/E design, detailing, and construction costs caused by the substitution.

• Coordination, installation, and changes in the Work as necessary for accepted substitution will be complete in all respects. Submitted by: Signed by: Firm: Address:

Telephone: Attachments: A/E’s REVIEW AND RECOMMENDATION

☐ Approve Substitution - Make submittals in accordance with Specification Section 01 25 00 Substitution Procedures.

☐ Approve Substitution as noted - Make submittals in accordance with Specification Section 01 25 00 Substitution Procedures.

☐ Reject Substitution - Use specified materials.

☐ Substitution Request received too late - Use specified materials.

Signed by: Date: OWNER'S REVIEW AND ACTION

☐ Substitution approved - Make submittals in accordance with Specification Section 01 25 00 Substitution Procedures. Prepare Change

Order.

☐ Substitution approved as noted - Make submittals in accordance with Specification Section 01 25 00 Substitution Procedures. Prepare

Change Order.

☐ Substitution rejected - Use specified materials.

Signed by: Date:

Additional Comments: ☐Contractor ☐Subcontractor ☐Supplier ☐Manufacturer ☐A/E

01 30 00 ADMINISTRATIVE SUBMITTALS


01 30 00 - 1 March 18, 2021

ADMINISTRATIVE SUBMITTALS

PART 1 – GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

1.1.1 This Section applies to all administrative and technical submittals described as follows:

1.1.1.1 Health and Safety Plan

1.1.1.2 Project Schedule

1.1.1.3 Daily Progress Forms

1.1.1.4 Shop Drawings

1.2 HEALTH AND SAFETY PLAN

1.2.1 The Contractor shall prepare a site-specific Health and Safety Plan for project. The Health and Safety Plan shall be provided to the University for informational and review purposes. The Contractor is responsible for implementation of their Health and Safety program. The University will provide comments on the Contractor’s Health and Safety Plan, but no approval of the Health and Safety Plan will be granted. Following incorporation of any comments, the University will accept the Health and Safety Plan.

1.2.2 The Site-Specific Health and Safety Plan shall meet the requirements, at a minimum, of the following:

1.2.2.1 29 CFR 1910: Safety and Health Regulations for General Industry, United States Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA), as amended.

1.2.2.2 29 CFR 1926: Safety and Health Regulations for Construction, OSHA, as amended.

1.2.3 The Contractor’s Health and Safety Plan is an enforceable document that shall guide the activities of the Contractor’s personnel and all subcontractor’s personnel. The Health and Safety Plan shall define site-specific safety provisions necessitated by all project activities of the Contractor and their subcontractors.

1.2.4 Hazard Communication Program: The Contractor shall utilize a Hazard Communication Program in accordance with 29 CFR 1926.59.

1.2.5 The Contractor and their designated Safety Officer shall be solely responsible for the implementation and monitoring of the Health and Safety Plan. The Health and Safety Plan shall address, but not be limited to, the following items:

1.2.5.1 Hazards: Provide a list and description of potential chemical, biological, and physical hazards associated with the proposed scope of work.

1.2.5.2 Planning: Describe the proposed health and safety organization and procedures for continuous updating of the Health and Safety Plan based on actual project conditions. The University shall be notified in writing of any proposed changes.

1.2.5.3 Training: Identify the types and level of training provided to all workers and other project personnel prior to their assignment to this project.

1.2.5.4 Personal Protective Equipment: Identify the means of protection for personnel working on the project. Identify conditions that would require increasing the level of protection during each work activity. Identify procedures for protecting personnel from other physical hazards, including but not limited to heat stress, hypothermia, and excessive noise.



01 30 00 - 2 March 18, 2021


1.2.5.5 Site Emergencies: The Health and Safety Plan shall include policies and procedures for responding to emergency situations, such as fire, physical injury, release of toxic materials, etc.

1.2.5.6 Waste Handling: Identify procedures that will be used to ensure the safe handling and transfer of wastes during loading and transportation activities.

1.2.5.7 Hot Work – Welding and Cutting: The Contractor shall establish procedures for performing hot work, including but not limited to welding, cutting, burning, and heating, or any other activity capable of providing a source of ignition. Additional requirements related to hot work are defined in 29 CFR 1926, Subpart J.

1.2.6 The University may require revisions to the Health and Safety Plan; however, extensions to the time period of this contract will not be granted if caused by delays in developing an acceptable Health and Safety Plan.

1.2.7 The Contractor shall conduct all operations in accordance with the Health and Safety Plan. Disregard for the provisions of the Health and Safety Plan shall be deemed just and sufficient cause for suspension of work and/or removal of Contractor personnel without compromise or prejudice to the rights of the University.

1.3 PROJECT SCHEDULE

1.3.1 The Contractor shall provide a project schedule that conforms to the requirements summarized below, unless otherwise approved by the Project Engineer.

1.3.1.1 The Project Schedule shall be formatted as a Gantt Chart and shall contain administrative, technical submittal dates, and required approval dates.

1.3.1.2 After starting work the Contractor shall continue the work to completion unless delays are approved by the University.

1.3.1.3 Work activities and durations with expected start and finish dates for each phase of the work should be included in the Project Schedule.

1.3.2 Procedures for updating the Project Schedule include:

1.3.2.1 Update schedules a minimum of every two weeks unless otherwise specified or directed by the University.

1.3.2.2 Submit updated schedules at progress meetings. If a schedule remains unchanged, submit a written notice to that effect.



01 30 00 - 3 March 18, 2021


1.4 DAILY PROGRESS REPORTS

1.4.1 The Contractor shall maintain daily progress reports that shall outline the safety topics reviewed prior to the start of work, work accomplished during the reporting period, and work to be completed during the subsequent reporting period. Problems, deficiencies, and safety concerns, real or anticipated, should be summarized in the progress reports. Work of suppliers and subcontractors shall also be included in the daily reports. Other pertinent information including, but not limited to weather conditions, project milestones, and corrective actions should also be documented.

1.5 SHOP DRAWINGS

1.5.1 The Contractor shall provide shop drawings for review and approval as necessitated by the work. The Contractor shall maintain one current record copy of all specifications, drawings, addenda, change orders, and shop drawings at the project site. The documents shall be kept current, in good order, and annotated to show all changes made over the course of construction.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

PART 3 - EXECUTION


31-18-01/DHH Bathroom Renovations 01 31 00 - 1 PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND March 18, 2021 COORDINATION

SECTION 01 31 00 - PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes administrative provisions for coordinating construction operations on Project including, but not limited to, the following:

1. General coordination procedures. 2. Coordination drawings. 3. RFIs. 4. Digital project management procedures. 5. Project meetings.

B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 01 70 00 "Execution and Closeout Requirements" for procedures for coordinating

general installation and field-engineering services, including establishment of benchmarks and control points.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. RFI: Request for Information. Request from Owner, Architect, or Contractor seeking information required by or clarifications of the Contract Documents.

1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS

A. Subcontract List: Prepare a written summary identifying individuals or firms proposed for each portion of the Work, including those who are to furnish products or equipment fabricated to a special design. Include the following information in tabular form:

1. Name, address, telephone number, and email address of entity performing subcontract or supplying products.

2. Number and title of related Specification Section(s) covered by subcontract. 3. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate, covered by subcontract.

B. Key Personnel Names: Within 15 days of starting construction operations, submit a list of key personnel assignments, including superintendent and other personnel in attendance at Project site. Identify individuals and their duties and responsibilities; list addresses and telephone numbers, including home, office and cellular telephone numbers and e-mail addresses. Provide names, addresses, and telephone numbers of individuals assigned as alternates in absence of individuals assigned to Project.


1.5 GENERAL COORDINATION PROCEDURES

A. Coordination: Coordinate construction operations included in different Sections of the Specifications to ensure efficient and orderly installation of each part of the Work. Coordinate construction operations included in different Sections that depend on each other for proper installation, connection, and operation.

1. Schedule construction operations in sequence required to obtain the best results where installation of one part of the Work depends on installation of other components, before or after its own installation.

2. Coordinate installation of different components to ensure maximum performance and accessibility for required maintenance, service, and repair.

3. Make adequate provisions to accommodate items scheduled for later installation.

1.6 REQUEST FOR INFORMATION (RFI)

A. General: Immediately on discovery of the need for additional information, clarification, or interpretation of the Contract Documents, Contractor shall prepare and submit an RFI in the form specified.

1. Architect will return without response those RFIs submitted to Architect by other entities controlled by Contractor.

2. Coordinate and submit RFIs in a prompt manner so as to avoid delays in Contractor's work or work of subcontractors.

B. Content of the RFI: Include a detailed, legible description of item needing information or interpretation and the following:

1. Project name. 2. Project number. 3. Date. 4. Name of Contractor. 5. Name of Architect. 6. RFI number, numbered sequentially. 7. RFI subject. 8. Specification Section number and title and related paragraphs, as appropriate. 9. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate. 10. Field dimensions and conditions, as appropriate. 11. Contractor's suggested resolution. If Contractor's suggested resolution impacts the

Contract Time or the Contract Sum, Contractor shall state impact in the RFI. 12. Contractor's signature. 13. Attachments: Include sketches, descriptions, measurements, photos, Product Data, Shop

Drawings, coordination drawings, and other information necessary to fully describe items needing interpretation.

C. RFI Forms: Software-generated form with substantially the same content as indicated above, acceptable to Architect.

D. Architect's Action: Architect will review each RFI, determine action required, and respond. Allow seven working days for Architect's response for each RFI. RFIs received by Architect after 1:00 p.m. will be considered as received the following working day.

1. The following Contractor-generated RFIs will be returned without action:


a. Requests for approval of submittals. b. Requests for approval of substitutions. c. Requests for approval of Contractor's means and methods. d. Requests for coordination information already indicated in the Contract

Documents. e. Requests for adjustments in the Contract Time or the Contract Sum. f. Requests for interpretation of Architect's actions on submittals. g. Incomplete RFIs or inaccurately prepared RFIs.

2. Architect's action may include a request for additional information, in which case Architect's time for response will date from time of receipt by Architect of additional information.

3. Architect's action on RFIs that may result in a change to the Contract Time or the Contract Sum may be eligible for Contractor to submit Change Proposal according to Section 01 26 00 "Contract Modification Procedures."

a. If Contractor believes the RFI response warrants change in the Contract Time or the Contract Sum, notify Architect in writing within 7 days of receipt of the RFI response.

E. RFI Log: Prepare, maintain, and submit a tabular log of RFIs organized by the RFI number. Submit log weekly.

1. Project name. 2. Name and address of Contractor. 3. Name and address of Architect. 4. RFI number including RFIs that were returned without action or withdrawn. 5. RFI description. 6. Date the RFI was submitted. 7. Date Architect's response was received.

F. On receipt of Architect's action, update the RFI log and immediately distribute the RFI response to affected parties. Review response and notify Architect within seven days if Contractor disagrees with response.

1.7 PROJECT MEETINGS

A. General: Architect will schedule and conduct meetings and conferences at Project site unless otherwise indicated.

B. Preconstruction Conference: Architect will schedule and conduct a preconstruction conference before starting construction, at a time convenient to Owner and Architect, but no later than 15 days after execution of the Agreement.

1. Conduct the conference to review responsibilities and personnel assignments. 2. Attendees: Authorized representatives of Owner Architect, and their consultants;

Contractor and its superintendent; major subcontractors; suppliers; and other concerned parties shall attend the conference. Participants at the conference shall be familiar with Project and authorized to conclude matters relating to the Work.

3. Agenda: Discuss items of significance that could affect progress, including the following: a. Tentative construction schedule. b. Phasing. c. Critical work sequencing and long lead items. d. Designation of key personnel and their duties.


e. Lines of communications. f. Procedures for processing field decisions and Change Orders. g. Procedures for RFIs. h. Procedures for testing and inspecting. i. Procedures for processing Applications for Payment. j. Distribution of the Contract Documents. k. Submittal procedures. l. Preparation of Record Documents. m. Use of the premises. n. Work restrictions. o. Working hours. p. Owner's occupancy requirements. q. Responsibility for temporary facilities and controls. r. Procedures for moisture and mold control. s. Procedures for disruptions and shutdowns. t. Construction waste management and recycling. u. Parking availability. v. Office, work, and storage areas. w. Equipment deliveries and priorities. x. First aid. y. Security. z. Progress cleaning.

4. Minutes: Architect will record and distribute meeting minutes.

C. Preinstallation Conferences: Conduct a preinstallation conference at Project site before each construction activity when required by other sections and when required for coordination with other construction.

1. Attendees: Installer and representatives of manufacturers and fabricators involved in or affected by the installation and its coordination or integration with other materials and installations that have preceded or will follow, shall attend the meeting. Advise Architect of scheduled meeting dates.

2. Agenda: Review progress of other construction activities and preparations for the particular activity under consideration, including requirements for the following:

a. Contract Documents. b. Options. c. Related RFIs. d. Related Change Orders. e. Purchases. f. Deliveries. g. Submittals. h. Review of mockups. i. Possible conflicts. j. Compatibility requirements. k. Time schedules. l. Weather limitations. m. Manufacturer's written instructions. n. Warranty requirements. o. Compatibility of materials. p. Acceptability of substrates. q. Temporary facilities and controls. r. Space and access limitations. s. Regulations of authorities having jurisdiction.


t. Testing and inspecting requirements. u. Installation procedures. v. Coordination with other work. w. Required performance results. x. Protection of adjacent work. y. Protection of construction and personnel.

3. Record significant conference discussions, agreements, and disagreements, including required corrective measures and actions.

4. Reporting: Distribute minutes of the meeting to each party present and to other parties requiring information.

5. Do not proceed with installation if the conference cannot be successfully concluded. Initiate whatever actions are necessary to resolve impediments to performance of the Work and reconvene the conference at earliest feasible date.

D. Progress Meetings: Architect will conduct progress meetings at weekly intervals.

1. Attendees: In addition to representatives of Owner and Architect, each contractor, subcontractor, supplier, and other entity concerned with current progress or involved in planning, coordination, or performance of future activities shall be represented at these meetings. All participants at the meeting shall be familiar with Project and authorized to conclude matters relating to the Work.

2. Agenda: Review and correct or approve minutes of previous progress meeting. Review other items of significance that could affect progress. Include topics for discussion as appropriate to status of Project.

a. Contractor's Construction Schedule: Review progress since the last meeting. Determine whether each activity is on time, ahead of schedule, or behind schedule, in relation to Contractor's construction schedule. Determine how construction behind schedule will be expedited; secure commitments from parties involved to do so. Discuss whether schedule revisions are required to ensure that current and subsequent activities will be completed within the Contract Time.

1) Review schedule for next period.

b. Review present and future needs of each entity present, including the following:

1) Interface requirements. 2) Sequence of operations. 3) Resolution of BIM component conflicts. 4) Status of submittals. 5) Deliveries. 6) Off-site fabrication. 7) Access. 8) Site use. 9) Temporary facilities and controls. 10) Progress cleaning. 11) Quality and work standards. 12) Status of correction of deficient items. 13) Field observations. 14) Status of RFIs. 15) Status of Proposal Requests. 16) Pending changes. 17) Status of Change Orders. 18) Pending claims and disputes.


19) Documentation of information for payment requests.

3. Minutes: Architect will record and distribute the meeting minutes to each party present and to parties requiring information.

a. Schedule Updating: Revise Contractor's construction schedule after each progress meeting where revisions to the schedule have been made or recognized. Issue revised schedule concurrently with the report of each meeting.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)

PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used)


01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES


01 33 00 - 1 March 18, 2021

SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. Section includes requirements for the submittal schedule and administrative and procedural requirements for submitting Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples, and other submittals.

1.02 DEFINITIONS

A. Action Submittals: Written and graphic information and physical samples that require Michigan Tech's responsive action.

B. Informational Submittals: Written and graphic information and physical samples that do not

require Michigan Tech's responsive action. Submittals may be rejected for not complying with requirements.


A. Prior to ordering materials and construction, provide an Action Submittal for items specified throughout the contract documents that include the phrase ‘as approved by Michigan Tech,’ if the exact item as specified cannot be obtained and a similar item must be provided. This is not intended to be a substitution procedure, substitutions must follow requirements of section 012500.

1.04 SUBMITTAL ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS

A. Electronic copies of digital data files of the specified items can be provided by Michigan Tech for Contractor's use in preparing submittals.

B. Processing Time: Provide submittals within one week after award of contract to insure sufficient lead time for materials in time for the construction start date. Allow time for submittal review, including time for resubmittals, as follows. Time for review shall commence on Michigan Tech's receipt of submittal. No extension of the Contract Time will be authorized because of failure to transmit submittals enough in advance of the Work to permit processing, including resubmittals.

1. Initial Review: Allow 7 days for initial review of each submittal. Allow additional time if

coordination with subsequent submittals is required. Michigan Tech will advise Contractor when a submittal being processed must be delayed for coordination.

2. Intermediate Review: If intermediate submittal is necessary, process it in same manner as initial submittal.

3. Resubmittal Review: Allow 7 days for review of each resubmittal. C. Electronic Submittals (note electronic submittals are preferred by Michigan Technological

University): Identify and incorporate information in each electronic submittal file as follows: 1. Assemble complete submittal package into a single indexed file incorporating submittal

requirements of a single Specification Section and transmittal form with links enabling navigation to each item.

2. Name file with submittal number or other unique identifier, including revision identifier.

a. File name shall use project identifier and Specification Section number followed by a decimal point and then a sequential number (e.g., DHH-061000.01). Resubmittals shall include an alphabetic suffix after another decimal point (e.g., DHH-061000.01.A).

3. Provide means for insertion to permanently record Contractor's review and approval markings and action taken by Michigan Tech.

4. Transmittal Form for Electronic Submittals: Use electronic form acceptable to Architect, containing the following information:

a. Project name. b. Date. c. Name and address of Architect.



01 33 00 - 2 March 18, 2021


d. Name of Construction Manager. e. Name of Contractor. f. Name of firm or entity that prepared submittal. g. Names of subcontractor, manufacturer, and supplier. h. Category and type of submittal. i. Submittal purpose and description. j. Specification Section number and title. k. Specification paragraph number or drawing designation and generic name for

each of multiple items. l. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate.

m. Location(s) where product is to be installed, as appropriate.

n. Related physical samples submitted directly. o. Indication of full or partial submittal. p. Transmittal number, numbered consecutively. q. Submittal and transmittal distribution record. r. Other necessary identification. s. Remarks.

D. Paper Submittals (note electronic submittals are preferred by Michigan Technological University):

Place a permanent label or title block on each submittal item for identification. 1. Indicate name of firm or entity that prepared each submittal on label or title block. 2. Provide a space approximately 6 by 8 inches on label or beside title block to record

Contractor's review and approval markings and action taken by Michigan Tech. 3. Include the following information for processing and recording action taken:

a. Project name. b. Date. c. Destination (To:). d. Source (From:). e. Name and address of Architect. f. Name of Construction Manager. g. Name of Contractor. h. Name of firm or entity that prepared submittal. i. Names of subcontractor, manufacturer, and supplier. j. Category and type of submittal. k. Submittal purpose and description. l. Submittal number shall use Specification Section number followed by a decimal

point and then a sequential number (e.g., 061000.01). Resubmittals shall include an alphabetic suffix after another decimal point (e.g., 061000.01.A).

m. Specification paragraph number or drawing designation and generic name for each of multiple items.

n. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate. o. Indication of full or partial submittal. p. Transmittal number, numbered consecutively. q. Submittal and transmittal distribution record. r. Remarks.

s. Signature of transmitter. 4. Additional Paper Copies: Unless additional copies are required for final submittal, and

unless Michigan Tech observes noncompliance with provisions in the Contract Documents, initial submittal may serve as final submittal.

E. Options: Identify options requiring selection by Michigan Tech.

F. Deviations: Identify deviations from the Contract Documents on submittals.

G. Resubmittals: Make resubmittals in same form and number of copies as initial submittal.



01 33 00 - 3 March 18, 2021


1. Note date and content of previous submittal. 2. Note date and content of revision in label or title block and clearly indicate extent of

revision. 3. Resubmit submittals until they are marked with approval notation from Architect's action

stamp.

H. Distribution: Furnish copies of final submittals to manufacturers, subcontractors, suppliers,

fabricators, installers, authorities having jurisdiction, and others as necessary for performance of construction activities. Show distribution on transmittal forms.

I. Use for Construction: Retain complete copies of submittals on Project site. Use only final

action submittals that are marked with approval notation from Michigan Tech's action stamp.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES

A. General Submittal Procedure Requirements:

1. Submit electronic submittals via email as PDF electronic files.

a. Michigan Tech will return annotated file. Annotate and retain one copy of file as an electronic Project record document file.

B. Product Data: Collect information into a single submittal for each element of construction and

type of product or equipment.

1. Mark each copy of each submittal to show which products and options are applicable.

2. Include the following information, as applicable: a. Manufacturer's catalog cuts. b. Manufacturer's product specifications. c. Standard color charts. d. Statement of compliance with specified referenced standards. e. Testing by recognized testing agency. f. Application of testing agency labels and seals. g. Notation of coordination requirements.

h. Availability and delivery time information. 3. Submit Product Data before or concurrent with Samples. 4. Submit Product Data in the following format:

a. PDF electronic file.

C. Shop Drawings: Prepare Project-specific information, drawn accurately to scale. Do not base

Shop Drawings on reproductions of the Contract Documents or standard printed data, unless submittal based on Architect's digital data drawing files is otherwise permitted.

1. Preparation: Fully illustrate requirements in the Contract Documents. Include the following information, as applicable: a. Identification of products. b. Schedules. c. Compliance with specified standards. d. Notation of coordination requirements. e. Notation of dimensions established by field measurement. f. Relationship and attachment to adjoining construction clearly indicated. g. Seal and signature of professional engineer if specified.

2. Sheet Size: Except for templates, patterns, and similar full-size drawings, submit

Shop Drawings on sheets at least 8-1/2 by 11 inches, but no larger than 30 by 42 inches. 3. Submit Shop Drawings in the following format:



01 33 00 - 4 March 18, 2021


a. PDF electronic file. b. Four opaque (bond) copies of each submittal. Michigan Tech will return two

copy(ies).

D. Samples: Submit Samples for review of kind, color, pattern, and texture for a check of these

characteristics with other elements and for a comparison of these characteristics between submittal and actual component as delivered and installed.

1. Transmit Samples that contain multiple, related components such as accessories together

in one submittal package. 2. Identification: Attach label on unexposed side of Samples that includes the following:

a. Generic description of Sample.

b. Product name and name of manufacturer. c. Sample source. d. Number and title of applicable Specification Section.

3. For projects where electronic submittals are required, provide corresponding electronic

submittal of Sample transmittal, digital image file illustrating Sample characteristics, and identification information for record.

4. Disposition: Maintain sets of approved Samples at Project site, available for quality- control comparisons throughout the course of construction activity. Sample sets may be used to determine final acceptance of construction associated with each set.

a. Samples that may be incorporated into the Work are indicated in individual

Specification Sections. Such Samples must be in an undamaged condition at time of use.

b. Samples not incorporated into the Work, or otherwise designated as Owner's property, are the property of Contractor.

5. Samples for Initial Selection: Submit manufacturer's color charts consisting of units or

sections of units showing the full range of colors, textures, and patterns available.

a. Number of Samples: Submit one full set(s) of available choices where color,

pattern, texture, or similar characteristics are required to be selected from manufacturer's product line. Michigan Tech will return submittal with options selected.

6. Samples for Verification: Submit full-size units or Samples of size indicated, prepared

from same material to be used for the Work, cured and finished in manner specified, and physically identical with material or product proposed for use, and that show full range of color and texture variations expected. Samples include, but are not limited to, the following: partial sections of manufactured or fabricated components; small cuts or containers of materials; complete units of repetitively used materials; swatches showing color, texture, and pattern; color range sets; and components used for independent testing and inspection.

a. Number of Samples: Submit one sets of Samples. Michigan Tech will retain. 1) If variation in color, pattern, texture, or other characteristic is inherent in

material or product represented by a Sample, submit at least three sets of paired units that show approximate limits of variations.

E. Application for Payment and Schedule of Values: Comply with requirements specified in

Section 01 00 01 Payment Procedures.



01 33 00 - 5 March 18, 2021


F. Closeout Submittals and Maintenance Material Submittals: Comply with requirements specified in Section 01 70 00 Closeout Procedures.

G. Manufacturer Certificates: Submit written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that manufacturer complies with requirements in the Contract Documents. Include evidence of manufacturing experience where required.

H. Product Certificates: Submit written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that

product complies with requirements in the Contract Documents.

I. Material Test Reports: Submit reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing agency's

standard form, indicating and interpreting test results of material for compliance with requirements in the Contract Documents.

J. Product Test Reports: Submit written reports indicating that current product produced by

manufacturer complies with requirements in the Contract Documents. Base reports on evaluation of tests performed by manufacturer and witnessed by a qualified testing agency, or on comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency.

2.02 DELEGATED-DESIGN SERVICES

A. Performance and Design Criteria: Where professional design services or certifications by a

design professional are specifically required of Contractor by the Contract Documents, provide products and systems complying with specific performance and design criteria indicated.

1. If criteria indicated are not sufficient to perform services or certification required, submit a

written request for additional information to Michigan Tech.

B. Delegated-Design Services Certification: In addition to Shop Drawings, Product Data, and other

required submittals, submit digitally signed PDF electronic file and three paper copies of certificate, signed and sealed by the responsible design professional, for each product and system specifically assigned to Contractor to be designed or certified by a design professional.

1. Indicate that products and systems comply with performance and design criteria in the

Contract Documents. Include list of codes, loads, and other factors used in performing these services.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 CONTRACTOR'S REVIEW

A. Action and Informational Submittals: Review each submittal and check for coordination with

other Work of the Contract and for compliance with the Contract Documents. Note corrections and field dimensions. Mark with approval stamp before submitting to Architect.

B. Project Closeout and Maintenance Material Submittals: See requirements in Section 017000

Closeout Procedures.

C. Approval Stamp: Stamp each submittal with a uniform, approval stamp. Include Project name and location, submittal number, Specification Section title and number, name of reviewer, date of Contractor's approval, and statement certifying that submittal has been reviewed, checked, and approved for compliance with the Contract Documents.



01 33 00 - 6 March 18, 2021


3.02 MICHIGAN TECH'S ACTION

A. General: Michigan Tech will not review submittals that do not bear Contractor's approval stamp

and will return them without action.

B. Action Submittals: Michigan Tech will review each submittal, make marks to indicate corrections

or revisions required, and return it. Architect will stamp each submittal with an action stamp and will mark stamp appropriately to indicate action.

C. Informational Submittals: Michigan Tech will review each submittal and will not return it, or will

return it if it does not comply with requirements. Michigan Tech will forward each submittal to appropriate party.

D. Incomplete submittals are unacceptable, will be considered nonresponsive, and will be returned

for resubmittal without review.

E. Submittals not required by the Contract Documents may not be reviewed and may be discarded.


MA

ST

ER

WO

RK

S S

UB

MIT

TA

L L

OG

PR

OJE

CT

: D

HH

Ba

thro

om

Ren

ovation

OW

NE

R:

Mic

hig

an T

echnolo

gic

al U

niv

ers

ity

PR

OJE

CT

NO

: 7

05

8-2

1-0

02

0

CO

NT

RA

CT

OR

:

DA

TE

R

EC

’D.

SPECIFICATION

SECTION NO.

SU

BM

ITT

AL

IT

EM

CO

NT

RA

CT

OR

S

UB

CO

NT

RA

CT

OR

NO. RECEIVED

OT

HE

R R

EV

IEW

ER

A

CT

ION

DATE

RETURNED

CO

PIE

S T

O

DA

TE

S

EN

T

F

IRM

NO. COPIES

DU

E

DA

TE

DA

TE

R

EC

’D.

APPROVED

APPROVED

AS NOTED

REVISE &

RESUBMIT

NOT APP’D.

CONTRACTOR

OWNER

FIELD

FILE

0

42

20

0

CO

NC

RE

TE

UN

IT M

AS

ON

RY

Pro

duct D

ata

0

71

41

6

CO

LD

FL

UID

-AP

PL

IED

WA

TE

RP

RO

OF

ING

Pro

duct D

ata

0

78

41

3

PE

NE

TR

AT

ION

FIR

ES

TO

PP

ING

Pro

duct D

ata

0

79

20

0

JO

INT

SE

AL

AN

TS

Pro

duct D

ata

Sam

ple

s

0

81

21

3

HO

LL

OW

ME

TA

L F

RA

ME

S

Pro

duct D

ata

Shop

Dra

win

gs

0

81

41

6

FL

US

H W

OO

D D

OO

RS

Pro

duct D

ata

Shop

Dra

win

gs

Sam

ple

s

0

85

11

3

AL

UM

INU

M W

IND

OW

S

Pro

duct D

ata

Shop

Dra

win

gs

Sam

ple

s

0

87

10

0

DO

OR

HA

RD

WA

RE

Pro

duct D

ata

Sam

ple

s

0

88

30

0

MIR

RO

RS

Pro

duct D

ata

Shop

Dra

win

gs

0

92

21

6

NO

N-S

TR

UC

TU

RA

L M

ET

AL

FR

AM

ING

Pro

duct D

ata

0

92

90

0

GY

PS

UM

BO

AR

D

Pro

duct D

ata

Sam

ple

s

0

93

01

3

CE

RA

MIC

TIL

ING

Pro

duct D

ata

Sam

ple

s

0

95

11

3

AC

OU

ST

ICA

L P

AN

EL

CE

ILIN

GS

MA

ST

ER

WO

RK

S S

UB

MIT

TA

L L

OG

PR

OJE

CT

: D

HH

Ba

thro

om

Ren

ovation

OW

NE

R:

Mic

hig

an T

echnolo

gic

al U

niv

ers

ity

PR

OJE

CT

NO

: 7

05

8-2

1-0

02

0

CO

NT

RA

CT

OR

:

DA

TE

R

EC

’D.

SPECIFICATION

SECTION NO.

SU

BM

ITT

AL

IT

EM

CO

NT

RA

CT

OR

S

UB

CO

NT

RA

CT

OR

NO. RECEIVED

OT

HE

R R

EV

IEW

ER

A

CT

ION

DATE

RETURNED

CO

PIE

S T

O

DA

TE

S

EN

T

F

IRM

NO. COPIES

DU

E

DA

TE

DA

TE

R

EC

’D.

APPROVED

APPROVED

AS NOTED

REVISE &

RESUBMIT

NOT APP’D.

CONTRACTOR

OWNER

FIELD

FILE

Pro

duct D

ata

Sam

ple

s

0

96

51

3

RE

SIL

IEN

T B

AS

E A

ND

AC

CE

SS

OR

IES

Pro

duct D

ata

Sam

ple

s

0

96

72

3

RE

SIN

OU

S F

LO

OR

ING

Pro

duct D

ata

Sam

ple

s

0

99

12

3

INT

ER

IOR

PA

INT

ING

Pro

duct D

ata

Sam

ple

s

1

02

11

3.1

9

PL

AS

TIC

TO

ILE

T C

OM

PA

RT

ME

NT

S

Pro

duct D

ata

Shop

Dra

win

gs

Sam

ple

s

1

02

11

6.1

9

PL

AS

TIC

SH

OW

ER

AN

D D

RE

SS

ING

C

OM

PA

RT

ME

NT

S

Pro

duct D

ata

Shop

Dra

win

gs

Sam

ple

s

1

02

80

0

TO

ILE

T, B

AT

H, A

ND

LA

UN

DR

Y

AC

CE

SS

OR

IES

Pro

duct D

ata

Sam

ple

s

1

23

66

1.1

6

SO

LID

SU

RF

AC

ING

CO

UN

TE

RT

OP

S

Pro

duct D

ata

Shop

Dra

win

gs

Sam

ple

s

2

20

51

7

SL

EE

VE

S A

ND

SL

EE

VE

SE

AL

S F

OR

P

LU

MB

ING

PIP

ING

Pro

duct D

ata

2

20

52

3.1

2

BA

LL

VA

LV

ES

FO

R P

LU

MB

ING

PIP

ING

Pro

duct D

ata

2

20

52

9

HA

NG

ER

S A

ND

SU

PP

OR

TS

FO

R

PL

UM

BIN

G P

IPIN

G A

ND

EQ

UIP

ME

NT

MA

ST

ER

WO

RK

S S

UB

MIT

TA

L L

OG

PR

OJE

CT

: D

HH

Ba

thro

om

Ren

ovation

OW

NE

R:

Mic

hig

an T

echnolo

gic

al U

niv

ers

ity

PR

OJE

CT

NO

: 7

05

8-2

1-0

02

0

CO

NT

RA

CT

OR

:

DA

TE

R

EC

’D.

SPECIFICATION

SECTION NO.

SU

BM

ITT

AL

IT

EM

CO

NT

RA

CT

OR

S

UB

CO

NT

RA

CT

OR

NO. RECEIVED

OT

HE

R R

EV

IEW

ER

A

CT

ION

DATE

RETURNED

CO

PIE

S T

O

DA

TE

S

EN

T

F

IRM

NO. COPIES

DU

E

DA

TE

DA

TE

R

EC

’D.

APPROVED

APPROVED

AS NOTED

REVISE &

RESUBMIT

NOT APP’D.

CONTRACTOR

OWNER

FIELD

FILE

Pro

duct D

ata

Shop

Dra

win

gs

2

20

55

3

IDE

NT

IFIC

AT

ION

FO

R P

LU

MB

ING

PIP

ING

A

ND

EQ

UIP

ME

NT

Pro

duct D

ata

2

20

71

9

PL

UM

BIN

G P

IPIN

G IN

SU

LA

TIO

N

Pro

duct D

ata

Shop

Dra

win

gs

2

21

11

6

DO

ME

ST

IC W

AT

ER

PIP

ING

Pro

duct D

ata

2

21

31

6

SA

NIT

AR

Y W

AS

TE

AN

D V

EN

T P

IPIN

G

Pro

duct D

ata

2

24

21

3.1

3

CO

MM

ER

CIA

L W

AT

ER

CL

OS

ET

S

Pro

duct D

ata

Shop

Dra

win

gs

2

24

21

6.1

3

CO

MM

ER

CIA

L L

AV

AT

OR

IES

Pro

duct D

ata

Shop

Dra

win

gs

2

24

22

3

CO

MM

ER

CIA

L S

HO

WE

RS

Pro

duct D

ata

2

30

13

0.5

2

EX

IST

ING

HV

AC

AIR

DIS

TR

IBU

TIO

N

SY

ST

EM

CL

EA

NIN

G

Pro

duct D

ata

2

33

11

3

ME

TA

L D

UC

TS

Pro

duct D

ata

Shop

Dra

win

gs

2

33

30

0

AIR

DU

CT

AC

CE

SS

OR

IES

Pro

duct D

ata

2

33

41

6

CE

NT

RIF

UG

AL

HV

AC

FA

NS

Pro

duct D

ata

Shop

Dra

win

gs

2

33

71

3

DIF

FU

SE

RS

, R

EG

IST

ER

S, A

ND

GR

ILL

ES

Pro

duct D

ata

Sam

ple

s

MA

ST

ER

WO

RK

S S

UB

MIT

TA

L L

OG

PR

OJE

CT

: D

HH

Ba

thro

om

Ren

ovation

OW

NE

R:

Mic

hig

an T

echnolo

gic

al U

niv

ers

ity

PR

OJE

CT

NO

: 7

05

8-2

1-0

02

0

CO

NT

RA

CT

OR

:

DA

TE

R

EC

’D.

SPECIFICATION

SECTION NO.

SU

BM

ITT

AL

IT

EM

CO

NT

RA

CT

OR

S

UB

CO

NT

RA

CT

OR

NO. RECEIVED

OT

HE

R R

EV

IEW

ER

A

CT

ION

DATE

RETURNED

CO

PIE

S T

O

DA

TE

S

EN

T

F

IRM

NO. COPIES

DU

E

DA

TE

DA

TE

R

EC

’D.

APPROVED

APPROVED

AS NOTED

REVISE &

RESUBMIT

NOT APP’D.

CONTRACTOR

OWNER

FIELD

FILE

2

60

51

9

LO

W-V

OL

TA

GE

EL

EC

TR

ICA

L P

OW

ER

C

ON

DU

CT

OR

S A

ND

CA

BL

ES

Pro

duct D

ata

2

60

52

9

HA

NG

ER

S A

ND

SU

PP

OR

TS

FO

R

EL

EC

TR

ICA

L S

YS

TE

MS

Pro

duct D

ata

Shop

Dra

win

gs

2

60

53

3

RA

CE

WA

Y A

ND

BO

XE

S F

OR

E

LE

CT

RIC

AL

SY

ST

EM

S

Pro

duct D

ata

Shop

Dra

win

gs

2

60

54

4

SL

EE

VE

S A

ND

SL

EE

VE

SE

AL

S F

OR

E

LE

CT

RIC

AL

RA

CE

WA

YS

AN

D C

AB

LIN

G

Pro

duct D

ata

2

60

55

3

IDE

NT

IFIC

AT

ION

FO

R E

LE

CT

RIC

AL

S

YS

TE

MS

Pro

duct D

ata

Sam

ple

s

2

60

92

3

LIG

HT

ING

CO

NT

RO

L D

EV

ICE

S

Pro

duct D

ata

Shop

Dra

win

gs

2

62

72

6

WIR

ING

DE

VIC

ES

Pro

duct D

ata

Shop

Dra

win

gs

2

62

81

3

FU

SE

S

Pro

duct D

ata

2

62

81

6

EN

CL

OS

ED

SW

ITC

HE

S A

ND

CIR

CU

IT

BR

EA

KE

RS

Pro

duct D

ata

Shop

Dra

win

gs

2

62

91

3

EN

CL

OS

ED

CO

NT

RO

LL

ER

S

Pro

duct D

ata

Shop

Dra

win

gs

2

65

11

9

LE

D IN

TE

RIO

R L

IGH

TIN

G

Pro

duct D

ata

MA

ST

ER

WO

RK

S S

UB

MIT

TA

L L

OG

PR

OJE

CT

: D

HH

Ba

thro

om

Ren

ovation

OW

NE

R:

Mic

hig

an T

echnolo

gic

al U

niv

ers

ity

PR

OJE

CT

NO

: 7

05

8-2

1-0

02

0

CO

NT

RA

CT

OR

:

DA

TE

R

EC

’D.

SPECIFICATION

SECTION NO.

SU

BM

ITT

AL

IT

EM

CO

NT

RA

CT

OR

S

UB

CO

NT

RA

CT

OR

NO. RECEIVED

OT

HE

R R

EV

IEW

ER

A

CT

ION

DATE

RETURNED

CO

PIE

S T

O

DA

TE

S

EN

T

F

IRM

NO. COPIES

DU

E

DA

TE

DA

TE

R

EC

’D.

APPROVED

APPROVED

AS NOTED

REVISE &

RESUBMIT

NOT APP’D.

CONTRACTOR

OWNER

FIELD

FILE

Shop

Dra

win

gs

3

29

20

0

TU

RF

AN

D G

RA

SS

ES

Pro

duct D

ata

31-18-01/DHH Bathroom Renovations 01 40 00 - 1 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS March 18, 2021

SECTION 01 40 00 - QUALITY REQUIREMENTS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for quality assurance and quality control.

B. Testing and inspection services are required to verify compliance with requirements specified or indicated. These services do not relieve Contractor of responsibility for compliance with the Contract Document requirements.

1. Specified tests, inspections, and related actions do not limit Contractor's other quality-assurance and quality-control procedures that facilitate compliance with the Contract Document requirements.

2. Requirements for Contractor to provide quality-assurance and quality-control services required by Architect, Owner, or authorities having jurisdiction are not limited by provisions of this Section.

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. Experienced: When used with an entity or individual, "experienced" unless otherwise further described means having successfully completed a minimum of five previous projects similar in nature, size, and extent to this Project; being familiar with special requirements indicated; and having complied with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Field Quality-Control Tests: Tests and inspections that are performed on-site for installation of the Work and for completed Work.

C. Installer/Applicator/Erector: Contractor or another entity engaged by Contractor as an employee, Subcontractor, or Sub-subcontractor, to perform a particular construction operation, including installation, erection, application, assembly, and similar operations.

1. Use of trade-specific terminology in referring to a trade or entity does not require that certain construction activities be performed by accredited or unionized individuals, or that requirements specified apply exclusively to specific trade(s).

D. Mockups: Full-size physical assemblies that are constructed on-site either as freestanding temporary built elements or as part of permanent construction. Mockups are constructed to verify selections made under Sample submittals; to demonstrate aesthetic effects and qualities of materials and execution; to review coordination, testing, or operation; to show interface between dissimilar materials; and to demonstrate compliance with specified installation tolerances. Mockups are not Samples. Unless otherwise indicated, approved mockups establish the standard by which the Work will be judged.

1. Laboratory Mockups: Full-size physical assemblies constructed and tested at testing facility to verify performance characteristics.

2. Integrated Exterior Mockups: Mockups of the exterior envelope constructed on-site as freestanding temporary built elements or as part of permanent construction, consisting of multiple products, assemblies, and subassemblies.


3. Room Mockups: Mockups of typical interior spaces complete with wall, floor, and ceiling finishes; doors; windows; millwork; casework; specialties; furnishings and equipment; and lighting.

E. Preconstruction Testing: Tests and inspections performed specifically for Project before products and materials are incorporated into the Work, to verify performance or compliance with specified criteria.

F. Product Tests: Tests and inspections that are performed by a nationally recognized testing laboratory (NRTL) according to 29 CFR 1910.7, by a testing agency accredited according to NIST's National Voluntary Laboratory Accreditation Program (NVLAP), or by a testing agency qualified to conduct product testing and acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, to establish product performance and compliance with specified requirements.

G. Source Quality-Control Tests: Tests and inspections that are performed at the source; for example, plant, mill, factory, or shop.

H. Testing Agency: An entity engaged to perform specific tests, inspections, or both. Testing laboratory shall mean the same as testing agency.

I. Quality-Assurance Services: Activities, actions, and procedures performed before and during execution of the Work to guard against defects and deficiencies and substantiate that proposed construction will comply with requirements.

J. Quality-Control Services: Tests, inspections, procedures, and related actions during and after execution of the Work to evaluate that actual products incorporated into the Work and completed construction comply with requirements. Contractor's quality-control services do not include contract administration activities performed by Architect.

1.3 DELEGATED-DESIGN SERVICES

A. Performance and Design Criteria: Where professional design services or certifications by a design professional are specifically required of Contractor by the Contract Documents, provide products and systems complying with specific performance and design criteria indicated.

1.4 CONFLICTING REQUIREMENTS

A. Conflicting Standards and Other Requirements: If compliance with two or more standards or requirements are specified and the standards or requirements establish different or conflicting requirements for minimum quantities or quality levels, comply with the most stringent requirement. Refer conflicting requirements that are different, but apparently equal, to Architect for direction before proceeding.

B. Minimum Quantity or Quality Levels: The quantity or quality level shown or specified shall be the minimum provided or performed. The actual installation may comply exactly with the minimum quantity or quality specified, or it may exceed the minimum within reasonable limits. To comply with these requirements, indicated numeric values are minimum or maximum, as appropriate, for the context of requirements. Refer uncertainties to Architect for a decision before proceeding.



A. Delegated-Design Services Submittal: In addition to Shop Drawings, Product Data, and other required submittals, submit a statement signed and sealed by the responsible design professional, for each product and system specifically assigned to Contractor to be designed or certified by a design professional, indicating that the products and systems are in compliance with performance and design criteria indicated. Include list of codes, loads, and other factors used in performing these services.


A. Contractor's Statement of Responsibility: When required by authorities having jurisdiction, submit copy of written statement of responsibility submitted to authorities having jurisdiction before starting work on the following systems:

1. Seismic-force-resisting system, designated seismic system, or component listed in the Statement of Special Inspections.

2. Main wind-force-resisting system or a wind-resisting component listed in the Statement of Special Inspections.

B. Testing Agency Qualifications: For testing agencies specified in "Quality Assurance" Article to demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include proof of qualifications in the form of a recent report on the inspection of the testing agency by a recognized authority.

C. Permits, Licenses, and Certificates: For Owner's record, submit copies of permits, licenses, certifications, inspection reports, releases, jurisdictional settlements, notices, receipts for fee payments, judgments, correspondence, records, and similar documents established for compliance with standards and regulations bearing on performance of the Work.

1.7 REPORTS AND DOCUMENTS

A. Test and Inspection Reports: Prepare and submit certified written reports specified in other Sections. Include the following:

1. Date of issue. 2. Project title and number. 3. Name, address, telephone number, and email address of testing agency. 4. Dates and locations of samples and tests or inspections. 5. Names of individuals making tests and inspections. 6. Description of the Work and test and inspection method. 7. Identification of product and Specification Section. 8. Complete test or inspection data. 9. Test and inspection results and an interpretation of test results. 10. Record of temperature and weather conditions at time of sample taking and testing and

inspection. 11. Comments or professional opinion on whether tested or inspected Work complies with

the Contract Document requirements. 12. Name and signature of laboratory inspector. 13. Recommendations on retesting and reinspecting.

B. Manufacturer's Technical Representative's Field Reports: Prepare written information documenting manufacturer's technical representative's tests and inspections specified in other Sections. Include the following:


1. Statement on condition of substrates and their acceptability for installation of product. 2. Statement that products at Project site comply with requirements. 3. Summary of installation procedures being followed, whether they comply with

requirements and, if not, what corrective action was taken. 4. Results of operational and other tests and a statement of whether observed performance

complies with requirements. 5. Other required items indicated in individual Specification Sections.

C. Factory-Authorized Service Representative's Reports: Prepare written information documenting manufacturer's factory-authorized service representative's tests and inspections specified in other Sections. Include the following:

1. Statement that equipment complies with requirements. 2. Results of operational and other tests and a statement of whether observed performance

complies with requirements. 3. Other required items indicated in individual Specification Sections.

1.8 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. General: Qualifications paragraphs in this article establish the minimum qualification levels required; individual Specification Sections specify additional requirements.

B. Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing products or systems similar to those indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance, as well as sufficient production capacity to produce required units. As applicable, procure products from manufacturers able to meet qualification requirements, warranty requirements, and technical or factory-authorized service representative requirements.

C. Fabricator Qualifications: A firm experienced in producing products similar to those indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance, as well as sufficient production capacity to produce required units.

D. Installer Qualifications: A firm or individual experienced in installing, erecting, applying, or assembling work similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project, whose work has resulted in construction with a record of successful in-service performance.

E. Professional Engineer Qualifications: A professional engineer who is legally qualified to practice in jurisdiction where Project is located and who is experienced in providing engineering services of the kind indicated. Engineering services are defined as those performed for installations of the system, assembly, or product that are similar in material, design, and extent to those indicated for this Project.

F. Specialists: Certain Specification Sections require that specific construction activities shall be performed by entities who are recognized experts in those operations. Specialists shall satisfy qualification requirements indicated and shall be engaged for the activities indicated.

1. Requirements of authorities having jurisdiction shall supersede requirements for specialists.

G. Testing Agency Qualifications: An NRTL, an NVLAP, or an independent agency with the experience and capability to conduct testing and inspection indicated, as documented according to ASTM E 329; and with additional qualifications specified in individual Sections; and, where required by authorities having jurisdiction, that is acceptable to authorities.


H. Manufacturer's Technical Representative Qualifications: An authorized representative of manufacturer who is trained and approved by manufacturer to observe and inspect installation of manufacturer's products that are similar in material, design, and extent to those indicated for this Project.

I. Factory-Authorized Service Representative Qualifications: An authorized representative of manufacturer who is trained and approved by manufacturer to inspect installation of manufacturer's products that are similar in material, design, and extent to those indicated for this Project.

J. Preconstruction Testing: Where testing agency is indicated to perform preconstruction testing for compliance with specified requirements for performance and test methods, comply with the following:

1. Contractor responsibilities include the following:

a. Provide test specimens representative of proposed products and construction. b. Submit specimens in a timely manner with sufficient time for testing and analyzing

results to prevent delaying the Work. c. Build laboratory mockups at testing facility using personnel, products, and methods

of construction indicated for the completed Work. d. When testing is complete, remove test specimens and test assemblies; do not

reuse products on Project.

2. Testing Agency Responsibilities: Submit a certified written report of each test, inspection, and similar quality-assurance service to Architect, with copy to Contractor. Interpret tests and inspections and state in each report whether tested and inspected work complies with or deviates from the Contract Documents.

K. Mockups: Before installing portions of the Work requiring mockups, build mockups for each form of construction and finish required to comply with the following requirements, using materials indicated for the completed Work:

1. Build mockups of size indicated. 2. Build mockups in location indicated or, if not indicated, as directed by Architect. 3. Notify Architect seven days in advance of dates and times when mockups will be

constructed. 4. Employ supervisory personnel who will oversee mockup construction. Employ workers

that will be employed to perform same tasks during the construction at Project. 5. Demonstrate the proposed range of aesthetic effects and workmanship. 6. Obtain Architect's approval of mockups before starting corresponding work, fabrication, or

construction.

a. Allow seven days for initial review and each re-review of each mockup.

7. Maintain mockups during construction in an undisturbed condition as a standard for judging the completed Work.

8. Demolish and remove mockups when directed unless otherwise indicated.

L. Laboratory Mockups: Comply with requirements of preconstruction testing and those specified in individual Specification Sections.


1.9 QUALITY CONTROL

A. Owner Responsibilities: Where quality-control services are indicated as Owner's responsibility, Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to perform these services.

1. Owner will furnish Contractor with names, addresses, and telephone numbers of testing agencies engaged and a description of types of testing and inspection they are engaged to perform.

2. Costs for retesting and reinspecting construction that replaces or is necessitated by work that failed to comply with the Contract Documents will be charged to Contractor, and the Contract Sum will be adjusted by Change Order.

B. Contractor Responsibilities: Tests and inspections not explicitly assigned to Owner are Contractor's responsibility. Perform additional quality-control activities, whether specified or not, to verify and document that the Work complies with requirements.

1. Engage a qualified testing agency to perform quality-control services.

a. Contractor shall not employ same entity engaged by Owner, unless agreed to in writing by Owner.

2. Notify testing agencies at least 24 hours in advance of time when Work that requires testing or inspection will be performed.

3. Where quality-control services are indicated as Contractor's responsibility, submit a certified written report, in duplicate, of each quality-control service.

4. Testing and inspection requested by Contractor and not required by the Contract Documents are Contractor's responsibility.

5. Submit additional copies of each written report directly to authorities having jurisdiction, when they so direct.

C. Retesting/Reinspecting: Regardless of whether original tests or inspections were Contractor's responsibility, provide quality-control services, including retesting and reinspecting, for construction that replaced Work that failed to comply with the Contract Documents.

D. Testing Agency Responsibilities: Cooperate with Architect and Contractor in performance of duties. Provide qualified personnel to perform required tests and inspections.

1. Notify Architect and Contractor promptly of irregularities or deficiencies observed in the Work during performance of its services.

2. Determine the locations from which test samples will be taken and in which in-situ tests are conducted.

3. Conduct and interpret tests and inspections and state in each report whether tested and inspected work complies with or deviates from requirements.

4. Submit a certified written report, in duplicate, of each test, inspection, and similar quality-control service through Contractor.

5. Do not release, revoke, alter, or increase the Contract Document requirements or approve or accept any portion of the Work.

6. Do not perform duties of Contractor.

E. Manufacturer's Field Services: Where indicated, engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect field-assembled components and equipment installation, including service connections. Report results in writing as specified in Section 01 33 00 "Submittal Procedures."


F. Manufacturer's Technical Services: Where indicated, engage a manufacturer's technical representative to observe and inspect the Work. Manufacturer's technical representative's services include participation in preinstallation conferences, examination of substrates and conditions, verification of materials, observation of Installer activities, inspection of completed portions of the Work, and submittal of written reports.

G. Associated Contractor Services: Cooperate with agencies and representatives performing required tests, inspections, and similar quality-control services, and provide reasonable auxiliary services as requested. Notify agency sufficiently in advance of operations to permit assignment of personnel. Provide the following:

1. Access to the Work. 2. Incidental labor and facilities necessary to facilitate tests and inspections. 3. Adequate quantities of representative samples of materials that require testing and

inspection. Assist agency in obtaining samples. 4. Facilities for storage and field curing of test samples. 5. Preliminary design mix proposed for use for material mixes that require control by testing

agency. 6. Security and protection for samples and for testing and inspection equipment at Project

site.

H. Coordination: Coordinate sequence of activities to accommodate required quality-assurance and quality-control services with a minimum of delay and to avoid necessity of removing and replacing construction to accommodate testing and inspection.

1. Schedule times for tests, inspections, obtaining samples, and similar activities.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 TEST AND INSPECTION LOG

A. Test and Inspection Log: Prepare a record of tests and inspections. Include the following:

1. Date test or inspection was conducted. 2. Description of the Work tested or inspected. 3. Date test or inspection results were transmitted to Architect. 4. Identification of testing agency or special inspector conducting test or inspection.

B. Maintain log at Project site. Post changes and revisions as they occur. Provide access to test and inspection log for Architect's reference during normal working hours.

1. Submit log at Project closeout as part of Project Record Documents.

3.2 REPAIR AND PROTECTION

A. General: On completion of testing, inspection, sample taking, and similar services, repair damaged construction and restore substrates and finishes.


1. Provide materials and comply with installation requirements specified in other Specification Sections or matching existing substrates and finishes. Restore patched areas and extend restoration into adjoining areas with durable seams that are as invisible as possible. Comply with the Contract Document requirements for cutting and patching in Section 01 73 00 "Execution."

B. Protect construction exposed by or for quality-control service activities.

C. Repair and protection are Contractor's responsibility, regardless of the assignment of responsibility for quality-control services.


01 50 00 TEMPORARY FACILITIES


01 50 00 - 1 March 18, 2021

TEMPORARY FACILITIES


A. Section includes requirements for temporary facilities, support facilities, storage facilities, and security and protection facilities.

B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 011000 Summary for work restrictions and limitations on utility interruptions. 2. Comply with requirements of Section 01 74 19 - Waste Management, remove from site

all materials not to be reused on site. C. For this project the Contractor may use the existing building utilities as necessary at no charge.

Contractor is responsible for making any temporary connections that may be necessary. D. Storage on site and on Michigan Tech’s campus is extremely limited. Any storage of material

for the project is the Contractor’s responsibility, and any cost for storage should be included in the base bid amount.

1.2 USE CHARGES

A. General: Installation and removal of and use charges for temporary facilities shall be included in the Total Contract Amount. Allow other entities to use temporary services and facilities without cost, including, but not limited to, Michigan Tech, testing agencies, and authorities having jurisdiction.


A. If storage facilities are temporary facilities, the following must be provided and the facilities must adhere to the remainder of this specification, as necessary so stored materials remain free from damage. 1. Site Plan: Coordinate with Michigan Tech regarding location temporary facilities,

construction trailers, utility hookups, staging areas, and parking areas for construction personnel.

2. Fire-Safety Program: Show compliance with requirements of NFPA 241 and authorities having jurisdiction. Indicate Contractor personnel responsible for management of fire prevention program.

B. If storage facilities are rented or other facilities, the facilities must adhere to the remainder of this specification, as necessary so stored materials remain free from damage.

1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Electric Service: Comply with NECA, NEMA, and UL standards and regulations for

temporary electric service. Install service to comply with NFPA 70. B. Tests and Inspections: Arrange for authorities having jurisdiction to test and inspect

each temporary utility before use. Obtain required certifications and permits.

1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Temporary Use of Permanent Facilities: Engage Installer of each permanent service to

assume responsibility for operation, maintenance, and protection of each permanent service during its use as a construction facility before Michigan Tech's acceptance, regardless of previously assigned responsibilities.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.1 EQUIPMENT

A. Fire Extinguishers: Portable, UL rated; with class and extinguishing agent as required by locations and classes of fire exposures.

B. HVAC Equipment: Provide vented, self-contained, liquid-propane-gas or fuel-oil heaters with individual space thermostatic control.



01 50 00 - 2 March 18, 2021


1. Use of gasoline-burning space heaters, open-flame heaters, or salamander-type heating units is prohibited.

2. Heating Units: Listed and labeled for type of fuel being consumed, by a qualified testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended location and application.

PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL

A. Locate facilities where they will serve Project adequately and result in minimum interference with performance of the Work. Relocate and modify facilities as required by progress of the Work.

B. Provide each facility ready for use when needed to avoid delay. Do not remove until facilities are no longer needed or are replaced by authorized use of completed permanent facilities.

C. Traffic Controls: Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. 1. Protect existing site improvements to remain including curbs, pavement, and utilities.

D. Maintain access for fire-fighting equipment and access to fire hydrants. E. Lifts and Hoists: Provide facilities necessary for hoisting materials and personnel.

1. Truck cranes and similar devices used for hoisting materials are considered "tools and equipment" and not temporary facilities.

3.2 TEMPORARY UTILITY INSTALLATION A. Water Service: If required, install water service and distribution piping in sizes and pressures

adequate for construction. B. Sanitary Facilities: Provide temporary toilets, wash facilities, and drinking water for use

of construction personnel. Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction for type, number, location, operation, and maintenance of fixtures and facilities.

C. Heating: Provide temporary heating required by construction activities for curing or drying of completed installations or for protecting installed construction from adverse effects of low temperatures or high humidity. Select equipment that will not have a harmful effect on completed installations or elements being installed.

D. Electric Power Service: MTU electric power can be used for this project.

3.3 VEHICULAR ACCESS AND PARKING

A. Comply with Michigan Tech regulations relating to use of streets and sidewalks, access to emergency facilities, and access for emergency vehicles.

B. Coordinate access and haul routes with governing authorities and Michigan Tech.

C. Provide and maintain access to fire hydrants, free of obstructions.

D. Provide means of removing mud from vehicle wheels before entering streets.

E. Parking and Storage Trailers: There will be room provided in Parking Lots 7 and/or 8 for Contractor and/or Subcontractor parking and storage of items. Parking for Contractor and Subcontractor vehicles will be available on site, but parking is limited and the Owner reserves the right to restrict the number of vehicles parking on site. Temporary parking permits will need to be obtained from Michigan Tech (there is no charge for these permits) and displayed when the vehicle is on site.

3.4 SECURITY A. Provide security and facilities to protect Work, existing facilities, and Michigan Tech's

operations from unauthorized entry, vandalism, or theft. B. Protection of Existing Facilities: Protect existing vegetation, equipment, structures, utilities,



01 50 00 - 3 March 18, 2021


and other improvements at Project site and on adjacent properties, except those indicated to be removed or altered. Repair damage to existing facilities.

C. Security Enclosure and Lockup: Install temporary enclosure around partially completed areas of construction. Provide lockable entrances to prevent unauthorized entrance, vandalism, theft, and similar violations of security. Lock entrances at end of each work day.

D. Temporary Fire Protection: Install and maintain temporary fire-protection facilities of types needed to protect against reasonably predictable and controllable fire losses. Comply with NFPA 241; manage fire prevention program. 1. Prohibit smoking in construction areas. 2. Supervise welding operations, combustion-type temporary heating units, and

similar sources of fire ignition according to requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.

3. Develop and supervise an overall fire-prevention and -protection program for personnel at Project site. Review needs with local fire department and establish procedures to be followed. Instruct personnel in methods and procedures. Post warnings and information.

3.5 MOISTURE AND MOLD CONTROL

A. Exposed Construction Phase: Before installation of weather barriers, when materials are subject to wetting and exposure and to airborne mold spores, protect materials from water damage and keep porous and organic materials from coming into prolonged contact with concrete.

B. Partially Enclosed Construction Phase: After installation of weather barriers but before full enclosure and conditioning of building, when installed materials are still subject to infiltration of moisture and ambient mold spores, protect as follows: 1. Do not load or install drywall or other porous materials or components, or items with

high organic content, into partially enclosed building. 2. Keep interior spaces reasonably clean and protected from water damage. 3. Discard or replace water-damaged and wet material. 4. Discard, replace, or clean stored or installed material that begins to grow mold. 5. Perform work in a sequence that allows any wet materials adequate time to dry

before enclosing the material in drywall or other interior finishes. C. Controlled Construction Phase of Construction: After completing and sealing of the

building enclosure but prior to the full operation of permanent HVAC systems, maintain as follows: 1. Control moisture and humidity inside building by maintaining effective dry-in conditions. 2. Remove materials that cannot be completely restored to their manufactured

moisture level within 48 hours. D. Control moisture so stored materials, furniture, and appliances are not damaged in

(temporary) storage facilities during time of storage. Contractor will assume full replacement costs without reimbursement.

3.6 BARRIERS

A. Provide barriers to prevent unauthorized entry to construction areas, to prevent access to areas that could be hazardous to workers or the public, to allow for Michigan Tech's use of site and to protect existing facilities and adjacent properties from damage from construction operations and demolition.

B. Provide barricades and covered walkways required by governing authorities for public rights-of-way and for public access to existing building.

C. Protect non-owned vehicular traffic, stored materials, site, and structures from damage.

3.7 OPERATION, TERMINATION, AND REMOVAL A. Supervision: Enforce strict discipline in use of temporary facilities. To minimize waste and

abuse, limit availability of temporary facilities to essential and intended uses.



01 50 00 - 4 March 18, 2021


B. Maintenance: Maintain facilities in good operating condition until removal. 1. Maintain operation of temporary enclosures, heating, cooling, humidity control,

ventilation, and similar facilities on a 24-hour basis where required to achieve indicated results and to avoid possibility of damage.

C. Temporary Facility Changeover: Do not change over from using temporary security and protection facilities to permanent facilities until Substantial Completion.

D. Termination and Removal: Remove each temporary facility when need for its service has ended, when it has been replaced by authorized use of a permanent facility, or no later than Substantial Completion. Complete or, if necessary, restore permanent construction that may have been delayed because of interference with temporary facility. Repair damaged Work, clean exposed surfaces, and replace construction that cannot be satisfactorily repaired. 1. Materials and facilities that constitute temporary facilities are property of

Contractor. Michigan Tech reserves right to take possession of Project identification signs.

2. At Substantial Completion, repair, renovate, and clean permanent facilities used during construction period. Comply with final cleaning requirements specified in Section 01 70 00 Execution and Closeout Requirements.


01 60 00 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS


01 60 00 - 1 March 18, 2021

PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for selection of products for use in Project;

product delivery, storage, and handling; manufacturers' standard warranties on products; special warranties; and comparable products.

B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 01 25 00 Substitution Procedures for requests for substitutions.

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. Products: Items obtained for incorporating into the Work, whether purchased for Project or taken

from previously purchased stock. The term "product" includes the terms "material," "equipment," "system," and terms of similar intent. 1. Named Products: Items identified by manufacturer's product name, including make or model

number or other designation shown or listed in manufacturer's published product literature that is current as of date of the Contract Documents.

2. New Products: Items that have not previously been incorporated into another project or facility. Products salvaged or recycled from other projects are not considered new products.

3. Comparable Product: Product that is demonstrated and approved through submittal process to have the indicated qualities related to type, function, dimension, in-service performance, physical properties, appearance, and other characteristics that equal or exceed those of specified product.

B. Basis-of-Design Product Specification: A specification in which a specific manufacturer's product is named and accompanied by the words "basis-of-design product," including make or model number or other designation, to establish the significant qualities related to type, function, dimension, in-service performance, physical properties, appearance, and other characteristics for purposes of evaluating comparable products of additional manufacturers named in the specification.


A. Comparable Product Requests: Submit request for consideration of each comparable product. Identify

product or fabrication or installation method to be replaced. Include Specification Section number and title and Drawing numbers and titles. 1. Michigan Tech's Action: If necessary, Michigan Tech will request additional information or

documentation for evaluation within one week of receipt of a comparable product request. Michigan Tech will notify Contractor of approval or rejection of proposed comparable product request within 10 days of receipt of request, or seven days of receipt of additional information or documentation, whichever is later. a. Use product specified if Michigan Tech does not issue a decision on use of a comparable

product request within time allocated.


A. Compatibility of Options: If Contractor is given option of selecting between two or more products

for use on Project, select product compatible with products previously selected, even if previously selected products were also options.

1.5 PRODUCTS AND PROJECT PHASING

A. After initial product selection and approval, substitutions and changes to the product selection will not be permitted. The intent is to standardize the products across all campus buildings.



01 60 00 - 2 March 18, 2021


1.6 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Deliver, store, and handle products using means and methods that will prevent damage,

deterioration, and loss, including theft and vandalism. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Delivery and Handling:

1. Schedule delivery to minimize long-term storage at Project site and to prevent overcrowding of construction spaces.

2. Coordinate delivery with installation time to ensure minimum holding time for items that are flammable, hazardous, easily damaged, or sensitive to deterioration, theft, and other losses.

3. Deliver products to Project site in an undamaged condition in manufacturer's original sealed container or other packaging system, complete with labels and instructions for handling, storing, unpacking, protecting, and installing.

4. Inspect products on delivery to determine compliance with the Contract Documents and to determine that products are undamaged and properly protected.

C. Storage:

1. Store products to allow for inspection and measurement of quantity or counting of units. 2. Store materials in a manner that will not endanger Project structure. 3. Store products that are subject to damage by the elements, under cover in a weathertight

enclosure above ground, with ventilation adequate to prevent condensation. 4. Protect foam plastic from exposure to sunlight, except to extent necessary for period of

installation and concealment. 5. Comply with product manufacturer's written instructions for temperature, humidity, ventilation,

and weather-protection requirements for storage. 6. Protect stored products from damage and liquids from freezing.

1.7 PRODUCT WARRANTIES

A. Warranties specified in other Sections shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other warranties required by the Contract Documents. Manufacturer's disclaimers and limitations on product warranties do not relieve Contractor of obligations under requirements of the Contract Documents.

1. Manufacturer's Warranty: Written warranty furnished by individual manufacturer for a particular product and specifically endorsed by manufacturer to Owner.

2. Special Warranty: Written warranty required by the Contract Documents to provide specific rights for Owner.

B. Special Warranties: Prepare a written document that contains appropriate terms and identification,

ready for execution. 1. Manufacturer's Standard Form: Modified to include Project-specific information and properly

executed. 2. Specified Form: When specified forms are included with the Specifications, prepare a written

document using indicated form properly executed. 3. Refer to other Sections for specific content requirements and particular requirements for

submitting special warranties.

C. Submittal Time: Comply with requirements in Section 017000 Closeout Procedures.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PRODUCT SELECTION PROCEDURES

A. General Product Requirements: Provide products that comply with the Contract Documents, are

undamaged and, unless otherwise indicated, are new at time of installation.

1. Provide products complete with accessories, trim, finish, fasteners, and other items needed



01 60 00 - 3 March 18, 2021


for a complete installation and indicated use and effect. 2. Standard Products: If available, and unless custom products or nonstandard options are specified,

provide standard products of types that have been produced and used successfully in similar situations on other projects.

3. Owner reserves the right to limit selection to products with warranties not in conflict with requirements of the Contract Documents.

4. Where products are accompanied by the term "as selected," Michigan Tech will make selection. 5. Descriptive, performance, and reference standard requirements in the Specifications establish

salient characteristics of products.

B. Product Selection Procedures:

1. Product: Where Specifications name a single manufacturer and product, provide the named product that complies with requirements. Comparable products or substitutions for Contractor's convenience will not be considered.

2. Manufacturer/Source: Where Specifications name a single manufacturer or source, provide a product by the named manufacturer or source that complies with requirements. Comparable products or substitutions for Contractor's convenience will not be considered.

3. Products:

a. Restricted List: Where Specifications include a list of names of both manufacturers and

products, provide one of the products listed that complies with requirements. Comparable products or substitutions for Contractor's convenience will not be considered.

b. Non-restricted List: Where Specifications include a list of names of both available manufacturers and products, provide one of the products listed, or an unnamed product, that complies with requirements. Comply with requirements in "Comparable Products" Article for consideration of an unnamed product.

4. Manufacturers:

a. Restricted List: Where Specifications include a list of manufacturers' names, provide a product by one of the manufacturers listed that complies with requirements. Comparable products or substitutions for Contractor's convenience will not be considered.

b. Non-restricted List: Where Specifications include a list of available manufacturers, provide a product by one of the manufacturers listed, or a product by an unnamed manufacturer, that complies with requirements. Comply with requirements in "Comparable Products" Article for consideration of an unnamed manufacturer's product.

5. Basis-of-Design Product: Where Specifications name a product, or refer to a product indicated

on Drawings, and include a list of manufacturers, provide the specified or indicated product or a comparable product by one of the other named manufacturers. Drawings and Specifications indicate sizes, profiles, dimensions, and other characteristics that are based on the product named. Comply with requirements in "Comparable Products" Article for consideration of an unnamed product by one of the other named manufacturers.

C. Visual Matching Specification: Where Specifications require "match Architect's sample", provide a

product that complies with requirements and matches Architect's sample. Architect's decision will be final on whether a proposed product matches.

1. If no product available within specified category matches and complies with other specified

requirements, comply with requirements in Section 01 25 00 "Substitution Procedures" for proposal of product.

D. Visual Selection Specification: Where Specifications include the phrase "as selected by Architect from

manufacturer's full range" or similar phrase, select a product that complies with requirements. Architect will select color, gloss, pattern, density, or texture from manufacturer's product line that includes both standard and premium items.



01 60 00 - 4 March 18, 2021


2.2 COMPARABLE PRODUCTS

A. Conditions for Consideration: Architect will consider Contractor's request for comparable product when the following conditions are satisfied. If the following conditions are not satisfied, Architect may return requests without action, except to record noncompliance with these requirements:

1. Evidence that the proposed product does not require revisions to the Contract Documents

that it is consistent with the Contract Documents and will produce the indicated results, and that it is compatible with other portions of the Work.

2. Detailed comparison of significant qualities of proposed product with those named in the Specifications. Significant qualities include attributes such as performance, weight, size, durability, visual effect, and specific features and requirements indicated.

3. Evidence that proposed product provides specified warranty. 4. List of similar installations for completed projects with project names and addresses and names

and addresses of architects and owners, if requested. 5. Samples, if requested.


01 70 00 EXECUTION AND CLOSEOUT REQUIREMENTS


01 70 00 - 1 March 18, 2021

EXECUTION AND CLOSEOUT REQUIRMENTS

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Section 01 00 08 – Substantial Completion Notice

B. Section 01 70 10 – Final Cleaning: for final cleaning of facility

C. Section 01 74 19 – Construction Waste Management and Disposal: Additional procedures for trash/waste removal, recycling, salvage, and reuse.

1.02 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate space requirements, supports, and installation of mechanical and electrical work that are indicated diagrammatically on Drawings. Follow routing shown for pipes, ducts, and conduit, as closely as practicable; place runs parallel with lines of building. Utilize spaces efficiently to maximize accessibility for other installations, for maintenance, and for repairs.

B. In finished areas except as otherwise indicated, conceal pipes, ducts, and wiring within the construction. Coordinate locations of fixtures and outlets with finish elements.

C. Coordinate completion and clean-up of work of separate sections.

D. After Owner occupancy of premises, coordinate access to site for correction of defective work and work not in accordance with Contract Documents, to minimize disruption of Owner's activities.

1.03 SUBMITTAL OF PROJECT WARRANTIES

A. Submit written warranties on request of Michigan Tech Facilities Management for designated portions of the Work where commencement of warranties other than date of Substantial Completion is indicated, or when delay in submittal of warranties might limit Michigan Tech's rights under warranty.

B. Organize warranty documents into an orderly sequence based on the table of contents of the Project Manual.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 PATCHING MATERIALS

A. New Materials: As specified in product sections; match existing products and work for patching and extending work.

B. Type and Quality of Existing Products: Determine by inspecting and testing products where necessary, referring to existing work as a standard.

C. Product Substitution: For any proposed change in materials, submit request for substitution described in Section 01 25 00 and Section 01 60 00.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Verify that existing site conditions and substrate surfaces are acceptable for subsequent work. Start of work means acceptance of existing conditions.



01 70 00 - 2 March 18, 2021


B. Verify that existing substrate is capable of structural support or attachment of new work being applied or attached.

C. Examine and verify specific conditions described in individual specification sections.

D. Take field measurements before confirming product orders or beginning fabrication, to minimize waste due to over-ordering or misfabrication.

E. Verify that utility services are available, of the correct characteristics, and in the correct locations.

F. Prior to Cutting: Examine existing conditions prior to commencing work, including elements subject to damage or movement during cutting and patching. After uncovering existing work, assess conditions affecting performance of work. Beginning of cutting or patching means acceptance of existing conditions.

3.02 PREPARATION

A. Clean substrate surfaces prior to applying next material or substance.

B. Seal cracks or openings of substrate prior to applying next material or substance.

C. Apply manufacturer required or recommended substrate primer, sealer, or conditioner prior to applying any new material or substance in contact or bond.

3.03 PRE-INSTALLATION MEETINGS

A. When required in individual specification sections, convene a pre-installation meeting at the site prior to commencing work of the section.

B. Require attendance of parties directly affecting, or affected by, work of the specific section.

C. Notify Michigan Tech four days in advance of meeting date.

D. Prepare agenda and preside at meeting:

1. Review conditions of examination, preparation and installation procedures.

2. Review coordination with related work.

E. Record minutes and distribute copies within two days after meeting to participants, with two copies to Architect, Owner, participants, and those affected by decisions made.

3.04 GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS

A. Install products as specified in individual sections, in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and recommendations, and so as to avoid waste due to necessity for replacement.

B. Make vertical elements plumb and horizontal elements level, unless otherwise indicated.

C. Install equipment and fittings plumb and level, neatly aligned with adjacent vertical and horizontal lines, unless otherwise indicated.

D. Make consistent texture on surfaces, with seamless transitions, unless otherwise indicated.

E. Make neat transitions between different surfaces, maintaining texture and appearance. Provide proper sealant at all joints as necessary.

3.05 ALTERATIONS

A. Drawings showing existing construction and utilities are based on casual field observation and existing record documents only.

1. Verify that construction and utility arrangements are as shown.



01 70 00 - 3 March 18, 2021


2. Report discrepancies to Architect before disturbing existing installation.

3. Beginning of alterations work constitutes acceptance of existing conditions.

B. Remove existing work as indicated and as required to accomplish new work.

1. Remove items indicated on drawings.

2. Relocate items indicated on drawings.

3. Where new surface finishes are to be applied to existing work, perform removals, patch, and prepare existing surfaces as required to receive new finish; remove existing finish if necessary for successful application of new finish.

4. Where new surface finishes are not specified or indicated, patch holes and damaged surfaces to match adjacent finished surfaces as closely as possible.

C. Services (Including but not limited to HVAC, Plumbing, Fire Protection, Electrical, Telecommunications, etc.): Remove, relocate, and extend existing systems to accommodate project work.

1. Maintain existing active systems that are to remain in operation; maintain access to equipment and operational components; if necessary, modify installation to allow access or provide access panel.

2. Where existing systems or equipment are not active and Contract Documents require reactivation, put back into operational condition; repair supply, distribution, and equipment as required.

3. Where existing active systems serve occupied facilities but are to be replaced with new services, maintain existing systems in service until new systems are complete and ready for service.

a. Disable existing systems only to make switchovers and connections; minimize duration of outages.

b. Provide temporary connections as required to maintain existing systems in service.

4. Verify that abandoned services serve only abandoned facilities.

5. Remove abandoned pipe, ducts, conduits, and equipment, including those above accessible ceilings; remove back to source of supply where possible, otherwise cap stub and tag with identification; patch holes left by removal using materials specified for new construction.

D. Protect existing work to remain.

1. Prevent movement of structure; provide shoring and bracing if necessary.

2. Perform cutting to accomplish removals neatly and as specified for cutting new work.

3. Repair adjacent construction and finishes damaged during removal work.

E. Adapt existing work to fit new work: Make as neat and smooth transition as possible.

F. Patching: Where the existing surface is not indicated to be refinished, patch to match the surface finish that existed prior to cutting. Where the surface is indicated to be refinished, patch so that the substrate is ready for the new finish.

G. Refinish existing surfaces as indicated:

1. Where rooms or spaces are indicated to be refinished, refinish all visible existing surfaces to remain to the specified condition for each material, with a neat transition to adjacent finishes.

2. If mechanical or electrical work is exposed accidentally during the work, re-cover and refinish to match.

H. Clean existing systems and equipment.

I. Remove demolition debris and abandoned items from alterations areas and dispose of off-site; do not burn or bury.

J. Do not begin new construction in alterations areas before demolition is complete.



01 70 00 - 4 March 18, 2021


K. Comply with all other applicable requirements of this section.

3.06 CUTTING AND PATCHING

A. Whenever possible, execute the work by methods that avoid cutting or patching.

B. See Alterations article above for additional requirements.

C. Perform whatever cutting and patching is necessary to:

1. Complete the work.

2. Fit products together to integrate with other work.

3. Provide openings for penetration of mechanical, electrical, and other services.

4. Match work that has been cut to adjacent work.

5. Repair areas adjacent to cuts to required condition.

6. Repair new work damaged by subsequent work.

7. Remove samples of installed work for testing when requested.

8. Remove and replace defective and non-conforming work.

D. Execute work by methods that avoid damage to other work and that will provide appropriate surfaces to receive patching and finishing. In existing work, minimize damage and restore to original condition.

E. Employ original installer to perform cutting for weather exposed and moisture resistant elements, and sight exposed surfaces.

F. Cut rigid materials using masonry saw or core drill. Pneumatic tools not allowed without prior approval.

G. Restore work with new products in accordance with requirements of Contract Documents.

H. Fit work air tight to pipes, sleeves, ducts, conduit, and other penetrations through surfaces.

I. At penetrations of fire rated walls, partitions, ceiling, or floor construction, completely seal voids with fire rated material, to full thickness of the penetrated element.

J. Patching:

1. Finish patched surfaces to match finish that existed prior to patching. On continuous surfaces, refinish to nearest intersection or natural break. For an assembly, refinish entire unit.

2. Match color, texture, and appearance.

3. Repair patched surfaces that are damaged, lifted, discolored, or showing other imperfections due to patching work. If defects are due to condition of substrate, repair substrate prior to repairing finish.

3.07 PROGRESS CLEANING

A. Maintain areas free of waste materials, debris, and rubbish. Maintain site in a clean and orderly condition.

B. Remove debris and rubbish from pipe chases, plenums, attics, crawl spaces, and other closed or remote spaces, prior to enclosing the space.

C. Broom and vacuum clean interior areas prior to start of surface finishing, and continue cleaning to eliminate dust.

D. Collect and remove waste materials, debris, and trash/rubbish from site periodically and dispose off-site; do not burn or bury.



01 70 00 - 5 March 18, 2021


3.08 PROTECTION OF INSTALLED WORK

A. Protect installed work from damage by construction operations.

B. Provide special protection where specified in individual specification sections.

C. Provide temporary and removable protection for installed products. Control activity in immediate work area to prevent damage.

D. Provide protective coverings at walls, projections, jambs, sills, and soffits of openings.

E. Protect finished floors, stairs, and other surfaces from traffic, dirt, wear, damage, or movement of heavy objects, by protecting with durable sheet materials.

F. Prohibit traffic or storage upon waterproofed or roofed surfaces. If traffic or activity is necessary, obtain recommendations for protection from waterproofing or roofing material manufacturer.

G. Remove protective coverings when no longer needed; reuse or recycle plastic coverings if possible.

3.09 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust operating products and equipment to ensure smooth and unhindered operation.

3.10 FINAL CLEANING

A. Do final cleaning of space after completion of construction prior to turning over to Owner. All areas shall be cleaned and ready for occupancy, and shall be inspected by Michigan Technological University’s custodial staff.

3.11 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES

A. Notify Michigan Tech when work is considered ready for Substantial Completion, and submit the Substantial Completion Notice to the Owner.

B. Submit written certification that Contract Documents have been reviewed, work has been inspected, and that work is complete in accordance with Contract Documents and ready for Michigan Tech's review.

C. Correct items of work listed in executed Certificates of Substantial Completion and the Final Completion Checklist.

D. Notify Michigan Tech when work is considered finally complete.


01 07 10 FINAL CLEANING


01 70 10 - 1 March 18, 2021

FINAL CLEANING

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Final cleaning of entire construction area.


A. Section 01 10 00 - Summary: Contract descriptions, description of alterations work, work by others, future work, occupancy conditions, use of site and premises, work sequence.

B. Section 01 70 00 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Examination, preparation, and general installation procedures; preinstallation meetings; cutting and patching; cleaning and protection; starting of systems; demonstration and instruction; closeout procedures except payment procedures; requirements for alterations work.

1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. Documentation that Cleaning Contractor complies with paragraph 1.04 - Quality Assurance requirements. Supply references indicating performance satisfaction from past clients.


A. Contractor Qualifications: Cleaning contractor with a minimum of 2 years documented experience performing this type of cleaning on a commercial basis.

PART 2 PRODUCTS – Not Used

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Examine construction area to verify that it is ready for final cleaning, and that all construction work has been completed.

3.02 FINAL CLEANING

A. Use cleaning materials that are nonhazardous.

B. Clean interior window glass, all surfaces exposed to view, remove temporary labels, stains and foreign substances, polish transparent and glossy surfaces, and vacuum carpeted and soft surfaces.

C. Steam clean all carpets, mop all floors, and wipe with disinfectant all horizontal and vertical surfaces.

D. Remove all labels that are not permanent. Do not paint or otherwise cover fire test labels or nameplates on mechanical and electrical equipment.

E. Clean surfaces and fixtures to a sanitary condition with cleaning materials appropriate to the surface and material being cleaned.

F. Remove waste, surplus materials, trash/rubbish, and construction facilities from the site; dispose of in legal manner; do not burn or bury.


01 74 19 CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL


01 74 19 - 1 March 18, 2021

CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 WASTE MANAGEMENT REQUIREMENTS

A. Owner requires that this project generate the least amount of trash and waste possible.

B. Any cost or savings from scrap of any materials or appliances must be incorporated into the contract price.

C. Employ processes that ensure the generation of as little waste as possible due to error, poor planning, breakage, mishandling, contamination, or other factors.

D. Minimize trash/waste disposal in landfills; reuse, salvage, or recycle as much waste as economically feasible.

E. Optional Recycling, Salvage, Reuse, or Landfills.

F. Recycling is optional for this project; Contractor is responsible for implementation. Revenue or savings must be reflected in the Contractor’s bid price.

G. Methods of trash/waste disposal that are not acceptable are:

1. Burning or burying on the project site.

2. Dumping or burying on other property, public or private or other illegal dumping or burying.

3. Incineration, either on- or off-site.

H. Regulatory Requirements: Contractor is responsible for knowing and complying with regulatory requirements, including but not limited to Federal, state and local requirements, pertaining to legal disposal of all construction and demolition waste materials.

I. Provide waste removal facilities and services as required to maintain the site in clean and orderly condition.

J. Waste Disposal Facilities: Provide waste-collection containers in sizes adequate to handle waste from construction operations. Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. Remove debris, junk, and trash from site periodically.

K. If materials to be recycled or re-used on the project must be stored on-site, provide suitable non-combustible containers.

L. Open free-fall chutes are not permitted. Terminate closed chutes into appropriate containers with lids.

M. Leave site in clean condition, ready for subsequent work.

N. Clean up spillage and wind-blown debris from public and private lands.


A. Section 01 50 00 Temporary Facilities and Controls: Additional related requirements.

B. Section 02 41 00 Demolition: Additional related requirements.

1.03 DEFINITIONS

A. Construction and Demolition Waste: Solid wastes typically including building materials, packaging, trash, debris, and rubble resulting from construction, remodeling, repair and demolition operations.

B. Recycle: To remove a waste material from the project site to another site for remanufacture into a new product for reuse by others.

C. Reuse: To reuse a construction waste material in some manner on the project site.

D. Salvage: To remove a waste material from the project site to another site for resale or reuse by others.

01 74 19 CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL


01 74 19 - 2 March 18, 2021

CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL

E. Waste: Extra material or material that has reached the end of its useful life in its intended use. Waste includes salvageable, returnable, recyclable, and reusable material.


31-18-01/DHH Bathroom Renovations 01 78 23 - 1 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA March 18, 2021

SECTION 01 78 23 - OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for preparing operation and maintenance manuals, including the following: 1. Systems and equipment operation and maintenance manuals.

1.2 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS

A. Submit operation and maintenance manuals indicated. Provide content for each manual as specified in individual Specification Sections, and as reviewed and approved at the time of Section submittals. Submit reviewed manual content formatted and organized as required by this Section.

1. Architect will comment on whether content of operation and maintenance submittals is acceptable.

2. Where applicable, clarify and update reviewed manual content to correspond to revisions and field conditions.

B. Format: Submit operation and maintenance manuals in the following format:

C. Preliminary Operation and Maintenance Manuals: Submit copies requested below for review no later than 14 days prior to Substantial Completion.

1. Submit PDF Electronic file on a DVD. Assemble each manual into a composite electronically indexed file. Submit on digital media acceptable to Architect. a. Name each indexed document file in composite electronic index with applicable

item name. Include a complete electronically linked operation and maintenance directory.

b. Enable inserted reviewer comments on draft submittals. 2. Submit one paper copy.

D. Final Manual Submittal:

1. Correct or revise each manual to comply with Architect's comments. Submit copies of each corrected manual as indicated below within 15 days of receipt of Architect's comments and prior to commencing demonstration and training and requesting Final Completion. a. Electronic Format: Submit Three DVD’s each containing PDF’s of the entire

manual. b. Paper Format: Submit Three Paper copies of the entire manual each in a three

ring binder.

E. Comply with Section 01 77 00 "Closeout Procedures" for schedule for submitting operation and maintenance documentation.

31-18-01/DHH Bathroom Renovations 01 78 23 - 2 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA March 18, 2021

1.3 FORMAT OF OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS

A. Manuals, Electronic Files: Submit manuals in the form of a multiple file composite electronic PDF file for each manual type required.

1. Electronic Files: Use electronic files prepared by manufacturer where available. Where scanning of paper documents is required, configure scanned file for minimum readable file size.

2. File Names and Bookmarks: Bookmark individual documents based on file names. Name document files to correspond to system, subsystem, and equipment names used in manual directory and table of contents. Group documents for each system and subsystem into individual composite bookmarked files, then create composite manual, so that resulting bookmarks reflect the system, subsystem, and equipment names in a readily navigated file tree. Configure electronic manual to display bookmark panel on opening file.

B. Manuals, Paper Copy: Submit manuals in the form of hard-copy, bound and labeled volumes.

1. Binders: Heavy-duty, three-ring, vinyl-covered, loose-leaf binders, in thickness necessary to accommodate contents, sized to hold 8-1/2-by-11-inch paper; with clear plastic sleeve on spine to hold label describing contents and with pockets inside covers to hold folded oversize sheets.

2. Drawings: Attach reinforced, punched binder tabs on drawings and bind with text.

a. If oversize drawings are necessary, fold drawings to same size as text pages and use as foldouts.

b. If drawings are too large to be used as foldouts, fold and place drawings in labeled envelopes and bind envelopes in rear of manual. At appropriate locations in manual, insert typewritten pages indicating drawing titles, descriptions of contents, and drawing locations.


31-18-01/DHH Bathroom Renovations 01 78 39 - 1 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS March 18, 2021

SECTION 01 78 39 - PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for project record documents, including the following:

1. Record Drawings.

B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 01 78 23 "Operation and Maintenance Data" for operation and maintenance

manual requirements.


A. Record Drawings: Comply with the following:

1. Number of Copies: Submit three set(s) of marked-up record prints.

1.3 RECORD DRAWINGS

A. Record Prints: Maintain one set of marked-up paper copies of the Contract Drawings and Shop Drawings, incorporating new and revised drawings as modifications are issued.

1. Preparation: Mark record prints to show the actual installation where installation varies from that shown originally. Require individual or entity who obtained record data, whether individual or entity is Installer, subcontractor, or similar entity, to provide information for preparation of corresponding marked-up record prints.

a. Give particular attention to information on concealed elements that would be difficult to identify or measure and record later.

b. Accurately record information in an acceptable drawing technique. c. Record data as soon as possible after obtaining it. d. Record and check the markup before enclosing concealed installations.

2. Content: Types of items requiring marking include, but are not limited to, the following:

a. Dimensional changes to Drawings. b. Revisions to details shown on Drawings. c. Depths of foundations. d. Locations and depths of underground utilities. e. Revisions to routing of piping and conduits. f. Revisions to electrical circuitry. g. Actual equipment locations. h. Duct size and routing. i. Locations of concealed internal utilities. j. Changes made by Change Order or Construction Change Directive. k. Changes made following Architect's written orders.

31-18-01/DHH Bathroom Renovations 01 78 39 - 2 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS March 18, 2021

l. Details not on the original Contract Drawings. m. Field records for variable and concealed conditions. n. Record information on the Work that is shown only schematically.

3. Mark the Contract Drawings and Shop Drawings completely and accurately. Use personnel proficient at recording graphic information in production of marked-up record prints.

4. Mark record sets with erasable, red-colored pencil. Use other colors to distinguish between changes for different categories of the Work at same location.

5. Mark important additional information that was either shown schematically or omitted from original Drawings.

6. Note Construction Change Directive numbers, alternate numbers, Change Order numbers, and similar identification, where applicable.

B. Format: Identify and date each record Drawing; include the designation "PROJECT RECORD DRAWING" in a prominent location.

1.4 MAINTENANCE OF RECORD DOCUMENTS

A. Maintenance of Record Documents: Store record documents in the field office apart from the Contract Documents used for construction. Do not use project record documents for construction purposes. Maintain record documents in good order and in a clean, dry, legible condition, protected from deterioration and loss. Provide access to project record documents for Architect's reference during normal working hours.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

PART 3 - EXECUTION


DIV

ISIO

N 2

–

TE

CH

NIC

AL

SP

EC

IFIC

AT

ION

S

31-18-01/DHH Bathroom Renovations 02 41 19 - 1 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION March 18, 2021

SECTION 02 41 19 - SELECTIVE DEMOLITION

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:

1. Demolition and removal of selected portions of building or structure. 2. Salvage of existing items to be reused or recycled.

1.2 MATERIALS OWNERSHIP

A. Unless otherwise indicated, demolition waste becomes property of Contractor.

B. Historic items, relics, antiques, and similar objects including, but not limited to, cornerstones and their contents, commemorative plaques and tablets, and other items of interest or value to Owner that may be uncovered during demolition remain the property of Owner.

1. Carefully salvage in a manner to prevent damage and promptly return to Owner.

1.3 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS

A. Predemolition Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.


A. Proposed Protection Measures: Submit report, including Drawings, that indicates the measures proposed for protecting individuals and property, for environmental protection and for dust control. Indicate proposed locations and construction of barriers.

B. Schedule of selective demolition activities with starting and ending dates for each activity.


A. Inventory of items that have been removed and salvaged.

1.6 FIELD CONDITIONS

A. Owner will occupy portions of building immediately adjacent to selective demolition area. Conduct selective demolition so Owner's operations will not be disrupted.

B. Conditions existing at time of inspection for bidding purpose will be maintained by Owner as far as practical.

1. Before selective demolition, Owner will remove the following items:


C. Notify Architect of discrepancies between existing conditions and Drawings before proceeding with selective demolition.

D. Hazardous Materials: It is not expected that hazardous materials will be encountered in the Work. 1. If suspected hazardous materials are encountered, do not disturb; immediately notify

Architect and Owner. Hazardous materials will be removed by Owner under a separate contract.

E. Storage or sale of removed items or materials on-site is not permitted.

F. Utility Service: Maintain existing utilities indicated to remain in service and protect them against damage during selective demolition operations.

1. Maintain fire-protection facilities in service during selective demolition operations.

G. Arrange selective demolition schedule so as not to interfere with Owner's operations.

1.7 WARRANTY

A. Existing Warranties: Remove, replace, patch, and repair materials and surfaces cut or damaged during selective demolition, by methods and with materials and using approved contractors so as not to void existing warranties.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with governing EPA notification regulations before beginning selective demolition. Comply with hauling and disposal regulations of authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Standards: Comply with ASSE A10.6 and NFPA 241.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Verify that utilities have been disconnected and capped before starting selective demolition operations.

B. Inventory and record the condition of items to be removed and salvaged.

3.2 UTILITY SERVICES AND MECHANICAL/ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

A. Existing Services/Systems to Remain: Maintain services/systems indicated to remain and protect them against damage.


B. Existing Services/Systems to Be Removed, Relocated, or Abandoned: Locate, identify, disconnect, and seal or cap off utility services and mechanical/electrical systems serving areas to be selectively demolished.

1. Owner will arrange to shut off indicated services/systems when requested by Contractor. 2. Arrange to shut off utilities with utility companies. 3. If services/systems are required to be removed, relocated, or abandoned, provide

temporary services/systems that bypass area of selective demolition and that maintain continuity of services/systems to other parts of building.

4. Disconnect, demolish, and remove fire-suppression systems, plumbing, and HVAC systems, equipment, and components indicated on Drawings to be removed.

a. Piping to Be Removed: Remove portion of piping indicated to be removed and cap or plug remaining piping with same or compatible piping material.

b. Piping to Be Abandoned in Place: Drain piping and cap or plug piping with same or compatible piping material and leave in place.

c. Equipment to Be Removed: Disconnect and cap services and remove equipment. d. Equipment to Be Removed and Reinstalled: Disconnect and cap services and

remove, clean, and store equipment; when appropriate, reinstall, reconnect, and make equipment operational.

e. Equipment to Be Removed and Salvaged: Disconnect and cap services and remove equipment and deliver to Owner.

f. Ducts to Be Removed: Remove portion of ducts indicated to be removed and plug remaining ducts with same or compatible ductwork material.

g. Ducts to Be Abandoned in Place: Cap or plug ducts with same or compatible ductwork material and leave in place.

3.3 PROTECTION

A. Temporary Protection: Provide temporary barricades and other protection required to prevent injury to people and damage to adjacent buildings and facilities to remain.

B. Temporary Shoring: Design, provide, and maintain shoring, bracing, and structural supports as required to preserve stability and prevent movement, settlement, or collapse of construction and finishes to remain, and to prevent unexpected or uncontrolled movement or collapse of construction being demolished.

C. Remove temporary barricades and protections where hazards no longer exist.

3.4 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION

A. General: Demolish and remove existing construction only to the extent required by new construction and as indicated. Use methods required to complete the Work within limitations of governing regulations and as follows:

1. Neatly cut openings and holes plumb, square, and true to dimensions required. Use cutting methods least likely to damage construction to remain or adjoining construction. Use hand tools or small power tools designed for sawing or grinding, not hammering and chopping. Temporarily cover openings to remain.

2. Cut or drill from the exposed or finished side into concealed surfaces to avoid marring existing finished surfaces.

3. Do not use cutting torches until work area is cleared of flammable materials. At concealed spaces, such as duct and pipe interiors, verify condition and contents of


hidden space before starting flame-cutting operations. Maintain portable fire-suppression devices during flame-cutting operations.

4. Maintain fire watch during and for at least 24 hours after flame-cutting operations. 5. Locate selective demolition equipment and remove debris and materials so as not to

impose excessive loads on supporting walls, floors, or framing. 6. Dispose of demolished items and materials promptly.

B. Site Access and Temporary Controls: Conduct selective demolition and debris-removal operations to ensure minimum interference with roads, streets, walks, walkways, and other adjacent occupied and used facilities.

C. Removed and Salvaged Items:

1. Clean salvaged items. 2. Pack or crate items after cleaning. Identify contents of containers. 3. Store items in a secure area until delivery to Owner. 4. Transport items to Owner's storage area as designated by Owner. 5. Protect items from damage during transport and storage.

D. Removed and Reinstalled Items:

1. Clean and repair items to functional condition adequate for intended reuse. 2. Pack or crate items after cleaning and repairing. Identify contents of containers. 3. Protect items from damage during transport and storage. 4. Reinstall items in locations indicated. Comply with installation requirements for new

materials and equipment. Provide connections, supports, and miscellaneous materials necessary to make item functional for use indicated.

E. Existing Items to Remain: Protect construction indicated to remain against damage and soiling during selective demolition. When permitted by Architect, items may be removed to a suitable, protected storage location during selective demolition and cleaned and reinstalled in their original locations after selective demolition operations are complete.

3.5 CLEANING

A. Remove demolition waste materials from Project site and dispose of them in an EPA-approved construction and demolition waste landfill acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

1. Do not allow demolished materials to accumulate on-site. 2. Remove and transport debris in a manner that will prevent spillage on adjacent surfaces

and areas. 3. Remove debris from elevated portions of building by chute, hoist, or other device that will

convey debris to grade level in a controlled descent.

B. Burning: Do not burn demolished materials.

C. Clean adjacent structures and improvements of dust, dirt, and debris caused by selective demolition operations. Return adjacent areas to condition existing before selective demolition operations began.


31-18-01/DHH Bathroom Renovations 04 22 00 - 1 CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY March 18, 2021

SECTION 04 22 00 - CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Concrete masonry units.

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. CMU(s): Concrete masonry unit(s).


A. Product Data: For each type of product.


A. Material Certificates: For each type and size of product. For masonry units, include material test reports substantiating compliance with requirements.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 UNIT MASONRY, GENERAL

A. Masonry Standard: Comply with TMS 602/ACI 530.1/ASCE 6, except as modified by requirements in the Contract Documents.

B. Defective Units: Referenced masonry unit standards may allow a certain percentage of units to contain chips, cracks, or other defects exceeding limits stated. Do not use units where such defects are exposed in the completed Work.

2.2 CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS

A. Shapes: Provide shapes indicated and as follows, with exposed surfaces matching exposed faces of adjacent units unless otherwise indicated.

1. Provide special shapes for lintels, corners, jambs, sashes, movement joints, headers, bonding, and other special conditions.

B. CMUs: ASTM C 90.

1. Unit Compressive Strength: Provide units with minimum average net-area compressive strength of 2800 psi. (Net area compressive strength of masonry = 2000 psi).


2. Density Classification: Normal weight.

2.3 MORTAR AND GROUT MATERIALS

A. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150/C 150M, Type I or II, except Type III may be used for cold-weather construction. Provide natural color or white cement as required to produce mortar color indicated.

B. Hydrated Lime: ASTM C 207, Type S.

C. Portland Cement-Lime Mix: Packaged blend of portland cement and hydrated lime containing no other ingredients.

D. Masonry Cement: ASTM C 91/C 91M.

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

a. Holcim (US) Inc. b. Lafarge Masonry Cement. c. Lafarge North America, Inc. d. Lehigh Cement Company. e. Lehigh Masonry Cement. f. Mortamix Masonry Cement.

E. Aggregate for Mortar: ASTM C 144.

1. White-Mortar Aggregates: Natural white sand or crushed white stone.

F. Aggregate for Grout: ASTM C 404.

G. Water: Potable.

2.4 REINFORCEMENT

A. Uncoated-Steel Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M or ASTM A 996/A 996M, Grade 60.

B. Masonry-Joint Reinforcement, General: ASTM A 951/A 951M.

1. Interior Walls: Mill- galvanized, carbon steel.

2.5 MORTAR AND GROUT MIXES

A. General: Do not use admixtures, including pigments, air-entraining agents, accelerators, retarders, water-repellent agents, antifreeze compounds, or other admixtures unless otherwise indicated.

1. Do not use calcium chloride in mortar or grout.

B. Preblended, Dry Mortar Mix: Furnish dry mortar ingredients in form of a preblended mix. Measure quantities by weight to ensure accurate proportions, and thoroughly blend ingredients before delivering to Project site.

http://www.specagent.com/Lookup?ulid=9956

http://www.specagent.com/Lookup?uid=123456993042



C. Mortar for Unit Masonry: Comply with ASTM C 270, Property Specification. Provide the following types of mortar for applications stated unless another type is indicated. 1. For reinforced masonry, use Type S. 2. For interior nonload-bearing partitions, Type O may be used instead of Type N.

2.6 MASONRY TIES

A. Stainless steel post installed anchor ties. 1. Heli Tie or equal.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL

A. Use full-size units without cutting if possible. If cutting is required to provide a continuous pattern or to fit adjoining construction, cut units with motor-driven saws; provide clean, sharp, unchipped edges. Allow units to dry before laying unless wetting of units is specified. Install cut units with cut surfaces and, where possible, cut edges concealed.

3.2 TOLERANCES

A. Dimensions and Locations of Elements:

1. For dimensions in cross section or elevation, do not vary by more than plus 1/2 inch or minus 1/4 inch.

2. For location of elements in plan, do not vary from that indicated by more than plus or minus 1/2 inch.

3. For location of elements in elevation, do not vary from that indicated by more than plus or minus 1/4 inch in a story height or 1/2 inch total.

B. Lines and Levels:

1. For bed joints and top surfaces of bearing walls, do not vary from level by more than 1/4 inch in 10 feet, or 1/2-inch maximum.

2. For conspicuous horizontal lines, such as lintels, sills, parapets, and reveals, do not vary from level by more than 1/8 inch in 10 feet, 1/4 inch in 20 feet, or 1/2-inch maximum.

3. For vertical lines and surfaces, do not vary from plumb by more than 1/4 inch in 10 feet, 3/8 inch in 20 feet, or 1/2-inch maximum.

4. For conspicuous vertical lines, such as external corners, door jambs, reveals, and expansion and control joints, do not vary from plumb by more than 1/8 inch in 10 feet, 1/4 inch in 20 feet, or 1/2-inch maximum.

5. For lines and surfaces, do not vary from straight by more than 1/4 inch in 10 feet, 3/8 inch in 20 feet, or 1/2-inch maximum.

C. Joints:

1. For bed joints, do not vary from thickness indicated by more than plus or minus 1/8 inch, with a maximum thickness limited to 1/2 inch.

2. For head and collar joints, do not vary from thickness indicated by more than plus 3/8 inch or minus 1/4 inch.


3. For exposed head joints, do not vary from thickness indicated by more than plus or minus 1/8 inch.

3.3 LAYING MASONRY WALLS

A. Lay out walls in advance for accurate spacing of surface bond patterns with uniform joint thicknesses and for accurate location of openings, movement-type joints, returns, and offsets. Avoid using less-than-half-size units, particularly at corners, jambs, and, where possible, at other locations.

B. Bond Pattern for Exposed Masonry: Unless otherwise indicated, lay exposed masonry in running bond; do not use units with less-than-nominal 4-inch horizontal face dimensions at corners or jambs.

C. Built-in Work: As construction progresses, build in items specified in this and other Sections. Fill in solidly with masonry around built-in items.

D. Fill space between steel frames and masonry solidly with mortar unless otherwise indicated.

E. Where built-in items are to be embedded in cores of hollow masonry units, place a layer of metal lath, wire mesh, or plastic mesh in the joint below, and rod mortar or grout into core.

F. Fill cores in hollow CMUs with grout 24 inches under bearing plates, beams, lintels, posts, and similar items unless otherwise indicated.

3.4 MORTAR BEDDING AND JOINTING

A. Lay hollow CMUs as follows:

1. Bed face shells in mortar and make head joints of depth equal to bed joints. 2. Bed webs in mortar in all courses of piers, columns, and pilasters. 3. Bed webs in mortar in grouted masonry, including starting course on footings. 4. Fully bed entire units, including areas under cells, at starting course on footings where

cells are not grouted.

B. Lay solid CMUs with completely filled bed and head joints; butter ends with sufficient mortar to fill head joints and shove into place. Do not deeply furrow bed joints or slush head joints.

C. Tool exposed joints slightly concave when thumbprint hard, using a jointer larger than joint thickness unless otherwise indicated.

D. Cut joints flush for masonry walls to receive plaster or other direct-applied finishes (other than paint) unless otherwise indicated.

3.5 MASONRY TIES AND JOINT REINFORCEMENT

A. General: Install entire length of longitudinal side rods in mortar with a minimum cover of 5/8 inch on exterior side of walls, 1/2 inch elsewhere. Lap reinforcement a minimum of 6 inches.

1. Space reinforcement not more than 16 inches o.c. 2. Space reinforcement not more than 8 inches o.c. in foundation walls and parapet walls.


3. Provide reinforcement not more than 8 inches above and below wall openings and extending 12 inches beyond openings in addition to continuous reinforcement.

B. Interrupt joint reinforcement at control and expansion joints unless otherwise indicated.

C. Provide continuity at wall intersections by using prefabricated T-shaped units.

D. Provide continuity at corners by using prefabricated L-shaped units.

E. Predrill holes for stainless steel post installed anchors per manufacturer’s requirements. Install anchors centered in mortar joints with 3½” minimum embedment.

3.6 REPAIRING, POINTING, AND CLEANING

A. In-Progress Cleaning: Clean unit masonry as work progresses by dry brushing to remove mortar fins and smears before tooling joints.

B. Final Cleaning: After mortar is thoroughly set and cured, clean exposed masonry as follows:

1. Test cleaning methods on sample wall panel; leave one-half of panel uncleaned for comparison purposes.

2. Clean concrete masonry by applicable cleaning methods indicated in NCMA TEK 8-4A.


31-18-01/DHH Bathroom Renovations 07 14 16 - 1 COLD FLUID-APPLIED WATERPROOFING March 18, 2021

SECTION 07 14 16 - COLD FLUID-APPLIED WATERPROOFING

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY


1. Surface Preparation. 2. Application of single-component, cold-applied, liquid waterproofing membrane.


A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Exterior Stair on the East end of Douglass Houghton Hall.

1. Review waterproofing requirements including, but not limited to, the following:

a. Surface preparation specified in other Sections. b. Minimum curing period. c. Forecasted weather conditions. d. Special details and sheet flashings. e. Repairs. f. Field quality control.

1.4 REFERENCES

A. Michigan Building Code Section 18 05 .3 Waterproofing

B. ASTM C661 - Standard Test Method for Indentation Hardness of Elastomeric-Type Sealants by Means of a Durometer.

C. ASTM D816 - Standard Test Methods for Rubber Cements.

D. ASTM D1644 - Standard Test Methods for Nonvolatile Content of Varnishes.

E. ASTM D2370 - Standard Test Method for Tensile Properties of Organic Coatings.

F. ASTM D2697 - Standard Test Method for Volume Nonvolatile Matter in Clear or Pigmented Coatings.

G. ASTM E96 - Standard Test Methods for Water Vapor Transmission of Materials.




1. Include construction details, material descriptions, and tested physical and performance properties of waterproofing.

2. Include manufacturer's written instructions for evaluating, preparing, and treating substrate.


A. Installer Qualifications: An entity that employs installers and supervisors who are thoroughly trained and experienced in the application of fluid-applied waterproofing membranes.

B. Obtain waterproofing materials from a single manufacturer regularly engaged in manufacturing the product.

C. Provide products which comply with all state and local regulations controlling use of volatile organic compounds (VOCs).


A. Environmental Limitations: Apply waterproofing within the range of ambient and substrate temperatures recommended in writing by waterproofing manufacturer.

1. Do not apply waterproofing to a damp or wet substrate, when relative humidity exceeds 85 percent, or when temperatures are less than 5 deg F above dew point.

2. Do not apply waterproofing in snow, rain, fog or mist, or when such weather conditions are imminent during application and curing period.

B. Maintain adequate ventilation during application and curing of waterproofing materials.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 POLYURETHANE AND RUBBER WATERPROOFING

A. Source Limitations for Waterproofing System: Obtain waterproofing materials from single source from single manufacturer.

B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. BASF Corporation. 2. Carlisle Coatings & Waterproofing Inc. 3. Tremco Incorporated. 4. W.R. Meadows.

2.2 AUXILIARY MATERIALS

A. General: Provide auxiliary materials recommended in writing by waterproofing manufacturer for intended use and compatible with one another and with waterproofing.






1. Furnish liquid-type auxiliary materials that comply with VOC limits of authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Primer: Manufacturer's standard primer, sealer, or surface conditioner; factory-formulated.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

1. Verify that concrete has cured and aged for minimum time period recommended in writing by waterproofing manufacturer.

2. Verify that substrate is visibly dry and within the moisture limits recommended in writing by manufacturer. Test for capillary moisture by plastic sheet method according to ASTM D 4263.

B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Clean, prepare, and treat substrates according to manufacturer's written instructions. Provide clean, dust-free, and dry substrates for waterproofing application.

B. Mask off adjoining surfaces not receiving waterproofing to prevent spillage and overspray affecting other construction.

C. Close off deck drains and other deck penetrations to prevent spillage and migration of waterproofing fluids.

D. Remove grease, oil, bitumen, form-release agents, paints, curing compounds, acid residues, and other penetrating contaminants or film-forming coatings from concrete.

1. Abrasive blast clean concrete surfaces uniformly to expose top surface of fine aggregate according to ASTM D 4259 with a self-contained, recirculating, blast-cleaning apparatus. Remove material to provide a sound surface free of laitance, glaze, efflorescence, curing compounds, concrete hardeners, or form-release agents. Remove remaining loose material and clean surfaces according to ASTM D 4258.

E. Remove fins, ridges, and other projections, and fill honeycomb, aggregate pockets, holes, and other voids.

3.3 PREPARATION AT TERMINATIONS, PENETRATIONS, AND CORNERS

A. Prepare surfaces at terminations and penetrations through waterproofing and at expansion joints, drains, sleeves, and corners according to waterproofing manufacturer's written instructions and to recommendations in ASTM C 898/C 898M and ASTM C 1471/C 1471M.

B. Apply waterproofing in two separate applications, and embed a joint reinforcing strip in the first preparation coat when recommended by waterproofing manufacturer.


3.4 JOINT AND CRACK TREATMENT

A. Prepare, treat, rout, and fill joints and cracks in substrate according to waterproofing manufacturer's written instructions and to recommendations in ASTM C 898/C 898M and ASTM C 1471/C 1471M. Before coating surfaces, remove dust and dirt from joints and cracks according to ASTM D 4258.

1. Comply with ASTM C 1193 for joint-sealant installation. 2. Apply bond breaker on sealant surface, beneath preparation strip. 3. Prime substrate along each side of joint and apply a single thickness of preparation strip

at least 6 inches wide along each side of joint. Apply waterproofing in two separate applications and embed a joint reinforcing strip in the first preparation coat.

3.5 WATERPROOFING APPLICATION

A. Apply waterproofing according to manufacturer's written instructions and to recommendations in ASTM C 898/C 898M and ASTM C 1471/C 1471M.

B. Apply primer over prepared substrate unless otherwise instructed in writing by waterproofing manufacturer.

C. Unreinforced Waterproofing Applications: Mix materials and apply waterproofing by spray, roller, notched squeegee, trowel, or other application method suitable to slope of substrate.

1. Apply one or more coats of waterproofing to obtain a seamless membrane free of entrapped gases and pinholes, with a dry film thickness of 60 mils.

2. Apply waterproofing to prepared wall terminations and vertical surfaces. 3. Verify manufacturer's recommended wet film thickness of waterproofing every 25 sq. ft.

D. Cure waterproofing, taking care to prevent contamination and damage during application and curing.

3.6 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Testing Agency: Owner may perform inspections.

B. Waterproofing will be considered defective if it does not pass inspections.

C. Prepare test and inspection reports.

3.7 PROTECTION

A. Do not permit foot or vehicular traffic on unprotected membrane.

B. Protect waterproofing from damage and wear during remainder of construction period.

C. Protect installed insulation drainage panels from damage due to UV light, harmful weather exposures, physical abuse, and other causes. Provide temporary coverings where insulation is subject to abuse and cannot be concealed and protected by permanent construction immediately after installation.


D. Correct deficiencies in or remove waterproofing that does not comply with requirements; repair substrates, reapply waterproofing, and repair sheet flashings.


31-18-01/DHH Bathroom Renovations 07 84 13 - 1 PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING March 18, 2021

SECTION 07 84 13 - PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Penetrations in smoke barriers.


A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.



B. Product Schedule: For each penetration firestopping system. Include location, illustration of firestopping system, and design designation of qualified testing and inspecting agency.

1. jurisdiction prior to submittal.


A. Qualification Data: For Installer.

B. Product Test Reports: For each penetration firestopping system, for tests performed by a qualified testing agency.


A. Installer Certificates: From Installer indicating that penetration firestopping systems have been installed in compliance with requirements and manufacturer's written instructions.


A. Installer Qualifications: A firm that has been approved by FM Global according to FM Global 4991, "Approval of Firestop Contractors," or been evaluated by UL and found to comply with its "Qualified Firestop Contractor Program Requirements."


1.8 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install penetration firestopping system when ambient or substrate temperatures are outside limits permitted by penetration firestopping system manufacturers or when substrates are wet because of rain, frost, condensation, or other causes.

B. Install and cure penetration firestopping materials per manufacturer's written instructions using natural means of ventilations or, where this is inadequate, forced-air circulation.

1.9 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate construction of openings and penetrating items to ensure that penetration firestopping systems can be installed according to specified firestopping system design.

B. Coordinate sizing of sleeves, openings, core-drilled holes, or cut openings to accommodate penetration firestopping systems.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics:

1. Perform penetration firestopping system tests by a qualified testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

2. Test per testing standards referenced in "Penetration Firestopping Systems" Article. Provide rated systems complying with the following requirements:

a. Penetration firestopping systems shall bear classification marking of a qualified testing agency.

1) UL in its "Fire Resistance Directory." 2) Intertek Group in its "Directory of Listed Building Products." 3) FM Global in its "Building Materials Approval Guide."

2.2 PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING SYSTEMS

A. Penetrations in Smoke Barriers: Penetration firestopping systems with ratings determined per UL 1479, based on testing at a positive pressure differential of 0.30-inch wg.

1. L-Rating: Not exceeding 5.0 cfm/sq. ft. of penetration opening at and no more than 50-cfm cumulative total for any 100 sq. ft. at both ambient and elevated temperatures.

B. Accessories: Provide components for each penetration firestopping system that are needed to install fill materials and to maintain ratings required. Use only those components specified by penetration firestopping system manufacturer and approved by qualified testing and inspecting agency for conditions indicated.

1. Permanent forming/damming/backing materials. 2. Substrate primers.


3. Collars. 4. Steel sleeves.

2.3 FILL MATERIALS

A. Cast-in-Place Firestop Devices: Factory-assembled devices for use in cast-in-place concrete floors and consisting of an outer sleeve lined with an intumescent strip, a flange attached to one end of the sleeve for fastening to concrete formwork, and a neoprene gasket.

B. Latex Sealants: Single-component latex formulations that do not re-emulsify after cure during exposure to moisture.

C. Firestop Devices: Factory-assembled collars formed from galvanized steel and lined with intumescent material sized to fit specific diameter of penetrant.

D. Intumescent Composite Sheets: Rigid panels consisting of aluminum-foil-faced intumescent elastomeric sheet bonded to galvanized-steel sheet.

E. Intumescent Putties: Nonhardening, water-resistant, intumescent putties containing no solvents or inorganic fibers.

F. Intumescent Wrap Strips: Single-component intumescent elastomeric sheets with aluminum foil on one side.

G. Mortars: Prepackaged dry mixes consisting of a blend of inorganic binders, hydraulic cement, fillers and lightweight aggregate formulated for mixing with water at Project site to form a nonshrinking, homogeneous mortar.

H. Pillows/Bags: Reusable heat-expanding pillows/bags consisting of glass-fiber cloth cases filled with a combination of mineral-fiber, water-insoluble expansion agents, and fire-retardant additives. Where exposed, cover openings with steel-reinforcing wire mesh to protect pillows/bags from being easily removed.

I. Silicone Foams: Multicomponent, silicone-based liquid elastomers that, when mixed, expand and cure in place to produce a flexible, nonshrinking foam.

J. Silicone Sealants: Single-component, silicone-based, neutral-curing elastomeric sealants.

2.4 MIXING

A. Penetration Firestopping Materials: For those products requiring mixing before application, comply with penetration firestopping system manufacturer's written instructions for accurate proportioning of materials, water (if required), type of mixing equipment, selection of mixer speeds, mixing containers, mixing time, and other items or procedures needed to produce products of uniform quality with optimum performance characteristics for application indicated.


PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for opening configurations, penetrating items, substrates, and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.


3.2 PREPARATION

A. Surface Cleaning: Before installing penetration firestopping systems, clean out openings immediately to comply with manufacturer's written instructions and with the following requirements:

1. Remove from surfaces of opening substrates and from penetrating items foreign materials that could interfere with adhesion of penetration firestopping materials.

2. Clean opening substrates and penetrating items to produce clean, sound surfaces capable of developing optimum bond with penetration firestopping materials. Remove loose particles remaining from cleaning operation.

3. Remove laitance and form-release agents from concrete.

B. Prime substrates where recommended in writing by manufacturer using that manufacturer's recommended products and methods. Confine primers to areas of bond; do not allow spillage and migration onto exposed surfaces.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. General: Install penetration firestopping systems to comply with manufacturer's written installation instructions and published drawings for products and applications.

B. Install forming materials and other accessories of types required to support fill materials during their application and in the position needed to produce cross-sectional shapes and depths required to achieve fire ratings.

1. After installing fill materials and allowing them to fully cure, remove combustible forming materials and other accessories not forming permanent components of firestopping.

C. Install fill materials by proven techniques to produce the following results:

1. Fill voids and cavities formed by openings, forming materials, accessories and penetrating items to achieve required fire-resistance ratings.

2. Apply materials so they contact and adhere to substrates formed by openings and penetrating items.

3. For fill materials that will remain exposed after completing the Work, finish to produce smooth, uniform surfaces that are flush with adjoining finishes.


3.4 IDENTIFICATION

A. Wall Identification: Permanently label walls containing penetration firestopping systems with the words "FIRE AND/OR SMOKE BARRIER - PROTECT ALL OPENINGS," using lettering not less than 3 inches high and with minimum 0.375-inch strokes.

1. Locate in accessible concealed floor, floor-ceiling, or attic space at 15 feet from end of wall and at intervals not exceeding 30 feet.

B. Penetration Identification: Identify each penetration firestopping system with legible metal or plastic labels. Attach labels permanently to surfaces adjacent to and within 6 inches of penetration firestopping system edge so labels are visible to anyone seeking to remove penetrating items or firestopping systems. Use mechanical fasteners or self-adhering-type labels with adhesives capable of permanently bonding labels to surfaces on which labels are placed. Include the following information on labels:

1. The words "Warning - Penetration Firestopping - Do Not Disturb. Notify Building Management of Any Damage."

2. Contractor's name, address, and phone number. 3. Designation of applicable testing and inspecting agency. 4. Date of installation. 5. Manufacturer's name. 6. Installer's name.


A. Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections according to ASTM E 2174.

B. Where deficiencies are found or penetration firestopping system is damaged or removed because of testing, repair or replace penetration firestopping system to comply with requirements.

C. Proceed with enclosing penetration firestopping systems with other construction only after inspection reports are issued and installations comply with requirements.

3.6 CLEANING AND PROTECTION

A. Clean off excess fill materials adjacent to openings as the Work progresses by methods and with cleaning materials that are approved in writing by penetration firestopping system manufacturers and that do not damage materials in which openings occur.

B. Provide final protection and maintain conditions during and after installation that ensure that penetration firestopping systems are without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. If, despite such protection, damage or deterioration occurs, immediately cut out and remove damaged or deteriorated penetration firestopping material and install new materials to produce systems complying with specified requirements.

3.7 PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING SYSTEMS

A. Penetration Firestopping Systems: Systems that resist spread of fire, passage of smoke and other gases, and maintain original fire-resistance rating of construction penetrated. Penetration


firestopping systems shall be compatible with one another, with the substrates forming openings, and with penetrating items if any.


a. 3M Fire Protection Products. b. A/D Fire Protection Systems Inc. c. Construction Solutions. d. Grabber Construction Products. e. Hilti, Inc. f. HOLDRITE. g. NUCO Inc. h. Passive Fire Protection Partners. i. RectorSeal. j. Specified Technologies, Inc. k. STC Architectural Products.














31-18-01/DHH Bathroom Renovations 07 92 00 - 1 JOINT SEALANTS March 18, 2021

SECTION 07 92 00 - JOINT SEALANTS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Silicone joint sealants. 2. Urethane joint sealants. 3. Latex joint sealants. 4. Preformed joint sealants. 5. Acoustical joint sealants.

1.2 PRECONSTRUCTION TESTING

A. Preconstruction Field-Adhesion Testing: Before installing sealants, field test their adhesion to Project joint substrates. Test joint sealants according to Method A, Field-Applied Sealant Joint Hand Pull Tab, in Appendix X1 in ASTM C 1193 or Method A, Tail Procedure, in ASTM C 1521.


A. Product Data: For each joint-sealant product indicated.

B. Samples: For each kind and color of joint sealant required.

C. Joint-Sealant Schedule: Include the following information:

1. Joint-sealant application, joint location, and designation. 2. Joint-sealant manufacturer and product name. 3. Joint-sealant formulation. 4. Joint-sealant color.


A. Product test reports.

B. Preconstruction compatibility and adhesion test reports.

C. Preconstruction field-adhesion test reports.

D. Field-adhesion test reports.

E. Warranties.



A. Testing Agency Qualifications: Qualified according to ASTM C 1021 to conduct the testing indicated.

B. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.

1.6 WARRANTY

A. Special Installer's Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which Installer agrees to repair or replace joint sealants that do not comply with performance and other requirements specified in this Section within specified warranty period.

1. Warranty Period: 5 years from date of Substantial Completion.

B. Special Manufacturer's Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which joint-sealant manufacturer agrees to furnish joint sealants to repair or replace those that do not comply with performance and other requirements specified in this Section within specified warranty period.


PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS, GENERAL

A. Liquid-Applied Joint Sealants: Comply with ASTM C 920 and other requirements indicated for each liquid-applied joint sealant specified, including those referencing ASTM C 920 classifications for type, grade, class, and uses related to exposure and joint substrates.

1. Suitability for Immersion in Liquids. Where sealants are indicated for Use I for joints that will be continuously immersed in liquids, provide products that have undergone testing according to ASTM C 1247. Liquid used for testing sealants is deionized water, unless otherwise indicated.

B. Stain-Test-Response Characteristics: Where sealants are specified to be nonstaining to porous substrates, provide products that have undergone testing according to ASTM C 1248 and have not stained porous joint substrates indicated for Project.

2.2 SILICONE JOINT SEALANTS

A. Mildew-Resistant Silicone Joint Sealant: ASTM C 920.

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

a. BASF Building Systems. b. Dow Corning Corporation. c. GE Advanced Materials - Silicones. d. May National Associates, Inc. e. Pecora Corporation.

http://www.specagent.com/LookUp/?uid=123456799288&mf=04&src=wd






f. Polymeric Systems, Inc. g. Schnee-Morehead, Inc. h. Sika Corporation; Construction Products Division. i. Tremco Incorporated.

2. Type: Single component (S). 3. Grade: nonsag (NS). 4. Class: 100/50. 5. Uses Related to Exposure: Nontraffic (NT).

2.3 URETHANE JOINT SEALANTS

A. Urethane Joint Sealant: ASTM C 920.


a. BASF Building Systems. b. Bostik, Inc. c. Lymtal, International, Inc. d. May National Associates, Inc. e. Pacific Polymers International, Inc. f. Pecora Corporation. g. Polymeric Systems, Inc. h. Schnee-Morehead, Inc. i. Sika Corporation; Construction Products Division. j. Tremco Incorporated.

2. Type: multicomponent (M). 3. Grade: nonsag (NS). 4. Class: 50. 5. Uses Related to Exposure: Nontraffic (NT).

2.4 LATEX JOINT SEALANTS

A. Latex Joint Sealant: Acrylic latex or siliconized acrylic latex, ASTM C 834, Type OP, Grade NF.


a. BASF Building Systems. b. Bostik, Inc. c. May National Associates, Inc. d. Pecora Corporation. e. Schnee-Morehead, Inc. f. Tremco Incorporated.






















2.5 ACOUSTICAL JOINT SEALANTS

A. Acoustical Joint Sealant: Manufacturer's standard nonsag, paintable, nonstaining latex sealant complying with ASTM C 834. Product effectively reduces airborne sound transmission through perimeter joints and openings in building construction as demonstrated by testing representative assemblies according to ASTM E 90.


a. Pecora Corporation . b. USG Corporation.

2.6 JOINT SEALANT BACKING

A. Cylindrical Sealant Backings: ASTM C 1330, Type C (closed-cell material with a surface skin), and of size and density to control sealant depth and otherwise contribute to producing optimum sealant performance.

B. Bond-Breaker Tape: Polyethylene tape or other plastic tape recommended by sealant manufacturer.

2.7 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS

A. Primer: Material recommended by joint-sealant manufacturer where required for adhesion of sealant to joint substrates indicated, as determined from preconstruction joint-sealant-substrate tests and field tests.

B. Cleaners for Nonporous Surfaces: Chemical cleaners acceptable to manufacturers of sealants and sealant backing materials.

C. Masking Tape: Nonstaining, nonabsorbent material compatible with joint sealants and surfaces adjacent to joints.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Surface Cleaning of Joints: Clean out joints immediately before installing joint sealants to comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written instructions.

1. Remove laitance and form-release agents from concrete. 2. Clean nonporous joint substrate surfaces with chemical cleaners or other means that do

not stain, harm substrates, or leave residues capable of interfering with adhesion of joint sealants.

B. Joint Priming: Prime joint substrates where recommended by joint-sealant manufacturer or as indicated by preconstruction joint-sealant-substrate tests or prior experience. Apply primer to comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written instructions. Confine primers to areas of joint-sealant bond; do not allow spillage or migration onto adjoining surfaces.




C. Masking Tape: Use masking tape where required to prevent contact of sealant or primer with adjoining surfaces that otherwise would be permanently stained or damaged by such contact or by cleaning methods required to remove sealant smears. Remove tape immediately after tooling without disturbing joint seal.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Sealant Installation Standard: Comply with recommendations in ASTM C 1193 for use of joint sealants as applicable to materials, applications, and conditions indicated.

B. Install sealant backings of kind indicated to support sealants during application and at position required to produce cross-sectional shapes and depths of installed sealants relative to joint widths that allow optimum sealant movement capability.

1. Do not leave gaps between ends of sealant backings. 2. Do not stretch, twist, puncture, or tear sealant backings. 3. Remove absorbent sealant backings that have become wet before sealant application

and replace them with dry materials.

C. Install bond-breaker tape behind sealants where sealant backings are not used between sealants and backs of joints.

D. Install sealants using proven techniques that comply with the following and at the same time backings are installed:

1. Place sealants so they directly contact and fully wet joint substrates. 2. Completely fill recesses in each joint configuration. 3. Produce uniform, cross-sectional shapes and depths relative to joint widths that allow

optimum sealant movement capability.

E. Tooling of Nonsag Sealants: Immediately after sealant application and before skinning or curing begins, tool sealants according to requirements specified in subparagraphs below to form smooth, uniform beads of configuration indicated; to eliminate air pockets; and to ensure contact and adhesion of sealant with sides of joint.

1. Remove excess sealant from surfaces adjacent to joints. 2. Use tooling agents that are approved in writing by sealant manufacturer and that do not

discolor sealants or adjacent surfaces. 3. Provide concave joint profile per Figure 8A in ASTM C 1193, unless otherwise indicated.

F. Acoustical Sealant Installation: Comply with ASTM C 919 and with manufacturer's written recommendations.

G. Clean off excess sealant or sealant smears adjacent to joints as the Work progresses by methods and with cleaning materials approved in writing by manufacturers of joint sealants and of products in which joints occur.


A. Field-Adhesion Testing: Field test joint-sealant adhesion to joint substrates as follows:

1. Extent of Testing: Test completed and cured sealant joints as follows:


a. Perform 5 tests for the first 1000 feet of joint length for each kind of sealant and joint substrate.

b. Perform 1 test for each 1000 feet of joint length thereafter or 1 test per each floor per elevation.

2. Test Method: Test joint sealants according to Method A, Field-Applied Sealant Joint Hand Pull Tab, in Appendix X1 in ASTM C 1193 or Method A, Tail Procedure, in ASTM C 1521.

B. Evaluation of Field-Adhesion Test Results: Sealants not evidencing adhesive failure from testing or noncompliance with other indicated requirements will be considered satisfactory. Remove sealants that fail to adhere to joint substrates during testing or to comply with other requirements. Retest failed applications until test results prove sealants comply with indicated requirements.

3.4 JOINT-SEALANT SCHEDULE

A. Joint-Sealant Application: Exterior joints in horizontal traffic surfaces.

1. Joint Locations:

a. Isolation and contraction joints in cast-in-place concrete slabs. b. Other joints as indicated.

2. Joint Sealant: Urethane. 3. Joint-Sealant Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of colors.

B. Joint-Sealant Application: Exterior joints in vertical surfaces and horizontal nontraffic surfaces.

1. Joint Locations:

a. Construction joints in cast-in-place concrete. b. Joints between plant-precast architectural concrete units. c. Control and expansion joints in unit masonry. d. Joints between metal panels. e. Joints between different materials listed above. f. Perimeter joints between materials listed above and frames of doors, windows and

louvers. g. Control and expansion joints in ceilings and other overhead surfaces. h. Other joints as indicated.


C. Joint-Sealant Application: Interior joints in horizontal traffic surfaces.

1. Joint Locations:

a. Isolation joints in cast-in-place concrete slabs. b. Other joints as indicated.



D. Joint-Sealant Application: Interior joints in vertical surfaces and horizontal nontraffic surfaces.

1. Joint Locations:

a. Control and expansion joints on exposed interior surfaces of exterior walls. b. Perimeter joints of exterior openings where indicated. c. Tile control and expansion joints. d. Vertical joints on exposed surfaces of interior unit masonry walls. e. Joints on underside of plant-precast structural concrete planks. f. Perimeter joints between interior wall surfaces and frames of interior doors and

windows. g. Other joints as indicated.

2. Joint Sealant: Latex. 3. Joint-Sealant Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of colors.

E. Joint-Sealant Application: Mildew-resistant interior joints in vertical surfaces and horizontal nontraffic surfaces.

1. Joint Sealant Location:

a. Joints between plumbing fixtures and adjoining walls, floors, and counters. b. Tile control and expansion joints where indicated. c. Other joints as indicated.

2. Joint Sealant: Silicone (mildew resistant). 3. Joint-Sealant Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of colors.

F. Joint-Sealant Application: Interior acoustical joints in vertical surfaces and horizontal nontraffic surfaces.

1. Joint Location:

a. Acoustical joints where indicated. b. Other joints as indicated.

2. Joint Sealant: Acoustical. 3. Joint-Sealant Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.


31-18-01/DHH Bathroom Renovations 08 12 13 - 1 HOLLOW METAL FRAMES March 18, 2021

SECTION 08 12 13 - HOLLOW METAL FRAMES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes hollow-metal frames.

B. Related Requirements:

1. Section 08 14 16 "Flush Wood Doors" for wood doors installed in hollow-metal frames.

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. Minimum Thickness: Minimum thickness of base metal without coatings according to NAAMM-HMMA 803 or SDI A250.8.



B. Shop Drawings: Include elevations, frame profiles, metal thicknesses, preparations for hardware, and other details.

C. Schedule: Prepared by or under the supervision of supplier, using same reference numbers for details and openings as those on Drawings.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

1. Amweld International, LLC. 2. Apex Industries, Inc. 3. Ceco Door; ASSA ABLOY. 4. Commercial Door & Hardware Inc. 5. Concept Frames, Inc. 6. Curries Company; ASSA ABLOY. 7. Custom Metal Products. 8. Daybar Industries, Ltd. 9. DE LA FONTAINE.












10. Deansteel Manufacturing Company, Inc. 11. DKS Steel Door & Frame Systems, Inc. 12. Door Components, Inc. 13. Fleming Door Products Ltd.; Assa Abloy Group Company. 14. Gensteel Doors, Inc. 15. Greensteel Industries, Ltd. 16. HMF Express, LLC. 17. Hollow Metal Inc. 18. Hollow Metal Xpress. 19. JR Metal Frames Manufacturing, Inc. 20. Karpen Steel Custom Doors & Frames. 21. L.I.F. Industries, Inc. 22. LaForce, Inc. 23. Megamet Industries, Inc. 24. Mesker Door Inc. 25. Michbi Doors Inc. 26. MPI Group, LLC (The).

2.2 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS

A. Fire-Rated Assemblies: Complying with NFPA 80 and listed and labeled by a qualified testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction for fire-protection ratings and temperature-rise limits indicated, based on testing at positive pressure according to NFPA 252 or UL 10C.

1. Smoke- and Draft-Control Assemblies: Provide an assembly with gaskets listed and labeled for smoke and draft control by a qualified testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, based on testing according to UL 1784 and installed in compliance with NFPA 105.

B. Fire-Rated, Borrowed-Lite Assemblies: Complying with NFPA 80 and listed and labeled by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction for fire-protection ratings indicated, based on testing according to NFPA 257 or UL 9.

2.3 INTERIOR FRAMES

A. Standard-Duty Frames: SDI A250.8, Level 1. At locations indicated in the Door and Frame Schedule.

1. Physical Performance: Level C according to SDI A250.4. 2. Materials: Uncoated, cold-rolled steel sheet, minimum thickness of 0.042 inch. 3. Construction: Face welded. 4. Exposed Finish: Prime.

2.4 FRAME ANCHORS

A. Jamb Anchors:

1. Masonry Type: Adjustable strap-and-stirrup or T-shaped anchors to suit frame size, not less than 0.042 inch thick, with corrugated or perforated straps not less than 2 inches wide by 10 inches long; or wire anchors not less than 0.177 inch thick.



















2. Postinstalled Expansion Type for In-Place Concrete or Masonry: Minimum 3/8-inch-diameter bolts with expansion shields or inserts. Provide pipe spacer from frame to wall, with throat reinforcement plate, welded to frame at each anchor location.

B. Floor Anchors: Formed from same material as frames, minimum thickness of 0.042 inch.

2.5 MATERIALS

A. Cold-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B.

B. Hot-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1011/A 1011M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B.

C. Metallic-Coated Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B.

D. Frame Anchors: ASTM A 879/A 879M, Commercial Steel (CS), 04Z coating designation; mill phosphatized.

1. For anchors built into exterior walls, steel sheet complying with ASTM A 1008/A 1008M or ASTM A 1011/A 1011M, hot-dip galvanized according to ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class B.

E. Inserts, Bolts, and Fasteners: Hot-dip galvanized according to ASTM A 153/A 153M.

F. Power-Actuated Fasteners in Concrete: From corrosion-resistant materials.

G. Grout: ASTM C 476, except with a maximum slump of 4 inches, as measured according to ASTM C 143/C 143M.

H. Mineral-Fiber Insulation: ASTM C 665, Type I (blankets without membrane facing).

I. Glazing: Comply with requirements in Section 08 80 00 "Glazing."

J. Bituminous Coating: Cold-applied asphalt mastic, compounded for 15-mil dry film thickness per coat.

2.6 FABRICATION

A. Fabricate hollow-metal work to be rigid and free of defects, warp, or buckle. Accurately form metal to required sizes and profiles, with minimum radius for metal thickness. Where practical, fit and assemble units in manufacturer's plant. To ensure proper assembly at Project site, clearly identify work that cannot be permanently factory assembled before shipment.

B. Hollow-Metal Frames: Where frames are fabricated in sections due to shipping or handling limitations, provide alignment plates or angles at each joint, fabricated of same thickness metal as frames.

1. Sidelite and Transom Bar Frames: Provide closed tubular members with no visible face seams or joints, fabricated from same material as door frame. Fasten members at crossings and to jambs by butt welding.

2. Provide countersunk, flat- or oval-head exposed screws and bolts for exposed fasteners unless otherwise indicated.

3. Grout Guards: Weld guards to frame at back of hardware mortises in frames to be grouted.


4. Floor Anchors: Weld anchors to bottoms of jambs with at least four spot welds per anchor; however, for slip-on drywall frames, provide anchor clips or countersunk holes at bottoms of jambs.

5. Jamb Anchors: Provide number and spacing of anchors as follows:

a. Masonry Type: Locate anchors not more than 16 inches from top and bottom of frame. Space anchors not more than 32 inches o.c., to match coursing.

b. Stud-Wall Type: Locate anchors not more than 18 inches from top and bottom of frame. Space anchors not more than 32 inches o.c.

c. Compression Type: Not less than two anchors in each frame. d. Postinstalled Expansion Type: Locate anchors not more than 6 inches from top

and bottom of frame. Space anchors not more than 26 inches o.c.

6. Door Silencers: Except on weather-stripped frames, drill stops to receive door silencers.

C. Hardware Preparation: Factory prepare hollow-metal work to receive templated mortised hardware; include cutouts, reinforcement, mortising, drilling, and tapping according to SDI A250.6, the Door Hardware Schedule, and templates.

1. Reinforce frames to receive nontemplated, mortised, and surface-mounted hardware. 2. Comply with applicable requirements in SDI A250.6 and BHMA A156.115 for preparation

of hollow-metal work for hardware.

D. Stops and Moldings: Provide stops and moldings around glazed lites and louvers where indicated. Form corners of stops and moldings with butted or mitered hairline joints.

1. Single Glazed Lites: Provide fixed stops and moldings welded on secure side of hollow-metal work.

2. Multiple Glazed Lites: Provide fixed and removable stops and moldings so that each glazed lite is capable of being removed independently.

3. Provide fixed frame moldings on outside of exterior and on secure side of interior frames. 4. Provide loose stops and moldings on inside of hollow-metal work. 5. Coordinate rabbet width between fixed and removable stops with glazing and installation

types indicated.

2.7 STEEL FINISHES

A. Prime Finish: Clean, pretreat, and apply manufacturer's standard primer.

1. Shop Primer: SDI A250.10.

2.8 ACCESSORIES

A. Mullions and Transom Bars: Join to adjacent members by welding or rigid mechanical anchors.

B. Grout Guards: Formed from same material as frames, not less than 0.016 inch thick.


PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Hollow-Metal Frames: Install hollow-metal frames for doors, transoms, sidelites, borrowed lites, and other openings, of size and profile indicated. Comply with SDI A250.11 or NAAMM-HMMA 840 as required by standards specified.

1. Set frames accurately in position; plumbed, aligned, and braced securely until permanent anchors are set. After wall construction is complete, remove temporary braces, leaving surfaces smooth and undamaged.

a. At fire-rated openings, install frames according to NFPA 80. b. Where frames are fabricated in sections because of shipping or handling

limitations, field splice at approved locations by welding face joint continuously; grind, fill, dress, and make splice smooth, flush, and invisible on exposed faces.

c. Install frames with removable stops located on secure side of opening. d. Install door silencers in frames before grouting. e. Remove temporary braces necessary for installation only after frames have been

properly set and secured. f. Check plumb, square, and twist of frames as walls are constructed. Shim as

necessary to comply with installation tolerances. g. Field apply bituminous coating to backs of frames that will be filled with grout

containing antifreezing agents.

2. Floor Anchors: Provide floor anchors for each jamb and mullion that extends to floor, and secure with postinstalled expansion anchors.

a. Floor anchors may be set with power-actuated fasteners instead of postinstalled expansion anchors if so indicated and approved on Shop Drawings.

3. Metal-Stud Partitions: Solidly pack mineral-fiber insulation inside frames. 4. Masonry Walls: Coordinate installation of frames to allow for solidly filling space between

frames and masonry with grout. 5. Concrete Walls: Solidly fill space between frames and concrete with mineral-fiber

insulation. 6. In-Place Concrete or Masonry Construction: Secure frames in place with postinstalled

expansion anchors. Countersink anchors, and fill and make smooth, flush, and invisible on exposed faces.

7. In-Place Metal or Wood-Stud Partitions: Secure slip-on drywall frames in place according to manufacturer's written instructions.

8. Installation Tolerances: Adjust hollow-metal door frames for squareness, alignment, twist, and plumb to the following tolerances:

a. Squareness: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at door rabbet on a line 90 degrees from jamb perpendicular to frame head.

b. Alignment: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at jambs on a horizontal line parallel to plane of wall.

c. Twist: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at opposite face corners of jambs on parallel lines, and perpendicular to plane of wall.

d. Plumbness: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at jambs at floor.


3.2 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING

A. Final Adjustments: Remove and replace defective work, including hollow-metal work that is warped, bowed, or otherwise unacceptable.

B. Remove grout and other bonding material from hollow-metal work immediately after installation.

C. Prime-Coat Touchup: Immediately after erection, sand smooth rusted or damaged areas of prime coat and apply touchup of compatible air-drying, rust-inhibitive primer.

D. Metallic-Coated Surface Touchup: Clean abraded areas and repair with galvanizing repair paint according to manufacturer's written instructions.

E. Touchup Painting: Cleaning and touchup painting of abraded areas of paint are specified in painting Sections.


31-18-01/DHH Bathroom Renovations 08 14 16 - 1 FLUSH WOOD DOORS March 18, 2021

SECTION 08 14 16 - FLUSH WOOD DOORS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Solid-core doors with wood-veneer faces. 2. Factory finishing flush wood doors. 3. Factory fitting flush wood doors to frames and factory machining for hardware.


A. Product Data: For each type of door. Include factory-finishing specifications.

B. Shop Drawings: Indicate location, size, and hand of each door; elevation of each kind of door; construction details not covered in Product Data; and the following:

1. Dimensions and locations of blocking. 2. Dimensions and locations of mortises and holes for hardware. 3. Dimensions and locations of cutouts. 4. Undercuts. 5. Requirements for veneer matching. 6. Doors to be factory finished and finish requirements. 7. Fire-protection ratings for fire-rated doors.

C. Samples: For factory-finished doors.


A. Quality Standard Compliance Certificates: AWI Quality Certification Program certificates.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Algoma Hardwoods, Inc. 2. Eggers Industries. 3. Graham Wood Doors; ASSA ABLOY Group company. 4. Marshfield DoorSystems, Inc. 5. Mohawk Flush Doors, Inc. 6. Oshkosh Door Company.









2.2 FLUSH WOOD DOORS, GENERAL

A. Quality Standard: In addition to requirements specified, comply with AWI's, AWMAC's, and WI's "Architectural Woodwork Standards."

1. Provide AWI Quality Certification Labels indicating that doors comply with requirements of grades specified.

B. WDMA I.S.1-A Performance Grade: 1. Extra Heavy Duty: Unless otherwise indicated.

C. Fire-Rated Wood Doors: Doors complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and labeled by a qualified testing agency, for fire-protection ratings indicated, based on testing at positive pressure according to NFPA 252 or UL 10C.

1. Cores: Provide core specified or mineral core as needed to provide fire-protection rating indicated.

2. Edge Construction: Provide edge construction with intumescent seals concealed by outer stile. Comply with specified requirements for exposed edges.

3. Pairs: Provide fire-retardant stiles that are listed and labeled for applications indicated without formed-steel edges and astragals. Provide stiles with concealed intumescent seals. Comply with specified requirements for exposed edges.

D. Smoke- and Draft-Control Door Assemblies: Listed and labeled for smoke and draft control, based on testing according to UL 1784.

E. Particleboard-Core Doors:

1. Particleboard: ANSI A208.1, Grade LD-1 or Grade LD-2. 2. Blocking: Provide wood blocking in particleboard-core doors as needed to eliminate

through-bolting hardware.

2.3 VENEER-FACED DOORS FOR TRANSPARENT FINISH

A. Interior Solid-Core Doors:

1. Grade: Custom (Grade A faces). 2. Species: Select red oak. 3. Cut: Plain sliced (flat sliced). 4. Match between Veneer Leaves: Book match. 5. Assembly of Veneer Leaves on Door Faces: Running match. 6. Pair and Set Match: Provide for doors hung in same opening. 7. Core: Particleboard. 8. Construction: Five or seven plies. Stiles and rails are bonded to core, then entire unit is

abrasive planed before veneering.

2.4 FABRICATION

A. Factory fit doors to suit frame-opening sizes indicated. Comply with clearance requirements of referenced quality standard for fitting unless otherwise indicated.

1. Comply with NFPA 80 requirements for fire-rated doors.


B. Factory machine doors for hardware that is not surface applied.

C. Openings: Factory cut and trim openings through doors. 1. Louvers: Factory install louvers in prepared openings.

2.5 FACTORY FINISHING

A. General: Comply with referenced quality standard for factory finishing. Complete fabrication, including fitting doors for openings and machining for hardware that is not surface applied, before finishing.

1. Finish faces, all four edges, edges of cutouts, and mortises. Stains and fillers may be omitted on top and bottom edges, edges of cutouts, and mortises.

B. Factory finish doors that are indicated to receive transparent finish.

C. Transparent Finish:

1. Grade: Custom. 2. Finish: AWI's, AWMAC's, and WI's "Architectural Woodwork Standards" System 11,

catalyzed polyurethane. 3. Finish: WDMA TR-6 catalyzed polyurethane. 4. Staining: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. 5. Effect: Open-grain finish. 6. Sheen: Satin.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Hardware: For installation, see Section 08 71 00 "Door Hardware."

B. Installation Instructions: Install doors to comply with manufacturer's written instructions and referenced quality standard, and as indicated.

1. Install fire-rated doors according to NFPA 80. 2. Install smoke- and draft-control doors according to NFPA 105.

C. Job-Fitted Doors: Align and fit doors in frames with uniform clearances and bevels as indicated below; do not trim stiles and rails in excess of limits set by manufacturer or permitted for fire-rated doors. Machine doors for hardware. Seal edges of doors, edges of cutouts, and mortises after fitting and machining.

1. Clearances: Provide 1/8 inch at heads, jambs, and between pairs of doors. Provide 1/8 inch from bottom of door to top of decorative floor finish or covering unless otherwise indicated. Where threshold is shown or scheduled, provide 1/4 inch from bottom of door to top of threshold unless otherwise indicated.

a. Comply with NFPA 80 for fire-rated doors.

D. Factory-Fitted Doors: Align in frames for uniform clearance at each edge.


E. Factory-Finished Doors: Restore finish before installation if fitting or machining is required at Project site.


31-18-01/DHH Bathroom Renovations 08 51 13 - 1 ALUMINUM WINDOWS March 18, 2021

SECTION 08 51 13 - ALUMINUM WINDOWS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes aluminum windows for exterior locations.





B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, hardware, accessories, insect screens, operational clearances, and details of installation, including anchor, flashing, and sealant installation.

C. Samples: For each exposed product and for each color specified.



B. Sample warranties.

1.5 WARRANTY

A. Manufacturer's Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace aluminum windows that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.

1. Warranty Period:

a. Frame and Sash: 5 years from date of Substantial Completion. b. Glazing Units: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion. c. Aluminum Finish: 5 years from date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 WINDOW PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Product Standard: Comply with AAMA/WDMA/CSA 101/I.S.2/A440 for definitions and minimum standards of performance, materials, components, accessories, and fabrication unless more stringent requirements are indicated.


1. Window Certification: AAMA certified with label attached to each window.

B. Performance Class and Grade: AAMA/WDMA/CSA 101/I.S.2/A440 as follows:

1. Minimum Performance Class: LC. 2. Minimum Performance Grade: 55.

C. Thermal Transmittance: NFRC 100 maximum whole-window U-factor of 0.45 Btu/sq. ft.

D. Solar Heat-Gain Coefficient (SHGC): NFRC 200 maximum whole-window SHGC of 0.20.

E. Condensation-Resistance Factor (CRF): Provide aluminum windows tested for thermal performance according to AAMA 1503, showing a CRF of 43.

F. Thermal Movements: Provide aluminum windows, including anchorage, that allow for thermal movements resulting from the following maximum change (range) in ambient and surface temperatures by preventing buckling, opening of joints, overstressing of components, failure of joint sealants, failure of connections, and other detrimental effects. Base engineering calculation on surface temperatures of materials due to both solar heat gain and nighttime-sky heat loss.

1. Temperature Change: 120 deg F ambient; 180 deg F material surfaces.

2.2 SINGLE HUNG ALUMINUM WINDOWS

A. Basis of Design: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide 5900 By Gerkin Windows and Doors or a comparable product by one of the following:

1. JELD-WEN: Premium Atlantic Aluminum Series.

B. Types: As indicated on Drawings.

C. Frames and Sashes: Aluminum extrusions complying with AAMA/WDMA/CSA 101/I.S.2/A440.

1. Thermally Improved Construction: Fabricate frames, sashes, and muntins with an integral, concealed, low-conductance thermal barrier located between exterior materials and window members exposed on interior side in a manner that eliminates direct metal-to-metal contact.

D. Insulating-Glass Units: ASTM E2190.

1. Glass: ASTM C1036, Type 1, Class 1, q3.

a. Tint: Clear - Frosted. b. Kind: Fully tempered.

2. Lites: Two. 3. Filling: Fill space between glass lites with argon. 4. Low-E Coating: Sputtered on third surface.

E. Hardware, General: Provide manufacturer's standard corrosion-resistant hardware sized to accommodate sash weight and dimensions.

1. Exposed Hardware Color and Finish: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.


F. Hung Window Hardware:

1. Counterbalancing Mechanism: AAMA 902. 2. Locks and Latches: Operated from the inside only. 3. Tilt Latch: Releasing latch allows sash to pivot about horizontal axis.

G. Weather Stripping: Provide full-perimeter weather stripping for each operable sash unless otherwise indicated.

H. Fasteners: Noncorrosive and compatible with window members, trim, hardware, anchors, and other components.

1. Exposed Fasteners: Do not use exposed fasteners to greatest extent possible. For application of hardware, use fasteners that match finish hardware being fastened.

2.3 ACCESSORIES

A. Dividers (False Muntins): Provide extruded-aluminum divider grilles in designs indicated for each sash lite.

1. Type: Permanently located between insulating-glass lites. 2. Pattern: As indicated on Drawings. 3. Profile: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.

B. Subsills: Thermally broken, extruded-aluminum subsills in configurations indicated on Drawings.

C. Column Covers: Extruded-aluminum profiles in sizes and configurations indicated on Drawings.

D. Interior Trim: Extruded-aluminum profiles in sizes and configurations indicated on Drawings.

E. Panning Trim: Extruded-aluminum profiles in sizes and configurations indicated on Drawings.

F. Receptor System: Two-piece, snap-together, thermally broken, extruded-aluminum receptor system that anchors windows in place.

2.4 INSECT SCREENS

A. General: Fabricate insect screens to integrate with window frame. Provide screen for each operable exterior sash. Screen wickets are not permitted.

1. Type and Location: Full, outside for double-hung and half, outside for single-hung sashes.

B. Aluminum Frames: Complying with SMA 1004 or SMA 1201.

C. Glass-Fiber Mesh Fabric: 18-by-18 or 18-by-16 mesh of PVC-coated, glass-fiber threads; woven and fused to form a fabric mesh resistant to corrosion, shrinkage, stretch, impact damage, and weather deterioration. Comply with ASTM D3656/D3656M.

1. Mesh Color: Manufacturer's standard.


2.5 FABRICATION

A. Fabricate aluminum windows in sizes indicated. Include a complete system for assembling components and anchoring windows.

B. Glaze aluminum windows in the factory.

C. Weather strip each operable sash to provide weathertight installation.

D. Weep Holes: Provide weep holes and internal passages to conduct infiltrating water to exterior.

E. Provide water-shed members above side-hinged sashes and similar lines of natural water penetration.

F. Mullions: Provide mullions and cover plates, matching window units, complete with anchors for support to structure and installation of window units. Allow for erection tolerances and provide for movement of window units due to thermal expansion and building deflections. Provide mullions and cover plates capable of withstanding design wind loads of window units.

G. Complete fabrication, assembly, finishing, hardware application, and other work in the factory to greatest extent possible. Disassemble components only as necessary for shipment and installation.

2.6 ALUMINUM FINISHES

A. Finish designations prefixed by AA comply with the system established by the Aluminum Association for designating aluminum finishes.

B. Class I, Color Anodic Finish: AA-M12C22A42/A44 (Mechanical Finish: nonspecular as fabricated; Chemical Finish: etched, medium matte; Anodic Coating: Architectural Class I, integrally colored or electrolytically deposited color coating 0.018 mm or thicker) complying with AAMA 611.

1. Color: Dark bronze.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing windows, hardware, accessories, and other components. For installation procedures and requirements not addressed in manufacturer's written instructions, comply with installation requirements in ASTM E2112.

B. Install windows level, plumb, square, true to line, without distortion or impeding thermal movement, anchored securely in place to structural support, and in proper relation to wall flashing and other adjacent construction to produce weathertight construction.

C. Install windows and components to drain condensation, water penetrating joints, and moisture migrating within windows to the exterior.

D. Separate aluminum and other corrodible surfaces from sources of corrosion or electrolytic action at points of contact with other materials.


E. Adjust operating sashes and hardware for a tight fit at contact points and weather stripping for smooth operation and weathertight closure.

F. Clean exposed surfaces immediately after installing windows. Avoid damaging protective coatings and finishes. Remove excess sealants, glazing materials, dirt, and other substances.

G. Remove and replace glass that has been broken, chipped, cracked, abraded, or damaged during construction period.


31-18-01/DHH Bathroom Renovations 08 71 00 - 1 DOOR HARDWARE March 18, 2021

SECTION 08 71 00 - DOOR HARDWARE

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Mechanical door hardware for the following:

a. Swinging doors.





B. Samples: For each exposed product in each finish specified.

C. Door hardware schedule.


A. Sample warranty.


A. Maintenance data.

1.6 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS

A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.


A. Installer Qualifications: Supplier of products and an employer of workers trained and approved by product manufacturers and of an Architectural Hardware Consultant who is available during the course of the Work to consult Contractor, Architect, and Owner about door hardware and keying. 1. Scheduling Responsibility: Preparation of door hardware and keying schedule. 2. Engineering Responsibility: Preparation of data for electrified door hardware, including

Shop Drawings, based on testing and engineering analysis of manufacturer's standard units in assemblies similar to those indicated for this Project.


B. Architectural Hardware Consultant Qualifications: A person who is experienced in providing consulting services for door hardware installations that are comparable in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project and who is currently certified by DHI as an Architectural Hardware Consultant (AHC) or Architectural Openings Consultant (AOC).

1.8 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of door hardware that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Warranty Period: Three years from date of Substantial Completion unless otherwise

indicated below: a. Manual Closers: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Fire-Rated Door Assemblies: Where fire-rated doors are indicated, provide door hardware complying with NFPA 80 that is listed and labeled by a qualified testing agency, for fire-protection ratings indicated, based on testing at positive pressure according to NFPA 252 or UL 10C.

B. Smoke- and Draft-Control Door Assemblies: Where smoke- and draft-control door assemblies are required, provide door hardware that complies with requirements of assemblies tested according to UL 1784 and installed in compliance with NFPA 105. 1. Air Leakage Rate: Maximum air leakage of 0.3 cfm/sq. ft. at the tested pressure

differential of 0.3-inch wg of water.

C. Means of Egress Doors: Latches do not require more than 15 lbf to release the latch. Locks do not require use of a key, tool, or special knowledge for operation.

D. Accessibility Requirements: For door hardware on doors in an accessible route, comply with ICC A117.1 and ADAAG.

2.2 SCHEDULED DOOR HARDWARE

A. Provide products for each door that comply with requirements indicated in Part 2 and door hardware schedule. 1. Door hardware is scheduled on Drawings.

2.3 HINGES

A. Hinges: BHMA A156.1. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the

following: a. Allegion plc. b. Baldwin Hardware Corporation. c. Bommer Industries, Inc. d. Cal-Royal Products, Inc. e. Design Hardware.








f. Don-Jo Mfg., Inc. g. Hager Companies. h. Lawrence Hardware Inc. i. McKinney Products Company; an ASSA ABLOY Group company. j. PBB, Inc.

2.4 MECHANICAL LOCKS AND LATCHES

A. Lock Functions: As indicated in door hardware schedule.

B. Lock Throw: Comply with testing requirements for length of bolts required for labeled fire doors, and as follows: 1. Mortise Locks: Minimum 3/4-inch latchbolt throw.

C. Lock Backset: 2-3/4 inches unless otherwise indicated.

D. Lock Trim: 1. Levers: Lever handle with through bolted trim. 2. Escutcheons (Roses): Round rose 2-9/16” to 3 -3/8” or largest available size. 3. Dummy Trim: Match lever lock trim and escutcheons.

E. Strikes: Provide manufacturer's standard strike for each lock bolt or latchbolt complying with requirements indicated for applicable lock or latch and with strike box and curved lip extended to protect frame; finished to match lock or latch. 1. Flat-Lip Strikes: For locks with three-piece antifriction latchbolts, as recommended by

manufacturer. 2. Extra-Long-Lip Strikes: For locks used on frames with applied wood casing trim. 3. Aluminum-Frame Strike Box: Manufacturer's special strike box fabricated for aluminum

framing. 4. Rabbet Front and Strike: Provide on locksets for rabbeted meeting stiles.

F. Mortise Locks: BHMA A156.13; Operational Grade 1 Security Grade 1; stamped steel case with steel or brass parts; Series 4000. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the

following: a. Best Access Systems; Stanley Security Solutions, Inc.; 40H Series. b. Corbin Russwin, Inc.; an ASSA ABLOY Group company.; ML2000 Series. c. Schlage an Allegion Company; L900 Series.

2.5 LOCK CYLINDERS

A. Lock Cylinders: Best 7-pin interchangeable core provided by Owner.

B. Construction Cores: Provide construction cores that are replaceable by permanent cores. Provide 10 construction master keys. Remove construction cores at completion.

2.6 KEYING

A. Keying System: By Owner.










2.7 OPERATING TRIM

A. Operating Trim: BHMA A156.6; aluminum unless otherwise indicated. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the

following: a. Allegion plc. b. Burns Manufacturing Incorporated. c. Don-Jo Mfg., Inc. d. Forms+Surfaces. e. Hager Companies. f. Hiawatha, Inc; a division of the Activar Construction Products Group. g. Rockwood Manufacturing Company; an ASSA ABLOY Group company.

2.8 SURFACE CLOSERS

A. Surface Closers: BHMA A156.4; rack-and-pinion hydraulic type with adjustable sweep and latch speeds controlled by key-operated valves and forged-steel main arm. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for size of door closers depending on size of door, exposure to weather, and anticipated frequency of use. Provide factory-sized closers, adjustable to meet field conditions and requirements for opening force. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the

following: a. Allegion plc; Super Smoothy LCN – 4040 Regular or Super Smoothy LCN-4041.

2.9 MECHANICAL STOPS AND HOLDERS

A. Wall- and Floor-Mounted Stops: BHMA A156.16. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the

following: a. Allegion plc. b. Architectural Builders Hardware Mfg., Inc. c. Baldwin Hardware Corporation. d. Burns Manufacturing Incorporated. e. Cal-Royal Products, Inc. f. Don-Jo Mfg., Inc. g. Door Controls International, Inc. h. Hager Companies. i. Hiawatha, Inc; a division of the Activar Construction Products Group. j. Rockwood Manufacturing Company; an ASSA ABLOY Group company.

2.10 OVERHEAD STOPS AND HOLDERS

A. Overhead Stops and Holders: BHMA A156.8. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the

following: a. Allegion plc. b. Architectural Builders Hardware Mfg., Inc. c. Hager Companies. d. Rixson Specialty Door Controls; an ASSA ABLOY Group company.




























2.11 METAL PROTECTIVE TRIM UNITS

A. Metal Protective Trim Units: BHMA A156.6; fabricated from 0.050-inch-thick aluminum; with manufacturer's standard machine or self-tapping screw fasteners. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the

following: a. Allegion plc. b. Burns Manufacturing Incorporated. c. Don-Jo Mfg., Inc. d. Hager Companies. e. Hiawatha, Inc; a division of the Activar Construction Products Group. f. InPro Corporation (IPC). g. Pawling Corporation. h. Rockwood Manufacturing Company; an ASSA ABLOY Group company.

2.12 FINISHES

A. Provide finishes complying with BHMA A156.18 as indicated in door hardware schedule.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Mounting Heights: Mount door hardware units at heights to comply with the following unless otherwise indicated or required to comply with governing regulations. 1. Standard Steel Doors and Frames: ANSI/SDI A250.8. 2. Custom Steel Doors and Frames: HMMA 831. 3. Wood Doors: DHI's "Recommended Locations for Architectural Hardware for Wood Flush

Doors."

B. Install each door hardware item to comply with manufacturer's written instructions. Where cutting and fitting are required to install door hardware onto or into surfaces that are later to be painted or finished in another way, coordinate removal, storage, and reinstallation of surface protective trim units with finishing work. Do not install surface-mounted items until finishes have been completed on substrates involved.

C. Hinges: Install types and in quantities indicated in door hardware schedule, but not fewer than the number recommended by manufacturer for application indicated or one hinge for every 30 inches of door height, whichever is more stringent, unless other equivalent means of support for door, such as spring hinges or pivots, are provided.

D. Lock Cylinders: Install construction cores to secure building and areas during construction period. 1. Move construction cores after completion. 2. Furnish permanent cores to Owner for installation.

E. Stops: Provide floor stops for doors unless wall or other type stops are indicated in door hardware schedule. Do not mount floor stops where they will impede traffic.











3.2 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust and check each operating item of door hardware and each door to ensure proper operation or function of every unit. Replace units that cannot be adjusted to operate as intended. Adjust door control devices to compensate for final operation of heating and ventilating equipment and to comply with referenced accessibility requirements.

3.3 DOOR HARDWARE SCHEDULE

A. SET 1 HINGES BB1279 (4.5” x 4.5”) 652 HAGER 1 EA PULL w/PLATE BF111 x 70C 630 ROCKWOOD 1 EA PUSH PLATE 70E 630 ROCKWOOD 1 EA CLOSER Super Smoothy 4040 689 LCN 1 EA WALL STOP 409 630 ROCKWOOD 1 EA KICKPLATE 10” x 1 ½” LDW 630 ROCKWOOD

B. SET 2 HINGES BB1279 (4.5” x 4.5”) 652 HAGER 1 EA PRIVACY LATCH 45H0L16R-VIN 626 STANLEYBES

T 1 EA CLOSER Super Smoothy 4040 689 LCN 1 EA WALL STOP 409 630 ROCKWOOD 1 EA KICKPLATE 10” x 1 ½” LDW 630 ROCKWOOD


31-18-01/DHH Bathroom Renovations 08 83 00 - 1 MIRRORS March 18, 2021

SECTION 08 83 00 - MIRRORS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes the following types of silvered flat glass mirrors: 1. Film-backed glass mirrors qualifying as safety glazing.



1.

B. Shop Drawings: Include mirror elevations, edge details, mirror hardware, and attachment details.


A. Preconstruction test report.

B. Sample Warranty: For special warranty.


A. Maintenance Data: For mirrors to include in maintenance manuals.

1.5 PRECONSTRUCTION TESTING

A. Preconstruction Mirror Mastic Compatibility Test: Submit mirror mastic products to mirror manufacturer for testing to determine compatibility of mastic with mirror backing.

1.6 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to replace mirrors that deteriorate within specified warranty period. Deterioration of mirrors is defined as defects developed from normal use that are not attributed to mirror breakage or to maintaining and cleaning mirrors contrary to manufacturer's written instructions. Defects include discoloration, black spots, and clouding of the silver film.

1. Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion.


PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS


1. Avalon Glass and Mirror Company. 2. Binswanger Mirror; a division of Vitro America, Inc. 3. D & W Incorporated. 4. Donisi Mirror Company. 5. Gardner Glass, Inc. 6. Gilded Mirrors, Inc. 7. Glasswerks LA, Inc. 8. Guardian Glass; SunGuard. 9. Head West. 10. Independent Mirror Industries, Inc. 11. Lenoir Mirror Company. 12. National Glass Industries. 13. Stroupe Mirror Co., Inc. 14. Sunshine Mirror. 15. Trulite Glass & Aluminum Solutions, LLC. 16. Virginia Mirror Company, Inc. 17. Walker Glass Co., Ltd.

2.2 SILVERED FLAT GLASS MIRRORS

A. Mirrors, General: ASTM C1503; manufactured using copper-free, low-lead mirror coating process.

B. Annealed Monolithic Glass Mirrors: Mirror Select Quality, clear.

1. Nominal Thickness: 6.0 mm.

C. Safety Glazing Products: For film-backed mirrors, provide products that comply with 16 CFR 1201, Category II.


A. Setting Blocks: Elastomeric material with a Shore, Type A durometer hardness of 85, plus or minus 5.

B. Edge Sealer: Coating approved by mirror manufacturer.

C. Mirror Mastic: An adhesive setting compound, asbestos-free, produced specifically for setting mirrors.


a. Franklin International. b. Laurence, C. R. Co., Inc. c. Liquid Nails Adhesive.
























d. Macco Adhesives. e. OSI Sealants; Henkel Corporation. f. Palmer Products Corporation. g. Pecora Corporation. h. Royal Adhesives & Sealants. i. Sommer & Maca Industries, Inc.

D. Film Backing for Safety Mirrors: Film backing and pressure-sensitive adhesive; both compatible with mirror backing paint as certified by mirror manufacturer.

2.4 MIRROR HARDWARE

A. Mirror Bottom Clips: As indicated.

B. Mirror Top Clips: As indicated.

C. Fasteners: Fabricated of same basic metal and alloy as fastened metal and matching it in finished color and texture where fasteners are exposed.

2.5 FABRICATION

A. Fabricate cutouts for notches and holes in mirrors without marring visible surfaces. Locate and size cutouts so they fit closely around penetrations in mirrors.

B. Mirror Edge Treatment: Flat polished. Seal edges of mirrors with edge sealer.

C. Film-Backed Safety Mirrors: Apply film backing with adhesive coating over mirror backing paint, as recommended in writing by film-backing manufacturer.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates, over which mirrors are to be mounted, with Installer present, for compliance with installation tolerances, substrate preparation, and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected and surfaces are dry.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Comply with mastic manufacturer's written installation instructions for preparation of substrates, including coating substrates with mastic manufacturer's special bond coating where applicable.








3.3 INSTALLATION

A. General: Install mirrors to comply with mirror manufacturer's written instructions and with referenced GANA publications. Mount mirrors accurately in place in a manner that avoids distorting reflected images.

B. Install mirrors with mastic and mirror hardware. Attach mirror hardware securely to mounting surfaces with mechanical fasteners installed with anchors or inserts as applicable. Install fasteners so heads do not impose point loads on backs of mirrors.

1. Apply mastic to comply with mastic manufacturer's written instructions for coverage and to allow air circulation between back of mirrors and face of mounting surface.

C. Clean exposed surface of mirrors not more than four days before date scheduled for inspections that establish date of Substantial Completion. Clean mirrors as recommended in writing by mirror manufacturer.


31-18-01/DHH Bathroom Renovations 09 22 16 - 1 NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING March 18, 2021

SECTION 09 22 16 - NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Non-load-bearing steel framing systems for interior partitions. 2. Suspension systems for interior ceilings and soffits.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: For fire-resistance-rated assemblies that incorporate non-load-bearing steel framing, provide materials and construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated, according to ASTM E 119 by an independent testing agency.

B. STC-Rated Assemblies: For STC-rated assemblies, provide materials and construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated, according to ASTM E 90 and classified according to ASTM E 413 by an independent testing agency.

2.2 FRAMING SYSTEMS

A. Framing Members, General: Comply with ASTM C 754 for conditions indicated. 1. Steel Sheet Components: Comply with ASTM C 645 requirements for metal unless

otherwise indicated. 2. Protective Coating: Coating with equivalent corrosion resistance of ASTM A 653/A 653M,

G40, hot-dip galvanized unless otherwise indicated.

B. Studs and Runners: ASTM C 645. 1. Steel Studs and Runners:

a. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 0.0179 inch. b. Depth: As indicated on Drawings.

2.3 SUSPENSION SYSTEMS

A. Tie Wire: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, 0.062-inch-diameter wire, or double strand of 0.048-inch-diameter wire.

B. Hanger Attachments to Concrete: 1. Power-Actuated Anchors: Fastener system of type suitable for application indicated,

fabricated from corrosion-resistant materials, with allowable load capacities calculated according to ICC-ES AC70, greater than or equal to the design load, as determined by testing per ASTM E 1190 conducted by a qualified testing agency.

C. Wire Hangers: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, 0.16 inch in diameter.


D. Carrying Channels: Cold-rolled, commercial-steel sheet with a base-metal thickness of 0.0538 inch and minimum 1/2-inch-wide flanges. 1. Depth: 2 inches.


A. General: Provide auxiliary materials that comply with referenced installation standards. 1. Fasteners for Metal Framing: Of type, material, size, corrosion resistance, holding power

and other properties required to fasten steel members to substrates.

B. Isolation Strip at Exterior Walls: Provide one of the following: 1. Asphalt-Saturated Organic Felt: ASTM D 226/D 226M, Type I (No. 15 asphalt felt),

nonperforated. 2. Foam Gasket: Adhesive-backed, closed-cell vinyl foam strips that allow fastener penetration

without foam displacement, 1/8 inch thick, in width to suit steel stud size.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL

A. Installation Standard: ASTM C 754. 1. Gypsum Board Assemblies: Also comply with requirements in ASTM C 840 that apply to

framing installation.

B. Install framing and accessories plumb, square, and true to line, with connections securely fastened.

C. Install supplementary framing, and blocking to support fixtures, equipment services, heavy trim, grab bars, toilet accessories, furnishings, or similar construction.

D. Install bracing at terminations in assemblies.

E. Do not bridge building control and expansion joints with non-load-bearing steel framing members. Frame both sides of joints independently.

3.2 INSTALLING FRAMED ASSEMBLIES

A. Install framing system components according to spacing indicated, but not greater than spacing required by referenced installation standards for assembly types.

B. Where studs are installed directly against exterior masonry walls or dissimilar metals at exterior walls, install isolation strip between studs and exterior wall.

C. Install studs so flanges within framing system point in same direction.

D. Install tracks (runners) at floors and overhead supports. Extend framing full height to structural supports or substrates above suspended ceilings except where partitions are indicated to terminate at suspended ceilings. Continue framing around ducts that penetrate partitions above ceiling. 1. Install to produce joints at tops of framing systems that prevent axial loading of finished

assemblies. 2. Door Openings: Screw vertical studs at jambs to jamb anchor clips on door frames; install

runner track section (for cripple studs) at head and secure to jamb studs. a. Install two studs at each jamb unless otherwise indicated.


b. Install cripple studs at head adjacent to each jamb stud, with a minimum 1/2-inch clearance from jamb stud to allow for installation of control joint in finished assembly.

c. Extend jamb studs through suspended ceilings and attach to underside of overhead structure.

3. Other Framed Openings: Frame openings other than door openings the same as required for door openings unless otherwise indicated. Install framing below sills of openings to match framing required above door heads.

E. Installation Tolerance: Install each framing member so fastening surfaces vary not more than 1/8 inch from the plane formed by faces of adjacent framing.

3.3 INSTALLING SUSPENSION SYSTEMS

A. Install suspension system components according to spacings indicated, but not greater than spacings required by referenced installation standards for assembly types.

B. Isolate suspension systems from building structure where they abut or are penetrated by building structure to prevent transfer of loading imposed by structural movement.

C. Suspend hangers from building structure as follows: 1. Install hangers plumb and free from contact with insulation or other objects within ceiling

plenum that are not part of supporting structural or suspension system. a. Splay hangers only where required to miss obstructions and offset resulting horizontal

forces by bracing, countersplaying, or other equally effective means. 2. Where width of ducts and other construction within ceiling plenum produces hanger

spacings that interfere with locations of hangers required to support standard suspension system members, install supplemental suspension members and hangers in the form of trapezes or equivalent devices. a. Size supplemental suspension members and hangers to support ceiling loads within

performance limits established by referenced installation standards. 3. Wire Hangers: Secure by looping and wire tying, either directly to structures or to inserts,

eye screws, or other devices and fasteners that are secure and appropriate for substrate, and in a manner that will not cause hangers to deteriorate or otherwise fail.

4. Do not attach hangers to steel roof deck. 5. Do not attach hangers to permanent metal forms. Furnish cast-in-place hanger inserts that

extend through forms. 6. Do not attach hangers to rolled-in hanger tabs of composite steel floor deck. 7. Do not connect or suspend steel framing from ducts, pipes, or conduit.

D. Installation Tolerances: Install suspension systems that are level to within 1/8 inch in 12 feet measured lengthwise on each member that will receive finishes and transversely between parallel members that will receive finishes.


31-18-01/DHH Bathroom Renovations 09 29 00 - 1 GYPSUM BOARD March 18, 2021

SECTION 09 29 00 - GYPSUM BOARD

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Interior gypsum board. 2. Texture finishes.



B. Samples: For each texture finish indicated on same backing indicated for Work.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Fire-Resistance-Rated Assemblies: For fire-resistance-rated assemblies, provide materials and construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated according to ASTM E 119 by an independent testing agency.

B. STC-Rated Assemblies: For STC-rated assemblies, provide materials and construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated according to ASTM E 90 and classified according to ASTM E 413 by an independent testing agency.

2.2 GYPSUM BOARD, GENERAL

A. Size: Provide maximum lengths and widths available that will minimize joints in each area and that correspond with support system indicated.

2.3 INTERIOR GYPSUM BOARD

A. Mold-Resistant Gypsum Board: ASTM C 1396/C 1396M. With moisture- and mold-resistant core and paper surfaces.


a. American Gypsum. b. CertainTeed Corporation. c. Continental Building Products, LLC. d. Georgia-Pacific Building Products. e. National Gypsum Company.








f. PABCO Gypsum. g. Temple-Inland Building Products by Georgia-Pacific.

2. Core: 5/8 inch, Type X.

3. Long Edges: Tapered. 4. Mold Resistance: ASTM D 3273, score of 10 as rated according to ASTM D 3274.

2.4 TRIM ACCESSORIES

A. Interior Trim: ASTM C 1047.

1. Material: Galvanized or aluminum-coated steel sheet, rolled zinc, plastic, or paper-faced galvanized-steel sheet.

2. Shapes:

a. Cornerbead. b. LC-Bead: J-shaped; exposed long flange receives joint compound. c. L-Bead: L-shaped; exposed long flange receives joint compound. d. U-Bead: J-shaped; exposed short flange does not receive joint compound. e. Expansion (control) joint.

2.5 JOINT TREATMENT MATERIALS

A. General: Comply with ASTM C 475/C 475M.

B. Joint Tape:

1. Interior Gypsum Board: Paper. 2. Exterior Gypsum Soffit Board: Paper. 3. Glass-Mat Gypsum Sheathing Board: 10-by-10 glass mesh. 4. Tile Backing Panels: As recommended by panel manufacturer.

C. Joint Compound for Interior Gypsum Board: For each coat, use formulation that is compatible with other compounds applied on previous or for successive coats.

1. Prefilling: At open joints and damaged surface areas, use setting-type taping compound. 2. Embedding and First Coat: For embedding tape and first coat on joints, fasteners, and

trim flanges, use setting-type taping or drying-type, all-purpose compound.

a. Use setting-type compound for installing paper-faced metal trim accessories.

3. Fill Coat: For second coat, use setting-type, sandable topping or drying-type, all-purpose compound.

4. Finish Coat: For third coat, use setting-type, sandable topping or drying-type, all-purpose compound.

5. Skim Coat: For final coat of Level 5 finish, use setting-type, sandable topping compound or drying-type, all-purpose compound or high-build interior coating product designed for application by airless sprayer and to be used instead of skim coat to produce Level 5 finish.





A. General: Provide auxiliary materials that comply with referenced installation standards and manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Laminating Adhesive: Adhesive or joint compound recommended for directly adhering gypsum panels to continuous substrate.

C. Steel Drill Screws: ASTM C 1002 unless otherwise indicated.

1. Use screws complying with ASTM C 954 for fastening panels to steel members from 0.033 to 0.112 inch thick.

2. For fastening cementitious backer units, use screws of type and size recommended by panel manufacturer.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 APPLYING AND FINISHING PANELS

A. Examine panels before installation. Reject panels that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold damaged.

B. Comply with ASTM C 840.

C. Isolate perimeter of gypsum board applied to non-load-bearing partitions at structural abutments. Provide 1/4- to 1/2-inch-wide spaces at these locations and trim edges with edge trim where edges of panels are exposed. Seal joints between edges and abutting structural surfaces with acoustical sealant.

D. For trim with back flanges intended for fasteners, attach to framing with same fasteners used for panels. Otherwise, attach trim according to manufacturer's written instructions.

E. Prefill open joints and damaged surface areas.

F. Apply joint tape over gypsum board joints, except for trim products specifically indicated as not intended to receive tape.

G. Gypsum Board Finish Levels: Finish panels to levels indicated below and according to ASTM C 840:

1. Level 1: Ceiling plenum areas, concealed areas, and where indicated. 2. Level 2: Panels that are substrate for tile. 3. Level 3: Where indicated on Drawings. 4. Level 4: At panel surfaces that will be exposed to view unless otherwise indicated.

a. Primer and its application to surfaces are specified in Section 09 91 23 "Interior Painting."

5. Level 5: Where indicated on Drawings.

a. Primer and its application to surfaces are specified in Section 09 91 23 "Interior Painting."


3.2 PROTECTION

A. Protect installed products from damage from weather, condensation, direct sunlight, construction, and other causes during remainder of the construction period.

B. Remove and replace panels that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold damaged.


31-18-01/DHH Bathroom Renovations 09 30 13 - 1 CERAMIC TILING March 18, 2021

SECTION 09 30 13 - CERAMIC TILING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Ceramic mosaic tile. 2. Glazed wall tile. 3. Tile backing panels. 4. Metal edge strips.



B. Samples:

1. Each type and composition of tile and for each color and finish required. For ceramic mosaic tile in color blend patterns, provide samples of each color blend.

2. Assembled samples mounted on a rigid panel, with grouted joints, for each type and composition of tile and for each color and finish required.

3. Stone thresholds.


A. Qualification Data: For Installer.


A. Furnish extra materials that match and are from same production runs as products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.

1. Tile and Trim Units: Furnish quantity of full-size units equal to 3 percent of amount installed for each type, composition, color, pattern, and size indicated.


A. Furnish extra materials that match and are from same production runs as products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.

1. Tile and Trim Units: Furnish quantity of full-size units equal to 3 percent of amount installed for each type, composition, color, pattern, and size indicated.


2. Grout: Furnish quantity of grout equal to 3 percent of amount installed for each type, composition, and color indicated.

1.6


A. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under Sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution. 1. Build mockup of wall tile installation. 2. Subject to compliance with requirements, approved mockups may become part of the

completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PRODUCTS, GENERAL

A. ANSI Ceramic Tile Standard: Provide Standard-grade tile that complies with ANSI A137.1 for types, compositions, and other characteristics indicated.

B. ANSI Standards for Tile Installation Materials: Provide materials complying with ANSI A108.02, ANSI standards referenced in other Part 2 articles, ANSI standards referenced by TCNA installation methods specified in tile installation schedules, and other requirements specified.

2.2 TILE PRODUCTS

A. Ceramic Tile Type (CT-1 and CT-2): Factory-mounted unglazed ceramic mosaic tile.

1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Chelsea Glass in Herringbone Mosaic by Interceramic.

2. Composition: Vitreous or impervious natural clay or porcelain. 3. Certification: Porcelain tile certified by the Porcelain Tile Certification Agency. 4. Module Size: 11 by 11 inch. 5. Thickness: 1/4 inch. 6. Face: Pattern of design indicated, with cushion edges. 7. Surface: Smooth, without abrasive admixture. 8. Tile Color and Pattern: Slate. 9. Grout Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. 10. Trim Units: Coordinated with sizes and coursing of adjoining flat tile where applicable and

matching characteristics of adjoining flat tile. Provide shapes as follows, selected from manufacturer's standard shapes: a. External Corners for Thinset Mortar Installations: Metal corner trim by Schluter;-

Quadec, or equal.

B. Ceramic Tile Type: Glazed wall tile.

1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Glazed Ceramic Wall Tile by Interceramic.

2. Module Size: 4-1/4 by 12-3/4 inches. 3. Face Size Variation: Rectified.




4. Thickness: 7.45 mm. 5. Face: Pattern of design indicated, with manufacturer's standard edges. 6. Finish: Brite/Matte glaze. 7. Tile Color and Pattern: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. 8. Grout Color: Cocoa. 9. Mounting: Factory, back mounted. 10. Mounting: Pregrouted sheets of tiles are factory assembled and grouted with

manufacturer's standard white silicone rubber. 11. Trim Units: Coordinated with sizes and coursing of adjoining flat tile where applicable and

matching characteristics of adjoining flat tile. Provide shapes as follows, selected from manufacturer's standard shapes: a. Wainscot Cap: Surface bullnose, module size 4-1/4 by 12-3/4 inches. b. External Corners: Metal corner trim by Schluter;-Quadec, or equal. c. Internal Corners: Field-butted square corners.

C. Ceramic Tile Type: Repair of glazed wall tile.

1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Glazed Ceramic Wall Tile by Interceramic.

2. Module Size: 4-1/4 by 12-3/4 inches. 3. Face Size Variation: Rectified. 4. Thickness: 7.45 mm. 5. Face: Pattern of design indicated, with manufacturer's standard edges. 6. Finish: Brite/Matte glaze. 7. Tile Color and Pattern: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. 8. Grout Color: Smoke. 9. Mounting: Factory, back mounted. 10. Mounting: Pregrouted sheets of tiles are factory assembled and grouted with

manufacturer's standard white silicone rubber. 11. Trim Units: Coordinated with sizes and coursing of adjoining flat tile where applicable and

matching characteristics of adjoining flat tile. Provide shapes as follows, selected from manufacturer's standard shapes:

a. Base: Coved, module size 4-1/4 by 4-1/4 inches.

2.3 TILE BACKING PANELS

A. Cementitious Backer Units: ANSI A118.9 or ASTM C1325, Type A.


a. C-Cure. b. Custom Building Products. c. FinPan, Inc. d. Georgia-Pacific Gypsum LLC. e. USG Corporation.

2. Thickness: 1/2 inch.

2.4 SETTING MATERIALS

A. Improved Modified Dry-Set Mortar (Thinset): ANSI A118.15E.









1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Superflex Ultra-Premium thin set Mortar by TEC or comparable product by one of the following: a. Bonsal American, an Oldcastle company. b. Custom Building Products. c. H.B. Fuller Construction Products Inc. / TEC. d. LATICRETE SUPERCAP, LLC. e. MAPEI Corporation.

2. For wall applications, provide nonsagging mortar.

2.5 GROUT MATERIALS

A. Standard Cement Grout: ANSI A118.6.

1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide AccuColor Premium Unsanded grout by TEC or comparable product by one of the following: a. Bonsal American, an Oldcastle company. b. Bostik, Inc. c. Custom Building Products. d. H.B. Fuller Construction Products Inc. / TEC. e. LATICRETE SUPERCAP, LLC. f. MAPEI Corporation.


A. Trowelable Underlayments and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, portland cement-based formulation provided or approved by manufacturer of tile-setting materials for installations indicated.

B. Corner Trim: QUADEC by Schluter, or equal.

1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide QUADEC by Schulter or comparable product by one of the following:

a. Blanke Corporation. b. Ceramic Tool Company, Inc. c. Schluter Systems L.P.

C. Grout Sealer: Manufacturer's standard product for sealing grout joints and that does not change color or appearance of grout.

1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

a. Bonsal American, an Oldcastle company; Grout Sealer. b. Bostik, Inc.; CeramaSeal Grout & Tile Sealer. c. Custom Building Products; Grout Sealer. d. MAPEI Corporation; Ultra Cave Grout Sealer. e. TEC, a subsidiary of H. B. Fuller Company; TA-256 Penetrating Silicone Grout

Sealer.


















http://www.specagent.com/LookUp/?ulid=1053&mf=04&mf=95&src=wd&mf=04&src=wd

http://www.specagent.com/LookUp/?uid=123456816180&mf=04&&mf=04&src=wd






PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions where tile will be installed, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

1. Verify that substrates for setting tile are firm; dry; clean; free of coatings that are incompatible with tile-setting materials, including curing compounds and other substances that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone; and comply with flatness tolerances required by ANSI A108.01 for installations indicated.


3.2 PREPARATION

A. Fill cracks, holes, and depressions in concrete substrates for tile floors installed with thinset mortar with trowelable leveling and patching compound specifically recommended by tile-setting material manufacturer.

B. Where indicated, prepare substrates to receive waterproof membrane by applying a reinforced mortar bed that complies with ANSI A108.1A and is sloped 1/4 inch per foot toward drains.

C. Blending: For tile exhibiting color variations, verify that tile has been factory blended and packaged so tile units taken from one package show same range of colors as those taken from other packages and match approved Samples. If not factory blended, either return to manufacturer or blend tiles at Project site before installing.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. Comply with TCNA's "Handbook for Ceramic, Glass, and Stone Tile Installation" for TCNA installation methods specified in tile installation schedules. Comply with parts of the ANSI A108 series "Specifications for Installation of Ceramic Tile" that are referenced in TCNA installation methods, specified in tile installation schedules, and apply to types of setting and grouting materials used.

B. Extend tile work into recesses and under or behind equipment and fixtures to form complete covering without interruptions unless otherwise indicated. Terminate work neatly at obstructions, edges, and corners without disrupting pattern or joint alignments.

C. Accurately form intersections and returns. Perform cutting and drilling of tile without marring visible surfaces. Carefully grind cut edges of tile abutting trim, finish, or built-in items for straight aligned joints. Fit tile closely to electrical outlets, piping, fixtures, and other penetrations so plates, collars, or covers overlap tile.

D. Provide manufacturer's standard trim shapes where necessary to eliminate exposed tile edges.

E. Where accent tile differs in thickness from field tile, vary setting bed thickness so that tiles are flush.


F. Jointing Pattern: Lay tile in grid pattern unless otherwise indicated. Lay out tile work and center tile fields in both directions in each space or on each wall area. Lay out tile work to minimize the use of pieces that are less than half of a tile. Provide uniform joint widths unless otherwise indicated.

G. Joint Widths: Unless otherwise indicated, install tile with the following joint widths:

1. Ceramic Mosaic Tile: 1/8 inch. 2. Glazed Wall Tile: 1/16 inch.

H. Lay out tile wainscots to dimensions indicated or to next full tile beyond dimensions indicated.

I. Expansion Joints: Provide expansion joints and other sealant-filled joints, including control, contraction, and isolation joints, where indicated. Form joints during installation of setting materials, mortar beds, and tile. Do not saw-cut joints after installing tiles.

1. Where joints occur in concrete substrates, locate joints in tile surfaces directly above them.

2. Prepare joints and apply sealant to comply with requirements in Section 07 92 00 “Joint Sealants.”

J. Corner Trim at all outside corners.

K. Grout Sealer: Apply grout sealer to grout joints according to grout-sealer manufacturer's written instructions. As soon as grout sealer has penetrated grout joints, remove excess sealer and sealer from tile faces by wiping with soft cloth.

L. Install tile backing panels and treat joints according to ANSI A108.11 and manufacturer's written instructions for type of application indicated. Use modified dry-set mortar for bonding material unless otherwise directed in manufacturer's written instructions.

3.4 INTERIOR CERAMIC TILE INSTALLATION SCHEDULE

A. Interior Wall Installations, Wood or Metal Studs or Furring:

1. Ceramic Tile Installation: TCNA W245 or TCNA W248; thinset mortar on glass-mat, water-resistant gypsum backer board.

a. Ceramic Tile Type: Intercermic glazed wall tile white (Brite/Matte) 4-1/4 – 12-3/4 inches.

b. Thinset Mortar: Improved modified dry-set mortar. c. Grout: Standard unsanded cement grout.


31-18-01/DHH Bathroom Renovations 09 51 13 - 1 ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS March 18, 2021

SECTION 09 51 13 - ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes acoustical panels, exposed suspension systems for interior ceilings.





B. Samples: For each exposed product and for each color and texture specified.


A. Coordination Drawings: Reflected ceiling plans, drawn to scale, and coordinated with each other, using input from installers of the items involved.

B. Product test reports.

C. Research reports.

D. Field quality-control reports.




A. Furnish extra materials, from the same product run, that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.

1. Acoustical Ceiling Units: Full-size panels equal to 2 percent of quantity installed. 2. Suspension-System Components: Quantity of each exposed component equal to 2

percent of quantity installed. 3. Hold-Down Clips: Equal to 2 percent of quantity installed. 4. Impact Clips: Equal to 2 percent of quantity installed.


PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Surface-Burning Characteristics: Comply with ASTM E 84; testing by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency. 1. Flame-Spread Index: Class B according to ASTM E 1264. 2. Smoke-Developed Index: 450 or less.

2.2 ACOUSTICAL PANELS

A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Armstrong World Industries, Inc., Optima Health Zone, or a comparable product by one of the following: 1. American Gypsum. 2. CertainTeed Corporation. 3. Chicago Metallic Corporation. 4. Rockfon (Roxul Inc.). 5. Tectum Inc.

B. Acoustical Panel Standard: Manufacturer's standard panels according to ASTM E 1264.

C. Classification: 24 x 24; Square Tegular 15/16”.

D. Color: White.

E. Light Reflectance (LR): .86.

F. Noise Reduction Coefficient (NRC): .95.

G. Edge/Joint Detail: Reveal sized to fit flange of exposed suspension-system members.

H. Thickness: 1 inch.

I. Modular Size: 24 by 24 inches.

2.3 METAL SUSPENSION SYSTEM

A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Armstrong World Industries, Inc., 15/16” clean room; or a comparable product by one of the following: 1. CertainTeed Corporation. 2. Chicago Metallic Corporation.

B. Metal Suspension-System Standard: Manufacturer's standard, direct-hung, metal suspension system and accessories according to ASTM C 635/C 635M.

C. Wide-Face, Capped, Double-Web, Aluminum 15/16 inch Suspension System. 1. Structural Classification: Intermediate-duty system. 2. End Condition of Cross Runners: Override (stepped) or butt-edge type. 3. Face Design: Flat, flush. 4. Cap Material: Aluminum. 5. Cap Finish: Painted white.















2.4 ACCESSORIES

A. Attachment Devices: Size for five times the design load indicated in ASTM C 635/C 635M, Table 1, "Direct Hung," unless otherwise indicated. Comply with seismic design requirements.

B. Hold down clips: Manufacturer’s standard hold-down clips. Provide at all panels.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Measure each ceiling area and establish layout of acoustical panels to balance border widths at opposite edges of each ceiling. Avoid using less-than-half-width panels at borders unless otherwise indicated.

B. Layout openings for penetrations centered on the penetrating items.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install acoustical panel ceilings according to ASTM C 636/C 636M and manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Install edge moldings and trim of type indicated at perimeter of acoustical ceiling area and where necessary to conceal edges of acoustical panels. 1. Apply acoustical sealant in a continuous ribbon concealed on back of vertical legs of

moldings before they are installed. 2. Do not use exposed fasteners, including pop rivets, on moldings and trim.


31-18-01/DHH Bathroom Renovations 09 65 13 - 1 RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES March 18, 2021

SECTION 09 65 13 - RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Resilient molding accessories.



B. Samples: For each exposed product and for each color and texture specified, not less than 12 inches long.



1. Furnish not less than 10 linear feet for every 500 linear feet or fraction thereof, of each type, color, pattern, and size of resilient product installed.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 RUBBER MOLDING ACCESSORY

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the following:

1. Roppe Corporation, USA.

B. Description: Rubber transition strips.

C. Profile and Dimensions: As required.

D. Locations: As required.

E. Colors and Patterns: As selected by Architect from full range of industry colors.

2.2 VINYL MOLDING ACCESSORY


1. Armstrong World Industries, Inc. 2. Burke Mercer Flooring Products; a division of Burke Industries Inc.







3. Flexco. 4. Johnsonite; a Tarkett company. 5. Musson Rubber Co.

B. Description: Vinyl transition strips.

C. Profile and Dimensions: As required.

D. Locations: As required.

E. Colors and Patterns: As selected by Architect from full range of industry colors.

2.3 INSTALLATION MATERIALS

A. Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, portland cement based or blended hydraulic-cement-based formulation provided or approved by resilient-product manufacturer for applications indicated.

B. Adhesives: Water-resistant type recommended by resilient-product manufacturer for resilient products and substrate conditions indicated.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Prepare substrates according to manufacturer's written instructions to ensure adhesion of resilient products.

B. Fill cracks, holes, and depressions in substrates with trowelable leveling and patching compound; remove bumps and ridges to produce a uniform and smooth substrate.

C. Do not install resilient products until they are the same temperature as the space where they are to be installed.

D. Immediately before installation, sweep and vacuum clean substrates to be covered by resilient products.

3.2 RESILIENT ACCESSORY INSTALLATION

A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing resilient accessories.

B. Resilient Molding Accessories: Butt to adjacent materials and tightly adhere to substrates throughout length of each piece. Install reducer strips at edges of floor covering that would otherwise be exposed.


A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning and protecting resilient products.

B. Cover resilient products subject to wear and foot traffic until Substantial Completion.






31-18-01/DHH Bathroom Renovations 09 67 23 - 1 RESINOUS FLOORING March 18, 2021

SECTION 09 67 23 - RESINOUS FLOORING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes resinous flooring systems.





B. Samples: For each type of exposed finish required.


A. Material certificates.

B. Material test reports.




A. Installer Qualifications: An authorized representative who is trained and approved by manufacturer.


A. Environmental Limitations: Comply with resinous flooring manufacturer's written instructions for substrate temperature, ambient temperature, moisture, ventilation, and other conditions affecting resinous flooring application.

B. Lighting: Provide permanent lighting or, if permanent lighting is not in place, simulate permanent lighting conditions during resinous flooring application.

C. Close spaces to traffic during resinous flooring application and for 24 hours after application unless manufacturer recommends a longer period.


PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PERORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Flammability: Self-extinguishing according to ASTM D 635.

2.2 RESINOUS FLOORING

A. Resinous Flooring System: Abrasion-, impact-, and chemical-resistant, aggregate-filled, and resin-based monolithic floor surfacing designed to produce a seamless floor and integral cove base. 1. Basis of Design Product: 440 Epiquartz Double Broadcast Epoxy Flooring by Superior

Polymer Products. Color as selected by architect from manufacturer’s full range. Clear topcoat is required. A minimum of two coats of the body product are required.

B. System Characteristics:

1. Color and Pattern: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. 2. Wearing Surface: Manufacturer's standard wearing surface.

C. Primer: Type recommended by resinous flooring manufacturer for substrate and resinous flooring system indicated.

D. Patching and Fill Material: Resinous product of or approved by resinous flooring manufacturer and recommended by manufacturer for application indicated.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Prepare and clean substrates according to resinous flooring manufacturer's written instructions for substrate indicated. Provide clean, dry substrate for resinous flooring application.

B. Concrete Tile Substrates: Provide sound concrete tile surfaces free of laitance, glaze, efflorescence, curing compounds, form-release agents, dust, dirt, grease, oil, and other contaminants incompatible with resinous flooring.

1. Roughen concrete tile substrates as follows: a. Hand grind concrete surfaces per manufacturer’s requirements. b. Acid wash concrete surfaces per manufacturer’s requirements.

c. Shot-blast surfaces with an apparatus that abrades the concrete surface, contains the dispensed shot within the apparatus, and recirculates the shot by vacuum pickup.

d. Comply with ASTM C 811 requirements unless manufacturer's written instructions are more stringent.

2. Repair damaged and deteriorated concrete tile substrates according to resinous flooring manufacturer's written instructions.

3. Verify that concrete substrates are dry and moisture-vapor emissions are within acceptable levels according to manufacturer's written instructions.


a. Anhydrous Calcium Chloride Test: ASTM F 1869. Proceed with application of resinous flooring only after substrates have maximum moisture-vapor-emission rate of 3 lb of water/1000 sq. ft. of slab area in 24 hours.

b. Plastic Sheet Test: ASTM D 4263. Proceed with application only after testing indicates absence of moisture in substrates.

c. Relative Humidity Test: Use in situ probes, ASTM F 2170. Proceed with installation only after substrates have a maximum 75 percent relative humidity level measurement.

4. Alkalinity and Adhesion Testing: Verify that concrete substrates have pH within acceptable range. Perform tests recommended by manufacturer. Proceed with application only after substrates pass testing.

C. Patching and Filling: Use patching and fill material to fill holes and depressions in substrates according to manufacturer's written instructions.

D. Resinous Materials: Mix components and prepare materials according to resinous flooring manufacturer's written instructions.

3.2 APPLICATION

A. Apply components of resinous flooring system according to manufacturer's written instructions to produce a uniform, monolithic wearing surface of thickness indicated.

1. Expansion and Isolation Joint Treatment: At substrate expansion and isolation joints, comply with resinous flooring manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Primer: Apply primer over prepared substrate at manufacturer's recommended spreading rate.

C. Integral Cove Base: Apply cove base mix to wall surfaces before applying flooring. Apply according to manufacturer's written instructions. Round internal and external corners.

1. Integral Cove Base: 3 inches high.

D. Self-Leveling Body Coats: Apply self-leveling slurry body coats in thickness indicated for flooring system.

1. Aggregates: Broadcast aggregates at rate recommended by manufacturer and, after resin is cured, remove excess aggregates to provide surface texture indicated.

E. Troweled or Screeded Body Coats: Apply troweled or screeded body coats in thickness indicated for flooring system. Hand or power trowel and grout to fill voids. When body coats are cured, remove trowel marks and roughness using method recommended by manufacturer.

F. Grout Coat: Apply grout coat, of type recommended by resinous flooring manufacturer, to fill voids in surface of final body coat.

G. Topcoats: Apply topcoats in number indicated for flooring system and at spreading rates recommended in writing by manufacturer and to produce wearing surface indicated.

H. Protect resinous flooring from damage and wear during the remainder of construction period.


31-18-01/DHH Bathroom Renovations 09 91 23 - 1 INTERIOR PAINTING March 18, 2021

SECTION 09 91 23 - INTERIOR PAINTING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes surface preparation and the application of paint systems on the following interior substrates:

1. Concrete. 2. Concrete masonry units (CMUs). 3. Steel and iron. 4. Gypsum board.

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. MPI Gloss Level 1: Not more than five units at 60 degrees and 10 units at 85 degrees, according to ASTM D 523.

B. MPI Gloss Level 2: Not more than 10 units at 60 degrees and 10 to 35 units at 85 degrees, according to ASTM D 523.

C. MPI Gloss Level 3: 10 to 25 units at 60 degrees and 10 to 35 units at 85 degrees, according to ASTM D 523.

D. MPI Gloss Level 4: 20 to 35 units at 60 degrees and not less than 35 units at 85 degrees, according to ASTM D 523.

E. MPI Gloss Level 5: 35 to 70 units at 60 degrees, according to ASTM D 523.

F. MPI Gloss Level 6: 70 to 85 units at 60 degrees, according to ASTM D 523.

G. MPI Gloss Level 7: More than 85 units at 60 degrees, according to ASTM D 523.


A. Product Data: For each type of product. Include preparation requirements and application instructions.

1. Include Printout of current "MPI Approved Products List" for each product category specified, with the proposed product highlighted.

B. Samples: For each type of paint system and in each color and gloss of topcoat.




1. Paint: 5 percent, but not less than 1 gal. of each material and color applied.


A. Mockups: Apply mockups of each paint system indicated and each color and finish selected to verify preliminary selections made under Sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution.

1. Architect will select one surface to represent surfaces and conditions for application of each paint system.

a. Vertical and Horizontal Surfaces: Provide samples of at least 100 sq. ft. b. Other Items: Architect will designate items or areas required.

2. Final approval of color selections will be based on mockups.

a. If preliminary color selections are not approved, apply additional mockups of additional colors selected by Architect at no added cost to Owner.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Sherwin-Williams Company (The).

B. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the products listed in the Interior Painting Schedule for the paint category indicated.

2.2 PAINT, GENERAL

A. MPI Standards: Products shall comply with MPI standards indicated and shall be listed in its "MPI Approved Products Lists."

B. Material Compatibility:

1. Materials for use within each paint system shall be compatible with one another and substrates indicated, under conditions of service and application as demonstrated by manufacturer, based on testing and field experience.

2. For each coat in a paint system, products shall be recommended in writing by topcoat manufacturers for use in paint system and on substrate indicated.

C. Colors: As indicated in a color schedule.




PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Applicator present, for compliance with requirements for maximum moisture content and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

B. Maximum Moisture Content of Substrates: When measured with an electronic moisture meter as follows:

1. Concrete: 12 percent. 2. Fiber-Cement Board: 12 percent. 3. Masonry (Clay and CMUs): 12 percent. 4. Wood: 15 percent. 5. Gypsum Board: 12 percent. 6. Plaster: 12 percent.

C. Verify suitability of substrates, including surface conditions and compatibility with existing finishes and primers.

D. Proceed with coating application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

1. Application of coating indicates acceptance of surfaces and conditions.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations in "MPI Architectural Painting Specification Manual" applicable to substrates and paint systems indicated.

B. Remove hardware, covers, plates, and similar items already in place that are removable and are not to be painted. If removal is impractical or impossible because of size or weight of item, provide surface-applied protection before surface preparation and painting.

1. After completing painting operations, use workers skilled in the trades involved to reinstall items that were removed. Remove surface-applied protection if any.

3.3 APPLICATION

A. Apply paints according to manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations in "MPI Architectural Painting Specification Manual."

B. Apply paints to produce surface films without cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush marks, roller tracking, runs, sags, ropiness, or other surface imperfections. Cut in sharp lines and color breaks.

3.4 INTERIOR PAINTING SCHEDULE

A. Steel Substrates:

1. Latex System, Alkyd Primer:


a. Prime Coat: Primer, alkyd, quick dry, for metal, MPI #76.

1) Sherwin Williams; Kem Bond HS Universal Alkyd Primer. .

b. Prime Coat: Shop primer specified in Section where substrate is specified.

c. Intermediate Coat: Latex, interior, matching topcoat.

d. Topcoat: Latex, interior, semi-gloss.

1) Sherwin Williams; Bath Paint. (A59 W51)

B. Galvanized-Metal Substrates:

1. Latex System:

a. Prime Coat: Primer, galvanized, water based.

1) Sherwin Williams; Pro-Cryl Universal Primer.

b. Intermediate Coat: Latex, interior, matching topcoat.

c. Topcoat: Latex, interior, semi-gloss.

1) Sherwin Williams; Bath Paint. (A59 W51)

C. Gypsum Board Substrates:

1. Latex over Latex Sealer System:

a. Prime Coat: Primer sealer, latex, interior.

1) Sherwin Williams; Drywall Primer.

b. Prime Coat: Latex, interior, matching topcoat. c. Intermediate Coat: Latex, interior, matching topcoat. d. Topcoat: Latex, interior, semi-gloss.

1) Sherwin Williams; ProMar 200: Off White 1095.


31-18-01/DHH Bathroom Renovations 10 21 13.19 - 1 PLASTIC TOILET COMPARTMENTS March 18, 2021

SECTION 10 21 13.19 - PLASTIC TOILET COMPARTMENTS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes solid-plastic toilet compartments configured as toilet enclosures.



B. Shop Drawings: For toilet compartments. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachment details.

C. Samples for each type of toilet compartment material indicated.


A. Product certificates.




A. Extra Stock Material: Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.

1. Door Hinges: One hinge(s) with associated fasteners. 2. Latch and Keeper: One latch(es) and keeper(s) with associated fasteners. 3. Door Bumper: One bumper(s) with associated fasteners. 4. Door Pull: One door pull(s) with associated fasteners. 5. Fasteners: 10 fasteners of each size and type.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Surface-Burning Characteristics: Comply with ASTM E 84; testing by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency.

1. Flame-Spread Index: 75 or less. 2. Smoke-Developed Index: 450 or less.


B. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with applicable provisions in the U.S. Architectural & Transportation Barriers Compliance Board's ADA-ABA Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities and ICC A117.1 for toilet compartments designated as accessible.

2.2 SOLID-PLASTIC TOILET COMPARTMENTS


1. Accurate Partitions Corp.; ASI Group. 2. AJW Architectural Products. 3. All American Metal Corp. 4. American Sanitary Partition Corporation. 5. Ampco Products, LLC. 6. Bradley Corporation. 7. Columbia Lockers; Partition Systems International of South Carolina. 8. General Partitions Mfg. Corp. 9. Global Partitions; ASI Group. 10. Hadrian Manufacturing Inc. 11. Knickerbocker Partition Corporation. 12. Marlite. 13. Metpar Corp. 14. Scranton Products.

B. Toilet-Enclosure Style: Floor and ceiling anchored.

C. Door, Panel, and Pilaster Construction: Solid, high-density polyethylene (HDPE) panel material, not less than 1 inch thick, seamless, with eased edges, no-sightline system, and with homogenous color and pattern throughout thickness of material.

1. Integral Hinges: Configure doors and pilasters to receive integral hinges. 2. Heat-Sink Strip: Manufacturer's standard continuous, extruded-aluminum or stainless-

steel strip fastened to exposed bottom edges of solid-plastic components to hinder malicious combustion.

3. Color and Pattern: One color and pattern in each room as selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.

D. Pilaster Shoes and Sleeves (Caps): Manufacturer's standard design; stainless steel.

E. Brackets (Fittings):

1. Stirrup Type: Ear or U-brackets, chrome-plated zamac. 2. Full-Height (Continuous) Type: Manufacturer's standard design; extruded aluminum.

2.3 HARDWARE AND ACCESSORIES

A. Hardware and Accessories: Manufacturer's standard operating hardware and accessories.

1. Material: Chrome-plated zamac. 2. Provide units that comply with regulatory requirements for accessibility at compartments

designated as accessible.

















B. Hardware and Accessories: Manufacturer's heavy-duty stainless-steel operating hardware and accessories.

1. Provide units that comply with regulatory requirements for accessibility at compartments designated as accessible.

C. Anchorages and Fasteners: Manufacturer's standard exposed fasteners of stainless steel, finished to match the items they are securing, with theft-resistant-type heads. Provide sex-type bolts for through-bolt applications. For concealed anchors, use stainless-steel, hot-dip galvanized-steel, or other rust-resistant, protective-coated steel compatible with related materials.

2.4 FABRICATION

A. Fabrication, General: Fabricate toilet compartment components to sizes indicated. Coordinate requirements and provide cutouts for through-partition toilet accessories where required for attachment of toilet accessories.

B. Floor-and-Ceiling-Anchored Units: Provide manufacturer's standard corrosion-resistant anchoring assemblies with leveling adjustment nuts at tops and bottoms of pilasters. Provide shoes and sleeves (caps) at pilasters to conceal anchorage.

C. Door Size and Swings: Unless otherwise indicated, provide 24-inch-wide, in-swinging doors for standard toilet compartments and 36-inch-wide, out-swinging doors with a minimum 32-inch-wide, clear opening for compartments designated as accessible.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. General: Comply with manufacturer's written installation instructions. Install units rigid, straight, level, and plumb. Secure units in position with manufacturer's recommended anchoring devices.

1. Maximum Clearances:

a. Pilasters and Panels: 1/2 inch. b. Panels and Walls: 1 inch.

2. Stirrup Brackets: Secure panels to walls and to pilasters with no fewer than three brackets attached at midpoint and near top and bottom of panel.

a. Locate wall brackets so holes for wall anchors occur in masonry or tile joints. b. Align brackets at pilasters with brackets at walls.

3. Full-Height (Continuous) Brackets: Secure panels to walls and to pilasters with full-height brackets.

a. Locate bracket fasteners so holes for wall anchors occur in masonry or tile joints. b. Align brackets at pilasters with brackets at walls.


3.2 ADJUSTING

A. Hardware Adjustment: Adjust and lubricate hardware according to hardware manufacturer's written instructions for proper operation. Set hinges on in-swinging doors to hold doors open approximately 30 degrees from closed position when unlatched. Set hinges on out-swinging doors to return doors to fully closed position.

END OF SECTION 10 21 13.19

31-18-01/DHH Bathroom Renovations 10 21 16.19 - 1 PLASTIC SHOWER AND DRESSING March 18, 2021 COMPARTMENTS

SECTION 10 21 16.19 - PLASTIC SHOWER AND DRESSING COMPARTMENTS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Solid-plastic compartments.



B. Shop Drawings: For shower and dressing compartments.

1. Include plans, elevations, sections, and attachment details.

C. Samples: For each exposed product and for each color and texture specified.


A. Product certificates.





1. Door Hinges: One door hinge(s) with associated fasteners. 2. Latch and Keeper: One latch(es) and keeper(s) with associated fasteners. 3. Clothing Hook: One clothing hook(s) with associated fasteners. 4. Door Bumper: One door bumper(s) with associated fasteners. 5. Door Pull: One door pull(s) with associated fasteners. 6. Fasteners: 10 fasteners of each size and type. 7. Curtain Rod: One curtain rod(s) with associated fasteners. 8. Curtain Hooks: Five curtain hooks. 9. Soap Holder: One soap holder(s) with associated fasteners. 10. Seat: One seat(s) with associated fasteners.


PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Surface-Burning Characteristics: Comply with ASTM E 84 or UL 723; testing by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency.

1. Flame-Spread Index: 75 or less. 2. Smoke-Developed Index: 450 or less.

B. Accessibility Standard: Comply with applicable provisions in the U.S. Architectural & Transportation Barriers Compliance Board's ADA-ABA Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities and ICC A117.1 for shower and dressing compartments designated as accessible.

2.2 SOLID-PLASTIC COMPARTMENTS


1. Accurate Partitions Corp.; ASI Group. 2. All American Metal Corp. 3. Columbia Lockers; Partition Systems International of South Carolina. 4. General Partitions Mfg. Corp. 5. Global Partitions; ASI Group. 6. Knickerbocker Partition Corporation. 7. Marlite. 8. Metpar Corp.

B. Configuration: Shower compartment as indicated on Drawings.

C. Enclosure Style: Floor and ceiling anchored.

D. Panel and Pilaster Construction: Solid, high-density polyethylene (HDPE) panel material, not less than 1 inch thick, seamless, with eased edges and with homogenous color and pattern throughout thickness of material.

1. Integral Hinges: Configure doors and pilasters to receive integral hinges. 2. Heat-Sink Strip: Manufacturer's standard, continuous, clear-anodized extruded-aluminum

or stainless-steel strip fastened to exposed bottom edges of solid-plastic components to hinder malicious combustion.

3. Color and Pattern: One color and pattern in each room; as selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.

E. Door Construction: Match panels.

F. Pilaster Shoes and Sleeves (Caps): Manufacturer's standard design; HDPE Plastic.

G. Brackets (Fittings):

1. Full-Height (Continuous) Type: Manufacturer's standard design; clear-anodized extruded aluminum.











2. Stirrup Type: Ear or U-brackets; chrome-plated brass.

2.3 ACCESSORIES

A. Door Hardware and Accessories: Manufacturer's standard design, heavy-duty, operating hardware and accessories. Mount to panels with through-bolts.

1. Material: Chrome-plated brass. 2. Hinges: Manufacturer's standard, paired, self-closing type that can be adjusted to hold

doors open at any angle up to 90 degrees, allowing emergency access by lifting door. 3. Latch and Keeper: Manufacturer's standard, surface-mounted latch unit designed for

emergency access and with combination rubber-faced door strike and keeper. Provide units that comply with regulatory requirements for accessibility at compartments designated as accessible. Provide bolt latch equal to SURFACO 3½” Bet Screw 39G0136.

4. Clothing Hooks: Manufacturer's standard clothing hooks in each dressing compartment; include one combination hook and rubber-tipped bumper at inswinging doors, sized to prevent door from hitting wall panel or compartment-mounted accessories.

5. Door Bumper: Manufacturer's standard, rubber-tipped bumper at outswinging doors. 6. Door Pull: Manufacturer's standard unit at outswinging doors that complies with

regulatory requirements for accessibility. Provide units on both sides of doors at compartments designated as accessible.

B. Anchorages and Fasteners: Manufacturer's standard, exposed fasteners of stainless steel, chrome-plated steel, or solid brass, finished to match the items they are securing; with theft-resistant-type heads. Provide sex-type bolts for through-bolt applications.

2.4 FABRICATION

A. Floor-and-Ceiling-Anchored Compartments: Manufacturer's standard, corrosion-resistant anchoring assemblies at pilasters and walls, with leveling adjustment at tops and bottoms of pilasters. Provide shoes and sleeves (caps) at pilasters to conceal anchorage.

B. Door Sizes and Swings: Unless otherwise indicated, provide 24-inch-wide, in swinging doors for standard shower and dressing compartments, and 36-inch-wide, out swinging doors with a minimum 32-inch-wide, clear opening for compartments designated as accessible.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. General: Comply with manufacturer's written installation instructions. Install compartments rigid, straight, level, and plumb. Secure compartments in position with manufacturer's recommended anchoring devices.

1. Clearances for Dressing Compartments: Maximum 1/2 inch between pilasters and panels; 1 inch between panels and walls.

2. Stirrup Brackets for Dressing Compartments: Secure panels to walls and to pilasters with no fewer than three brackets attached at midpoint and near top and bottom of panel.


a. Locate wall brackets so holes for wall anchors occur in masonry or tile joints. b. Align brackets at pilasters with brackets at walls.

3. Full-Height (Continuous) Brackets for Dressing Compartments: Secure panels to walls and to pilasters with full-height brackets.

a. Locate bracket fasteners so holes for wall anchors occur in masonry or tile joints. b. Align brackets at pilasters with brackets at walls.

3.2 ADJUSTING

A. Hardware Adjustment: Adjust and lubricate hardware according to hardware manufacturer's written instructions for proper operation. Set hinges on inswinging doors to hold doors open approximately 30 degrees from closed position when unlatched. Set hinges on outswinging doors to return doors to fully closed position.


31-18-01/DHH Bathroom Renovations 10 28 00 - 1 TOILET, BATH, AND LAUNDRY March 18, 2021 ACCESSORIES

SECTION 10 28 00 - TOILET, BATH, AND LAUNDRY ACCESSORIES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Public-use washroom accessories. 2. Public-use shower room accessories.



B. Samples: Full size, for each exposed product and for each finish specified.


A. Sample warranty.



1.5 WARRANTY

A. Manufacturer's Special Warranty for Mirrors: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace mirrors that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.


PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

2.2 PUBLIC-USE WASHROOM ACCESSORIES

A. Grab Bar:



a. AJW Architectural Products. b. American Specialties, Inc. c. Bobrick Washroom Equipment, Inc. d. Bradley Corporation. e. Brey-Krause Manufacturing Co. f. GAMCO Specialty Accessories; a division of Bobrick.

2. Mounting: Flanges with concealed fasteners. 3. Material: Stainless steel, 0.05 inch thick.

a. Finish: Smooth, No. 4 finish (satin) on ends and slip-resistant texture in grip area.

4. Outside Diameter: 1-1/2 inches. 5. Configuration and Length: As indicated on Drawings.

B. Mirror Unit:

1. See Section 08 83 00 Mirrors. 2. Size: As indicated on Drawings.

C. Shelves:

1. See Section 12 36 61.16 Solid Surfacing Materials. 2. Size: As indicated on Drawings.

2.3 PUBLIC-USE SHOWER ROOM ACCESSORIES

A. Shower Curtain Rod:



2. Description: 1-1/4-inch OD; fabricated from nominal 0.05-inch-thick stainless steel. 3. Mounting Flanges: Stainless-steel flanges designed for exposed fasteners. 4. Finish: Stainless steel, No. 4 finish (satin).

B. Folding Shower Seat:


a. AJW Architectural Products. b. American Specialties, Inc. c. Bobrick Washroom Equipment, Inc.






















d. Bradley Corporation. e. Brey-Krause Manufacturing Co. f. GAMCO Specialty Accessories; a division of Bobrick.

2. Configuration: L-shaped seat, designed for wheelchair access. 3. Seat: Phenolic or polymeric composite of slat-type or one-piece construction in color as

selected by Architect. 4. Mounting Mechanism: Stainless steel, No. 4 finish (satin).

C. Folding Dressing Room Seat:

1. Basis of Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Model #APFSSB2 by Freedom Showers, Inc. or comparable product by one of the following:


2. Configuration: Rectangular seat, with swing down legs, 22” x 15” as indicated on the drawings.

3. Barrier Free Configuration: Rectangular seat, with swing down legs, 24” x 48” as indicated on the drawings.

4. Seat: Phenolic or polymeric composite of slat-type or one-piece construction in color as selected by Architect.

5. Mounting Mechanism: Stainless steel, No. 4 finish (satin).

D. Robe/Towel Hook:



2. Description: Double-prong unit equal to Bradley Corporation Model 9124. 3. Material and Finish: Stainless steel, No. 4 finish (satin).

E. Shower Caddy:

1. Basis of Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Bioprism Large Corner Shower Caddy by In Pro Corporation or comparable product by one of the following:

a. AJW Architectural Products. b. American Specialties, Inc. c. Bobrick Washroom Equipment, Inc. d. Bradley Corporation. e. Brey-Krause Manufacturing Co.



























f. GAMCO Specialty Accessories; a division of Bobrick. g. In Pro Corporation.

2. Color: As selected by the Architect. Provide samples for selection. 3. Seat: Install per manufacturer’s requirements. 4. Mounting Mechanism: Mounting Bracket.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install accessories according to manufacturers' written instructions, using fasteners appropriate to substrate indicated and recommended by unit manufacturer. Install units level, plumb, and firmly anchored in locations and at heights indicated.

B. Grab Bars: Install to withstand a downward load of at least 250 lbf, when tested according to ASTM F 446.



31-18-01/DHH Bathroom Renovations 12 36 61.16 - 1 SOLID SURFACING COUNTERTOPS March 18, 2021

SECTION 12 36 61.16 - SOLID SURFACING MATERIALS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Solid surface material countertops with integral sinks. 2. Solid surface material shower wall. 3. Solid surface material receptors. 4. Solid surface material shelves.


A. Product Data: For solid surface materials.

B. Shop Drawings: For countertops, shower walls and shower receptors. Show materials, finishes, edge profiles, methods of joining, and cutouts for plumbing fixtures.

C. Samples: For each type of material exposed to view.


A. Field Measurements: Verify dimensions of countertops by field measurements after surrounding wall construction is complete, but before countertop fabrication is complete.

1.4 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate locations of utilities that will penetrate countertops or backsplashes.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SOLID SURFACE MATERIALS

A. Solid Surface Material: Homogeneous-filled plastic resin complying with ICPA SS-1.

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Formica Corporation. b. Meganite Inc. c. Swan Corporation (The). d. In Pro Corporation.

2. Type: Provide Standard type unless Special Purpose type is indicated. 3. Colors and Patterns: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.







B. Particleboard: ANSI A208.1, Grade M-2-Exterior Glue.

C. Plywood: Exterior softwood plywood complying with DOC PS 1, Grade C-C Plugged, touch sanded.

2.2 COUNTERTOP FABRICATION

A. Fabricate countertops according to solid surface material manufacturer's written instructions and to the AWI/AWMAC/WI's "Architectural Woodwork Standards."

1. Grade: Custom.

B. Configuration:

1. Front: Radius edge with apron, 2 inches high with 3/8-inch radius. 2. Backsplash: Straight, slightly eased at corner. 3. End Splash: Matching backsplash.

C. Countertops: 3/4-inch-thick, solid surface material with front edge built up with same material.

D. Backsplashes: 3/4-inch-thick, solid surface material. Fabricate with loose backsplashes for field assembly.

E. Joints: Fabricate countertops without joints.

F. Integral sinks: Install integral sink bowls in countertops in the shop.

G. Cutouts and Holes:

1. Plumbing Fixtures: Make cutouts for fixtures in shop using template or pattern furnished by fixture manufacturer. Form cutouts to smooth, even curves.

H. Supports: Provide Richelieu Heavy Duty Countertop Bracket, 24” x 18”, Black finish, or equal

2.3 SHELVING

A. Fabricate shelving according to solid surface material manufacturer's written instructions and to the AWI/AWMAC/WI's "Architectural Woodwork Standards."

1. Grade: Custom.

B. Configuration:

1. Front: Radius edge with apron, 1 inches high with 1/4-inch radius.

C. Shelving: 1-inch-thick, solid surface material.

D. Supports: 1-inch-thick, solid surface material.

E. Joints: Fabricate countertops without joints.


2.4 SHOWER WALLS

A. Fabricate shower walls according to solid surface material manufacturer's written instructions and conform to ANSI Z124.1.2 – 2205 for workmanship, finish structural integrity and material characteristics.

B. Shower wall: 1/4-inch-thick, solid surface material with square edge.

C. Trim: Provide trim as indicated on drawings.

D. Joints: Fabricate shower walls without joints.

E. Cutouts and Holes:

1. Plumbing Fixtures: Make cutouts for fixtures in shop using template or pattern furnished by fixture manufacturer. Form cutouts to smooth, even curves.

2.5 SHOWER RECEPTORS

A. Fabricate shower receptors according to solid surface material manufacturer's written instructions and conform to ANSI Z124.1.2 – 2005 for workmanship, finish, structural integrity and material characteristics.

B. Fungal & Bacterial Resistance: Provide solid surface material that does not support fungal and bacterial growth as tested in accordance with ASTM G – 21 and ASTM G – 22.

C. Drain: Oatey number 42150 Brass, no caulk drain with stainless steel strainer.

D. Receptor floor to be solid cast product with integral threshold and water barrier.

2.6 INSTALLATION MATERIALS

A. Adhesive: Product recommended by solid surface material manufacturer.

B. Sealant: Comply with applicable requirements in Section 07 92 00 "Joint Sealants” or as recommended by manufacturer.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install components plumb and level scribe adjacent finishes in accordance with approved shop drawings and recommended installation instructions.

B. Secure countertops to subtops with adhesive according to solid surface material manufacturer's written instructions.

C. Bond joints with adhesive and draw tight, as material is set. Mask surface areas adjacent to joints to prevent adhesive smears.


D. Complete cutouts not finished in shop. Mask areas of solid surface material adjacent to cutouts to prevent damage while cutting. Make cutouts to accurately fit items to be installed, and at right angles to finished surfaces unless beveling is required for clearance. Ease edges slightly to prevent snipping.

E. Apply sealant to gaps at walls; comply with Section 07 92 00 "Joint Sealants."


31-18-01/DHH Bathroom Renovations 22 05 17 - 1 SLEEVES AND SLEEVE March 18, 2021 SEALS FOR PLUMBING PIPING

SECTION 22 05 17 - SLEEVES AND SLEEVE SEALS FOR PLUMBING PIPING

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Sleeves. 2. Stack-sleeve fittings. 3. Silicone sealants.




PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SLEEVES


1. Advance Products & Systems, Inc. 2. CALPICO, Inc. 3. GPT; an EnPro Industries company.

B. Steel Pipe Sleeves: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type E, Grade B, Schedule 40, galvanized, with plain ends and integral welded waterstop collar.

C. Galvanized-Steel Sheet Sleeves: 0.0239-inch minimum thickness; round tube closed with welded longitudinal joint.

2.2 STACK-SLEEVE FITTINGS


1. Jay R. Smith Mfg Co; a division of Morris Group International. 2. Zurn Industries, LLC.

B. Description: Manufactured, galvanized cast-iron sleeve with integral clamping flange for use in waterproof floors and roofs. Include clamping ring, bolts, and nuts for membrane flashing.

1. Underdeck Clamp: Clamping ring with setscrews.

http://www.specagent.com/LookUp/?ulid=13012&mf=04&src=wd#http://www.specagent.com/LookUp/?ulid=13012&mf=04&src=wd




2.3 SILICONE SEALANTS

A. Silicone, S, NS, 25, NT: Single-component, nonsag, plus 25 percent and minus 25 percent movement capability, nontraffic-use, neutral-curing silicone joint sealant, ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, Use NT.

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. GE Construction Sealants; Momentive Performance Materials Inc. b. Polymeric Systems, Inc. c. Sherwin-Williams Company (The).

B. Silicone, S, P, 25, T, NT: Single-component, pourable, plus 25 percent and minus 25 percent movement capability, traffic- and nontraffic-use, neutral-curing silicone joint sealant; ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade P, Class 25, Uses T and NT. Grade P Pourable (self-leveling) formulation is for opening in floors and other horizontal surfaces that are not fire rated.

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the following: a. May National Associates, Inc.; a subsidiary of Sika Corporation.

C. Silicone Foam: Multicomponent, silicone-based liquid elastomers that, when mixed, expand and cure in place to produce a flexible, nonshrinking foam.

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the following: a. Smooth-On.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 SLEEVE INSTALLATION

A. Install sleeves for piping passing through penetrations in floors, partitions, roofs, and walls.

B. For sleeves that will have sleeve-seal system installed, select sleeves of size large enough to provide 1-inch annular clear space between piping and concrete slabs and walls.

1. Sleeves are not required for core-drilled holes.

C. Install sleeves for pipes passing through interior partitions.

1. Cut sleeves to length for mounting flush with both surfaces. 2. Install sleeves that are large enough to provide 1/4-inch annular clear space between sleeve

and pipe or pipe insulation. 3. Seal annular space between sleeve and piping or piping insulation; use joint sealants

appropriate for size, depth, and location of joint.

D. Fire-Resistance-Rated Penetrations (any masonry walls), Horizontal Assembly Penetrations, and Smoke Barrier Penetrations: Maintain indicated fire or smoke rating of walls, partitions, ceilings, and floors at pipe penetrations. Seal pipe penetrations with fire- and smoke-stop materials.

3.2 STACK-SLEEVE-FITTING INSTALLATION

A. Install stack-sleeve fittings in slabs.

1. Install fittings that are large enough to provide 1/4-inch annular clear space between sleeve and pipe or pipe insulation.





2. Secure flashing between clamping flanges for pipes penetrating floors with membrane waterproofing.

3. Install section of cast-iron soil pipe to extend sleeve to 2 inches above finished floor level. 4. Extend cast-iron sleeve fittings below floor slab as required to secure clamping ring if ring

is specified. 5. Use silicone sealant to seal the space around outside of stack-sleeve fittings.

B. Fire-Resistance-Rated Penetrations (any concrete slab), Horizontal Assembly Penetrations, and Smoke Barrier Penetrations: Maintain indicated fire or smoke rating of floors at pipe penetrations. Seal pipe penetrations with fire- and smoke-stop materials.

3.3 SLEEVE AND SLEEVE-SEAL SCHEDULE

A. Use sleeves and sleeve seals for the following piping-penetration applications:

1. Concrete Slabs above Grade: a. Piping Smaller Than NPS 6: Steel pipe sleeves. b. Piping NPS 6 and Larger: Steel pipe sleeves.

2. Interior Partitions: a. Piping Smaller Than NPS 6: Steel pipe sleeves. b. Piping NPS 6 and Larger: Galvanized-steel sheet sleeves.


31-18-01/DHH Bathroom Renovations 22 05 18 - 1 ESCUTCHEONS FOR March 18, 2021 PLUMBING PIPING

SECTION 22 05 18 - ESCUTCHEONS FOR PLUMBING PIPING

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Escutcheons.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Existing Piping to Remain: Existing piping that is not to be removed and that is not otherwise indicated to be removed and salvaged, or removed and reinstalled.


PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS


1. BrassCraft Manufacturing Co.; a Masco company. 2. Dearborn Brass. 3. ProFlo; a Ferguson Enterprises, Inc. brand.

2.2 ESCUTCHEONS

A. One-Piece, Steel Type: With polished, chrome-plated finish and setscrew fastener.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install escutcheons for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and finished floors.

B. Install escutcheons with ID to closely fit around pipe, tube, and insulation of insulated piping and with OD that completely covers opening.

1. Escutcheons for New Piping: a. Bare Piping at Wall and Floor Penetrations in Finished Spaces: One-piece steel with

polished, chrome-plated finish.

C. Install floor plates for piping penetrations of equipment-room floors.

D. Install floor plates with ID to closely fit around pipe, tube, and insulation of piping and with OD that completely covers opening.



31-18-01/DHH Bathroom Renovations 22 05 23.12 - 1 BALL VALVES FOR PLUMBING PIPING March 18, 2021

SECTION 22 05 23.12 - BALL VALVES FOR PLUMBING PIPING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Brass ball valves. 2. Bronze ball valves.


A. Product Data: For each type of valve. 1. Certification that products comply with NSF 61 Annex G and NSF 372.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR VALVES

A. Source Limitations for Valves: Obtain each type of valve from single source from single manufacturer.

B. ASME Compliance: 1. ASME B1.20.1 for threads for threaded end valves. 2. ASME B16.10 and ASME B16.34 for ferrous valve dimensions and design criteria. 3. ASME B16.18 for solder-joint connections. 4. ASME B31.9 for building services piping valves.

C. NSF Compliance: NSF 61 Annex G and NSF 372 for valve materials for potable-water service.

D. Bronze valves shall be made with dezincification-resistant materials. Bronze valves made with copper alloy (brass) containing more than 15 percent zinc are not permitted.

E. Valve Pressure-Temperature Ratings: Not less than indicated and as required for system pressures and temperatures.

F. Valve Sizes: Same as upstream piping unless otherwise indicated.

G. Valve Actuator Types: 1. Gear Actuator: For quarter-turn valves NPS 4 and larger. 2. Handlever: For quarter-turn valves smaller than NPS 4.

H. Valves in Insulated Piping: 1. Include 2-inch stem extensions. 2. Extended operating handles of nonthermal-conductive material and protective sleeves that

allow operation of valves without breaking vapor seals or disturbing insulation. 3. Memory stops that are fully adjustable after insulation is applied.

2.2 BRASS BALL VALVES

A. One-Piece, Brass Ball Valves: 1. Description:

a. Standard: MSS SP-110.

31-18-01/DHH Bathroom Renovations 22 05 23.12 - 2 BALL VALVES FOR PLUMBING PIPING March 18, 2021

b. CWP Rating: 400 psig. c. Body Design: One piece. d. Body Material: Forged brass or bronze. e. Ends: Threaded or flanged only f. Seats: PTFE. g. Stem: Brass or stainless steel. h. Ball: Chrome-plated brass or stainless steel. i. Port: Reduced.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 VALVE INSTALLATION

A. Install valves with unions or flanges at each piece of equipment arranged to allow service, maintenance, and equipment removal without system shutdown.

B. Locate valves for easy access and provide separate support where necessary.

C. Install valves in horizontal piping with stem at or above center of pipe.

D. Install valves in position to allow full stem movement.

3.2 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR VALVE APPLICATIONS

A. If valves with specified CWP ratings are unavailable, the same types of valves with higher CWP ratings may be substituted.

B. Select valves with the following end connections: 1. For Copper Tubing, NPS 2 and Smaller: Threaded ends except where solder-joint valve-

end option is indicated in valve schedules below. 2. For Steel Piping, NPS 2 and Smaller: Threaded ends.

3.3 DOMESTIC HOT- AND COLD-WATER VALVE SCHEDULE

A. Pipe NPS 2 and Smaller: 1. One piece, brass ball valve.


31-18-01/DHH Bathroom Renovations 22 05 29 - 1 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR March 18, 2021 PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT

SECTION 22 05 29 - HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Metal pipe hangers and supports. 2. Trapeze pipe hangers. 3. Thermal-hanger shield inserts. 4. Fastener systems. 5. Pipe positioning systems. 6. Equipment supports.


A. Delegated Design: Design trapeze pipe hangers and equipment supports, including comprehensive engineering analysis by a qualified professional engineer, using performance requirements and design criteria indicated.

B. Structural Performance: Hangers and supports for plumbing piping and equipment shall withstand the effects of gravity loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated according to ASCE/SEI 7. 1. Design supports for multiple pipes capable of supporting combined weight of supported

systems, system contents, and test water. 2. Design equipment supports capable of supporting combined operating weight of supported

equipment and connected systems and components.


A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.

B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details and include calculations for the following; include Product Data for components: 1. Trapeze pipe hangers. 2. Equipment supports.

C. Delegated-Design Submittal: For trapeze hangers indicated to comply with performance requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation.


A. Welding certificates.


A. Structural Steel Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel."

B. Pipe Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and operators according to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code.


PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 METAL PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS

A. Carbon-Steel Pipe Hangers and Supports: 1. Description: MSS SP-58, Types 1 through 58, factory-fabricated components. 2. Galvanized Metallic Coatings: Pregalvanized or hot dipped. 3. Nonmetallic Coatings: Plastic coating, jacket, or liner. 4. Padded Hangers: Hanger with fiberglass or other pipe insulation pad or cushion to support

bearing surface of piping. 5. Hanger Rods: Continuous-thread rod, nuts, and washer made of carbon steel.

B. Copper Pipe Hangers: 1. Description: MSS SP-58, Types 1 through 58, copper-coated-steel, factory-fabricated

components. 2. Hanger Rods: Continuous-thread rod, nuts, and washer made of copper-coated steel.

2.2 TRAPEZE PIPE HANGERS

A. Description: MSS SP-69, Type 59, shop- or field-fabricated pipe-support assembly made from structural carbon-steel shapes with MSS SP-58 carbon-steel hanger rods, nuts, saddles, and U-bolts.

2.3 THERMAL-HANGER SHIELD INSERTS

A. Insulation-Insert Material for Cold Piping: ASTM C 552, Type II cellular glass with 100-psig or ASTM C 591, Type VI, Grade 1 polyisocyanurate with 125-psig minimum compressive strength and vapor barrier.

B. Insulation-Insert Material for Hot Piping: ASTM C 552, Type II cellular glass with 100-psig or ASTM C 591, Type VI, Grade 1 polyisocyanurate with 125-psig minimum compressive strength.

C. For Trapeze or Clamped Systems: Insert and shield shall cover entire circumference of pipe.

D. For Clevis or Band Hangers: Insert and shield shall cover lower 180 degrees of pipe.

E. Insert Length: Extend 2 inches beyond sheet metal shield for piping operating below ambient air temperature.

2.4 FASTENER SYSTEMS

A. Powder-Actuated Fasteners: Threaded-steel stud, for use in hardened portland cement concrete with pull-out, tension, and shear capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials where used.

B. Mechanical-Expansion Anchors: Insert-wedge-type, zinc-coated steel anchors, for use in hardened portland cement concrete; with pull-out, tension, and shear capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials where used.

2.5 PIPE POSITIONING SYSTEMS

A. Description: IAPMO PS 42, positioning system of metal brackets, clips, and straps for positioning piping in pipe spaces; for plumbing fixtures in commercial applications.


2.6 EQUIPMENT SUPPORTS

A. Description: Welded, shop- or field-fabricated equipment support made from structural carbon-steel shapes.


A. Structural Steel: ASTM A 36/A 36M, carbon-steel plates, shapes, and bars; black and galvanized.

B. Grout: ASTM C 1107, factory-mixed and -packaged, dry, hydraulic-cement, nonshrink and nonmetallic grout; suitable for interior and exterior applications. 1. Properties: Nonstaining, noncorrosive, and nongaseous. 2. Design Mix: 5000-psi, 28-day compressive strength.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 HANGER AND SUPPORT INSTALLATION

A. Metal Pipe-Hanger Installation: Comply with MSS SP-69 and MSS SP-89. Install hangers, supports, clamps, and attachments as required to properly support piping from the building structure.

B. Metal Trapeze Pipe-Hanger Installation: Comply with MSS SP-69 and MSS SP-89. Arrange for grouping of parallel runs of horizontal piping, and support together on field-fabricated trapeze pipe hangers. 1. Pipes of Various Sizes: Support together and space trapezes for smallest pipe size or install

intermediate supports for smaller diameter pipes as specified for individual pipe hangers. 2. Field fabricate from ASTM A 36/A 36M, carbon-steel shapes selected for loads being

supported. Weld steel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M.

C. Thermal-Hanger Shield Installation: Install in pipe hanger or shield for insulated piping.

D. Fastener System Installation: 1. Install powder-actuated fasteners for use in lightweight concrete or concrete slabs less than

4 inches thick in concrete after concrete is placed and completely cured. Use operators that are licensed by powder-actuated tool manufacturer. Install fasteners according to powder-actuated tool manufacturer's operating manual.

2. Install mechanical-expansion anchors in concrete after concrete is placed and completely cured. Install fasteners according to manufacturer's written instructions.

E. Pipe Positioning-System Installation: Install support devices to make rigid supply and waste piping connections to each plumbing fixture.

F. Install hangers and supports complete with necessary attachments, inserts, bolts, rods, nuts, washers, and other accessories.

G. Equipment Support Installation: Fabricate from welded-structural-steel shapes.

H. Install hangers and supports to allow controlled thermal and seismic movement of piping systems, to permit freedom of movement between pipe anchors, and to facilitate action of expansion joints, expansion loops, expansion bends, and similar units.

I. Install lateral bracing with pipe hangers and supports to prevent swaying.


J. Install building attachments within concrete slabs or attach to structural steel. Install additional attachments at concentrated loads, including valves, flanges, and strainers, NPS 2-1/2 and larger and at changes in direction of piping. Install concrete inserts before concrete is placed; fasten inserts to forms and install reinforcing bars through openings at top of inserts.

K. Load Distribution: Install hangers and supports so that piping live and dead loads and stresses from movement will not be transmitted to connected equipment.

L. Pipe Slopes: Install hangers and supports to provide indicated pipe slopes and to not exceed maximum pipe deflections allowed by ASME B31.9 for building services piping.

M. Insulated Piping: 1. Attach clamps and spacers to piping.

a. Piping Operating above Ambient Air Temperature: Clamp may project through insulation.

b. Piping Operating below Ambient Air Temperature: Use thermal-hanger shield insert with clamp sized to match OD of insert.

c. Do not exceed pipe stress limits allowed by ASME B31.9 for building services piping. 2. Install MSS SP-58, Type 39, protection saddles if insulation without vapor barrier is

indicated. Fill interior voids with insulation that matches adjoining insulation. a. Option: Thermal-hanger shield inserts may be used. Include steel weight-distribution

plate for pipe NPS 4 and larger if pipe is installed on rollers. 3. Install MSS SP-58, Type 40, protective shields on cold piping with vapor barrier. Shields

shall span an arc of 180 degrees. a. Option: Thermal-hanger shield inserts may be used. Include steel weight-distribution

plate for pipe NPS 4 and larger if pipe is installed on rollers. 4. Shield Dimensions for Pipe: Not less than the following:

a. NPS 1/4 to NPS 3-1/2: 12 inches long and 0.048 inch thick. b. NPS 4: 12 inches long and 0.06 inch thick. c. NPS 5 and NPS 6: 18 inches long and 0.06 inch thick. d. NPS 8 to NPS 14: 24 inches long and 0.075 inch thick. e. NPS 16 to NPS 24: 24 inches long and 0.105 inch thick.

5. Pipes NPS 8 and Larger: Include wood or reinforced calcium-silicate-insulation inserts of length at least as long as protective shield.

6. Thermal-Hanger Shields: Install with insulation same thickness as piping insulation.

3.2 EQUIPMENT SUPPORTS

A. Fabricate structural-steel stands to suspend equipment from structure overhead or to support equipment above floor.

B. Grouting: Place grout under supports for equipment and make bearing surface smooth.

C. Provide lateral bracing, to prevent swaying, for equipment supports.

3.3 METAL FABRICATIONS

A. Cut, drill, and fit miscellaneous metal fabrications for trapeze pipe hangers.

B. Fit exposed connections together to form hairline joints. Field weld connections that cannot be shop welded because of shipping size limitations.

C. Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1/D1.1M procedures for shielded, metal arc welding; appearance and quality of welds; and methods used in correcting welding work; and with the following:


1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion resistance of base metals.

2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap. 3. Remove welding flux immediately. 4. Finish welds at exposed connections so no roughness shows after finishing and so

contours of welded surfaces match adjacent contours.

3.4 ADJUSTING

A. Hanger Adjustments: Adjust hangers to distribute loads equally on attachments and to achieve indicated slope of pipe.

B. Trim excess length of continuous-thread hanger and support rods to 1-1/2 inches.

3.5 PAINTING

A. Touchup: Clean field welds and abraded areas of shop paint. Paint exposed areas immediately after erecting hangers and supports. Use same materials as used for shop painting. Comply with SSPC-PA 1 requirements for touching up field-painted surfaces. 1. Apply paint by brush or spray to provide a minimum dry film thickness of 2.0 mils.

B. Touchup: Cleaning and touchup painting of field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas of shop paint on miscellaneous metal are specified in Section 09 91 23 "Interior Painting."

C. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and apply galvanizing-repair paint to comply with ASTM A 780.

3.6 HANGER AND SUPPORT SCHEDULE

A. Specific hanger and support requirements are in Sections specifying piping systems and equipment.

B. Comply with MSS SP-69 for pipe-hanger selections and applications that are not specified in piping system Sections.

C. Use hangers and supports with galvanized metallic coatings for piping and equipment that will not have field-applied finish.

D. Use nonmetallic coatings on attachments for electrolytic protection where attachments are in direct contact with copper tubing.

E. Use carbon-steel pipe hangers and supports and metal trapeze pipe hangers and attachments for general service applications.

F. Use copper-plated pipe hangers and copper attachments for copper piping and tubing.

G. Use padded hangers for piping that is subject to scratching.

H. Use thermal-hanger shield inserts for insulated piping and tubing.

I. Horizontal-Piping Hangers and Supports: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Sections, install the following types: 1. Adjustable, Steel Clevis Hangers (MSS Type 1): For suspension of noninsulated or

insulated, stationary pipes NPS 1/2 to NPS 30.


2. Yoke-Type Pipe Clamps (MSS Type 2): For suspension of up to 1050 deg F, pipes NPS 4 to NPS 24, requiring up to 4 inches of insulation.

3. Carbon- or Alloy-Steel, Double-Bolt Pipe Clamps (MSS Type 3): For suspension of pipes NPS 3/4 to NPS 36, requiring clamp flexibility and up to 4 inches of insulation.

4. Adjustable, Steel Band Hangers (MSS Type 7): For suspension of noninsulated, stationary pipes NPS 1/2 to NPS 8.

5. U-Bolts (MSS Type 24): For support of heavy pipes NPS 1/2 to NPS 30. 6. Pipe Saddle Supports (MSS Type 36): For support of pipes NPS 4 to NPS 36, with steel-

pipe base stanchion support and cast-iron floor flange or carbon-steel plate. 7. Pipe Stanchion Saddles (MSS Type 37): For support of pipes NPS 4 to NPS 36, with steel-

pipe base stanchion support and cast-iron floor flange or carbon-steel plate, and with U-bolt to retain pipe.

8. Single-Pipe Rolls (MSS Type 41): For suspension of pipes NPS 1 to NPS 30, from two rods if longitudinal movement caused by expansion and contraction might occur.

9. Complete Pipe Rolls (MSS Type 44): For support of pipes NPS 2 to NPS 42 if longitudinal movement caused by expansion and contraction might occur but vertical adjustment is not necessary.

J. Vertical-Piping Clamps: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Sections, install the following types: 1. Extension Pipe or Riser Clamps (MSS Type 8): For support of pipe risers NPS 3/4 to

NPS 24. 2. Carbon- or Alloy-Steel Riser Clamps (MSS Type 42): For support of pipe risers NPS 3/4 to

NPS 24 if longer ends are required for riser clamps.

K. Hanger-Rod Attachments: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Sections, install the following types: 1. Steel Turnbuckles (MSS Type 13): For adjustment up to 6 inches for heavy loads. 2. Steel Clevises (MSS Type 14): For 120 to 450 deg F piping installations.

L. Building Attachments: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Sections, install the following types: 1. Steel or Malleable Concrete Inserts (MSS Type 18): For upper attachment to suspend pipe

hangers from concrete ceiling. 2. Top-Beam C-Clamps (MSS Type 19): For use under roof installations with bar-joist

construction, to attach to top flange of structural shape. 3. Side-Beam or Channel Clamps (MSS Type 20): For attaching to bottom flange of beams,

channels, or angles. 4. Center-Beam Clamps (MSS Type 21): For attaching to center of bottom flange of beams. 5. Welded Beam Attachments (MSS Type 22): For attaching to bottom of beams if loads are

considerable and rod sizes are large. 6. C-Clamps (MSS Type 23): For structural shapes. 7. Welded-Steel Brackets: For support of pipes from below, or for suspending from above by

using clip and rod. Use one of the following for indicated loads: a. Light (MSS Type 31): 750 lb. b. Medium (MSS Type 32): 1500 lb. c. Heavy (MSS Type 33): 3000 lb.

8. Side-Beam Brackets (MSS Type 34): For sides of steel or wooden beams. 9. Plate Lugs (MSS Type 57): For attaching to steel beams if flexibility at beam is required.

M. Saddles and Shields: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Sections, install the following types: 1. Steel-Pipe-Covering Protection Saddles (MSS Type 39): To fill interior voids with insulation

that matches adjoining insulation. 2. Protection Shields (MSS Type 40): Of length recommended in writing by manufacturer to

prevent crushing insulation.


3. Thermal-Hanger Shield Inserts: For supporting insulated pipe.

N. Spring Hangers and Supports: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Sections, install the following types: 1. Spring Cushions (MSS Type 48): For light loads if vertical movement does not exceed 1-1/4

inches. 2. Spring-Cushion Roll Hangers (MSS Type 49): For equipping Type 41, roll hanger with

springs. 3. Variable-Spring Base Supports (MSS Type 52): Preset to indicated load and limit variability

factor to 25 percent to allow expansion and contraction of piping system from base support.

O. Comply with MSS SP-69 for trapeze pipe-hanger selections and applications that are not specified in piping system Sections.

P. Use powder-actuated fasteners or mechanical-expansion anchors instead of building attachments where required in concrete construction.

Q. Use pipe positioning systems in pipe spaces behind plumbing fixtures to support supply and waste piping for plumbing fixtures.


31-18-01/DHH Bathroom Renovations 22 05 53 - 1 IDENTIFICATION FOR March 18, 2021 PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT

SECTION 22 05 53 - IDENTIFICATION FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Equipment labels. 2. Warning signs and labels. 3. Pipe labels. 4. Valve tags.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 EQUIPMENT LABELS

A. Plastic Labels for Equipment:

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Brady Corporation. b. Craftmark Pipe Markers. c. LEM Products Inc. d. Marking Services, Inc. e. Seton Identification Products; a Brady Corporation company.

2. Material and Thickness: Multilayer, multicolor, plastic labels for mechanical engraving, 1/8

inch thick, and having predrilled holes for attachment hardware. 3. Letter Color: Black . 4. Background Color: White . 5. Maximum Temperature: Able to withstand temperatures up to 160 deg F. 6. Minimum Label Size: Length and width vary for required label content, but not less than 2-

1/2 by 3/4 inch. 7. Minimum Letter Size: 1/4 inch for name of units if viewing distance is less than 24 inches,

1/2 inch for viewing distances up to 72 inches, and proportionately larger lettering for greater viewing distances. Include secondary lettering two-thirds to three-quarters the size of principal lettering.

8. Fasteners: Stainless-steel self-tapping screws. 9. Adhesive: Contact-type permanent adhesive, compatible with label and with substrate.

B. Label Content: Include equipment's Drawing designation or unique equipment number, Drawing numbers where equipment is indicated (plans, details, and schedules), and the Specification Section number and title where equipment is specified.

C. Equipment Label Schedule: For each item of equipment to be labeled, on 8-1/2-by-11-inch bond paper. Tabulate equipment identification number, and identify Drawing numbers where



equipment is indicated (plans, details, and schedules) and the Specification Section number and title where equipment is specified. Equipment schedule shall be included in operation and maintenance data.

2.2 WARNING SIGNS AND LABELS


1. Brady Corporation. 2. Craftmark Pipe Markers. 3. LEM Products Inc. 4. Seton Identification Products; a Brady Corporation company.

B. Material and Thickness: Multilayer, multicolor, plastic labels for mechanical engraving, 1/8 inch thick, and having predrilled holes for attachment hardware.

C. Letter Color: Red .

D. Background Color: Yellow .

E. Maximum Temperature: Able to withstand temperatures up to 160 deg F.

F. Minimum Label Size: Length and width vary for required label content, but not less than 2-1/2 by

3/4 inch.

G. Minimum Letter Size: 1/4 inch for name of units if viewing distance is less than 24 inches, 1/2 inch for viewing distances up to 72 inches, and proportionately larger lettering for greater viewing distances. Include secondary lettering two-thirds to three-quarters the size of principal lettering.

H. Fasteners: Stainless-steel self-tapping screws.

I. Adhesive: Contact-type permanent adhesive, compatible with label and with substrate.

J. Label Content: Include caution and warning information plus emergency notification instructions.

2.3 PIPE LABELS


1. Brady Corporation. 2. Craftmark Pipe Markers. 3. LEM Products Inc. 4. Marking Services Inc. 5. Seton Identification Products; a Brady Corporation company.

B. General Requirements for Manufactured Pipe Labels: Preprinted, color-coded, with lettering indicating service, and showing flow direction.

C. Pretensioned Pipe Labels: Precoiled, semirigid plastic formed to cover full circumference of pipe and to attach to pipe without fasteners or adhesive.

D. Pipe Label Contents: Include identification of piping service using same designations or abbreviations as used on Drawings; also include pipe size and an arrow indicating flow direction. Include identification of all exposed piping to be abandoned in place.




1. Flow-Direction Arrows: Integral with piping-system service lettering to accommodate both directions or as separate unit on each pipe label to indicate flow direction.

2. Lettering Size: Size letters according to ASME A13.1 for piping .

2.4 VALVE TAGS


1. Brady Corporation. 2. Craftmark Pipe Markers. 3. LEM Products Inc. 4. Marking Services Inc.

B. Valve Tags: Stamped or engraved with 1/4-inch letters for piping system abbreviation and 1/2-inch numbers.

1. Tag Material: aluminum, 0.032-inch minimum thickness, and having predrilled or stamped holes for attachment hardware.

2. Fasteners: Brass wire-link chain or beaded chain .

C. Valve Schedules: For each piping system, on 8-1/2-by-11-inch bond paper. Tabulate valve number, piping system, system abbreviation (as shown on valve tag), location of valve (room or space), normal-operating position (open, closed, or modulating), and variations for identification. Mark valves for emergency shutoff and similar special uses.

1. Valve-tag schedule shall be included in operation and maintenance data.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Clean piping and equipment surfaces of substances that could impair bond of identification devices, including dirt, oil, grease, release agents, and incompatible primers, paints, and encapsulants.


A. Coordinate installation of identifying devices with completion of covering and painting of surfaces where devices are to be applied.

B. Coordinate installation of identifying devices with locations of access panels and doors.

C. Install identifying devices before installing acoustical ceilings and similar concealment.

3.3 EQUIPMENT LABEL INSTALLATION

A. Install or permanently fasten labels on each major item of mechanical equipment.

B. Locate equipment labels where accessible and visible.

3.4 PIPE LABEL INSTALLATION

A. Pipe Label Locations: Locate pipe labels where piping is exposed or above accessible ceilings in finished spaces; machine rooms; accessible maintenance spaces such as shafts, tunnels, and plenums; and exterior exposed locations as follows:



1. Near each valve and control device. 2. Near each branch connection, excluding short takeoffs for fixtures and terminal units.

Where flow pattern is not obvious, mark each pipe at branch. 3. Near penetrations through walls, floors, ceilings, and inaccessible enclosures. 4. At access doors, manholes, and similar access points that permit view of concealed piping. 5. Near major equipment items and other points of origination and termination. 6. Spaced at maximum intervals of 50 feet along each run. Reduce intervals to 25 feet in areas

of congested piping and equipment.

B. Directional Flow Arrows: Arrows shall be used to indicate direction of flow in pipes, including pipes where flow is allowed in both directions.

C. Pipe Label Color Schedule:

1. Domestic Water Piping a. Background: Safety green . b. Letter Colors: White .

3.5 VALVE-TAG INSTALLATION

A. Install tags on valves and control devices in piping systems, except check valves, valves within factory-fabricated equipment units, shutoff valves, faucets, convenience and lawn-watering hose connections, and similar roughing-in connections of end-use fixtures and units. List tagged valves in a valve schedule.

B. Valve-Tag Application Schedule: Tag valves according to size, shape, and color scheme and with captions similar to those indicated in the following subparagraphs:

1. Valve-Tag Size and Shape: a. Cold Water: 1-1/2 inches, round. b. Hot Water: 1-1/2 inches, round.

2. Valve-Tag Colors: a. Cold Water: Natural . b. Hot Water: Natural .

3. Letter Colors: a. Cold Water: White . b. Hot Water: White .


31-18-01/DHH Bathroom Renovations 22 07 19 - 1 PLUMBING PIPING INSULATION March 18, 2021

SECTION 22 07 19 - PLUMBING PIPING INSULATION

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes insulating the following plumbing piping services: 1. Domestic hot-water piping. 2. Domestic recirculating hot-water piping. 3. Supplies and drains for handicap-accessible lavatories and sinks.

B. Related Sections: 1. Section 22 07 16 "Plumbing Equipment Insulation."



B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work. 1. Detail application of protective shields, saddles, and inserts at hangers for each type of

insulation and hanger. 2. Detail attachment and covering of heat tracing inside insulation. 3. Detail insulation application at pipe expansion joints for each type of insulation. 4. Detail insulation application at elbows, fittings, flanges, valves, and specialties for each type

of insulation. 5. Detail removable insulation at piping specialties, equipment connections, and access

panels. 6. Detail application of field-applied jackets. 7. Detail application at linkages of control devices.


A. Field quality-control reports.


A. Surface-Burning Characteristics: For insulation and related materials, as determined by testing identical products according to ASTM E 84 by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Factory label insulation and jacket materials and adhesive, mastic, tapes, and cement material containers, with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency. 1. Insulation Installed Indoors: Flame-spread index of 25 or less, and smoke-developed index

of 50 or less. 2. Insulation Installed Outdoors: Flame-spread index of 75 or less, and smoke-developed

index of 150 or less.

B. Comply with the following applicable standards and other requirements specified for miscellaneous components: 1. Supply and Drain Protective Shielding Guards: ICC A117.1.


PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 INSULATION MATERIALS

A. Comply with requirements in "Piping Insulation Schedule, General," "Indoor Piping Insulation Schedule," "Outdoor, Aboveground Piping Insulation Schedule," and "Outdoor, Underground Piping Insulation Schedule" articles for where insulating materials shall be applied.

B. Products shall not contain asbestos, lead, mercury, or mercury compounds.

C. Products that come in contact with stainless steel shall have a leachable chloride content of less than 50 ppm when tested according to ASTM C 871.

D. Insulation materials for use on austenitic stainless steel shall be qualified as acceptable according to ASTM C 795.

E. Foam insulation materials shall not use CFC or HCFC blowing agents in the manufacturing process.

F. Cellular Glass: Inorganic, incombustible, foamed or cellulated glass with annealed, rigid, hermetically sealed cells. Factory-applied jacket requirements are specified in "Factory-Applied Jackets" Article.

1. Special-Shaped Insulation: ASTM C 552, Type III. 2. Preformed Pipe Insulation without Jacket: Comply with ASTM C 552, Type II, Class 1. 3. Preformed Pipe Insulation with Factory-Applied ASJ: Comply with ASTM C 552, Type II,

Class 2. 4. Factory fabricate shapes according to ASTM C 450 and ASTM C 585.

G. Mineral-Fiber, Preformed Pipe Insulation: 1. Type I, 850 Deg F Materials: Mineral or glass fibers bonded with a thermosetting resin.

Comply with ASTM C 547, Type I, Grade A, with factory-applied ASJ. Factory-applied jacket requirements are specified in "Factory-Applied Jackets" Article.

2.2 INSULATING CEMENTS

A. Mineral-Fiber, Hydraulic-Setting Insulating and Finishing Cement: Comply with ASTM C 449.

2.3 ADHESIVES

A. Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates and for bonding insulation to itself and to surfaces to be insulated, unless otherwise indicated.

B. Cellular-Glass Adhesive: Two-component, thermosetting urethane adhesive containing no flammable solvents, with a service temperature range of minus 100 to plus 200 deg F.

1. For indoor applications, adhesive shall have a VOC content of 50 g/L or less when

calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24). 2. Adhesive shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California

Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers."

C. Mineral-Fiber Adhesive: Comply with MIL-A-3316C, Class 2, Grade A.


D. ASJ Adhesive, and FSK Jacket Adhesive: Comply with MIL-A-3316C, Class 2, Grade A for bonding insulation jacket lap seams and joints.

E. PVC Jacket Adhesive: Compatible with PVC jacket.

2.4 SEALANTS

A. Joint Sealants for Cellular-Glass Products: 1. Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates. 2. Permanently flexible, elastomeric sealant. 3. Service Temperature Range: Minus 100 to plus 300 deg F. 4. Color: White or gray.

B. FSK and Metal Jacket Flashing Sealants: 1. Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates. 2. Fire- and water-resistant, flexible, elastomeric sealant. 3. Service Temperature Range: Minus 40 to plus 250 deg F. 4. Color: Aluminum.

C. ASJ Flashing Sealants, and Vinyl, PVDC, and PVC Jacket Flashing Sealants: 1. Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates. 2. Fire- and water-resistant, flexible, elastomeric sealant. 3. Service Temperature Range: Minus 40 to plus 250 deg F. 4. Color: White.

2.5 FACTORY-APPLIED JACKETS

A. Insulation system schedules indicate factory-applied jackets on various applications. When factory-applied jackets are indicated, comply with the following: 1. ASJ: White, kraft-paper, fiberglass-reinforced scrim with aluminum-foil backing; complying

with ASTM C 1136, Type I. 2. ASJ-SSL: ASJ with self-sealing, pressure-sensitive, acrylic-based adhesive covered by a

removable protective strip; complying with ASTM C 1136, Type I. 3. FSK Jacket: Aluminum-foil, fiberglass-reinforced scrim with kraft-paper backing; complying

with ASTM C 1136, Type II.

2.6 FIELD-APPLIED JACKETS

A. Field-applied jackets shall comply with ASTM C 921, Type I, unless otherwise indicated.

B. PVC Jacket: High-impact-resistant, UV-resistant PVC complying with ASTM D 1784, Class 16354-C; thickness as scheduled; roll stock ready for shop or field cutting and forming. Thickness is indicated in field-applied jacket schedules. 1. Adhesive: As recommended by jacket material manufacturer. 2. Color: White. 3. Factory-fabricated fitting covers to match jacket if available; otherwise, field fabricate.

a. Shapes: 45- and 90-degree, short- and long-radius elbows, tees, valves, flanges, unions, reducers, end caps, soil-pipe hubs, traps, mechanical joints, and P-trap and supply covers for lavatories.

2.7 TAPES

A. ASJ Tape: White vapor-retarder tape matching factory-applied jacket with acrylic adhesive, complying with ASTM C 1136. 1. Width: 3 inches.


2. Thickness: 11.5 mils. 3. Adhesion: 90 ounces force/inch in width. 4. Elongation: 2 percent. 5. Tensile Strength: 40 lbf/inch in width. 6. ASJ Tape Disks and Squares: Precut disks or squares of ASJ tape.

B. FSK Tape: Foil-face, vapor-retarder tape matching factory-applied jacket with acrylic adhesive; complying with ASTM C 1136. 1. Width: 3 inches. 2. Thickness: 6.5 mils. 3. Adhesion: 90 ounces force/inch in width. 4. Elongation: 2 percent. 5. Tensile Strength: 40 lbf/inch in width. 6. FSK Tape Disks and Squares: Precut disks or squares of FSK tape.

C. PVC Tape: White vapor-retarder tape matching field-applied PVC jacket with acrylic adhesive; suitable for indoor and outdoor applications. 1. Width: 2 inches. 2. Thickness: 6 mils. 3. Adhesion: 64 ounces force/inch in width. 4. Elongation: 500 percent. 5. Tensile Strength: 18 lbf/inch in width. 6. .

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Surface Preparation: Clean and dry surfaces to receive insulation. Remove materials that will adversely affect insulation application.

B. Coordinate insulation installation with the trade installing heat tracing. Comply with requirements for heat tracing that apply to insulation.

C. Mix insulating cements with clean potable water; if insulating cements are to be in contact with stainless-steel surfaces, use demineralized water.


A. Install insulation materials, accessories, and finishes with smooth, straight, and even surfaces; free of voids throughout the length of piping including fittings, valves, and specialties.

B. Install insulation materials, forms, vapor barriers or retarders, jackets, and thicknesses required for each item of pipe system as specified in insulation system schedules.

C. Install accessories compatible with insulation materials and suitable for the service. Install accessories that do not corrode, soften, or otherwise attack insulation or jacket in either wet or dry state.

D. Install insulation with longitudinal seams at top and bottom of horizontal runs.

E. Install multiple layers of insulation with longitudinal and end seams staggered.

F. Do not weld brackets, clips, or other attachment devices to piping, fittings, and specialties.


G. Keep insulation materials dry during application and finishing.

H. Install insulation with tight longitudinal seams and end joints. Bond seams and joints with adhesive recommended by insulation material manufacturer.

I. Install insulation with least number of joints practical.

J. Where vapor barrier is indicated, seal joints, seams, and penetrations in insulation at hangers, supports, anchors, and other projections with vapor-barrier mastic. 1. Install insulation continuously through hangers and around anchor attachments. 2. For insulation application where vapor barriers are indicated, extend insulation on anchor

legs from point of attachment to supported item to point of attachment to structure. Taper and seal ends at attachment to structure with vapor-barrier mastic.

3. Install insert materials and install insulation to tightly join the insert. Seal insulation to insulation inserts with adhesive or sealing compound recommended by insulation material manufacturer.

4. Cover inserts with jacket material matching adjacent pipe insulation. Install shields over jacket, arranged to protect jacket from tear or puncture by hanger, support, and shield.

K. Apply adhesives, mastics, and sealants at manufacturer's recommended coverage rate and wet and dry film thicknesses.

L. Install insulation with factory-applied jackets as follows: 1. Draw jacket tight and smooth. 2. Cover circumferential joints with 3-inch-wide strips, of same material as insulation jacket.

Secure strips with adhesive and outward clinching staples along both edges of strip, spaced 4 inches o.c.

3. Overlap jacket longitudinal seams at least 1-1/2 inches. Install insulation with longitudinal seams at bottom of pipe. Clean and dry surface to receive self-sealing lap. Staple laps with outward clinching staples along edge at 2 inches o.c. a. For below-ambient services, apply vapor-barrier mastic over staples.

4. Cover joints and seams with tape, according to insulation material manufacturer's written instructions, to maintain vapor seal.

5. Where vapor barriers are indicated, apply vapor-barrier mastic on seams and joints and at ends adjacent to pipe flanges and fittings.

M. Cut insulation in a manner to avoid compressing insulation more than 75 percent of its nominal thickness.

N. Finish installation with systems at operating conditions. Repair joint separations and cracking due to thermal movement.

O. Repair damaged insulation facings by applying same facing material over damaged areas. Extend patches at least 4 inches beyond damaged areas. Adhere, staple, and seal patches similar to butt joints.

P. For above-ambient services, do not install insulation to the following: 1. Vibration-control devices. 2. Testing agency labels and stamps. 3. Nameplates and data plates. 4. Cleanouts.


3.3 PENETRATIONS

A. Insulation Installation at Roof Penetrations: Install insulation continuously through roof penetrations. 1. Seal penetrations with flashing sealant. 2. For applications requiring only indoor insulation, terminate insulation above roof surface and

seal with joint sealant. For applications requiring indoor and outdoor insulation, install insulation for outdoor applications tightly joined to indoor insulation ends. Seal joint with joint sealant.

3. Extend jacket of outdoor insulation outside roof flashing at least 2 inches below top of roof flashing.

4. Seal jacket to roof flashing with flashing sealant.

B. Insulation Installation at Underground Exterior Wall Penetrations: Terminate insulation flush with sleeve seal. Seal terminations with flashing sealant.

C. Insulation Installation at Aboveground Exterior Wall Penetrations: Install insulation continuously through wall penetrations. 1. Seal penetrations with flashing sealant. 2. For applications requiring only indoor insulation, terminate insulation inside wall surface and

seal with joint sealant. For applications requiring indoor and outdoor insulation, install insulation for outdoor applications tightly joined to indoor insulation ends. Seal joint with joint sealant.

3. Extend jacket of outdoor insulation outside wall flashing and overlap wall flashing at least 2 inches.

4. Seal jacket to wall flashing with flashing sealant.

D. Insulation Installation at Interior Wall and Partition Penetrations (That Are Not Fire Rated): Install insulation continuously through walls and partitions.

E. Insulation Installation at Fire-Rated Wall and Partition Penetrations: Install insulation continuously through penetrations of fire-rated walls and partitions. 1. Comply with requirements in Section 07 84 13 "Penetration Firestopping" for firestopping

and fire-resistive joint sealers.

F. Insulation Installation at Floor Penetrations: 1. Pipe: Install insulation continuously through floor penetrations. 2. Seal penetrations through fire-rated assemblies. Comply with requirements in

Section 07 84 13 "Penetration Firestopping."

3.4 GENERAL PIPE INSULATION INSTALLATION

A. Requirements in this article generally apply to all insulation materials except where more specific requirements are specified in various pipe insulation material installation articles.

B. Insulation Installation on Fittings, Valves, Strainers, Flanges, and Unions: 1. Install insulation over fittings, valves, strainers, flanges, unions, and other specialties with

continuous thermal and vapor-retarder integrity unless otherwise indicated. 2. Insulate pipe elbows using preformed fitting insulation or mitered fittings made from same

material and density as adjacent pipe insulation. Each piece shall be butted tightly against adjoining piece and bonded with adhesive. Fill joints, seams, voids, and irregular surfaces with insulating cement finished to a smooth, hard, and uniform contour that is uniform with adjoining pipe insulation.


3. Insulate tee fittings with preformed fitting insulation or sectional pipe insulation of same material and thickness as used for adjacent pipe. Cut sectional pipe insulation to fit. Butt each section closely to the next and hold in place with tie wire. Bond pieces with adhesive.

4. Insulate valves using preformed fitting insulation or sectional pipe insulation of same material, density, and thickness as used for adjacent pipe. Overlap adjoining pipe insulation by not less than two times the thickness of pipe insulation, or one pipe diameter, whichever is thicker. For valves, insulate up to and including the bonnets, valve stuffing-box studs, bolts, and nuts. Fill joints, seams, and irregular surfaces with insulating cement.

5. Insulate strainers using preformed fitting insulation or sectional pipe insulation of same material, density, and thickness as used for adjacent pipe. Overlap adjoining pipe insulation by not less than two times the thickness of pipe insulation, or one pipe diameter, whichever is thicker. Fill joints, seams, and irregular surfaces with insulating cement. Insulate strainers so strainer basket flange or plug can be easily removed and replaced without damaging the insulation and jacket. Provide a removable reusable insulation cover. For below-ambient services, provide a design that maintains vapor barrier.

6. Insulate flanges and unions using a section of oversized preformed pipe insulation. Overlap adjoining pipe insulation by not less than two times the thickness of pipe insulation, or one pipe diameter, whichever is thicker.

7. Cover segmented insulated surfaces with a layer of finishing cement and coat with a mastic. Install vapor-barrier mastic for below-ambient services and a breather mastic for above-ambient services. Reinforce the mastic with fabric-reinforcing mesh. Trowel the mastic to a smooth and well-shaped contour.

8. For services not specified to receive a field-applied jacket except for flexible elastomeric and polyolefin, install fitted PVC cover over elbows, tees, strainers, valves, flanges, and unions. Terminate ends with PVC end caps. Tape PVC covers to adjoining insulation facing using PVC tape.

9. Stencil or label the outside insulation jacket of each union with the word "union." Match size and color of pipe labels.

C. Insulate instrument connections for thermometers, pressure gages, pressure temperature taps, test connections, flow meters, sensors, switches, and transmitters on insulated pipes. Shape insulation at these connections by tapering it to and around the connection with insulating cement and finish with finishing cement, mastic, and flashing sealant.

D. Install removable insulation covers at locations indicated. Installation shall conform to the following: 1. Make removable flange and union insulation from sectional pipe insulation of same

thickness as that on adjoining pipe. Install same insulation jacket as adjoining pipe insulation.

2. When flange and union covers are made from sectional pipe insulation, extend insulation from flanges or union long at least two times the insulation thickness over adjacent pipe insulation on each side of flange or union. Secure flange cover in place with stainless-steel or aluminum bands. Select band material compatible with insulation and jacket.

3. Construct removable valve insulation covers in same manner as for flanges, except divide the two-part section on the vertical center line of valve body.

4. When covers are made from block insulation, make two halves, each consisting of mitered blocks wired to stainless-steel fabric. Secure this wire frame, with its attached insulation, to flanges with tie wire. Extend insulation at least 2 inches over adjacent pipe insulation on each side of valve. Fill space between flange or union cover and pipe insulation with insulating cement. Finish cover assembly with insulating cement applied in two coats. After first coat is dry, apply and trowel second coat to a smooth finish.

5. Unless a PVC jacket is indicated in field-applied jacket schedules, finish exposed surfaces with a metal jacket.


3.5 INSTALLATION OF CELLULAR-GLASS INSULATION

A. Insulation Installation on Straight Pipes and Tubes: 1. Secure each layer of insulation to pipe with wire or bands and tighten bands without

deforming insulation materials. 2. Where vapor barriers are indicated, seal longitudinal seams, end joints, and protrusions

with vapor-barrier mastic and joint sealant. 3. For insulation with factory-applied jackets on above-ambient services, secure laps with

outward clinched staples at 6 inches o.c. 4. For insulation with factory-applied jackets on below-ambient services, do not staple

longitudinal tabs. Instead, secure tabs with additional adhesive as recommended by insulation material manufacturer and seal with vapor-barrier mastic and flashing sealant.

B. Insulation Installation on Pipe Flanges: 1. Install preformed pipe insulation to outer diameter of pipe flange. 2. Make width of insulation section same as overall width of flange and bolts, plus twice the

thickness of pipe insulation. 3. Fill voids between inner circumference of flange insulation and outer circumference of

adjacent straight pipe segments with cut sections of cellular-glass block insulation of same thickness as pipe insulation.

4. Install jacket material with manufacturer's recommended adhesive, overlap seams at least 1 inch, and seal joints with flashing sealant.

C. Insulation Installation on Pipe Fittings and Elbows: 1. Install preformed sections of same material as straight segments of pipe insulation when

available. Secure according to manufacturer's written instructions. 2. When preformed sections of insulation are not available, install mitered sections of cellular-

glass insulation. Secure insulation materials with wire or bands.

D. Insulation Installation on Valves and Pipe Specialties: 1. Install preformed sections of cellular-glass insulation to valve body. 2. Arrange insulation to permit access to packing and to allow valve operation without

disturbing insulation. 3. Install insulation to flanges as specified for flange insulation application.

3.6 INSTALLATION OF MINERAL-FIBER PREFORMED PIPE INSULATION

A. Insulation Installation on Straight Pipes and Tubes: 1. Secure each layer of preformed pipe insulation to pipe with wire or bands and tighten bands

without deforming insulation materials. 2. Where vapor barriers are indicated, seal longitudinal seams, end joints, and protrusions

with vapor-barrier mastic and joint sealant. 3. For insulation with factory-applied jackets on above-ambient surfaces, secure laps with

outward clinched staples at 6 inches o.c. 4. For insulation with factory-applied jackets on below-ambient surfaces, do not staple

longitudinal tabs. Instead, secure tabs with additional adhesive as recommended by insulation material manufacturer and seal with vapor-barrier mastic and flashing sealant.

B. Insulation Installation on Pipe Flanges: 1. Install preformed pipe insulation to outer diameter of pipe flange. 2. Make width of insulation section same as overall width of flange and bolts, plus twice the

thickness of pipe insulation. 3. Fill voids between inner circumference of flange insulation and outer circumference of

adjacent straight pipe segments with mineral-fiber blanket insulation. 4. Install jacket material with manufacturer's recommended adhesive, overlap seams at least 1

inch, and seal joints with flashing sealant.


C. Insulation Installation on Pipe Fittings and Elbows: 1. Install preformed sections of same material as straight segments of pipe insulation when

available. 2. When preformed insulation elbows and fittings are not available, install mitered sections of

pipe insulation, to a thickness equal to adjoining pipe insulation. Secure insulation materials with wire or bands.

D. Insulation Installation on Valves and Pipe Specialties: 1. Install preformed sections of same material as straight segments of pipe insulation when

available. 2. When preformed sections are not available, install mitered sections of pipe insulation to

valve body. 3. Arrange insulation to permit access to packing and to allow valve operation without

disturbing insulation. 4. Install insulation to flanges as specified for flange insulation application.

3.7 FIELD-APPLIED JACKET INSTALLATION

A. Where FSK jackets are indicated, install as follows: 1. Draw jacket material smooth and tight. 2. Install lap or joint strips with same material as jacket. 3. Secure jacket to insulation with manufacturer's recommended adhesive. 4. Install jacket with 1-1/2-inch laps at longitudinal seams and 3-inch-wide joint strips at end

joints. 5. Seal openings, punctures, and breaks in vapor-retarder jackets and exposed insulation with

vapor-barrier mastic.

B. Where PVC jackets are indicated, install with 1-inch overlap at longitudinal seams and end joints. Seal with manufacturer's recommended adhesive. 1. Apply two continuous beads of adhesive to seams and joints, one bead under lap and the

finish bead along seam and joint edge.

C. Where metal jackets are indicated, install with 2-inch overlap at longitudinal seams and end joints. Overlap longitudinal seams arranged to shed water. Seal end joints with weatherproof sealant recommended by insulation manufacturer. Secure jacket with stainless-steel bands 12 inches o.c. and at end joints.

3.8 FINISHES

A. Insulation with ASJ, Glass-Cloth, or Other Paintable Jacket Material: Paint jacket with paint system identified below and as specified in Section 09 91 13 "Exterior Painting" and Section 09 91 23 "Interior Painting." 1. Flat Acrylic Finish: Two finish coats over a primer that is compatible with jacket material

and finish coat paint. Add fungicidal agent to render fabric mildew proof. a. Finish Coat Material: Interior, flat, latex-emulsion size.

B. Flexible Elastomeric Thermal Insulation: After adhesive has fully cured, apply two coats of insulation manufacturer's recommended protective coating.

C. Color: Final color as selected by Architect. Vary first and second coats to allow visual inspection of the completed Work.

D. Do not field paint aluminum or stainless-steel jackets.



A. Perform tests and inspections.

B. All insulation applications will be considered defective Work if sample inspection reveals noncompliance with requirements.

3.10 PIPING INSULATION SCHEDULE, GENERAL

A. Acceptable preformed pipe and tubular insulation materials and thicknesses are identified for each piping system and pipe size range. If more than one material is listed for a piping system, selection from materials listed is Contractor's option.

B. Items Not Insulated: Unless otherwise indicated, do not install insulation on the following: 1. Drainage piping located in crawl spaces. 2. Underground piping. 3. Chrome-plated pipes and fittings unless there is a potential for personnel injury.

3.11 INDOOR PIPING INSULATION SCHEDULE

A. Domestic Hot and Recirculated Hot Water: Insulation shall be the following: 1. Mineral-Fiber, Preformed Pipe Insulation, Type I: 1/2 inch thick.

3.12 INDOOR, FIELD-APPLIED JACKET SCHEDULE

A. Install jacket over insulation material. For insulation with factory-applied jacket, install the field-applied jacket over the factory-applied jacket.

B. If more than one material is listed, selection from materials listed is Contractor's option.

C. Piping, Concealed: 1. None.

D. Piping, Exposed: 1. PVC


31-18-01/DHH Bathroom Renovations 22 11 16 - 1 DOMESTIC WATER PIPING March 18, 2021

SECTION 22 11 16 - DOMESTIC WATER PIPING

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Copper tube and fittings. 2. PEX tube and fittings. 3. Piping joining materials. 4. Encasement for piping. 5. Transition fittings. 6. Dielectric fittings.


A. Product Data:

1. Pipe and tube. 2. Fittings. 3. Joining materials. 4. Transition fittings.


A. System purging and disinfecting activities report.


A. Interruption of Existing Water Service: Do not interrupt water service to facilities occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide temporary water service according to requirements indicated:

1. Notify Owner no fewer than five days in advance of proposed interruption of water service. 2. Do not interrupt water service without Owner's written permission.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PIPING MATERIALS

A. Potable-water piping and components shall comply with NSF 14, NSF 61, and NSF 372. Include marking "NSF-pw" on piping.

2.2 COPPER TUBE AND FITTINGS

A. Drawn-Temper Copper Tube: ASTM B88, Type L .

B. Cast-Copper, Solder-Joint Fittings: ASME B16.18, pressure fittings.

C. Wrought-Copper, Solder-Joint Fittings: ASME B16.22, pressure fittings.


D. Bronze Flanges: ASME B16.24, Class 150, with solder-joint ends.

E. Cast Copper Unions: MSS SP-123, cast-copper-alloy, hexagonal-stock body, with ball-and-socket, metal-to-metal seating surfaces and solder-joint or threaded ends.

F. Wrought Copper Unions: ASME B16.22.

G. Copper-Tube, Mechanically Formed Tee Fitting: For forming T-branch on copper water tube.

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the following: a. T-DRILL Industries Inc.

2. Description: Tee formed in copper tube in accordance with ASTM F2014.

2.3 PEX TUBE AND FITTINGS


1. Apollo Valves; a part of Aalberts Integrated Piping Systems. 2. Uponor. 3. Watts Radiant; A WATTS Brand. 4. Zurn Industries, LLC.

B. Tube Material: PEX plastic according to ASTM F876 and ASTM F877.

C. Fittings: ASTM F1807, metal insert and copper crimp rings .

D. Manifold: Multiple-outlet, plastic or corrosion-resistant-metal assembly complying with ASTM F876; with plastic or corrosion-resistant-metal valve for each outlet.

2.4 PIPING JOINING MATERIALS

A. Metal, Pipe-Flange Bolts and Nuts: ASME B18.2.1, carbon steel unless otherwise indicated.

B. Solder Filler Metals: ASTM B32, lead-free alloys.

C. Flux: ASTM B813, water flushable.

D. Brazing Filler Metals: AWS A5.8M/A5.8, BCuP Series, copper-phosphorus alloys for general-duty brazing unless otherwise indicated.

2.5 TRANSITION FITTINGS

A. General Requirements:

1. Same size as pipes to be joined. 2. Pressure rating at least equal to pipes to be joined. 3. End connections compatible with pipes to be joined.

B. Fitting-Type Transition Couplings: Manufactured piping coupling or specified piping system fitting.

C. Plastic-to-Metal Transition Fittings:

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Charlotte Pipe and Foundry Company. b. Sioux Chief Manufacturing Company, Inc.







c. Spears Manufacturing Company.

D. Plastic-to-Metal Transition Unions:

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Aquatherm. b. NIBCO INC. c. Spears Manufacturing Company.

2.6 DIELECTRIC FITTINGS

A. General Requirements: Assembly of copper alloy and ferrous materials with separating nonconductive insulating material. Include end connections compatible with pipes to be joined.

B. Dielectric Unions:

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Central Plastics Company. b. WATTS. c. Zurn Industries, LLC.

2. Standard: ASSE 1079. 3. Pressure Rating: 125 psig minimum at 180 deg F . 4. End Connections: Solder-joint copper alloy and threaded ferrous.

C. Dielectric Flanges:

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the

following: a. Central Plastics Company. b. WATTS. c. Zurn Industries, LLC.

2. Standard: ASSE 1079. 3. Factory-fabricated, bolted, companion-flange assembly. 4. Pressure Rating: 125 psig minimum at 180 deg F . 5. End Connections: Solder-joint copper alloy and threaded ferrous; threaded solder-joint

copper alloy and threaded ferrous.

D. Dielectric-Flange Insulating Kits:

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the

following: a. Advance Products & Systems, Inc. b. Calpico, Inc. c. Central Plastics Company.

2. Nonconducting materials for field assembly of companion flanges. 3. Pressure Rating: 150 psig . 4. Gasket: Neoprene or phenolic. 5. Bolt Sleeves: Phenolic or polyethylene. 6. Washers: Phenolic with steel backing washers.

E. Dielectric Nipples:







1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Grinnell G-Fire by Johnson Controls Company. b. Sioux Chief Manufacturing Company, Inc. c. Victaulic Company.

2. Standard: IAPMO PS 66. 3. Electroplated steel nipple complying with ASTM F1545. 4. Pressure Rating and Temperature: 300 psig at 225 deg F . 5. End Connections: Male threaded or grooved. 6. Lining: Inert and noncorrosive, propylene.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PIPING APPLICATIONS

A. Transition and special fittings with pressure ratings at least equal to piping rating may be used in applications below unless otherwise indicated.

B. Flanges and unions may be used for aboveground piping joints unless otherwise indicated.

C. Fitting Option: Extruded-tee connections and brazed joints may be used on aboveground copper tubing.

D. Aboveground domestic water piping, NPS-2 1/2 and smaller, shall be one of the following:

1. Drawn-temper copper tube, ASTM B88, Type L; cast- or wrought-copper, solder-joint fittings; and soldered joints.

2. PEX-A tube. a. Fittings for PEX tube:

1) ASTM F1807, metal insert and copper crimp rings. 2) ASTM F1960, cold expansion fittings and reinforcing rings.

E. Aboveground domestic water piping, NPS 3 to NPS 6, shall be one of the following: 1. Drawn-temper copper tube, ASTM B88, Type L; cast- or wrought-copper, solder-joint fittings;

and soldered joints.

3.2 INSTALLATION OF PIPING

A. Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of domestic water piping. Indicated locations and arrangements are used to size pipe and calculate friction loss, expansion, and other design considerations. Install piping as indicated unless deviations to layout are approved on coordination drawings.

B. Install valves according to the following:

1. Section 22 05 23.12 "Ball Valves for Plumbing Piping."

C. Install domestic water piping level with 0.25 percent slope downward toward drain and plumb.

D. Install piping concealed from view and protected from physical contact by building occupants unless otherwise indicated and except in equipment rooms and service areas.

E. Install piping indicated to be exposed and piping in equipment rooms and service areas at right angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs are prohibited unless specifically indicated otherwise.



F. Install piping above accessible ceilings to allow sufficient space for ceiling panel removal, and coordinate with other services occupying that space.

G. Install piping to permit valve servicing.

H. Install nipples, unions, special fittings, and valves with pressure ratings the same as or higher than the system pressure rating used in applications below unless otherwise indicated.

I. Install piping free of sags and bends.

J. Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections.

K. Install PEX tubing with loop at each change of direction of more than 90 degrees.

L. Install unions in copper tubing at final connection to each piece of equipment, machine, and specialty.

M. Install sleeves for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors. Comply with requirements for sleeves specified in Section 22 05 17 "Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for Plumbing Piping."

N. Install sleeve seals for piping penetrations of concrete walls and slabs. Comply with requirements for sleeve seals specified in Section 22 05 17 "Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for Plumbing Piping."

O. Install escutcheons for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors. Comply with requirements for escutcheons specified in Section 22 05 18 "Escutcheons for Plumbing Piping."

3.3 JOINT CONSTRUCTION

A. Ream ends of pipes and tubes and remove burrs. Bevel plain ends of steel pipe.

B. Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from inside and outside of pipes, tubes, and fittings before assembly.

C. Threaded Joints: Thread pipe with tapered pipe threads according to ASME B1.20.1. Cut threads full and clean using sharp dies. Ream threaded pipe ends to remove burrs and restore full ID. Join pipe fittings and valves as follows:

1. Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to external pipe threads. 2. Damaged Threads: Do not use pipe or pipe fittings with threads that are corroded or

damaged.

D. Brazed Joints for Copper Tubing: Comply with CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook," "Brazed Joints" chapter.

E. Soldered Joints for Copper Tubing: Apply ASTM B813, water-flushable flux to end of tube. Join copper tube and fittings according to ASTM B828 or CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook."

F. Extruded-Tee Connections: Form tee in copper tube according to ASTM F2014. Use tool designed for copper tube; drill pilot hole, form collar for outlet, dimple tube to form seating stop, and braze branch tube into collar.

G. Flanged Joints: Select appropriate asbestos-free, nonmetallic gasket material in size, type, and thickness suitable for domestic water service. Join flanges with gasket and bolts according to ASME B31.9.

H. Joints for PEX Tubing, ASTM: Join according to ASTM F1807 for metal insert and copper crimp ring fittings and ASTM F1960 for cold expansion fittings and reinforcing rings.


I. Joints for Dissimilar-Material Piping: Make joints using adapters compatible with materials of both piping systems.

3.4 INSTALLATION OF TRANSITION FITTINGS

A. Install transition couplings at joints of dissimilar piping.

B. Transition Fittings in Aboveground Domestic Water Piping NPS 2 and Smaller: Plastic-to-metal transition fittings or unions.

3.5 INSTALLATION OF DIELECTRIC FITTINGS

A. Install dielectric fittings in piping at connections of dissimilar metal piping and tubing.

B. Dielectric Fittings for NPS 2 and Smaller: Use dielectric couplings or unions.

C. Dielectric Fittings for NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 4: Use dielectric flanges.

D. Dielectric Fittings for NPS 5 and Larger: Use dielectric flange kits.

3.6 INSTALLATION OF HANGERS AND SUPPORTS

A. Comply with requirements for hangers, supports, and anchor devices in Section 22 05 29 "Hangers and Supports for Plumbing Piping and Equipment."

B. Install hangers for copper,, piping, with maximum horizontal spacing and minimum rod diameters, to comply with MSS-58, locally enforced codes, and authorities having jurisdiction requirements, whichever are most stringent.

C. Install vinyl-coated hangers for PEX tubing, with maximum horizontal spacing and minimum rod diameters, to comply with manufacturer's written instructions, locally enforced codes, and authorities having jurisdiction requirements, whichever are most stringent.

D. Support horizontal piping within 6 inches of each fitting.

E. Support vertical runs of copper,, piping to comply with MSS-58, locally enforced codes, and authorities having jurisdiction requirements, whichever are most stringent.

F. Support vertical runs of PEX tubing to comply with manufacturer's written instructions, locally enforced codes, and authorities having jurisdiction requirements, whichever are most stringent.

3.7 CONNECTIONS

A. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.

B. When installing piping adjacent to equipment and machines, allow space for service and maintenance.

C. Connect domestic water piping to exterior water-service piping. Use transition fitting to join dissimilar piping materials.

D. Connect domestic water piping to water-service piping with shutoff valve; extend and connect to the following:

1. Water Heaters: Cold-water inlet and hot-water outlet piping in sizes indicated, but not smaller than sizes of water heater connections.


2. Equipment: Cold- and hot-water-supply piping as indicated, but not smaller than equipment connections. Provide shutoff valve and union for each connection. Use flanges instead of unions for NPS 2-1/2 and larger.

3.8 IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify system components. Comply with requirements for identification materials and installation in Section 22 05 53 "Identification for Plumbing Piping and Equipment."

3.9 ADJUSTING

A. Perform the following adjustments before operation:

1. Close drain valves, hydrants, and hose bibbs. 2. Open shutoff valves to fully open position. 3. Open throttling valves to proper setting. 4. Adjust balancing valves in hot-water-circulation return piping to provide adequate flow.

a. Manually adjust ball-type balancing valves in hot-water-circulation return piping to provide hot-water flow in each branch.

b. Adjust calibrated balancing valves to flows indicated. 5. Remove plugs used during testing of piping and for temporary sealing of piping during

installation. 6. Check plumbing specialties and verify proper settings, adjustments, and operation.


A. Perform the following tests and inspections:

1. Piping Inspections: a. Do not enclose, cover, or put piping into operation until it has been inspected and

approved by authorities having jurisdiction. b. During installation, notify authorities having jurisdiction at least one day before

inspection must be made. Perform tests specified below in presence of authorities having jurisdiction: 1) Roughing-in Inspection: Arrange for inspection of piping before concealing or

closing in after roughing in and before setting fixtures. 2) Final Inspection: Arrange for authorities having jurisdiction to observe tests

specified in "Piping Tests" Subparagraph below and to ensure compliance with requirements.

c. Reinspection: If authorities having jurisdiction find that piping will not pass tests or inspections, make required corrections and arrange for reinspection.

d. Reports: Prepare inspection reports and have them signed by authorities having jurisdiction.

2. Piping Tests: a. Fill domestic water piping. Check components to determine that they are not air bound

and that piping is full of water. b. Test for leaks and defects in new piping and parts of existing piping that have been

altered, extended, or repaired. If testing is performed in segments, submit a separate report for each test, complete with diagram of portion of piping tested.

c. Leave new, altered, extended, or replaced domestic water piping uncovered and unconcealed until it has been tested and approved. Expose work that was covered or concealed before it was tested.

d. Cap and subject piping to static water pressure of 50 psig above operating pressure, without exceeding pressure rating of piping system materials. Isolate test source and allow it to stand for four hours. Leaks and loss in test pressure constitute defects that must be repaired.


e. Hydrostatic testing and documentation of test results for polypropylene piping to be in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions and submitted to the manufacturer upon successful completion per warranty requirements.

f. Repair leaks and defects with new materials, and retest piping or portion thereof until satisfactory results are obtained.

g. Prepare reports for tests and for corrective action required.

B. Domestic water piping will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.


3.11 CLEANING

A. Clean and disinfect potable domestic water piping as follows:

1. Purge new piping and parts of existing piping that have been altered, extended, or repaired before using.

2. Use purging and disinfecting procedures prescribed by authorities having jurisdiction; if methods are not prescribed, use procedures described in either AWWA C651 or AWWA C652 or follow procedures described below: a. Flush piping system with clean, potable water until dirty water does not appear at

outlets. b. Fill and isolate system according to either of the following:

1) Fill system or part thereof with water/chlorine solution with at least 50 ppm of chlorine. Isolate with valves and allow to stand for 24 hours.

2) Fill system or part thereof with water/chlorine solution with at least 200 ppm of chlorine. Isolate and allow to stand for three hours.

c. Flush system with clean, potable water until no chlorine is in water coming from system after the standing time.

d. Repeat procedures if biological examination shows contamination. e. Submit water samples in sterile bottles to authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Prepare and submit reports of purging and disinfecting activities. Include copies of water-sample approvals from authorities having jurisdiction.

C. Clean interior of domestic water piping system. Remove dirt and debris as work progresses.


31-18-01/DHH Bathroom Renovations 22 13 16 - 1 SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING March 18, 2021

SECTION 22 13 16 - SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Pipe, tube, and fittings. 2. Specialty pipe fittings.



B. Sustainable Design Submittals:


A. Seismic Qualification Certificates: For waste and vent piping, accessories, and components, from manufacturer.

B. Field quality-control reports.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Components and installation shall be capable of withstanding the following minimum working pressure unless otherwise indicated: 1. Soil, Waste, and Vent Piping: 10-foot head of water.

2.2 PIPING MATERIALS

A. Piping materials shall bear label, stamp, or other markings of specified testing agency.

B. Comply with requirements in "Piping Schedule" Article for applications of pipe, tube, fitting materials, and joining methods for specific services, service locations, and pipe sizes.

2.3 HUB-AND-SPIGOT, CAST-IRON SOIL PIPE AND FITTINGS

A. Pipe and Fittings: ASTM A 74, Service class.

B. Gaskets: ASTM C 564, rubber.

C. Calking Materials: ASTM B 29, pure lead and oakum or hemp fiber.

2.4 COPPER TUBE AND FITTINGS

A. Copper Type DWV Tube: ASTM B 306, drainage tube, drawn temper.

B. Copper Drainage Fittings: ASME B16.23, cast copper or ASME B16.29, wrought copper, solder-joint fittings.


C. Copper Pressure Fittings: 1. Copper Fittings: ASME B16.18, cast-copper-alloy or ASME B16.22, wrought-copper, solder-

joint fittings. Furnish wrought-copper fittings if indicated. 2. Copper Unions: MSS SP-123, copper-alloy, hexagonal-stock body with ball-and-socket,

metal-to-metal seating surfaces, and solder-joint or threaded ends.

D. Copper Flanges: ASME B16.24, Class 150, cast copper with solder-joint end. 1. Flange Gasket Materials: ASME B16.21, full-face, flat, nonmetallic, asbestos-free, 1/8-inch

maximum thickness unless thickness or specific material is indicated. 2. Flange Bolts and Nuts: ASME B18.2.1, carbon steel unless otherwise indicated.

E. Solder: ASTM B 32, lead free with ASTM B 813, water-flushable flux.

2.5 SPECIALTY PIPE FITTINGS

A. Transition Couplings: 1. Fitting-Type Transition Couplings: Manufactured piping coupling or specified piping system

fitting. 2. Unshielded, Nonpressure Transition Couplings:

a. Standard: ASTM C 1173. b. Description: Elastomeric, sleeve-type, reducing or transition pattern. Include shear ring

and corrosion-resistant-metal tension band and tightening mechanism on each end. c. End Connections: Same size as and compatible with pipes to be joined. d. Sleeve Materials:

1) For Cast-Iron Soil Pipes: ASTM C 564, rubber. 2) For Plastic Pipes: ASTM F 477, elastomeric seal or ASTM D 5926, PVC. 3) For Dissimilar Pipes: ASTM D 5926, PVC or other material compatible with pipe

materials being joined. 3. Shielded, Nonpressure Transition Couplings:

a. Standard: ASTM C 1460. b. Description: Elastomeric or rubber sleeve with full-length, corrosion-resistant outer

shield and corrosion-resistant-metal tension band and tightening mechanism on each end.

c. End Connections: Same size as and compatible with pipes to be joined.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EARTH MOVING

A. Comply with requirements for excavating, trenching, and backfilling specified in Section 31 20 00 "Earth Moving."

3.2 PIPING INSTALLATION

A. Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of piping systems. 1. Indicated locations and arrangements were used to size pipe and calculate friction loss,

expansion, pump sizing, and other design considerations. 2. Install piping as indicated unless deviations to layout are approved on coordination

drawings.

B. Install piping in concealed locations unless otherwise indicated and except in equipment rooms and service areas.


C. Install piping indicated to be exposed and piping in equipment rooms and service areas at right angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs are prohibited unless specifically indicated otherwise.

D. Install piping above accessible ceilings to allow sufficient space for ceiling panel removal.

E. Install piping to permit valve servicing.

F. Install piping at indicated slopes.

G. Install piping free of sags and bends.

H. Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections.

I. Install piping to allow application of insulation.

J. Make changes in direction for soil and waste drainage and vent piping using appropriate branches, bends, and long-sweep bends. 1. Sanitary tees and short-sweep 1/4 bends may be used on vertical stacks if change in

direction of flow is from horizontal to vertical. 2. Use long-turn, double Y-branch and 1/8-bend fittings if two fixtures are installed back to

back or side by side with common drain pipe. a. Straight tees, elbows, and crosses may be used on vent lines.

3. Do not change direction of flow more than 90 degrees. 4. Use proper size of standard increasers and reducers if pipes of different sizes are

connected. a. Reducing size of waste piping in direction of flow is prohibited.

K. Install soil and waste and vent piping at the following minimum slopes unless otherwise indicated: 1. Building Sanitary Waste: 2 percent downward in direction of flow for piping NPS 3 and

smaller; 1 percent downward in direction of flow for piping NPS 4 and larger. 2. Horizontal Sanitary Waste Piping: 2 percent downward in direction of flow. 3. Vent Piping: 1 percent down toward vertical fixture vent or toward vent stack.

L. Install cast-iron soil piping according to CISPI's "Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings Handbook," Chapter IV, "Installation of Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings."

M. Install aboveground copper tubing according to CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook."

N. Plumbing Specialties: 1. Install backwater valves in sanitary waster gravity-flow piping.

a. Comply with requirements for backwater valves specified in Section 22 13 19 "Sanitary Waste Piping Specialties."

2. Install cleanouts at grade and extend to where building sanitary drains connect to building sanitary sewers in sanitary waste gravity-flow piping. a. Comply with requirements for cleanouts specified in Section 22 13 19 "Sanitary Waste

Piping Specialties." 3. Install drains in sanitary waste gravity-flow piping.

a. Comply with requirements for drains specified in Section 22 13 19 "Sanitary Waste Piping Specialties."

O. Do not enclose, cover, or put piping into operation until it is inspected and approved by authorities having jurisdiction.


P. Install sleeves for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors. 1. Comply with requirements for sleeves specified in Section 22 05 17 "Sleeves and Sleeve

Seals for Plumbing Piping."

Q. Install sleeve seals for piping penetrations of concrete walls and slabs. 1. Comply with requirements for sleeve seals specified in Section 22 05 17 "Sleeves and

Sleeve Seals for Plumbing Piping."

R. Install escutcheons for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors. 1. Comply with requirements for escutcheons specified in Section 22 05 18 "Escutcheons for

Plumbing Piping."

3.3 JOINT CONSTRUCTION

A. Join hub-and-spigot, cast-iron soil piping with gasket joints according to CISPI's "Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings Handbook" for compression joints.

B. Join copper tube and fittings with soldered joints according to ASTM B 828. Use ASTM B 813, water-flushable, lead-free flux and ASTM B 32, lead-free-alloy solder.

3.4 SPECIALTY PIPE FITTING INSTALLATION

A. Transition Couplings: 1. Install transition couplings at joints of piping with small differences in ODs. 2. In Waste Drainage Piping: Unshielded, nonpressure transition couplings.


A. Comply with requirements for seismic-restraint devices specified in Section 22 05 48 "Vibration and Seismic Controls for Plumbing Piping and Equipment."

B. Comply with requirements for pipe hanger and support devices and installation specified in Section 22 05 29 "Hangers and Supports for Plumbing Piping and Equipment." 1. Install carbon-steel pipe hangers for horizontal piping in noncorrosive environments. 2. Install carbon-steel pipe support clamps for vertical piping in noncorrosive environments. 3. Install stainless-steel pipe support clamps for vertical piping in corrosive environments. 4. Vertical Piping: MSS Type 8 or Type 42, clamps. 5. Install individual, straight, horizontal piping runs:

a. 100 Feet and Less: MSS Type 1, adjustable, steel clevis hangers. b. Longer Than 100 Feet: MSS Type 43, adjustable roller hangers. c. Longer Than 100 Feet if Indicated: MSS Type 49, spring cushion rolls.

6. Multiple, Straight, Horizontal Piping Runs 100 Feet or Longer: MSS Type 44, pipe rolls. Support pipe rolls on trapeze.

7. Base of Vertical Piping: MSS Type 52, spring hangers.

C. Support horizontal piping and tubing within 12 inches of each fitting and coupling.

D. Support vertical piping and tubing at base and at each floor.

E. Rod diameter may be reduced one size for double-rod hangers, with 3/8-inch minimum rods.

F. Install hangers for cast-iron soil piping with the following maximum horizontal spacing and minimum rod diameters: 1. NPS 1-1/2 and NPS 2: 60 inches with 3/8-inch rod. 2. NPS 3: 60 inches with 1/2-inch rod.


3. NPS 4 and NPS 5: 60 inches with 5/8-inch rod. 4. NPS 6 and NPS 8: 60 inches with 3/4-inch rod. 5. NPS 10 and NPS 12: 60 inches with 7/8-inch rod. 6. Spacing for 10-foot lengths may be increased to 10 feet. Spacing for fittings is limited to 60

inches.

G. Install supports for vertical cast-iron soil piping every 15 feet.

H. Install hangers for steel piping with the following maximum horizontal spacing and minimum rod diameters: 1. NPS 1-1/4: 84 inches with 3/8-inch rod. 2. NPS 1-1/2: 108 inches with 3/8-inch rod. 3. NPS 2: 10 feet with 3/8-inch rod. 4. NPS 2-1/2: 11 feet with 1/2-inch rod. 5. NPS 3: 12 feet with 1/2-inch rod. 6. NPS 4 and NPS 5: 12 feet with 5/8-inch rod. 7. NPS 6 and NPS 8: 12 feet with 3/4-inch rod. 8. NPS 10 and NPS 12: 12 feet with 7/8-inch rod.

I. Install supports for vertical steel piping every 15 feet.

J. Install supports for vertical stainless-steel piping every 10 feet.

K. Install hangers for copper tubing with the following maximum horizontal spacing and minimum rod diameters: 1. NPS 1-1/4: 72 inches with 3/8-inch rod. 2. NPS 1-1/2 and NPS 2: 96 inches with 3/8-inch rod. 3. NPS 2-1/2: 108 inches with 1/2-inch rod. 4. NPS 3 and NPS 5: 10 feet with 1/2-inch rod. 5. NPS 6: 10 feet with 5/8-inch rod. 6. NPS 8: 10 feet with 3/4-inch rod.

L. Install supports for vertical copper tubing every 10 feet.

M. Support piping and tubing not listed above according to MSS SP-58 and manufacturer's written instructions.

3.6 CONNECTIONS

A. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.

B. Connect soil and waste piping to exterior sanitary sewerage piping. Use transition fitting to join dissimilar piping materials.

C. Connect waste and vent piping to the following: 1. Plumbing Fixtures: Connect waste piping in sizes indicated, but not smaller than required by

plumbing code. 2. Plumbing Fixtures and Equipment: Connect atmospheric vent piping in sizes indicated, but

not smaller than required by authorities having jurisdiction. 3. Plumbing Specialties: Connect waste and vent piping in sizes indicated, but not smaller

than required by plumbing code. 4. Install test tees (wall cleanouts) in conductors near floor and floor cleanouts with cover flush

with floor. 5. Equipment: Connect waste piping as indicated.

a. Provide shutoff valve if indicated and union for each connection.


b. Use flanges instead of unions for connections NPS 2-1/2 and larger.

D. Where installing piping adjacent to equipment, allow space for service and maintenance of equipment.

E. Make connections according to the following unless otherwise indicated: 1. Install unions, in piping NPS 2 and smaller, adjacent to each valve and at final connection to

each piece of equipment. 2. Install flanges, in piping NPS 2-1/2 and larger, adjacent to flanged valves and at final

connection to each piece of equipment.

3.7 IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify exposed sanitary waste and vent piping.

B. Comply with requirements for identification specified in Section 22 05 53 "Identification for Plumbing Piping and Equipment."


A. During installation, notify authorities having jurisdiction at least 24 hours before inspection must be made. Perform tests specified below in presence of authorities having jurisdiction. 1. Roughing-in Inspection: Arrange for inspection of piping before concealing or closing-in

after roughing-in and before setting fixtures. 2. Final Inspection: Arrange for final inspection by authorities having jurisdiction to observe

tests specified below and to ensure compliance with requirements.

B. Reinspection: If authorities having jurisdiction find that piping will not pass test or inspection, make required corrections and arrange for reinspection.

C. Reports: Prepare inspection reports and have them signed by authorities having jurisdiction.

D. Test sanitary waste and vent piping according to procedures of authorities having jurisdiction or, in absence of published procedures, as follows: 1. Test for leaks and defects in new piping and parts of existing piping that have been altered,

extended, or repaired. a. If testing is performed in segments, submit separate report for each test, complete with

diagram of portion of piping tested. 2. Leave uncovered and unconcealed new, altered, extended, or replaced waste and vent

piping until it has been tested and approved. a. Expose work that was covered or concealed before it was tested.

3. Roughing-in Plumbing Test Procedure: Test waste and vent piping except outside leaders on completion of roughing-in. a. Close openings in piping system and fill with water to point of overflow, but not less than

10-foot head of water. b. From 15 minutes before inspection starts to completion of inspection, water level must

not drop. c. Inspect joints for leaks.

4. Finished Plumbing Test Procedure: After plumbing fixtures have been set and traps filled with water, test connections and prove they are gastight and watertight. a. Plug vent-stack openings on roof and building drains where they leave building.

Introduce air into piping system equal to pressure of 1-inch wg. b. Use U-tube or manometer inserted in trap of water closet to measure this pressure. c. Air pressure must remain constant without introducing additional air throughout period

of inspection.


d. Inspect plumbing fixture connections for gas and water leaks. 5. Repair leaks and defects with new materials and retest piping, or portion thereof, until

satisfactory results are obtained. 6. Prepare reports for tests and required corrective action.


A. Clean interior of piping. Remove dirt and debris as work progresses.

B. Protect sanitary waste and vent piping during remainder of construction period to avoid clogging with dirt and debris and to prevent damage from traffic and construction work.

C. Place plugs in ends of uncompleted piping at end of day and when work stops.

D. Repair damage to adjacent materials caused by waste and vent piping installation.

3.10 PIPING SCHEDULE

A. Flanges and unions may be used on aboveground pressure piping unless otherwise indicated.

B. Aboveground, soil and waste piping NPS 4 and smaller shall be the following: 1. Service class, cast-iron soil pipe and fittings; gaskets; and gasketed joints.

C. Aboveground, soil and waste piping NPS 5 and larger shall be the following: 1. Service class, cast-iron soil pipe and fittings; gaskets; and gasketed joints.

D. Aboveground, vent piping NPS 4 and smaller shall be the following: 1. Service class, cast-iron soil pipe and fittings; gaskets; and gasketed joints.

E. Aboveground, vent piping NPS 5 and larger shall be the following: 1. Service class, cast-iron soil pipe and fittings; gaskets; and gasketed joints.


31-18-01/DHH Bathroom Renovations 22 13 19 - 1 SANITARY WASTE PIPING SPECIALTIES March 18, 2021

SECTION 22 13 19 - SANITARY WASTE PIPING SPECIALTIES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Backwater valves. 2. Cleanouts. 3. Roof flashing assemblies. 4. Miscellaneous sanitary drainage piping specialties.

B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 22 14 23 "Storm Drainage Piping Specialties" for trench drains for storm water,

channel drainage systems for storm water, roof drains, and catch basins. 2. Section 22 43 00 "Healthcare Plumbing Fixtures" for plaster sink interceptors. 3. Section 33 41 00 "Storm Utility Drainage Piping" for storm drainage piping and piping

specialties outside the building.




A. Operation and maintenance data.


A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.

1. Cultures: Provide 1-gal. (3.8-L) bottles of bacteria culture recommended by manufacturer of FOG disposal systems equal to 200 percent of amount installed, but no fewer than 2 1-gal. (3.8-L) bottles.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 ASSEMBLY DESCRIPTIONS

A. Sanitary waste piping specialties shall bear label, stamp, or other markings of specified testing agency.

B. Comply with NSF 14 for plastic sanitary waste piping specialty components.

2.2 CLEANOUTS

A. Cast-Iron Exposed Cleanouts

1. Standard: ASME A112.36.2M for cast iron for cleanout test tee. 2. Size: Same as connected drainage piping


3. Body Material: Hub-and-spigot, cast-iron soil pipe T-branch as required to match connected piping.

4. Closure: Countersunk or raised-head, plug. 5. Closure Plug Size: Same as or not more than one size smaller than cleanout size. 6. Closure: Stainless-steel plug with seal.

B. Cast-Iron Exposed Floor Cleanouts: 1. Standard: ASME A112.36.2M for adjustable housing threaded, adjustable housing cleanout. 2. Size: Same as connected branch. 3. Type: Adjustable housing.

C. Cast-Iron Wall Cleanouts 1. Standard: ASME A112.36.2M. Include wall access. 2. Size: Same as connected drainage piping.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install cleanouts in aboveground piping and building drain piping according to the following, unless otherwise indicated: 1. Size same as drainage piping up to NPS 4. Use NPS 4 for larger drainage piping unless

larger cleanout is indicated. 2. Locate at each change in direction of piping greater than 45 degrees. 3. Locate at minimum intervals of 50 feet for piping NPS 4 and smaller and 100 feet for larger

piping. 4. Locate at base of each vertical soil and waste stack.

B. For floor cleanouts for piping below floors, install cleanout deck plates with top flush with finished floor.

C. For cleanouts located in concealed piping, install cleanout wall access covers, of types indicated, with frame and cover flush with finished wall.

D. Install roof flashing assemblies on sanitary stack vents and vent stacks that extend through roof. Comply with requirements in Section 07 62 00, Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim.

E. Install flashing fittings on sanitary stack vents and vent stacks that extend through roof. Comply with requirements in Section 07 62 00, Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim.

F. Install deep-seal traps on floor drains and other waste outlets, if indicated.

G. Install floor-drain, trap-seal primer fittings on inlet to floor drains that require trap-seal primer connection. 1. Exception: Fitting may be omitted if trap has trap-seal primer connection. 2. Size: Same as floor drain inlet.

H. Install air-gap fittings on draining-type backflow preventers and on indirect-waste piping discharge into sanitary drainage system.

I. Install sleeve and sleeve seals with each riser and stack passing through floors with waterproof membrane.

J. Install vent caps on each vent pipe passing through roof.


K. Install expansion joints on vertical stacks and conductors. Position expansion joints for easy access and maintenance.

L. Install wood-blocking reinforcement for wall-mounting-type specialties.

M. Install traps on plumbing specialty drain outlets. Omit traps on indirect wastes unless trap is indicated.

3.2 CONNECTIONS

A. Comply with requirements in Section 22 13 16 "Sanitary Waste and Vent Piping" for piping installation requirements. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.

B. Install piping adjacent to equipment to allow service and maintenance.

C. Ground equipment according to Section 26 05 26 "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems."

D. Connect wiring according to Section 26 05 19 "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables."

3.3 FLASHING INSTALLATION

A. Comply with requirements in Section 07 62 00 "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim."

B. Fabricate flashing from single piece unless large pans, sumps, or other drainage shapes are required.

C. Install sheet flashing on pipes, sleeves, and specialties passing through or embedded in floors and roofs with waterproof membrane. 1. Pipe Flashing: Sleeve type, matching pipe size, with minimum length of 10 inches, and skirt

or flange extending at least 8 inches around pipe. 2. Sleeve Flashing: Flat sheet, with skirt or flange extending at least 8 inches around sleeve. 3. Embedded Specialty Flashing: Flat sheet, with skirt or flange extending at least 8 inches

around specialty.

D. Set flashing on floors and roofs in solid coating of bituminous cement.

E. Secure flashing into sleeve and specialty clamping ring or device.

F. Install flashing for piping passing through roofs with counterflashing or commercially made flashing fittings, according to Section 07 62 00 "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim."

G. Extend flashing up vent pipe passing through roofs and turn down into pipe, or secure flashing into cast-iron sleeve having calking recess.

3.4 LABELING AND IDENTIFYING

A. Distinguish among multiple units, inform operator of operational requirements, indicate safety and emergency precautions, and warn of hazards and improper operations, in addition to identifying unit. 1. Nameplates and signs are specified in Section 22 05 53 "Identification for Plumbing Piping

and Equipment."


3.5 PROTECTION

A. Protect drains during remainder of construction period to avoid clogging with dirt or debris and to prevent damage from traffic or construction work.

B. Place plugs in ends of uncompleted piping at end of each day or when work stops.


31-18-01/DHH Bathroom Renovations 22 42 13.13 - 1 COMMERCIAL WATER CLOSETS March 18, 2021

SECTION 22 42 13.13 - COMMERCIAL WATER CLOSETS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Water closets. 2. Flushometer valves. 3. Toilet seats. 4. Supports.



B. Shop Drawings: Include diagrams for power, signal, and control wiring.


A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For flushometer valves and electronic sensors to include in operation and maintenance manuals.


A. Furnish extra materials that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.

1. Flushometer-Valve Repair Kits: Equal to 10 percent of amount of each type installed, but no fewer than one of each type.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 Water Closets – See drawing schedules

2.2 SUPPORTS

A. Water Closet Carrier: 1. Standard: ASME A112.6.1M. 2. Description: Waste-fitting assembly, as required to match drainage piping material and

arrangement with faceplates, couplings gaskets, and feet; bolts and hardware matching fixture

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Water-Closet Installation: 1. Install level and plumb according to roughing-in drawings. 2. Install floor-mounted water closets on bowl-to-drain connecting fitting attachments to piping

or building substrate.


3. Install accessible, wall-mounted water closets at mounting height for handicapped/elderly, according to ICC/ANSI A117.1.

B. Support Installation: 1. Install supports, affixed to building substrate, for floor-mounted, back-outlet water closets. 2. Use carrier supports with waste-fitting assembly and seal.

C. Flushometer-Valve Installation: 1. Install flushometer-valve, water-supply fitting on each supply to each water closet. 2. Attach supply piping to supports or substrate within pipe spaces behind fixtures. 3. Install lever-handle flushometer valves for accessible water closets with handle mounted on

open side of water closet. 4. Install actuators in locations that are easy for people with disabilities to reach.

D. Install toilet seats on water closets.

E. Wall Flange and Escutcheon Installation: 1. Install wall flanges or escutcheons at piping wall penetrations in exposed, finished locations

and within cabinets and millwork. 2. Install deep-pattern escutcheons if required to conceal protruding fittings. 3. Comply with escutcheon requirements specified in Section 22 05 18 "Escutcheons for

Plumbing Piping."

F. Joint Sealing: 1. Seal joints between water closets and walls and floors using sanitary-type, one-part,

mildew-resistant silicone sealant. 2. Match sealant color to water-closet color. 3. Comply with sealant requirements specified in Section 07 92 00 "Joint Sealants."

3.2 CONNECTIONS

A. Connect water closets with water supplies and soil, waste, and vent piping. Use size fittings required to match water closets.

B. Comply with water piping requirements specified in Section 22 11 16 "Domestic Water Piping."

C. Comply with soil and waste piping requirements specified in Section 22 13 16 "Sanitary Waste and Vent Piping."

D. Where installing piping adjacent to water closets, allow space for service and maintenance.

3.3 ADJUSTING

A. Operate and adjust water closets and controls. Replace damaged and malfunctioning water closets, fittings, and controls.

B. Adjust water pressure at flushometer valves to produce proper flow.


A. Clean water closets and fittings with manufacturers' recommended cleaning methods and materials.

B. Install protective covering for installed water closets and fittings.


C. Do not allow use of water closets for temporary facilities unless approved in writing by Owner.


31-18-01/DHH Bathroom Renovations 22 42 16.13 - 1 COMMERCIAL LAVATORIES March 18, 2021

SECTION 22 42 16.13 - COMMERCIAL LAVATORIES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Lavatories. 2. Faucets. 3. Supports.



B. Shop Drawings: Include diagrams for power, signal, and control wiring of automatic faucets.


A. Coordination Drawings: Counter cutout templates for mounting of counter-mounted lavatories.


A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For lavatories and faucets to include in operation and maintenance manuals. 1. In addition to items specified in Section 01 78 23 "Operation and Maintenance Data,"

include the following: a. Servicing and adjustments of automatic faucets.



1. Faucet Washers and O-Rings: Equal to 10 percent of amount of each type and size installed.

2. Faucet Cartridges and O-Rings: Equal to 5 percent of amount of each type and size installed.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 LAVATORIES – See Drawing Schedule

2.2 SUPPORTS

A. Type II Lavatory Carrier:

1. Standard: ASME A112.6.1M.

B. Type III Lavatory Carrier: 1. Standard: ASME A112.6.1M.


2.3 SUPPLY FITTINGS

A. NSF Standard: Comply with NSF/ANSI 61 Annex G, "Drinking Water System Components - Health Effects," for supply-fitting materials that will be in contact with potable water.

B. Standard: ASME A112.18.1/CSA B125.1.

C. Supply Piping: Chrome-plated-brass pipe or chrome-plated copper tube matching water-supply piping size. Include chrome-plated-brass or stainless-steel wall flange.

D. Supply Stops: Chrome-plated-brass, one-quarter-turn, ball-type or compression valve with inlet connection matching supply piping.

E. Operation: Wheel handle.

F. Risers: 1. NPS 1/2. 2. Chrome-plated, soft-copper flexible tube riser.

2.4 WASTE FITTINGS

A. Standard: ASME A112.18.2/CSA B125.2.

B. Drain: Grid type with NPS 1-1/4 offset and straight tailpiece.

C. Trap: 1. Size: NPS 1-1/2 by NPS 1-1/4.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine roughing-in of water supply and sanitary drainage and vent piping systems to verify actual locations of piping connections before lavatory installation.

B. Examine counters and walls for suitable conditions where lavatories will be installed.

C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install lavatories level and plumb according to roughing-in drawings.

B. Install supports, affixed to building substrate, for wall-mounted lavatories.

C. Install accessible wall-mounted lavatories at handicapped/elderly mounting height for people with disabilities or the elderly, according to ICC/ANSI A117.1.

D. Install wall flanges or escutcheons at piping wall penetrations in exposed, finished locations. Use deep-pattern escutcheons if required to conceal protruding fittings. Comply with escutcheon requirements specified in Section 22 05 18 "Escutcheons for Plumbing Piping."


E. Seal joints between lavatories and counters and walls using sanitary-type, one-part, mildew-resistant silicone sealant. Match sealant color to fixture color. Comply with sealant requirements specified in Section 07 92 00 "Joint Sealants."

F. Install protective shielding pipe covers and enclosures on exposed supplies and waste piping of accessible lavatories. Comply with requirements in Section 22 07 19 "Plumbing Piping Insulation."

3.3 CONNECTIONS

A. Connect fixtures with water supplies, stops, and risers, and with traps, soil, waste, and vent piping. Use size fittings required to match fixtures.


C. Comply with soil and waste piping requirements specified in Section 22 13 16 "Sanitary Waste and Vent Piping."

3.4 ADJUSTING

A. Operate and adjust lavatories and controls. Replace damaged and malfunctioning lavatories, fittings, and controls.

B. Adjust water pressure at faucets to produce proper flow.

C. Install fresh batteries in battery-powered, electronic-sensor mechanisms.


A. After completing installation of lavatories, inspect and repair damaged finishes.

B. Clean lavatories, faucets, and other fittings with manufacturers' recommended cleaning methods and materials.

C. Provide protective covering for installed lavatories and fittings.

D. Do not allow use of lavatories for temporary facilities unless approved in writing by Owner.


31-18-01/DHH Bathroom Renovations 22 42 23 - 1 COMMERCIAL SHOWERS March 18, 2021

SECTION 22 42 23 - COMMERCIAL SHOWERS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Individual showers. 2. Shower faucets. 3. Grout.







1. Faucet Washers and O-Rings: Equal to 10 percent of amount of each type and size installed.

2. Faucet Cartridges and O-Rings: Equal to 5 percent of amount of each type and size installed.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SHOWERS –SEE Drawing Schedule

2.2 SHOWER FAUCETS- SEE Drawing Schedule (Shall be pressure compensated)

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Assemble shower components according to manufacturers' written instructions.

B. Install showers level and plumb according to roughing-in drawings.

C. Install water-supply piping with stop on each supply to each shower faucet. 1. Exception: Use ball or gate valves if supply stops are not specified with shower. Comply

with valve requirements specified in Section 22 05 23.12 "Ball Valves for Plumbing Piping" and Section 22 05 23.15 "Gate Valves for Plumbing Piping."

2. Install stops in locations where they can be easily reached for operation.

D. Install shower flow-control fittings with specified maximum flow rates in shower arms.

31-18-01/DHH Bathroom Renovations 22 42 23 - 2 COMMERCIAL SHOWERS March 18, 2021

E. Set shower receptors in leveling bed of cement grout.

F. Install wall flanges or escutcheons at piping wall penetrations in exposed, finished locations. Use deep-pattern escutcheons if required to conceal protruding fittings. Comply with escutcheons requirements specified in Section 22 05 18 "Escutcheons for Plumbing Piping."

G. Seal joints between showers and floors and walls using sanitary-type, one-part, mildew-resistant silicone sealant. Match sealant color to fixture color. Comply with sealant requirements specified in Section 07 92 00 "Joint Sealants."

3.2 CONNECTIONS

A. Connect fixtures with water supplies, stops, and risers, and with traps, soil, waste, and vent piping. Use size fittings required to match fixtures.


C. Comply with traps and soil and waste piping requirements specified in Section 22 13 16 "Sanitary Waste and Vent Piping."

3.3 ADJUSTING

A. Operate and adjust showers and controls. Replace damaged and malfunctioning showers, fittings, and controls.

B. Adjust water pressure at faucets to produce proper flow.


A. After completing installation of showers, inspect and repair damaged finishes.

B. Clean showers, faucets, and other fittings with manufacturers' recommended cleaning methods and materials.

C. Provide protective covering for installed fixtures and fittings.

D. Do not allow use of showers for temporary facilities unless approved in writing by Owner.


31-18-01/DHH Bathroom Renovations 23 01 30.52 - 1 EXISTING HVAC AIR DISTRIBUTION March 18, 2021 SYSTEM CLEANING

SECTION 23 01 30.52 - EXISTING HVAC AIR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM CLEANING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes cleaning existing HVAC air-distribution equipment, ducts, plenums, and system components.

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. ACAC: American Council for Accredited Certification.

B. AIHA-LAP: American Industrial Hygiene Association Lab Accreditation Program

C. ASCS: Air systems cleaning specialist.

D. CESB: Council of Engineering and Scientific Specialty Boards.

E. CMI: Certified Microbial Investigator.

F. CMC: Certified Microbial Consultant.

G. CMR: Certified Microbial Remediator.

H. CMRS: Certified Microbial Remediation Supervisor.

I. EMLAP: Environmental Microbiology Laboratory Accreditation Program.

J. IEP: Indoor Environmental Professional.

K. IICRC: Institute of Inspection, Cleaning, and Restoration Certification.

L. NADCA: National Air Duct Cleaners Association.






A. ASCS Qualifications: A certified member of NADCA.


1. Certification: Employ an ASCS certified by NADCA on a full-time basis.

B. IEP Qualifications: CMI who is certified by ACAC and accredited by CESB.

C. IEP Qualifications: CMC who is certified by ACAC and accredited by CESB.

D. CMR Qualifications: Certified by ACAC and accredited by CESB.

E. CMRS Qualifications: Certified by ACAC and accredited by CESB.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 HVAC CLEANING AGENTS


1. Apex Engineering Products Corporation. 2. BBJ Environmental Solutions. 3. Goodway Technologies Corporation. 4. Nu-Calgon. 5. QuestVapco Corporation.

B. Description:

1. Formulated for each specific soiled coil condition that needs remedy.

2.2 ANTIMICROBIAL SURFACE TREATMENT


1. Bio-Cide International, Inc. 2. Contec, Inc. 3. Ecolab, Inc.

B. Description: Specific product selected shall be as recommended by the IEP based on the specific antimicrobial needs of the specific Project conditions.

1. Formulated to kill and inhibit growth of microorganisms. 2. EPA-registered for use in HVAC systems and for the specific application in which it will

be used. 3. Have no residual action after drying, with zero VOC off-gassing. 4. OSHA compliant. 5. Treatment shall dry clear to allow continued visual observation of the treated surface.












PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Inspect HVAC air-distribution equipment, ducts, plenums, and system components to determine appropriate methods, tools, and equipment required for performance of the Work.

B. Cleaning Plan: Prepare a written plan for air-distribution system cleaning that includes strategies and step-by-step procedures.

C. Proceed with work only after conditions detrimental to performance of the Work have been corrected and cleaning plan has been approved.

D. Use the existing service openings, as required for proper cleaning, at various points of the HVAC system for physical and mechanical entry and for inspection.

E. Mark the position of manual volume dampers and air-directional mechanical devices inside the system prior to cleaning.

3.2 CLEANING

A. Comply with NADCA ACR.

B. Perform electrical lockout and tagout according to Owner's standards or authorities having jurisdiction.

C. Remove non-adhered substances and deposits from within the HVAC system.

D. Systems and Components to Be Cleaned: All air-moving and -distribution equipment.

E. Collect debris removed during cleaning. Ensure that debris is not dispersed outside the HVAC system during the cleaning process.

1. Particulate Collection: For particulate collection equipment, include adequate filtration to contain debris removed. Locate equipment downwind and away from all air intakes and other points of entry into the building.

2. HEPA filtration with 99.97 percent collection efficiency for particles sized 0.3 micrometer or larger shall be used where the particulate collection equipment is exhausting inside the building,

F. Control odors and mist vapors during the cleaning and restoration process.

G. Mark the position of manual volume dampers and air-directional mechanical devices inside the system prior to cleaning. Restore them to their marked position on completion of cleaning.

H. System components shall be cleaned so that all HVAC system components are visibly clean. On completion, all components must be returned to those settings recorded just prior to cleaning operations.

I. Clean all air-distribution devices, registers, grilles, and diffusers.

J. Clean non-adhered substance deposits according to NADCA ACR and the following:


1. Clean air-handling units, airstream surfaces, components, condensate collectors, and drains.

2. Ensure that a suitable operative drainage system is in place prior to beginning wash-down procedures.

3. Clean evaporator coils, reheat coils, and other airstream components.

K. Air-Distribution Systems:

1. Create service openings in the HVAC system as necessary to accommodate cleaning. 2. Mechanically clean air-distribution systems specified to remove all visible contaminants,

so that the systems are capable of passing the HVAC System Cleanliness Tests (see NADCA ACR).

L. Debris removed from the HVAC system shall be disposed of according to applicable Federal, state, and local requirements.

M. Mechanical Cleaning Methodology:

1. Source-Removal Cleaning Methods: The HVAC system shall be cleaned using source-removal mechanical cleaning methods designed to extract contaminants from within the HVAC system and to safely remove these contaminants from the facility. No cleaning method, or combination of methods, shall be used that could potentially damage components of the HVAC system or negatively alter the integrity of the system.

a. Use continuously operating vacuum-collection devices to keep each section being cleaned under negative pressure.

b. Cleaning methods that require mechanical agitation devices to dislodge debris that is adhered to interior surfaces of HVAC system components shall be equipped to safely remove these devices. Cleaning methods shall not damage the integrity of HVAC system components or damage porous surface materials, such as duct and plenum liners.

2. Cleaning Mineral-Fiber Insulation Components:

a. Fibrous-glass thermal or acoustical insulation elements present in equipment or ductwork shall be thoroughly cleaned with HEPA vacuuming equipment while the HVAC system is under constant negative pressure and shall not be permitted to get wet according to NADCA ACR.

b. Cleaning methods used shall not cause damage to fibrous-glass components and will render the system capable of passing the HVAC System Cleanliness Tests (see NADCA ACR).

c. Fibrous materials that become wet shall be discarded and replaced.

N. Coil Cleaning:

1. See NADCA ACR, "Coil Surface Cleaning" Section. Type 1, or Type 1 and Type 2, cleaning methods shall be used to render the coil visibly clean and capable of passing coil cleaning verification.

2. Coil drain pans shall be subject to NADCA ACR, "Non-Porous Surfaces Cleaning Verification." Ensure that condensate drain pans are operational.

3. Electric-resistance coils shall be de-energized, locked out, and tagged before cleaning. 4. Cleaning methods shall not cause any appreciable damage to, cause displacement of,

inhibit heat transfer, or cause erosion of the coil surface or fins, and shall comply with coil manufacturer's written recommendations.

5. Rinse thoroughly with clean water to remove any latent residues.


O. Application of Antimicrobial Treatment:

1. Apply antimicrobial agents and coatings if active fungal growth is determined by the IEP to be at Condition 2 or Condition 3 status according to IICRC S520, as analyzed by a laboratory, and with results interpreted by an IEP. Apply antimicrobial agents and coatings according to manufacturer's written recommendations and EPA registration listing after the removal of surface deposits and debris.

2. Apply antimicrobial treatments and coatings after the system is rendered clean. 3. Apply antimicrobial agents and coatings directly onto surfaces of interior ductwork. 4. Microbial remediation shall be performed by a qualified CMR and CMRS.

3.3 CLEANLINESS VERIFICATION

A. Verify cleanliness according to NADCA ACR, "Verification of HVAC System Cleanliness" Section.

B. Surface-Cleaning Verification: Perform visual inspection for cleanliness. If no contaminants are evident through visual inspection, the HVAC system shall be considered clean. If visible contaminants are evident through visual inspection, those portions of the system where contaminants are visible shall be re-cleaned and subjected to re-inspection for cleanliness.

C. Verification of Coil Cleaning: Coil will be considered clean if the coil is free of foreign matter and chemical residue, based on a thorough visual inspection.

D. Prepare a written cleanliness verification report.

3.4 RESTORATION

A. Restore and repair HVAC air-distribution equipment, ducts, plenums, and components according to NADCA ACR, "Restoration and Repair of Mechanical Systems" Section.

B. Restore service openings capable of future reopening.

C. Reseal fibrous-glass ducts.

D. Replace fibrous-glass materials that cannot be restored by cleaning or resurfacing.

E. Replace damaged insulation according to Section 23 07 13 "Duct Insulation."

F. Ensure that closures do not hinder or alter airflow.

G. New closure materials, including insulation, shall match opened materials and shall have removable closure panels fitted with gaskets and fasteners.

H. Restore manual volume dampers and air-directional mechanical devices inside the system to their marked position on completion of cleaning.


31-18-01/DHH Bathroom Renovations 23 31 13 - 1 METAL DUCTS March 18, 2021

SECTION 23 31 13 - METAL DUCTS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Rectangular ducts and fittings. 2. Round ducts and fittings. 3. Hangers and supports. 4. Seismic-restraint devices.

B. Related Sections:

1. Section 23 05 93 "Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC" for testing, adjusting, and balancing requirements for metal ducts.

2. Section 23 31 16 "Nonmetal Ducts" for fibrous-glass ducts, thermoset fiber-reinforced plastic ducts, thermoplastic ducts, PVC ducts, and concrete ducts.

3. Section 23 31 19 "HVAC Casings" for factory- and field-fabricated casings for mechanical equipment.

4. Section 23 33 00 "Air Duct Accessories" for dampers, sound-control devices, duct-mounting access doors and panels, turning vanes, and flexible ducts.


A. Delegated Duct Design: Duct construction, including sheet metal thicknesses, seam and joint construction, reinforcements, and hangers and supports, shall comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" and performance requirements and design criteria indicated in "Duct Schedule" Article.

B. Structural Performance: Duct hangers and supports shall withstand the effects of gravity loads and stresses within limits and under conditions described in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible"

C. Airstream Surfaces: Surfaces in contact with the airstream shall comply with requirements in ASHRAE 62.1.



B. Shop Drawings:

1. Fabrication, assembly, and installation, including plans, elevations, sections, components, and attachments to other work.

2. Factory- and shop-fabricated ducts and fittings. 3. Duct layout indicating sizes, configuration, and static-pressure classes. 4. Elevation of top of ducts. 5. Dimensions of main duct runs from building grid lines.


6. Fittings. 7. Reinforcement and spacing. 8. Seam and joint construction. 9. Penetrations through fire-rated and other partitions. 10. Equipment installation based on equipment being used on Project. 11. Locations for duct accessories, including dampers, turning vanes, and access doors and

panels. 12. Hangers and supports, including methods for duct and building attachment and vibration

isolation.


A. Coordination Drawings: Plans, drawn to scale, on which the following items are shown and coordinated with each other, using input from installers of the items involved:

1. Duct installation in congested spaces, indicating coordination with general construction, building components, and other building services. Indicate proposed changes to duct layout.

2. Suspended ceiling components. 3. Structural members to which duct will be attached. 4. Size and location of initial access modules for acoustical tile. 5. Penetrations of smoke barriers and fire-rated construction. 6. Items penetrating finished ceiling including the following:

a. Lighting fixtures. b. Air outlets and inlets. c. Speakers. d. Sprinklers. e. Access panels. f. Perimeter moldings.


A. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to the following:

1. AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel," for hangers and supports. 2. AWS D1.2/D1.2M, "Structural Welding Code - Aluminum," for aluminum supports. 3. AWS D9.1M/D9.1, "Sheet Metal Welding Code," for duct joint and seam welding.

B. ASHRAE Compliance: Applicable requirements in ASHRAE 62.1, Section 5 - "Systems and Equipment" and Section 7 - "Construction and System Start-up."

C. ASHRAE/IESNA Compliance: Applicable requirements in ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1, Section 6.4.4 - "HVAC System Construction and Insulation."


PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 RECTANGULAR DUCTS AND FITTINGS

A. General Fabrication Requirements: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" based on indicated static-pressure class unless otherwise indicated.

B. Transverse Joints: Select joint types and fabricate according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 2-1, "Rectangular Duct/Transverse Joints," for static-pressure class, applicable sealing requirements, materials involved, duct-support intervals, and other provisions in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible."

C. Longitudinal Seams: Select seam types and fabricate according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 2-2, "Rectangular Duct/Longitudinal Seams," for static-pressure class, applicable sealing requirements, materials involved, duct-support intervals, and other provisions in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible."

D. Elbows, Transitions, Offsets, Branch Connections, and Other Duct Construction: Select types and fabricate according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Chapter 4, "Fittings and Other Construction," for static-pressure class, applicable sealing requirements, materials involved, duct-support intervals, and other provisions in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible."

2.2 SHEET METAL MATERIALS

A. General Material Requirements: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" for acceptable materials, material thicknesses, and duct construction methods unless otherwise indicated. Sheet metal materials shall be free of pitting, seam marks, roller marks, stains, discolorations, and other imperfections.

B. Galvanized Sheet Steel: Comply with ASTM A 653/A 653M.

1. Galvanized Coating Designation: G90. 2. Finishes for Surfaces Exposed to View: Mill phosphatized.

C. Carbon-Steel Sheets: Comply with ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, with oiled, matte finish for exposed ducts.

D. Stainless-Steel Sheets: Comply with ASTM A 480/A 480M, Type 304 or 316, as indicated in the "Duct Schedule" Article; cold rolled, annealed, sheet. Exposed surface finish shall be No. 2B, No. 2D, No. 3, or No. 4 as indicated in the "Duct Schedule" Article.

E. Aluminum Sheets: Comply with ASTM B 209 Alloy 3003, H14 temper; with mill finish for concealed ducts, and standard, one-side bright finish for duct surfaces exposed to view.

F. Reinforcement Shapes and Plates: ASTM A 36/A 36M, steel plates, shapes, and bars; black and galvanized.

1. Where black- and galvanized-steel shapes and plates are used to reinforce aluminum ducts, isolate the different metals with butyl rubber, neoprene, or EPDM gasket materials.


G. Tie Rods: Galvanized steel, 1/4-inch minimum diameter for lengths 36 inches or less; 3/8-inch minimum diameter for lengths longer than 36 inches.

2.3 SEALANT AND GASKETS

A. General Sealant and Gasket Requirements: Surface-burning characteristics for sealants and gaskets shall be a maximum flame-spread index of 25 and a maximum smoke-developed index of 50 when tested according to UL 723; certified by an NRTL.

B. Two-Part Tape Sealing System:

1. Tape: Woven cotton fiber impregnated with mineral gypsum and modified acrylic/silicone activator to react exothermically with tape to form hard, durable, airtight seal.

2. Tape Width: 3 inches. 3. Sealant: Modified styrene acrylic. 4. Water resistant. 5. Mold and mildew resistant. 6. Maximum Static-Pressure Class: 10-inch wg, positive and negative. 7. Service: Indoor and outdoor. 8. Service Temperature: Minus 40 to plus 200 deg F. 9. Substrate: Compatible with galvanized sheet steel (both PVC coated and bare), stainless

steel, or aluminum. 10. For indoor applications, sealant shall have a VOC content of 250 g/L or less when

calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24). 11. Sealant shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California


C. Water-Based Joint and Seam Sealant:

1. Application Method: Brush on. 2. Solids Content: Minimum 65 percent. 3. Shore A Hardness: Minimum 20. 4. Water resistant. 5. Mold and mildew resistant. 6. VOC: Maximum 75 g/L (less water). 7. Maximum Static-Pressure Class: 10-inch wg, positive and negative. 8. Service: Indoor or outdoor. 9. Substrate: Compatible with galvanized sheet steel (both PVC coated and bare), stainless

steel, or aluminum sheets.

D. Flanged Joint Sealant: Comply with ASTM C 920.

1. General: Single-component, acid-curing, silicone, elastomeric. 2. Type: S. 3. Grade: NS. 4. Class: 25. 5. Use: O. 6. For indoor applications, sealant shall have a VOC content of 250 g/L or less when

calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24). 7. Sealant shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California



E. Flange Gaskets: Butyl rubber, neoprene, or EPDM polymer with polyisobutylene plasticizer.

F. Round Duct Joint O-Ring Seals:

1. Seal shall provide maximum leakage class of 3 cfm/100 sq. ft. at 1-inch wg and shall be rated for10-inch wg static-pressure class, positive or negative.

2. EPDM O-ring to seal in concave bead in coupling or fitting spigot. 3. Double-lipped, EPDM O-ring seal, mechanically fastened to factory-fabricated couplings

and fitting spigots.

2.4 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS

A. Hanger Rods for Noncorrosive Environments: Cadmium-plated steel rods and nuts.

B. Hanger Rods for Corrosive Environments: Electrogalvanized, all-thread rods or galvanized rods with threads painted with zinc-chromate primer after installation.

C. Strap and Rod Sizes: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Table 5-1, "Rectangular Duct Hangers Minimum Size," and Table 5-2, "Minimum Hanger Sizes for Round Duct."

D. Steel Cables for Galvanized-Steel Ducts: Galvanized steel complying with ASTM A 603.

E. Steel Cables for Stainless-Steel Ducts: Stainless steel complying with ASTM A 492.

F. Steel Cable End Connections: Cadmium-plated steel assemblies with brackets, swivel, and bolts designed for duct hanger service; with an automatic-locking and clamping device.

G. Duct Attachments: Sheet metal screws, blind rivets, or self-tapping metal screws; compatible with duct materials.

H. Trapeze and Riser Supports:

1. Supports for Galvanized-Steel Ducts: Galvanized-steel shapes and plates. 2. Supports for Stainless-Steel Ducts: Stainless-steel shapes and plates. 3. Supports for Aluminum Ducts: Aluminum or galvanized steel coated with zinc chromate.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 DUCT INSTALLATION

A. Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of duct system. Indicated duct locations, configurations, and arrangements were used to size ducts and calculate friction loss for air-handling equipment sizing and for other design considerations. Install duct systems as indicated unless deviations to layout are approved on Shop Drawings and Coordination Drawings.

B. Install ducts according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" unless otherwise indicated.

C. Install round ducts in maximum practical lengths.


D. Install ducts with fewest possible joints.

E. Install factory- or shop-fabricated fittings for changes in direction, size, and shape and for branch connections.

F. Unless otherwise indicated, install ducts vertically and horizontally, and parallel and perpendicular to building lines.

G. Install ducts close to walls, overhead construction, columns, and other structural and permanent enclosure elements of building.

H. Install ducts with a clearance of 1 inch, plus allowance for insulation thickness.

I. Route ducts to avoid passing through transformer vaults and electrical equipment rooms and enclosures.

J. Where ducts pass through non-fire-rated interior partitions and exterior walls and are exposed to view, cover the opening between the partition and duct or duct insulation with sheet metal flanges of same metal thickness as the duct. Overlap openings on four sides by at least 1-1/2 inches.

K. Where ducts pass through fire-rated interior partitions and exterior walls, install fire dampers. Comply with requirements in Section 23 33 00 "Air Duct Accessories" for fire and smoke dampers.

L. Protect duct interiors from moisture, construction debris and dust, and other foreign materials. Comply with SMACNA's "IAQ Guidelines for Occupied Buildings Under Construction," Appendix G, "Duct Cleanliness for New Construction Guidelines."

3.2 INSTALLATION OF EXPOSED DUCTWORK

A. Protect ducts exposed in finished spaces from being dented, scratched, or damaged.

B. Trim duct sealants flush with metal. Create a smooth and uniform exposed bead. Do not use two-part tape sealing system.

C. Grind welds to provide smooth surface free of burrs, sharp edges, and weld splatter. When welding stainless steel with a No. 3 or 4 finish, grind the welds flush, polish the exposed welds, and treat the welds to remove discoloration caused by welding.

D. Maintain consistency, symmetry, and uniformity in the arrangement and fabrication of fittings, hangers and supports, duct accessories, and air outlets.

E. Repair or replace damaged sections and finished work that does not comply with these requirements.

3.3 ADDITIONAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS FOR COMMERCIAL KITCHEN HOOD EXHAUST DUCT

A. Install commercial kitchen hood exhaust ducts without dips and traps that may hold grease, and sloped a minimum of 2 percent to drain grease back to the hood.


B. Install fire-rated access panel assemblies at each change in direction and at maximum intervals of 20 feet in horizontal ducts, and at every floor for vertical ducts, or as indicated on Drawings. Locate access panel on top or sides of duct a minimum of 1-1/2 inches from bottom of duct.

C. Do not penetrate fire-rated assemblies except as allowed by applicable building codes and authorities having jurisdiction.

3.4 DUCT SEALING

A. Seal ducts for duct static-pressure, seal classes, and leakage classes specified in "Duct Schedule" Article according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible."

B. Seal ducts to the following seal classes according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible":

1. Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible." 2. Outdoor, Supply-Air Ducts: Seal Class A. 3. Outdoor, Exhaust Ducts: Seal Class C. 4. Outdoor, Return-Air Ducts: Seal Class C. 5. Unconditioned Space, Supply-Air Ducts in Pressure Classes 2-Inch wg and Lower: Seal

Class B. 6. Unconditioned Space, Supply-Air Ducts in Pressure Classes Higher Than 2-Inch wg:

Seal Class A. 7. Unconditioned Space, Exhaust Ducts: Seal Class C. 8. Unconditioned Space, Return-Air Ducts: Seal Class B. 9. Conditioned Space, Supply-Air Ducts in Pressure Classes 2-Inch wg and Lower: Seal

Class C. 10. Conditioned Space, Supply-Air Ducts in Pressure Classes Higher Than 2-Inch wg: Seal

Class B. 11. Conditioned Space, Exhaust Ducts: Seal Class B. 12. Conditioned Space, Return-Air Ducts: Seal Class C.


A. Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Chapter 5, "Hangers and Supports."

B. Building Attachments: Concrete inserts, powder-actuated fasteners, or structural-steel fasteners appropriate for construction materials to which hangers are being attached.

1. Where practical, install concrete inserts before placing concrete. 2. Install powder-actuated concrete fasteners after concrete is placed and completely cured. 3. Use powder-actuated concrete fasteners for standard-weight aggregate concretes or for

slabs more than 4 inches thick. 4. Do not use powder-actuated concrete fasteners for lightweight-aggregate concretes or for

slabs less than 4 inches thick. 5. Do not use powder-actuated concrete fasteners for seismic restraints.

C. Hanger Spacing: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Table 5-1, "Rectangular Duct Hangers Minimum Size," and Table 5-2, "Minimum Hanger Sizes for Round Duct," for maximum hanger spacing; install hangers and supports within 24 inches of each elbow and within 48 inches of each branch intersection.


D. Hangers Exposed to View: Threaded rod and angle or channel supports.

E. Support vertical ducts with steel angles or channel secured to the sides of the duct with welds, bolts, sheet metal screws, or blind rivets; support at each floor and at a maximum intervals of 16 feet.

F. Install upper attachments to structures. Select and size upper attachments with pull-out, tension, and shear capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials where used.

3.6 CONNECTIONS

A. Make connections to equipment with flexible connectors complying with Section 23 33 00 "Air Duct Accessories."

B. Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" for branch, outlet and inlet, and terminal unit connections.

3.7 DUCT CLEANING

A. Clean new duct system(s) before testing, adjusting, and balancing.

B. Use service openings for entry and inspection.

1. Create new openings and install access panels appropriate for duct static-pressure class if required for cleaning access. Provide insulated panels for insulated or lined duct. Patch insulation and liner as recommended by duct liner manufacturer. Comply with Section 23 33 00 "Air Duct Accessories" for access panels and doors.

2. Disconnect and reconnect flexible ducts as needed for cleaning and inspection. 3. Remove and reinstall ceiling to gain access during the cleaning process.

C. Particulate Collection and Odor Control:

1. When venting vacuuming system inside the building, use HEPA filtration with 99.97 percent collection efficiency for 0.3-micron-size (or larger) particles.

2. When venting vacuuming system to outdoors, use filter to collect debris removed from HVAC system, and locate exhaust downwind and away from air intakes and other points of entry into building.

D. Clean the following components by removing surface contaminants and deposits:

1. Air outlets and inlets (registers, grilles, and diffusers). 2. Supply, return, and exhaust fans including fan housings, plenums (except ceiling supply

and return plenums), scrolls, blades or vanes, shafts, baffles, dampers, and drive assemblies.

3. Air-handling unit internal surfaces and components including mixing box, coil section, air wash systems, spray eliminators, condensate drain pans, humidifiers and dehumidifiers, filters and filter sections, and condensate collectors and drains.

4. Coils and related components. 5. Return-air ducts, dampers, actuators, and turning vanes except in ceiling plenums and

mechanical equipment rooms. 6. Supply-air ducts, dampers, actuators, and turning vanes. 7. Dedicated exhaust and ventilation components and makeup air systems.


E. Mechanical Cleaning Methodology:

1. Clean metal duct systems using mechanical cleaning methods that extract contaminants from within duct systems and remove contaminants from building.

2. Use vacuum-collection devices that are operated continuously during cleaning. Connect vacuum device to downstream end of duct sections so areas being cleaned are under negative pressure.

3. Use mechanical agitation to dislodge debris adhered to interior duct surfaces without damaging integrity of metal ducts, duct liner, or duct accessories.

4. Clean fibrous-glass duct liner with HEPA vacuuming equipment; do not permit duct liner to get wet. Replace fibrous-glass duct liner that is damaged, deteriorated, or delaminated or that has friable material, mold, or fungus growth.

5. Clean coils and coil drain pans according to NADCA 1992. Keep drain pan operational. Rinse coils with clean water to remove latent residues and cleaning materials; comb and straighten fins.

6. Provide drainage and cleanup for wash-down procedures. 7. Antimicrobial Agents and Coatings: Apply EPA-registered antimicrobial agents if fungus

is present. Apply antimicrobial agents according to manufacturer's written instructions after removal of surface deposits and debris.

3.8 START UP

A. Air Balance: Comply with requirements in Section 23 05 93 "Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC."

3.9 DUCT SCHEDULE

A. Fabricate ducts with galvanized sheet steel except as otherwise indicated and as follows:

B. Exhaust Ducts:

1. Ducts Connected to Fans Exhausting (ASHRAE 62.1, Class 1 and 2) Air:

a. Pressure Class: Negative 2-inch wg. b. Minimum SMACNA Seal Class: A if negative pressure, and A if positive pressure.

2. Rectangular Duct: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 4-2, "Rectangular Elbows."

a. Radius Type RE 1 with minimum 1.5 radius-to-diameter ratio. b. Radius Type RE 3 with minimum 1.0 radius-to-diameter ratio and two vanes. c. Mitered Type RE 2 with vanes complying with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct

Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 4-3, "Vanes and Vane Runners," and Figure 4-4, "Vane Support in Elbows."

3. Round Duct: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 3-4, "Round Duct Elbows."

a. Minimum Radius-to-Diameter Ratio and Elbow Segments: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Table 3-1, "Mitered Elbows." Elbows with less than 90-degree change of direction have proportionately fewer segments.


1) Velocity 1000 fpm or Lower: 0.5 radius-to-diameter ratio and three segments for 90-degree elbow.

2) Velocity 1000 to 1500 fpm: 1.0 radius-to-diameter ratio and four segments for 90-degree elbow.

3) Velocity 1500 fpm or Higher: 1.5 radius-to-diameter ratio and five segments for 90-degree elbow.

4) Radius-to Diameter Ratio: 1.5.

C. Branch Configuration:

1. Rectangular Duct: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 4-6, "Branch Connection."

a. Rectangular Main to Rectangular Branch: 45-degree entry. b. Rectangular Main to Round Branch: Spin in.

2. Round: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 3-5, "90 Degree Tees and Laterals," and Figure 3-6, "Conical Tees." Saddle taps are permitted in existing duct.

a. Velocity 1000 fpm or Lower: 90-degree tap. b. Velocity 1000 to 1500 fpm: Conical tap. c. Velocity 1500 fpm or Higher: 45-degree lateral.


31-18-01/DHH Bathroom Renovations 23 33 00 - 1 AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES March 18, 2021

SECTION 23 33 00 - AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Backdraft and pressure relief dampers. 2. Manual volume dampers. 3. Control dampers. 4. Flange connectors. 5. Turning vanes. 6. Duct-mounted access doors. 7. Flexible connectors. 8. Duct accessory hardware.







1. Fusible Links: Furnish quantity equal to 10 percent of amount installed.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 ASSEMBLY DESCRIPTION

A. Comply with NFPA 90A, "Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems," and with NFPA 90B, "Installation of Warm Air Heating and Air Conditioning Systems."

B. Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" for acceptable materials, material thicknesses, and duct construction methods unless otherwise indicated. Sheet metal materials shall be free of pitting, seam marks, roller marks, stains, discolorations, and other imperfections.


2.2 MATERIALS

A. Galvanized Sheet Steel: Comply with ASTM A 653/A 653M.

1. Galvanized Coating Designation: G60. 2. Exposed-Surface Finish: Mill phosphatized.

B. Aluminum Sheets: Comply with ASTM B 209, Alloy 3003, Temper H14; with mill finish for concealed ducts and standard, 1-side bright finish for exposed ducts.

C. Extruded Aluminum: Comply with ASTM B 221, Alloy 6063, Temper T6.

D. Reinforcement Shapes and Plates: Galvanized-steel reinforcement where installed on galvanized sheet metal ducts; compatible materials for aluminum and stainless-steel ducts.

E. Tie Rods: Galvanized steel, 1/4-inch minimum diameter for lengths 36 inches or less; 3/8-inch minimum diameter for lengths longer than 36 inches.

2.3 BACKDRAFT AND PRESSURE RELIEF DAMPERS

A. Description: Gravity balanced.

B. Frame: Hat-shaped, 0.094-inch-thick, galvanized sheet steel, with welded corners or mechanically attached and mounting flange.

C. Blade Action: Parallel.

D. Blade Seals: Felt.

E. Blade Axles:

1. Material: Nonferrous metal. 2. Diameter: 0.20 inch.

F. Tie Bars and Brackets: Aluminum.

G. Return Spring: Adjustable tension.

H. Bearings: Steel ball or synthetic pivot bushings.

I. Accessories:

1. Adjustment device to permit setting for varying differential static pressure. 2. Counterweights and spring-assist kits for vertical airflow installations. 3. Electric actuators. 4. Chain pulls. 5. Screen Mounting: Front mounted in sleeve.

a. Sleeve Thickness: 20 gage minimum. b. Sleeve Length: 6 inches minimum.

6. Screen Mounting: Rear mounted. 7. Screen Material: Galvanized steel. 8. Screen Type: Bird.


9. 90-degree stops.

2.4 MANUAL VOLUME DAMPERS

A. Standard, Steel, Manual Volume Dampers:

1. Standard leakage rating, with linkage outside airstream. 2. Suitable for horizontal or vertical applications. 3. Frames:

a. Frame: Hat-shaped, 0.094-inch-thick, galvanized sheet steel. b. Mitered and welded corners. c. Flanges for attaching to walls and flangeless frames for installing in ducts.

4. Blades:

a. Multiple or single blade. b. Parallel- or opposed-blade design. c. Stiffen damper blades for stability. d. Galvanized-steel, 0.064 inch thick.

5. Blade Axles: Galvanized steel. 6. Bearings:

a. Oil-impregnated bronze. b. Dampers in ducts with pressure classes of 3-inch wg or less shall have axles full

length of damper blades and bearings at both ends of operating shaft.

7. Tie Bars and Brackets: Galvanized steel.

B. Standard, Aluminum, Manual Volume Dampers:

1. Standard leakage rating, with linkage outside airstream. 2. Suitable for horizontal or vertical applications. 3. Frames: Hat-shaped, 0.10-inch-thick, aluminum sheet channels; frames with flanges for

attaching to walls and flangeless frames for installing in ducts. 4. Blades:

a. Multiple or single blade. b. Parallel- or opposed-blade design. c. Stiffen damper blades for stability. d. Roll-Formed Aluminum Blades: 0.10-inch-thick aluminum sheet. e. Extruded-Aluminum Blades: 0.050-inch-thick extruded aluminum.

5. Blade Axles: Galvanized steel. 6. Bearings:

a. Oil-impregnated bronze. b. Dampers in ducts with pressure classes of 3-inch wg or less shall have axles full

length of damper blades and bearings at both ends of operating shaft.

7. Tie Bars and Brackets: Aluminum.

C. Jackshaft:


1. Size: 0.5-inch diameter. 2. Material: Galvanized-steel pipe rotating within pipe-bearing assembly mounted on

supports at each mullion and at each end of multiple-damper assemblies. 3. Length and Number of Mountings: As required to connect linkage of each damper in

multiple-damper assembly.

D. Damper Hardware:

1. Zinc-plated, die-cast core with dial and handle made of 3/32-inch-thick zinc-plated steel, and a 3/4-inch hexagon locking nut.

2. Include center hole to suit damper operating-rod size. 3. Include elevated platform for insulated duct mounting.

2.5 CONTROL DAMPERS

A. Frames:

1. Hat shaped. 2. 0.094-inch-thick, galvanized sheet steel. 3. Mitered and welded corners.

B. Blades:

1. Multiple blade with maximum blade width of 6 inches. 2. Parallel- and opposed-blade design. 3. Galvanized-steel. 4. 0.064 inch thick single skin or 0.0747-inch-thick dual skin. 5. Blade Edging: Closed-cell neoprene. 6. Blade Edging: Inflatable seal blade edging, or replaceable rubber seals.

C. Blade Axles: 1/2-inch-diameter; galvanized steel; blade-linkage hardware of zinc-plated steel and brass; ends sealed against blade bearings.

1. Operating Temperature Range: From minus 40 to plus 200 deg F.

D. Bearings:

1. Oil-impregnated bronze. 2. Dampers in ducts with pressure classes of 3-inch wg or less shall have axles full length of

damper blades and bearings at both ends of operating shaft. 3. Thrust bearings at each end of every blade.

2.6 FLANGE CONNECTORS

A. Description: Add-on or roll-formed, factory-fabricated, slide-on transverse flange connectors, gaskets, and components.

B. Material: Galvanized steel.

C. Gage and Shape: Match connecting ductwork.


2.7 TURNING VANES

A. Manufactured Turning Vanes for Metal Ducts: Curved blades of galvanized sheet steel; support with bars perpendicular to blades set; set into vane runners suitable for duct mounting.

1. Acoustic Turning Vanes: Fabricate airfoil-shaped aluminum extrusions with perforated faces and fibrous-glass fill.

B. Manufactured Turning Vanes for Nonmetal Ducts: Fabricate curved blades of resin-bonded fiberglass with acrylic polymer coating; support with bars perpendicular to blades set; set into vane runners suitable for duct mounting.

C. General Requirements: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible"; Figures 4-3, "Vanes and Vane Runners," and 4-4, "Vane Support in Elbows."

D. Vane Construction: Single wall.

2.8 DUCT-MOUNTED ACCESS DOORS

A. Duct-Mounted Access Doors: Fabricate access panels according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible"; Figures 7-2, "Duct Access Doors and Panels," and 7-3, "Access Doors - Round Duct."

1. Door:

a. Double wall, rectangular. b. Galvanized sheet metal with insulation fill and thickness as indicated for duct

pressure class. c. Vision panel. d. Hinges and Latches: 1-by-1-inchbutt or piano hinge and cam latches. e. Fabricate doors airtight and suitable for duct pressure class.

2. Frame: Galvanized sheet steel, with bend-over tabs and foam gaskets. 3. Number of Hinges and Locks:

a. Access Doors Less Than 12 Inches Square: No hinges and two sash locks. b. Access Doors up to 18 Inches Square: Continuous and two sash locks. c. Access Doors up to 24 by 48 Inches: Continuous and two compression

latches with outside and inside handles.

2.9 DUCT ACCESS PANEL ASSEMBLIES

A. Labeled according to UL 1978 by an NRTL.

B. Panel and Frame: Minimum thickness 0.0528-inch carbon steel.

C. Fasteners: Carbon steel. Panel fasteners shall not penetrate duct wall.

D. Gasket: Comply with NFPA 96; grease-tight, high-temperature ceramic fiber, rated for minimum 2000 deg F.

E. Minimum Pressure Rating: 10-inch wg, positive or negative.


2.10 FLEXIBLE CONNECTORS

A. Materials: Flame-retardant or noncombustible fabrics.

B. Coatings and Adhesives: Comply with UL 181, Class 1.

C. Metal-Edged Connectors: Factory fabricated with a fabric strip [3-1/2 inches] [5-3/4 inches] wide attached to two strips of 2-3/4-inch-wide, 0.028-inch-thick, galvanized sheet steel or 0.032-inch-thick aluminum sheets. Provide metal compatible with connected ducts.

D. Indoor System, Flexible Connector Fabric: Glass fabric double coated with neoprene.

1. Minimum Weight: 26 oz./sq. yd.. 2. Tensile Strength: 480 lbf/inch in the warp and 360 lbf/inch in the filling. 3. Service Temperature: Minus 40 to plus 200 deg F.

2.11 DUCT ACCESSORY HARDWARE

A. Instrument Test Holes: Cast iron or cast aluminum to suit duct material, including screw cap and gasket. Size to allow insertion of pitot tube and other testing instruments and of length to suit duct-insulation thickness.

B. Adhesives: High strength, quick setting, neoprene based, waterproof, and resistant to gasoline and grease.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install duct accessories according to applicable details in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" for metal ducts and in NAIMA AH116, "Fibrous Glass Duct Construction Standards," for fibrous-glass ducts.

B. Install duct accessories of materials suited to duct materials; use galvanized-steel accessories in galvanized-steel and fibrous-glass ducts, stainless-steel accessories in stainless-steel ducts, and aluminum accessories in aluminum ducts.

C. Install backdraft dampers at inlet of exhaust fans or exhaust ducts as close as possible to exhaust fan unless otherwise indicated.

D. Install volume dampers at points on supply, return, and exhaust systems where branches extend from larger ducts. Where dampers are installed in ducts having duct liner, install dampers with hat channels of same depth as liner, and terminate liner with nosing at hat channel.

1. Install steel volume dampers in steel ducts. 2. Install aluminum volume dampers in aluminum ducts.

E. Set dampers to fully open position before testing, adjusting, and balancing.

F. Install test holes at fan inlets and outlets and elsewhere as indicated.


G. Install duct access doors on sides of ducts to allow for inspecting, adjusting, and maintaining accessories and equipment at the following locations:

1. On both sides of duct coils. 2. Upstream from duct filters. 3. At outdoor-air intakes and mixed-air plenums. 4. At drain pans and seals. 5. Downstream from manual volume dampers, control dampers, backdraft dampers, and

equipment. 6. Adjacent to and close enough to fire or smoke dampers, to reset or reinstall fusible links.

Access doors for access to fire or smoke dampers having fusible links shall be pressure relief access doors and shall be outward operation for access doors installed upstream from dampers and inward operation for access doors installed downstream from dampers.

7. At each change in direction and at maximum 50-foot spacing. 8. Upstream from turning vanes. 9. Upstream or downstream from duct silencers. 10. Control devices requiring inspection. 11. Elsewhere as indicated.

H. Install access doors with swing against duct static pressure.

I. Access Door Sizes:

1. One-Hand or Inspection Access: 8 by 5 inches. 2. Two-Hand Access: 12 by 6 inches. 3. Head and Hand Access: 18 by 10 inches. 4. Head and Shoulders Access: 21 by 14 inches. 5. Body Access: 25 by 14 inches. 6. Body plus Ladder Access: 25 by 17 inches.

J. Label access doors according to Section 23 05 53 "Identification for HVAC Piping and Equipment" to indicate the purpose of access door.

K. Install flexible connectors to connect ducts to equipment.

L. Connect terminal units to supply ducts directly or with maximum 12-inch lengths of flexible duct. Do not use flexible ducts to change directions.

M. Connect diffusers or light troffer boots to ducts directly or with maximum 60-inch lengths of flexible duct clamped or strapped in place.

N. Connect flexible ducts to metal ducts with draw bands.

O. Install duct test holes where required for testing and balancing purposes.


A. Tests and Inspections:

1. Operate dampers to verify full range of movement. 2. Inspect locations of access doors and verify that purpose of access door can be

performed.


3. Operate fire and smoke dampers to verify full range of movement and verify that proper heat-response device is installed.

4. Inspect turning vanes for proper and secure installation.


31-18-01/DHH Bathroom Renovations 23 34 16 - 1 CENTRIFUGAL HVAC FANS March 18, 2021

SECTION 23 34 16 - CENTRIFUGAL HVAC FANS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: For each product.

1. Backward-inclined centrifugal fans. 2. Forward-curved centrifugal fans.


A. Product Data:

1. Include rated capacities, furnished specialties, and accessories for each fan. 2. Certified fan performance curves with system operating conditions indicated. 3. Certified fan sound-power ratings. 4. Motor ratings and electrical characteristics, plus motor and electrical accessories. 5. Material thickness and finishes, including color charts. 6. Dampers, including housings, linkages, and operators.

B. Shop Drawings:

1. Include plans, elevations, sections, and attachment details. 2. Include details of equipment assemblies. Indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required

clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field connection.

3. Include diagrams for power, signal, and control wiring. 4. Design Calculations: Calculate requirements for selecting vibration isolators and seismic

restraints and for designing vibration isolation bases. 5. Vibration Isolation Base Details: Detail fabrication, including anchorages and attachments

to structure and to supported equipment. Include auxiliary motor slides and rails, and base weights.


A. Coordination Drawings: Show fan room layout and relationships between components and adjacent structural and mechanical elements. Show support locations, type of support, and weight on each support. Indicate and certify field measurements.



A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For centrifugal fans to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.



A. Belts: One set(s) for each belt-driven unit.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. AMCA Compliance: Comply with AMCA performance requirements and bear the AMCA-Certified Ratings Seal.

B. Capacities and Characteristics: See Drawing Schedule

2.2 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL

A. Sound-Power Level Ratings: Comply with AMCA 301, "Methods for Calculating Fan Sound Ratings from Laboratory Test Data." Factory test fans according to AMCA 300, "Reverberant Room Method for Sound Testing of Fans." Label fans with the AMCA-Certified Ratings Seal.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install centrifugal fans level and plumb.

B. Disassemble and reassemble units, as required for moving to the final location, according to manufacturer's written instructions.

C. Lift and support units with manufacturer's designated lifting or supporting points.

D. Curb Support: Install roof curb on roof structure, level and secure, according to "The NRCA Roofing and Waterproofing Manual," Low-Slope Membrane Roofing Construction Details Section, Illustration "Raised Curb Detail for Rooftop Air Handling Units and Ducts." Install and secure centrifugal fans on curbs, and coordinate roof penetrations and flashing with roof construction. Secure units to curb support with anchor bolts.

E. Unit Support: Install centrifugal fans level on structural curbs. Coordinate wall penetrations and flashing with wall construction. Secure units to structural support with anchor bolts.

F. Isolation Curb Support: Install centrifugal fans on isolation curbs, and install and vibration isolation and seismic-control devices.

1. Comply with requirements in Section 23 33 00 "Air Duct Accessories" for flexible duct connectors.

G. Install units with clearances for service and maintenance.

H. Label fans according to requirements specified in Section 23 05 53 "Identification for HVAC Piping and Equipment."


3.2 CONNECTIONS

A. Drawings indicate general arrangement of ducts and duct accessories. Make final duct connections with flexible connectors. Flexible connectors are specified in Section 23 33 00 "Air Duct Accessories."

B. Install ducts adjacent to fans to allow service and maintenance.

C. Install piping from scroll drain connection, with trap with seal equal to 1.5 times specified static pressure, to nearest floor drain with pipe sizes matching the drain connection.



1. Verify that shipping, blocking, and bracing are removed. 2. Verify that unit is secure on mountings and supporting devices and that connections to

ducts and electrical components are complete. Verify that proper thermal-overload protection is installed in motors, starters, and disconnect switches.

3. Verify that cleaning and adjusting are complete. 4. Disconnect fan drive from motor, verify proper motor rotation direction, and verify fan

wheel free rotation and smooth bearing operation. Reconnect fan drive system, align and adjust belts, and install belt guards.

5. Adjust belt tension. 6. Adjust damper linkages for proper damper operation. 7. Verify lubrication for bearings and other moving parts. 8. Verify that manual and automatic volume control and fire and smoke dampers in

connected ductwork systems are in fully open position. 9. See Section 23 05 93 "Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing For HVAC" for testing,

adjusting, and balancing procedures. 10. Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest as specified above.

B. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Controls and equipment will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections.



31-18-01/DHH Bathroom Renovations 23 37 13 - 1 DIFFUSERS, REGISTERS, AND GRILLES March 18, 2021

SECTION 23 37 13 - DIFFUSERS, REGISTERS, AND GRILLES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Adjustable bar registers and grilles.


1. Section 08 91 16 "Operable Wall Louvers" and Section 08 91 19 "Fixed Louvers" for fixed and adjustable louvers and wall vents, whether or not they are connected to ducts.

2. Section 23 33 00 "Air Duct Accessories" for fire and smoke dampers and volume-control dampers not integral to diffusers, registers, and grilles.


A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated, include the following:

1. Data Sheet: Indicate materials of construction, finish, and mounting details; and performance data including throw and drop, static-pressure drop, and noise ratings.

2. Diffuser, Register, and Grille Schedule: Indicate drawing designation, room location, quantity, model number, size, and accessories furnished.

B. Samples: For each exposed product and for each color and texture specified.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 REGISTERS AND GRILLES

A. Fixed Face Register – See Drawing Schedule

B. Fixed Face Grille - See Drawing Schedule

2.2 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL

A. Verification of Performance: Rate diffusers, registers, and grilles according to ASHRAE 70, "Method of Testing for Rating the Performance of Air Outlets and Inlets."

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install diffusers, registers, and grilles level and plumb.

31-18-01/DHH Bathroom Renovations 23 37 13 - 2 DIFFUSERS, REGISTERS, AND GRILLES March 18, 2021

B. Ceiling-Mounted Outlets and Inlets: Drawings indicate general arrangement of ducts, fittings, and accessories. Air outlet and inlet locations have been indicated to achieve design requirements for air volume, noise criteria, airflow pattern, throw, and pressure drop. Make final locations where indicated, as much as practical. For units installed in lay-in ceiling panels, locate units in the center of panel. Where architectural features or other items conflict with installation, notify Architect for a determination of final location.

C. Install diffusers, registers, and grilles with airtight connections to ducts and to allow service and maintenance of dampers, air extractors, and fire dampers.

3.2 ADJUSTING

A. After installation, adjust diffusers, registers, and grilles to air patterns indicated, or as directed, before starting air balancing.


31-18-01/DHH Bathroom Renovations 26 05 19 - 1 LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER March 18, 2021 CONDUCTORS AND CABLES

SECTION 26 05 19 - LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following: 1. Building wires and cables rated 600 V and less. 2. Connectors, splices, and terminations rated 600 V and less. 3. Sleeves and sleeve seals for cables.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. EPDM: Ethylene-propylene-diene terpolymer rubber.

B. NBR: Acrylonitrile-butadiene rubber.

1.4 SUBMITTALS


B. Qualification Data: For testing agency.

C. Field quality-control test reports.


A. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent agency, with the experience and capability to conduct the testing indicated, that is a member company of the InterNational Electrical Testing Association or is a nationally recognized testing laboratory (NRTL) as defined by OSHA in 29 CFR 1910.7, and that is acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 1. Testing Agency's Field Supervisor: Person currently certified by the InterNational Electrical

Testing Association or the National Institute for Certification in Engineering Technologies to supervise on-site testing specified in Part 3.

B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use.

C. Comply with NFPA 70.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 CONDUCTORS AND CABLES



1. Alcan Products Corporation; Alcan Cable Division. 2. American Insulated Wire Corp.; a Leviton Company. 3. General Cable Corporation. 4. Senator Wire & Cable Company. 5. Southwire Company. 6. Other acceptable manufacturers as approved by the Engineer.

2.2 Tinned Copper Conductors

A. Comply with NEMA WC 70/ICEA S-95-658.

B. Conductor Insulation: Comply with NEMA WC 70 for Types RHW-2 with EPR insulation.

2.3 CONNECTORS AND SPLICES

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. AFC Cable Systems, Inc. 2. Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. 3. O-Z/Gedney; EGS Electrical Group LLC. 4. 3M; Electrical Products Division. 5. Tyco Electronics Corp. 6. Other acceptable manufacturers as approved by the Engineer

B. Description: Factory-fabricated connectors and splices of size, ampacity rating, material, type, and class for application and service indicated.

2.4 SLEEVES SEALS

A. See specification 26 05 44 – Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for Electrical raceways and cables.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 CONDUCTOR MATERIAL APPLICATIONS

A. Feeders: Tinned Copper; stranded.

B. Branch Circuits: Tinned Copper; stranded.

3.2 CONDUCTOR INSULATION AND MULTICONDUCTOR CABLE APPLICATIONS AND WIRING METHODS

A. Service Entrance: Type RHW-2,EPR insulation, single conductors in raceway.

B. Exposed Feeders: Type RHW-2, EPR insulation, single conductors in raceway.

C. Feeders Concealed in Ceilings, Walls, Partitions, and Crawlspaces: Type RHW-2, EPR insulation, single conductors in raceway.

D. Feeders Concealed in Concrete, below Slabs-on-Grade, and Underground: Type RHW-2, EPR insulation, single conductors in raceway.


E. Exposed Branch Circuits, Including in Crawlspaces: Type RHW-2, EPR insulation, single conductors in raceway.

F. Branch Circuits Concealed in Ceilings, Walls, and Partitions: Type RHW-2, EPR insulation, or XHHW-2 single conductors in raceway.

G. Branch Circuits Concealed in Concrete, below Slabs-on-Grade, and Underground: Type RHW-2, EPR insulation, single conductors in raceway.

H. Cord Drops and Portable Appliance Connections: Type SO, hard service cord with stainless-steel, wire-mesh, strain relief device at terminations to suit application.

I. Class 1 Control Circuits: Type THHN-THWN or XHHW-2, in raceway.

J. Class 2 Control Circuits: Type THHN-THWN or XHHW-2, in raceway or Power-limited tray cable, in raceway.

3.3 INSTALLATION OF CONDUCTORS AND CABLES

A. Conduits shall be concealed in walls and ceilings in finished spaces such as offices and restrooms. Conduits in process or maintenance areas shall be surface mounted. Exterior conduits shall be buried except around areas of concrete tanks.

B. Use manufacturer-approved pulling compound or lubricant where necessary; compound used must not deteriorate conductor or insulation. Do not exceed manufacturer's recommended maximum pulling tensions and sidewall pressure values.

C. Use pulling means, including fish tape, cable, rope, and basket-weave wire/cable grips, that will not damage cables or raceway.

D. Install exposed cables parallel and perpendicular to surfaces of exposed structural members, and follow surface contours where possible.

E. Support cables according to Division 26 Section "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems."

F. Identify and color-code conductors and cables according to Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems."

3.4 CONNECTIONS

A. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published torque-tightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified in UL 486A and UL 486B.

B. Make splices and taps that are compatible with conductor material and that possess equivalent or better mechanical strength and insulation ratings than unspliced conductors.

C. Wiring at Outlets: Install conductor at each outlet, with at least 6 inches of slack.

3.5 SLEEVE INSTALLATION FOR ELECTRICAL PENETRATIONS

A. Coordinate sleeve selection and application with selection and application of firestopping specified in Division 07 Section "Penetration Firestopping."


B. Concrete Slabs and Walls: Install sleeves for penetrations unless core-drilled holes or formed openings are used. Install sleeves during erection of slabs and walls.

C. Use pipe sleeves unless penetration arrangement requires rectangular sleeved opening.

D. Rectangular Sleeve Minimum Metal Thickness: 1. For sleeve rectangle perimeter less than 50 inches and no side greater than 16 inches

thickness shall be 0.052inch 2. For sleeve rectangle perimeter equal to, or greater than, 50 inches and 1 or more sides

equal to, or greater than, 16 inches thickness shall be 0.138inch

E. Fire-Rated Assemblies: Install sleeves for penetrations of fire-rated floor and wall assemblies unless openings compatible with firestop system used are fabricated during construction of floor or wall.

F. Cut sleeves to length for mounting flush with both wall surfaces.

G. Extend sleeves installed in floors 2 inches above finished floor level.

H. Size pipe sleeves to provide 1/4-inchannular clear space between sleeve and cable unless sleeve seal is to be installed

I. Seal space outside of sleeves with grout for penetrations of concrete and masonry and with approved joint compound for gypsum board assemblies.

J. Interior Penetrations of Non-Fire-Rated Walls and Floors: Seal annular space between sleeve and cable, using joint sealant appropriate for size, depth, and location of joint according to Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants."

K. Fire-Rated-Assembly Penetrations: Maintain indicated fire rating of walls, partitions, ceilings, and floors at cable penetrations. Install sleeves and seal with firestop materials according to Division 07 Section "Penetration Firestopping."

L. Roof-Penetration Sleeves: Seal penetration of individual cables with flexible boot-type flashing units applied in coordination with roofing work.

M. Aboveground Exterior-Wall Penetrations: Seal penetrations using sleeves and mechanical sleeve seals. Size sleeves to allow for 1-inchannular clear space between pipe and sleeve for installing mechanical sleeve seals.

N. Underground Exterior-Wall Penetrations: Install cast-iron "wall pipes" for sleeves. Size sleeves to allow for 1-inchannular clear space between cable and sleeve for installing mechanical sleeve seals.

3.6 SLEEVE-SEAL INSTALLATION

A. Install to seal underground exterior-wall penetrations.

B. Use type and number of sealing elements recommended by manufacturer for cable material and size. Position cable in center of sleeve. Assemble mechanical sleeve seals and install in annular space between cable and sleeve. Tighten bolts against pressure plates that cause sealing elements to expand and make watertight seal.


3.7 FIRESTOPPING

A. Apply firestopping to electrical penetrations of fire-rated floor and wall assemblies to restore original fire-resistance rating of assembly according to Division 07 Section "Penetration Firestopping."


A. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections and prepare test reports.

B. Perform tests and inspections and prepare test reports.

C. Tests and Inspections: 1. After installing conductors and cables and before electrical circuitry has been energized,

test feeder conductors, and conductors feeding the following critical equipment and services for compliance with requirements. a. All exterior power and control circuits.

2. Perform each visual and mechanical inspection and electrical test stated in NETA Acceptance Testing Specification. Certify compliance with test parameters.

D. Test Reports: Prepare a written report to record the following: 1. Test procedures used. 2. Test results that comply with requirements. 3. Test results that do not comply with requirements and corrective action taken to achieve

compliance with requirements.

E. Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest as specified above.


31-18-01/DHH Bathroom Renovations 26 05 29 - 1 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR March 18, 2021 ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

SECTION 26 05 29 - HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following: 1. Hangers and supports for electrical equipment and systems. 2. Construction requirements for concrete bases.

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. EMT: Electrical metallic tubing.

B. IMC: Intermediate metal conduit.

C. RMC: Rigid metal conduit.


A. Design supports for multiple raceways capable of supporting combined weight of supported systems and its contents.

B. Design equipment supports capable of supporting combined operating weight of supported equipment and connected systems and components.

C. Rated Strength: Adequate in tension, shear, and pullout force to resist maximum loads calculated or imposed for this Project, with a minimum structural safety factor of three times the applied force.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For the following: 1. Steel slotted support systems. 2. Nonmetallic slotted support systems.

B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details and include calculations for the following: 1. Trapeze hangers. Include Product Data for components. 2. Steel slotted channel systems. Include Product Data for components. 3. Nonmetallic slotted channel systems. Include Product Data for components. 4. Equipment supports.


A. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel."

B. Comply with NFPA 70.


1.6 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate size and location of concrete bases. Cast anchor-bolt inserts into bases. Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified in Division 03.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SUPPORT, ANCHORAGE, AND ATTACHMENT COMPONENTS

A. Steel Slotted Support Systems: Comply with MFMA-4, factory-fabricated components for field assembly. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the

following: a. Allied Tube & Conduit. b. Cooper B-Line, Inc.; a division of Cooper Industries. c. ERICO International Corporation. d. GS Metals Corp. e. Thomas & Betts Corporation. f. Unistrut; Tyco International, Ltd. g. Wesanco, Inc.

2. Metallic Coatings: Hot-dip galvanized after fabrication and applied according to MFMA-4. 3. Nonmetallic Coatings: Manufacturer's standard PVC, polyurethane, or polyester coating

applied according to MFMA-4. 4. Channel Dimensions: Selected for applicable load criteria.

B. Nonmetallic Slotted Support Systems: Structural-grade, factory-formed, glass-fiber-resin channels and angles with 9/16-inchdiameter holes at a maximum of 8 inches o.c., in at least 1 surface. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the

following: a. Allied Tube & Conduit. b. Cooper B-Line, Inc.; a division of Cooper Industries. c. Fabco Plastics Wholesale Limited. d. Seasafe, Inc.

2. Fittings and Accessories: Products of channel and angle manufacturer and designed for use with those items.

3. Fitting and Accessory Materials: Same as channels and angles, except metal items may be stainless steel.

4. Rated Strength: Selected to suit applicable load criteria.

C. Raceway and Cable Supports: As described in NECA 1 and NECA 101.

D. Conduit and Cable Support Devices: Steel and malleable-iron hangers, clamps, and associated fittings, designed for types and sizes of raceway or cable to be supported.

E. Support for Conductors in Vertical Conduit: Factory-fabricated assembly consisting of threaded body and insulating wedging plug or plugs for non-armored electrical conductors or cables in riser conduits. Plugs shall have number, size, and shape of conductor gripping pieces as required to suit individual conductors or cables supported. Body shall be malleable iron.

F. Structural Steel for Fabricated Supports and Restraints: ASTM A 36/A 36M, steel plates, shapes, and bars; black and galvanized.


G. Mounting, Anchoring, and Attachment Components: Items for fastening electrical items or their supports to building surfaces include the following: 1. Powder-Actuated Fasteners: Threaded-steel stud, for use in hardened portland cement

concrete, steel, or wood, with tension, shear, and pullout capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials where used. a. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of

the following: 1) Hilti Inc. 2) ITW Ramset/Red Head; a division of Illinois Tool Works, Inc. 3) MKT Fastening, LLC. 4) Simpson Strong-Tie Co., Inc.; Masterset Fastening Systems Unit.

2. Mechanical-Expansion Anchors: Insert-wedge-type, stainless steel, for use in hardened portland cement concrete with tension, shear, and pullout capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials in which used. a. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of

the following: 1) Cooper B-Line, Inc.; a division of Cooper Industries. 2) Empire Tool and Manufacturing Co., Inc. 3) Hilti Inc. 4) ITW Ramset/Red Head; a division of Illinois Tool Works, Inc. 5) MKT Fastening, LLC.

3. Concrete Inserts: Steel or malleable-iron, slotted support system units similar to MSS Type 18; complying with MFMA-4 or MSS SP-58.

4. Clamps for Attachment to Steel Structural Elements: MSS SP-58, type suitable for attached structural element.

5. Through Bolts: Structural type, hex head, and high strength. Comply with ASTM A 325. 6. Toggle Bolts: All-steel springhead type. 7. Hanger Rods: Threaded steel.

2.2 FABRICATED METAL EQUIPMENT SUPPORT ASSEMBLIES

A. Description: Welded or bolted, structural-steel shapes, shop or field fabricated to fit dimensions of supported equipment.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 APPLICATION

A. Comply with NECA 1 and NECA 101 for application of hangers and supports for electrical equipment and systems except if requirements in this Section are stricter.

B. Maximum Support Spacing and Minimum Hanger Rod Size for Raceway: Space supports for EMT, IMC, and RMC as required by NFPA 70. Minimum rod size shall be 1/4-inchin diameter.

C. Multiple Raceways or Cables: Install trapeze-type supports fabricated with steel slotted or other support system, sized so capacity can be increased by at least 25 percent in future without exceeding specified design load limits. 1. Secure raceways and cables to these supports with two-bolt conduit clamps.

D. Spring-steel clamps designed for supporting single conduits without bolts may be used for 1-1/2-inchand smaller raceways serving branch circuits and communication systems above suspended ceilings and for fastening raceways to trapeze supports.


3.2 SUPPORT INSTALLATION

A. Comply with NECA 1 and NECA 101 for installation requirements except as specified in this Article.

B. Raceway Support Methods: In addition to methods described in NECA 1, EMT, IMC, and RMC may be supported by openings through structure members, as permitted in NFPA 70.

C. Strength of Support Assemblies: Where not indicated, select sizes of components so strength will be adequate to carry present and future static loads within specified loading limits. Minimum static design load used for strength determination shall be weight of supported components plus 200 lbs.

D. Mounting and Anchorage of Surface-Mounted Equipment and Components: Anchor and fasten electrical items and their supports to building structural elements by the following methods unless otherwise indicated by code: 1. To Wood: Fasten with lag screws or through bolts. 2. To New Concrete: Bolt to concrete inserts. 3. To Masonry: Approved toggle-type bolts on hollow masonry units and expansion anchor

fasteners on solid masonry units. 4. To Existing Concrete: Expansion anchor fasteners. 5. Instead of expansion anchors, powder-actuated driven threaded studs provided with lock

washers and nuts may be used in existing standard-weight concrete 4 inches thick or greater. Do not use for anchorage to lightweight-aggregate concrete or for slabs less than 4 inches thick.

6. To Steel: Welded threaded studs complying with AWS D1.1/D1.1M, with lock washers and nuts or Beam clamps (MSS Type 19, 21, 23, 25, or 27) complying with MSS SP-69 or Spring-tension clamps.

7. To Light Steel: Sheet metal screws. 8. Items Mounted on Hollow Walls and Nonstructural Building Surfaces: Mount cabinets,

panelboards, disconnect switches, control enclosures, pull and junction boxes, transformers, and other devices on slotted-channel racks attached to substrate.

E. Drill holes for expansion anchors in concrete at locations and to depths that avoid reinforcing bars.

3.3 INSTALLATION OF FABRICATED METAL SUPPORTS

A. Comply with installation requirements in Division 05 Section "Metal Fabrications" for site-fabricated metal supports.

B. Cut, fit, and place miscellaneous metal supports accurately in location, alignment, and elevation to support and anchor electrical materials and equipment.

C. Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1/D1.1M.

3.4 CONCRETE BASES

A. Construct concrete bases of dimensions indicated but not less than 4 inches larger in both directions than supported unit, and so anchors will be a minimum of 10 bolt diameters from edge of the base.

B. Use 3000-psi 28-day compressive-strength concrete. Concrete materials, reinforcement, and placement requirements are specified in Division 03 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete."


C. Anchor equipment to concrete base. 1. Place and secure anchorage devices. Use supported equipment manufacturer's setting

drawings, templates, diagrams, instructions, and directions furnished with items to be embedded.

2. Install anchor bolts to elevations required for proper attachment to supported equipment. 3. Install anchor bolts according to anchor-bolt manufacturer's written instructions.

3.5 PAINTING

A. Touchup: Clean field welds and abraded areas of shop paint. Paint exposed areas immediately after erecting hangers and supports. Use same materials as used for shop painting. Comply with SSPC-PA 1 requirements for touching up field-painted surfaces. 1. Apply paint by brush or spray to provide minimum dry film thickness of 2.0 mils

B. Touchup: Comply with requirements in Division 09 painting Sections for cleaning and touchup painting of field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas of shop paint on miscellaneous metal.

C. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and apply galvanizing-repair paint to comply with ASTM A 780.


31-18-01/DHH Bathroom Renovations 26 05 33 - 1 RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR March 18, 2021 ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

SECTION 26 05 33 - RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes raceways, fittings, boxes, enclosures, and cabinets for electrical wiring.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. EMT: Electrical metallic tubing.

B. ENT: Electrical nonmetallic tubing.

C. EPDM: Ethylene-propylene-diene terpolymer rubber.

D. FMC: Flexible metal conduit.

E. IMC: Intermediate metal conduit.

F. LFMC: Liquidtight flexible metal conduit.

G. LFNC: Liquidtight flexible nonmetallic conduit.

H. NBR: Acrylonitrile-butadiene rubber.

I. RNC: Rigid nonmetallic conduit.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For conduit, fittings, boxes, hinged-cover enclosures, and cabinets.

B. Shop Drawings: For the following raceway components. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work. 1. Custom enclosures and cabinets.

C. Coordination Drawings: Conduit routing plans, drawn to scale, on which the following items are shown and coordinated with each other, based on input from installers of the items involved: 1. Structural members in the paths of conduit groups with common supports. 2. Process piping items and structural features in the paths of conduit groups with common

supports.

D. Qualification Data: For professional engineer and testing agency.

E. Source quality-control test reports.



A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use.


PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 METAL CONDUIT AND TUBING

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. AFC Cable Systems, Inc. 2. Alflex Inc. 3. Allied Tube & Conduit; a Tyco International Ltd. Co. 4. Anamet Electrical, Inc.; Anaconda Metal Hose. 5. Electri-Flex Co. 6. Manhattan/CDT/Cole-Flex. 7. Maverick Tube Corporation. 8. O-Z Gedney; a unit of General Signal. 9. Wheatland Tube Company.

B. Rigid Steel Conduit: ANSI C80.1.

C. Aluminum Rigid Conduit: ANSI C80.5.

D. IMC: ANSI C80.6.

E. PVC-Coated Steel Conduit: PVC-coated rigid steel conduit 1. Comply with NEMA RN 1. 2. Coating Thickness: 0.040-inch minimum.

F. EMT: ANSI C80.3.

G. FMC: Zinc-coated steel, Aluminum, Zinc-coated steel or aluminum.

H. LFMC: Flexible steel conduit with PVC jacket.

I. Fittings for Conduit (Including all Types and Flexible and Liquidtight), EMT, and Cable: NEMA FB 1; listed for type and size raceway with which used, and for application and environment in which installed. 1. Conduit Fittings for Hazardous (Classified) Locations: Comply with UL 886. 2. Fittings for EMT: Steel, set-screw type. 3. Coating for Fittings for PVC-Coated Conduit: Minimum thickness, 0.040-inch with

overlapping sleeves protecting threaded joints.

J. Joint Compound for Rigid Steel Conduit or IMC: Listed for use in cable connector assemblies, and compounded for use to lubricate and protect threaded raceway joints from corrosion and enhance their conductivity.


2.2 NONMETALLIC CONDUIT AND TUBING

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. AFC Cable Systems, Inc. 2. Anamet Electrical, Inc.; Anaconda Metal Hose. 3. Arnco Corporation. 4. CANTEX Inc. 5. CertainTeed Corp.; Pipe & Plastics Group. 6. Condux International, Inc. 7. ElecSYS, Inc. 8. Electri-Flex Co. 9. Lamson & Sessions; Carlon Electrical Products. 10. Manhattan/CDT/Cole-Flex. 11. RACO; a Hubbell Company. 12. Thomas & Betts Corporation.

B. RNC: NEMA TC 2, Type EPC-40-PVC, unless otherwise indicated.

C. Fittings for RNC: NEMA TC 3; match to conduit or tubing type and material.

2.3 METAL WIREWAYS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Cooper B-Line, Inc. 2. Hoffman. 3. Square D; Schneider Electric.

B. Description: Sheet metal sized and shaped as indicated, NEMA 250, Type 3R, unless otherwise indicated.

C. Fittings and Accessories: Include couplings, offsets, elbows, expansion joints, adapters, hold-down straps, end caps, and other fittings to match and mate with wireways as required for complete system.

D. Wireway Covers: All wireways to include cover to maintain NEMA rating.

E. Finish: Manufacturer's standard enamel finish.

2.4 SURFACE RACEWAYS

A. Surface Metal Raceways: Galvanized steel with snap-on covers. Pre-painted. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the

following: a. Thomas & Betts Corporation. b. Walker Systems, Inc.; Wiremold Company (The). c. Wiremold Company (The); Electrical Sales Division.

2.5 BOXES, ENCLOSURES, AND CABINETS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Cooper Crouse-Hinds; Div. of Cooper Industries, Inc.


2. EGS/Appleton Electric. 3. Erickson Electrical Equipment Company. 4. Hoffman. 5. Hubbell Incorporated; Killark Electric Manufacturing Co. Division. 6. O-Z/Gedney; a unit of General Signal. 7. RACO; a Hubbell Company. 8. Robroy Industries, Inc.; Enclosure Division. 9. Scott Fetzer Co.; Adalet Division. 10. Spring City Electrical Manufacturing Company. 11. Thomas & Betts Corporation. 12. Walker Systems, Inc.; Wiremold Company (The). 13. Woodhead, Daniel Company; Woodhead Industries, Inc. Subsidiary.

B. Sheet Metal Outlet and Device Boxes: NEMA OS 1.

C. Cast-Metal Outlet and Device Boxes: NEMA FB 1, ferrous alloy, Type FD, with gasketed cover.

D. Small Sheet Metal Pull and Junction Boxes: NEMA OS 1.

E. Cast-Metal Access, Pull, and Junction Boxes: NEMA FB 1, galvanized, cast iron with gasketed cover.

F. Hinged-Cover Enclosures: NEMA 250, Type 12 with continuous-hinge cover with flush latch, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Metal Enclosures: Steel, finished inside and out with manufacturer's standard enamel. 2. Nonmetallic Enclosures: Plastic.

G. Cabinets: 1. NEMA 250, Type 12 galvanized-steel box with removable interior panel and removable

front, finished inside and out with manufacturer's standard enamel. 2. Hinged door in front cover with flush latch and concealed hinge. 3. Key latch to match panelboards. 4. Metal barriers to separate wiring of different systems and voltage. 5. Accessory feet where required for freestanding equipment.

2.6 HANDHOLES AND BOXES FOR EXTERIOR UNDERGROUND WIRING

A. Description: Comply with SCTE 77. 1. Color of Frame and Cover: Gray. 2. Configuration: Units shall be designed for flush burial and have open bottom, unless

otherwise indicated. 3. Cover: Weatherproof, secured by tamper-resistant locking devices and having structural

load rating consistent with enclosure. 4. Cover Finish: Nonskid finish shall have a minimum coefficient of friction of 0.50. 5. Cover Legend: Molded lettering, "ELECTRIC." as indicated for each service. 6. Conduit Entrance Provisions: Conduit-terminating fittings shall mate with entering ducts for

secure, fixed installation in enclosure wall.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 RACEWAY APPLICATION

A. Outdoors: Apply raceway products as specified below, unless otherwise indicated:


1. Exposed Conduit: Use rigid galvanized steel conduit or EPC-40-PVC where not subject to damage and approved by the Engineer.

2. Concealed Conduit, Aboveground: Use rigid galvanized steel conduit where subject to damage, otherwise use EMT.

3. Underground Conduit: Use only PVC coated rigid galvanized steel conduit, or RNC, Type EPC- 40-PVC.

4. Hazardous and Corrosive Locations: Use PVC coated rigid galvanized steel. 5. Connection to Vibrating Equipment (Including Transformers and Hydraulic, Pneumatic,

Electric Solenoid, or Motor-Driven Equipment): LFMC. 6. Boxes and Enclosures, Aboveground: NEMA 250, Type 12 or 4.

B. Comply with the following indoor applications, unless otherwise indicated: 1. Exposed, dry, in office areas Not Subject to Physical Damage: EMT. 2. Exposed and all process areas: Rigid steel conduit. 3. Concealed in Ceilings and Interior Walls and Partitions in conditioned spaces: EMT. 4. Connection to Vibrating Equipment (Including Transformers and Hydraulic, Pneumatic,

Electric Solenoid, or Motor-Driven Equipment): FMC, except use LFMC in damp or wet locations.

5. Damp or Wet Locations: PVC coated rigid galvanized steel conduit. 6. Hazardous Locations: Use PVC coated rigid galvanized steel. 7. Corrosive environment: Use only non-metallic boxes, raceways and fittings EPC-40-PVC,

with stainless fasteners. 8. Underground within buildings: Use only EPC-40-PVC. 9. Boxes and Enclosures: NEMA 250, Type 1 in offices and electrical control rooms, use Type

4 in dry process areas, except use NEMA 250, Type 4X, stainless steel in damp or wet locations.

C. Minimum Raceway Size: 3/4-inchtrade size.

D. Raceway Fittings: Compatible with raceways and suitable for use and location. 1. Rigid and Intermediate Steel Conduit: Use threaded rigid steel conduit fittings, unless

otherwise indicated. 2. PVC Externally Coated, Rigid Steel Conduits: Use only fittings listed for use with that

material. Patch and seal all joints, nicks, and scrapes in PVC coating after installing conduits and fittings. Use sealant recommended by fitting manufacturer.

E. Install nonferrous conduit or tubing for circuits operating above 60 Hz. Where aluminum raceways are installed for such circuits and pass through concrete, install in nonmetallic sleeve.

F. Do not install aluminum conduits in contact with concrete.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Comply with NECA 1 for installation requirements applicable to products specified in Part 2 except where requirements on Drawings or in this Article are stricter.

B. Install conduit parallel or perpendicular to building structural members. Raceways above radius corridors shall follow the path of the corridor.

C. Keep raceways at least 6 inches away from parallel runs of flues and steam or hot-water pipes. Install horizontal raceway runs above water and steam piping.

D. Complete raceway installation before starting conductor installation.


E. Support raceways as specified in Division 26 Section "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems."

F. Arrange stub-ups so curved portions of bends are not visible above the finished slab.

G. Install no more than the equivalent of three 90-degree bends in any conduit run except for communications conduits, for which fewer bends are allowed.

H. Conceal conduit and EMT within finished walls, ceilings, and floors, unless otherwise indicated.

I. Threaded Conduit Joints, Exposed to Wet, Damp, Corrosive, or Outdoor Conditions: Apply listed compound to threads of raceway and fittings before making up joints. Follow compound manufacturer's written instructions.

J. Raceway Terminations at Locations Subject to Moisture or Vibration: Use insulating bushings to protect conductors, including conductors smaller than No. 4 AWG.

K. Install pull wires in empty raceways. Use polypropylene or monofilament plastic line with not less than 200-lbtensile strength. Leave at least 12 inches of slack at each end of pull wire.

L. Install raceway sealing fittings at suitable, approved, and accessible locations and fill them with listed sealing compound. For concealed raceways, install each fitting in a flush steel box with a blank cover plate having a finish similar to that of adjacent plates or surfaces. Install raceway sealing fittings at the following points: 1. Where conduits pass from warm to cold locations, such as boundaries of refrigerated

spaces. 2. Where otherwise required by NFPA 70.

M. Expansion-Joint Fittings for RNC: Install in each run of aboveground conduit that is located where environmental temperature change may exceed 30 degree F and that has straight-run length that exceeds 25 feet 1. Install expansion-joint fittings for each of the following locations, and provide type and

quantity of fittings that accommodate temperature change listed for location: a. Outdoor Locations Not Exposed to Direct Sunlight: 125 degree F temperature change. b. Outdoor Locations Exposed to Direct Sunlight: 155 degree F temperature change. c. Indoor Spaces: Connected with the Outdoors without Physical Separation: 125

degree F temperature change. d. Attics: 135 degree F temperature change.

2. Install fitting(s) that provide expansion and contraction for at least 0.00041-inch per foot of length of straight run per degree F of temperature change.

3. Install each expansion-joint fitting with position, mounting, and piston setting selected according to manufacturer's written instructions for conditions at specific location at the time of installation.

N. Flexible Conduit Connections: Use maximum of 72 inches of flexible conduit for recessed and semi-recessed lighting fixtures, equipment subject to vibration, noise transmission, or movement; and for transformers and motors. 1. Use LFMC in damp or wet locations subject to severe physical damage. 2. Use LFMC or LFNC in damp or wet locations not subject to severe physical damage.

O. Recessed Boxes in Masonry Walls: Saw-cut opening for box in center of cell of masonry block, and install box flush with surface of wall.

P. Set metal floor boxes level and flush with finished floor surface.


3.3 INSTALLATION OF UNDERGROUND CONDUIT

A. Direct-Buried Conduit: 1. Excavate trench bottom to provide firm and uniform support for conduit. Prepare trench

bottom as specified in Division 31 Section "Earth Moving" for pipe less than 6 inches in nominal diameter.

2. After installing conduit, backfill with Class 2 material and compact. Start at tie-in point, and work toward end of conduit run, leaving conduit at end of run free to move with expansion and contraction as temperature changes during this process. Firmly hand tamp backfill around conduit to provide maximum supporting strength. After placing controlled backfill to within 12 inches of finished grade, make final conduit connection at end of run and complete backfilling with normal compaction as specified in Division 31 Section "Earth Moving."

3. Install manufactured duct elbows for stub-ups at poles and equipment and at building entrances through the floor, unless otherwise indicated. Encase elbows for stub-up ducts throughout the length of the elbow.

4. Install manufactured rigid steel conduit elbows for stub-ups at poles and equipment and at building entrances through the floor. Wrap all steel conduit underground with PVC pipe wrap adhesive tape. a. Couple steel conduits to ducts with adapters designed for this purpose, and encase

coupling with 3 inches of concrete. b. For stub-ups at equipment mounted on outdoor concrete bases, extend steel conduit

horizontally a minimum of 60 inches from edge of equipment pad or foundation. Install insulated grounding bushings on terminations at equipment.

5. Warning Planks: Bury warning planks approximately 12 inches above direct-buried conduits, placing them 24 inches o.c. Align planks along the width and along the centerline of conduit.

3.4 INSTALLATION OF UNDERGROUND HANDHOLES AND BOXES

A. Install handholes and boxes level and plumb and with orientation and depth coordinated with connecting conduits to minimize bends and deflections required for proper entrances.

B. Unless otherwise indicated, support units on a level bed of crushed stone or gravel, graded from 1/2-inch sieve to No. 4 sieve and compacted to same density as adjacent undisturbed earth.

C. Elevation: In paved areas, set so cover surface will be flush with finished grade. Set covers of other enclosures 1 inch above finished grade.

D. Install handholes with bottom below frost line, below grade.

E. Field-cut openings for conduits according to enclosure manufacturer's written instructions. Cut wall of enclosure with a tool designed for material to be cut. Size holes for terminating fittings to be used, and seal around penetrations after fittings are installed.

3.5 SLEEVE INSTALLATION FOR ELECTRICAL PENETRATIONS

A. See Specification 26 05 44 Sleeves and Sleeve seals for electrical raceways and cabling.

3.6 FIRESTOPPING

A. Apply firestopping to electrical penetrations of fire-rated floor and wall assemblies to restore original fire-resistance rating of assembly. Firestopping materials and installation requirements are specified in Division 07 Section "Penetration Firestopping."


3.7 PROTECTION

A. Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure coatings, finishes, and cabinets are without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. 1. Repair damage to galvanized finishes with zinc-rich paint recommended by manufacturer. 2. Repair damage to PVC or paint finishes with matching touchup coating recommended by

manufacturer.


31-18-01/DHH Bathroom Renovations 26 05 44 - 1 SLEEVES AND SLEEVE SEALS March 18, 2021 FOR ELECTRICAL RACEWAYS AND CABLING

SECTION 26 05 44 - SLEEVES AND SLEEVE SEALS FOR ELECTRICAL RACEWAYS AND CABLING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Sleeves for raceway and cable penetration of non-fire-rated construction walls and floors. 2. Sleeve-seal systems. 3. Sleeve-seal fittings. 4. Grout. 5. Silicone sealants.

B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 07 84 13 "Penetration Firestopping" for penetration firestopping installed in fire-

resistance-rated walls, horizontal assemblies, and smoke barriers, with and without penetrating items.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SLEEVES

A. Wall Sleeves: 1. Steel Pipe Sleeves: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type E, Grade B, Schedule 40, zinc coated, plain

ends.

B. Sleeves for Conduits Penetrating Non-Fire-Rated Gypsum Board Assemblies: Galvanized-steel sheet; 0.0239-inchminimum thickness; round tube closed with welded longitudinal joint, with tabs for screw-fastening the sleeve to the board.

C. Sleeves for Rectangular Openings: 1. Material: Galvanized sheet steel. 2. Minimum Metal Thickness:

a. For sleeve cross-section rectangle perimeter less than 50 inches and with no side larger than 16-inche’s thickness shall be 0.052 inch

b. For sleeve cross-section rectangle perimeter 50 inches or more and one or more sides larger than 16 inches thickness shall be 0.138 inch

2.2 SLEEVE-SEAL SYSTEMS

A. Description: Modular sealing device, designed for field assembly, to fill annular space between sleeve and raceway or cable. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering

products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Advance Products & Systems, Inc. b. CALPICO, Inc.




c. Metraflex Company (The). d. Pipeline Seal and Insulator, Inc. e. Proco Products, Inc.

2. Sealing Elements: EPDM rubber interlocking links shaped to fit surface of pipe. Include type and number required for pipe material and size of pipe.

3. Pressure Plates: Carbon steel. 4. Connecting Bolts and Nuts: Carbon steel, with corrosion-resistant coating, of length

required to secure pressure plates to sealing elements.

2.3 SLEEVE-SEAL FITTINGS

A. Description: Manufactured plastic, sleeve-type, waterstop assembly made for embedding in concrete slab or wall. Unit shall have plastic or rubber waterstop collar with center opening to match piping OD. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering

products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Presealed Systems.

2.4 GROUT

A. Description: Nonshrink; recommended for interior and exterior sealing openings in non-fire-rated walls or floors.

B. Standard: ASTM C 1107/C 1107M, Grade B, post-hardening and volume-adjusting, dry, hydraulic-cement grout.

C. Design Mix: 5000-psi 28-day compressive strength.

D. Packaging: Premixed and factory packaged.

2.5 SILICONE SEALANTS

A. Silicone Sealants: Single-component, silicone-based, neutral-curing elastomeric sealants of grade indicated below. 1. Grade: Pourable (self-leveling) formulation for openings in floors and other horizontal

surfaces that are not fire rated.

B. Silicone Foams: Multicomponent, silicone-based liquid elastomers that, when mixed, expand and cure in place to produce a flexible, nonshrinking foam.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 SLEEVE INSTALLATION FOR NON-FIRE-RATED ELECTRICAL PENETRATIONS

A. Comply with NECA 1.

B. Comply with NEMA VE 2 for cable tray and cable penetrations.

C. Sleeves for Conduits Penetrating Above-Grade Non-Fire-Rated Concrete and Masonry-Unit Floors and Walls: 1. Interior Penetrations of Non-Fire-Rated Walls and Floors:






a. Seal annular space between sleeve and raceway or cable, using joint sealant appropriate for size, depth, and location of joint. Comply with requirements in Section 07 92 00 "Joint Sealants."

b. Seal space outside of sleeves with mortar or grout. Pack sealing material solidly between sleeve and wall so no voids remain. Tool exposed surfaces smooth; protect material while curing.

2. Use pipe sleeves unless penetration arrangement requires rectangular sleeved opening. 3. Size pipe sleeves to provide 1/4-inchannular clear space between sleeve and raceway or

cable unless sleeve seal is to be installed. 4. Install sleeves for wall penetrations unless core-drilled holes or formed openings are used.

Install sleeves during erection of walls. Cut sleeves to length for mounting flush with both surfaces of walls. Deburr after cutting.

5. Install sleeves for floor penetrations. Extend sleeves installed in floors 2 inches above finished floor level. Install sleeves during erection of floors.

D. Sleeves for Conduits Penetrating Non-Fire-Rated Gypsum Board Assemblies: 1. Use circular metal sleeves unless penetration arrangement requires rectangular sleeved

opening. 2. Seal space outside of sleeves with approved joint compound for gypsum board assemblies.

E. Roof-Penetration Sleeves: Seal penetration of individual raceways and cables with flexible boot-type flashing units applied in coordination with roofing work.

F. Aboveground, Exterior-Wall Penetrations: Seal penetrations using steel pipe sleeves and mechanical sleeve seals. Select sleeve size to allow for 1-inchannular clear space between pipe and sleeve for installing mechanical sleeve seals.

G. Underground, Exterior-Wall and Floor Penetrations: Install cast-iron pipe sleeves. Size sleeves to allow for 1-inchannular clear space between raceway or cable and sleeve for installing sleeve-seal system.

3.2 SLEEVE-SEAL-SYSTEM INSTALLATION

A. Install sleeve-seal systems in sleeves in exterior concrete walls and slabs-on-grade at raceway entries into building.

B. Install type and number of sealing elements recommended by manufacturer for raceway or cable material and size. Position raceway or cable in center of sleeve. Assemble mechanical sleeve seals and install in annular space between raceway or cable and sleeve. Tighten bolts against pressure plates that cause sealing elements to expand and make watertight seal.

3.3 SLEEVE-SEAL-FITTING INSTALLATION

A. Install sleeve-seal fittings in new walls and slabs as they are constructed.

B. Assemble fitting components of length to be flush with both surfaces of concrete slabs and walls. Position waterstop flange to be centered in concrete slab or wall.

C. Secure nailing flanges to concrete forms.

D. Using grout, seal the space around outside of sleeve-seal fittings.



31-18-01/DHH Bathroom Renovations 26 05 53 - 1IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS March 18, 2021

SECTION 26 05 53 - IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Identification for raceways. 2. Identification of power and control cables. 3. Identification for conductors. 4. Underground-line warning tape. 5. Warning labels and signs. 6. Instruction signs. 7. Equipment identification labels. 8. Miscellaneous identification products.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each electrical identification product indicated.

B. Samples: For each type of label and sign to illustrate size, colors, lettering style, mounting provisions, and graphic features of identification products.

C. Identification Schedule: An index of nomenclature of electrical equipment and system components used in identification signs and labels.


A. Comply with ANSI A13.1 and IEEE C2.


C. Comply with 29 CFR 1910.144 and 29 CFR 1910.145.

D. Comply with ANSI Z535.4 for safety signs and labels.

E. Adhesive-attached labeling materials, including label stocks, laminating adhesives, and inks used by label printers, shall comply with UL 969.

1.5 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate identification names, abbreviations, colors, and other features with requirements in other Sections requiring identification applications, Drawings, Shop Drawings, manufacturer's wiring diagrams, and the Operation and Maintenance Manual; and with those required by codes, standards, and 29 CFR 1910.145. Use consistent designations throughout Project.

B. Coordinate installation of identifying devices with completion of covering and painting of surfaces where devices are to be applied.


C. Coordinate installation of identifying devices with location of access panels and doors.

D. Install identifying devices before installing acoustical ceilings and similar concealment.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 POWER RACEWAY IDENTIFICATION MATERIALS

A. Comply with ANSI A13.1 for minimum size of letters for legend and for minimum length of color field for each raceway size.

B. Colors for Raceways Carrying Circuits at 600 V or Less: 1. Black letters on an orange field. 2. Legend: Indicate voltage and system or service type.

C. Self-Adhesive Vinyl Labels for Raceways Carrying Circuits at 600 V or Less: Preprinted, flexible label laminated with a clear, weather- and chemical-resistant coating and matching wraparound adhesive tape for securing ends of legend label.

D. Metal Tags: Brass or aluminum, 2 by 2 by 0.05-inch with stamped legend, punched for use with self-locking cable tie fastener.

E. Write-On Tags: Polyester tag, 0.015-inchthick, with corrosion-resistant grommet and cable tie for attachment to conductor or cable. 1. Marker for Tags: Permanent, waterproof, black ink marker recommended by tag

manufacturer. 2. Marker for Tags: Machine-printed, permanent, waterproof, black ink marker recommended

by printer manufacturer.

2.2 POWER AND CONTROL CABLE IDENTIFICATION MATERIALS

A. Comply with ANSI A13.1 for minimum size of letters for legend and for minimum length of color field for each raceway and cable size.

B. Self-Adhesive Vinyl Labels: Preprinted, flexible label laminated with a clear, weather- and chemical-resistant coating and matching wraparound adhesive tape for securing ends of legend label.

2.3 CONDUCTOR IDENTIFICATION MATERIALS

A. Color-Coding Conductor Tape: Colored, self-adhesive vinyl tape not less than 3 milsthick by 1 to 2 incheswide.

B. Self-Adhesive Vinyl Labels: Preprinted, flexible label laminated with a clear, weather- and chemical-resistant coating and matching wraparound adhesive tape for securing ends of legend label.

C. Marker Tapes: Vinyl or vinyl-cloth, self-adhesive wraparound type, with circuit identification legend machine printed by thermal transfer or equivalent process.

D. Write-On Tags: Polyester tag, 0.015-inchthick, with corrosion-resistant grommet and cable tie for attachment to conductor or cable. 1. Marker for Tags: Permanent, waterproof, black ink marker recommended by tag

manufacturer.


2. Marker for Tags: Machine-printed, permanent, waterproof, black ink marker recommended by printer manufacturer.

2.4 FLOOR MARKING TAPE

A. 2-inchwide, 5-milpressure-sensitive vinyl tape, with black and white stripes and clear vinyl overlay.

2.5 UNDERGROUND-LINE WARNING TAPE

A. Tape: 1. Recommended by manufacturer for the method of installation and suitable to identify and

locate underground electrical and communications utility lines. 2. Printing on tape shall be permanent and shall not be damaged by burial operations. 3. Tape material and ink shall be chemically inert, and not subject to degrading when exposed

to acids, alkalis, and other destructive substances commonly found in soils.

B. Color and Printing: 1. Comply with ANSI Z535.1 through ANSI Z535.5. 2. Inscriptions for Red-Colored Tapes: ELECTRIC LINE, HIGH VOLTAGE. 3. Inscriptions for Orange-Colored Tapes: COMMUNICATIONS CABLE.

C. Tag: Type ID: 1. Detectable three-layer laminate, consisting of a printed pigmented polyolefin film, a solid

aluminum-foil core, and a clear protective film that allows inspection of the continuity of the conductive core, bright-colored, continuous-printed on one side with the inscription of the utility, compounded for direct-burial service.

2. Overall Thickness: 5 mils 3. Foil Core Thickness: 0.35 mil 4. Weight: 28 lb/1000 sq. ft.3-InchTensile According to ASTM D 882: 70 lbf and 4600 psi

D. Tag: Type IID: 1. Reinforced, detectable three-layer laminate, consisting of a printed pigmented woven scrim,

a solid aluminum-foil core, and a clear protective film that allows inspection of the continuity of the conductive core, bright-colored, continuous-printed on one side with the inscription of the utility, compounded for direct-burial service.

2. Overall Thickness: 8 mils 3. Foil Core Thickness: 0.35 mil 4. Weight: 34 lb/1000 sq. ft.3-InchTensile According to ASTM D 882: 300 lbf and 12,500 psi

2.6 WARNING LABELS AND SIGNS

A. Comply with NFPA 70 and 29 CFR 1910.145.

B. Self-Adhesive Warning Labels: Factory-printed, multicolor, pressure-sensitive adhesive labels, configured for display on front cover, door, or other access to equipment unless otherwise indicated.

C. Baked-Enamel Warning Signs: 1. Preprinted aluminum signs, punched or drilled for fasteners, with colors, legend, and size

required for application. 2. 1/4-inchgrommets in corners for mounting. 3. Nominal size, 7 by 10 inches

D. Metal-Backed, Butyrate Warning Signs:


1. Weather-resistant, nonfading, preprinted, cellulose-acetate butyrate signs with 0.0396-inchgalvanized-steel backing; and with colors, legend, and size required for application.

2. 1/4-inchgrommets in corners for mounting. 3. Nominal size, 10 by 14 inches

E. Warning label and sign shall include, but are not limited to, the following legends: 1. Multiple Power Source Warning: "DANGER - ELECTRICAL SHOCK HAZARD -

EQUIPMENT HAS MULTIPLE POWER SOURCES." 2. Workspace Clearance Warning: "WARNING - OSHA REGULATION - AREA IN FRONT OF

ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT MUST BE KEPT CLEAR FOR 36 INCHES"

2.7 INSTRUCTION SIGNS

A. Engraved, laminated acrylic or melamine plastic, minimum 1/16-inchthick for signs up to 20 sq. inchesand 1/8-inchthick for larger sizes. 1. Engraved legend with black letters on white face. 2. Punched or drilled for mechanical fasteners. 3. Framed with mitered acrylic molding and arranged for attachment at applicable equipment.

B. Adhesive Film Label: Machine printed, in black, by thermal transfer or equivalent process. Minimum letter height shall be 3/8-inch

C. Adhesive Film Label with Clear Protective Overlay: Machine printed, in black, by thermal transfer or equivalent process. Minimum letter height shall be 3/8-inch Overlay shall provide a weatherproof and UV-resistant seal for label.

2.8 EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION LABELS

A. Adhesive Film Label: Machine printed, in black, by thermal transfer or equivalent process. Minimum letter height shall be 3/8-inch

B. Adhesive Film Label with Clear Protective Overlay: Machine printed, in black, by thermal transfer or equivalent process. Minimum letter height shall be 3/8-inch Overlay shall provide a weatherproof and UV-resistant seal for label.

C. Self-Adhesive, Engraved, Laminated Acrylic or Melamine Label: Adhesive backed, with white letters on a dark-gray background. Minimum letter height shall be 3/8-inch

D. Engraved, Laminated Acrylic or Melamine Label: Punched or drilled for screw mounting. White letters on a dark-gray background. Minimum letter height shall be-3/8-inch

2.9 CABLE TIES

A. General-Purpose Cable Ties: Fungus inert, self extinguishing, one piece, self locking, Type 6/6 nylon. 1. Minimum Width: 3/16-inch 2. Tensile Strength at 73 degree F According to ASTM D 638: 12,000 psi 3. Temperature Range: Minus 40 to plus 185 degree F 4. Color: Black except where used for color-coding.

B. UV-Stabilized Cable Ties: Fungus inert, designed for continuous exposure to exterior sunlight, self extinguishing, one piece, self locking, Type 6/6 nylon. 1. Minimum Width: 3/16-inch 2. Tensile Strength at 73 degree F According to ASTM D 638: 12,000 psi 3. Temperature Range: Minus 40 to plus 185 degree F


4. Color: Black.

C. Plenum-Rated Cable Ties: Self extinguishing, UV stabilized, one piece, self locking. 1. Minimum Width: 3/16-inch 2. Tensile Strength at 73 degree F According to ASTM D 638: 7000 psi 3. UL 94 Flame Rating: 94V-0. 4. Temperature Range: Minus 50 to plus 284 degree F 5. Color: Black.

2.10 MISCELLANEOUS IDENTIFICATION PRODUCTS

A. Paint: Comply with requirements in Division 09 painting Sections for paint materials and application requirements. Select paint system applicable for surface material and location (exterior or interior).

B. Fasteners for Labels and Signs: Self-tapping, stainless-steel screws or stainless-steel machine screws with nuts and flat and lock washers.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Verify identity of each item before installing identification products.

B. Location: Install identification materials and devices at locations for most convenient viewing without interference with operation and maintenance of equipment.

C. Apply identification devices to surfaces that require finish after completing finish work.

D. Self-Adhesive Identification Products: Clean surfaces before application, using materials and methods recommended by manufacturer of identification device.

E. Attach signs and plastic labels that are not self-adhesive type with mechanical fasteners appropriate to the location and substrate.

F. System Identification Color-Coding Bands for Raceways and Cables: Each color-coding band shall completely encircle cable or conduit. Place adjacent bands of two-color markings in contact, side by side. Locate bands at changes in direction, at penetrations of walls and floors, at 50-footmaximum intervals in straight runs, and at 25-footmaximum intervals in congested areas.

G. Aluminum Wraparound Marker Labels and Metal Tags: Secure tight to surface of conductor or cable at a location with high visibility and accessibility.

H. Cable Ties: For attaching tags. Use general-purpose type, except as listed below: 1. Outdoors: UV-stabilized nylon. 2. In Spaces Handling Environmental Air: Plenum rated.

I. Underground-Line Warning Tape: During backfilling of trenches install continuous underground-line warning tape directly above line at 6 to 8 inchesbelow finished grade. Use multiple tapes where width of multiple lines installed in a common trench or concrete envelope exceeds 16 inchesoverall.


J. Painted Identification: Comply with requirements in Division 09 painting Sections for surface preparation and paint application.

3.2 IDENTIFICATION SCHEDULE

A. Concealed Raceways, Duct Banks, More Than 600 V, within Buildings: Tape and stencil 4-inchwide black stripes on 10-inchcenters over orange background that extends full length of raceway or duct and is 12 incheswide. Stencil legend "DANGER CONCEALED HIGH VOLTAGE WIRING" with 3-inchhigh black letters on 20-inchcenters. Stop stripes at legends. Apply to the following finished surfaces: 1. Floor surface directly above conduits running beneath and within 12 inchesof a floor that is

in contact with earth or is framed above unexcavated space. 2. Wall surfaces directly external to raceways concealed within wall. 3. Accessible surfaces of concrete envelope around raceways in vertical shafts, exposed in

the building, or concealed above suspended ceilings.

B. Accessible Raceways, Armored and Metal-Clad Cables, More Than 600 V: Self-adhesive vinyl labels. Install labels at 30-footmaximum intervals.

C. Accessible Raceways and Metal-Clad Cables, 600 V or Less, for Service, Feeder, and Branch Circuits More Than 30 A, and 120 V to ground: Identify with self-adhesive vinyl label. Install labels at 30-footmaximum intervals.

D. Accessible Raceways and Cables within Buildings: Identify the covers of each junction and pull box of the following systems with self-adhesive vinyl labels with the wiring system legend and system voltage. System legends shall be as follows: 1. Emergency Power. 2. Power. 3. UPS.

E. Power-Circuit Conductor Identification, 600 V or Less: For conductors in vaults, pull and junction boxes, manholes, and hand holes, use color-coding conductor tape to identify the phase. 1. Color-Coding for Phase and Voltage Level Identification, 600 V or Less: Use colors listed

below for ungrounded feeder and branch-circuit conductors. a. Color shall be factory applied or field applied for sizes larger than No. 8 AWG, if

authorities having jurisdiction permit. b. Colors for 208/120-V Circuits:

1) Phase A: Black. 2) Phase B: Red. 3) Phase C: Blue.

c. Field-Applied, Color-Coding Conductor Tape: Apply in half-lapped turns for a minimum distance of 6 inchesfrom terminal points and in boxes where splices or taps are made. Apply last two turns of tape with no tension to prevent possible unwinding. Locate bands to avoid obscuring factory cable markings.

F. Install instructional sign including the color-code for grounded and ungrounded conductors using adhesive-film-type labels.

G. Conductors to Be Extended in the Future: Attach write-on tags or marker tape to conductors and list source.

H. Auxiliary Electrical Systems Conductor Identification: Identify field-installed alarm, control, and signal connections. 1. Identify conductors, cables, and terminals in enclosures and at junctions, terminals, and pull

points. Identify by system and circuit designation.


2. Use system of marker tape designations that is uniform and consistent with system used by manufacturer for factory-installed connections.

3. Coordinate identification with Project Drawings, manufacturer's wiring diagrams, and the Operation and Maintenance Manual.

I. Locations of Underground Lines: Identify with underground-line warning tape for power, lighting, communication, and control wiring and optical fiber cable. 1. Install underground-line warning tape for both direct-buried cables and cables in raceway.

J. Workspace Indication: Install floor marking tape to show working clearances in the direction of access to live parts. Workspace shall be as required by NFPA 70 and 29 CFR 1926.403 unless otherwise indicated. Do not install at flush-mounted panelboards and similar equipment in finished spaces.

K. Warning Labels for Indoor Cabinets, Boxes, and Enclosures for Power and Lighting: Self-adhesive warning labels. 1. Comply with 29 CFR 1910.145. 2. Identify system voltage with black letters on an orange background. 3. Apply to exterior of door, cover, or other access. 4. For equipment with multiple power or control sources, apply to door or cover of equipment

including, but not limited to, the following: a. Power transfer switches. b. Controls with external control power connections.

L. Operating Instruction Signs: Install instruction signs to facilitate proper operation and maintenance of electrical systems and items to which they connect. Install instruction signs with approved legend where instructions are needed for system or equipment operation.

M. Equipment Identification Labels: On each unit of equipment, install unique designation label that is consistent with wiring diagrams, schedules, and the Operation and Maintenance Manual. Apply labels to disconnect switches and protection equipment, central or master units, control panels, control stations, terminal cabinets, and racks of each system. Systems include power, lighting, control, communication, signal, monitoring, and alarm systems unless equipment is provided with its own identification. 1. Labeling Instructions:

a. Indoor Equipment: Engraved, laminated acrylic or melamine label. Unless otherwise indicated, provide a single line of text with 1/2-inchhigh letters on 1-1/2-inchhigh label; where two lines of text are required, use labels 2 inches high.

b. Outdoor Equipment: Engraved, laminated acrylic or melamine label. c. Elevated Components: Increase sizes of labels and letters to those appropriate for

viewing from the floor. d. Unless provided with self-adhesive means of attachment, fasten labels with appropriate

mechanical fasteners that do not change the NEMA or NRTL rating of the enclosure. 2. Equipment to Be Labeled:

a. Panelboards: Typewritten directory of circuits in the location provided by panelboard manufacturer. Panelboard identification shall be engraved, laminated acrylic or melamine label.

b. Enclosures and electrical cabinets. c. Access doors and panels for concealed electrical items. d. Switchgear. e. Switchboards. f. Transformers: Label that includes tag designation shown on Drawings for the

transformer, feeder, and panelboards or equipment supplied by the secondary. g. Substations. h. Emergency system boxes and enclosures. i. Motor-control centers.


j. Enclosed switches. k. Enclosed circuit breakers. l. Enclosed controllers. m. Variable-speed controllers. n. Push-button stations. o. Power transfer equipment. p. Contactors. q. Power-generating units. r. Monitoring and control equipment.


31-18-01/DHH Bathroom Renovations 26 09 23 - 1 LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES March 18, 2021

SECTION 26 09 23 - LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Time switches. 2. Photoelectric switches. 3. Indoor occupancy sensors. 4. Dimmer Switches 5. Lighting contactors.

B. Related Requirements:

1. Section 26 27 26 "Wiring Devices" for manual light switches.



B. Shop Drawings: Show installation details for occupancy and light-level sensors.

1. Interconnection diagrams showing field-installed wiring. 2. Include diagrams for power, signal, and control wiring.




A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For each type of lighting control device to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 TIME SWITCHES

A. As scheduled on drawing or approved equal.


B. Electronic Time Switches: Solid state, programmable, with alphanumeric display; complying with UL 917.

1. Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

2. Contact Configuration: SPST. 3. Contact Rating: 30-A inductive or resistive, 240-V ac. 4. Programs: Two on-off set points on a 24-hour schedule, allowing different set points for

each day of the week and an annual holiday schedule that overrides the weekly operation on holidays.

5. Programs: 4 channels; each channel is individually programmable with two on-off set points on a 24-hour schedule with a skip-a-day weekly schedule.

6. Circuitry: Allow connection of a photoelectric relay as substitute for on-off function of a program on selected channels.

7. Astronomic Time: All channels. 8. Automatic daylight savings time changeover. 9. Battery Backup: Not less than seven days reserve, to maintain schedules and time clock.

2.2 OUTDOOR PHOTOELECTRIC SWITCHES

A. Description: Solid state, with SPST dry contacts rated for 1800 VA, to operate connected load, complying with UL 773.


2. Light-Level Monitoring Range: 1.5 to 10 fc, with an adjustment for turn-on and turn-off levels within that range.

3. Time Delay: Thirty-second minimum, to prevent false operation. 4. Lightning Arrester: Air-gap type. 5. Mounting: Twist lock complying with NEMA C136.10, with base.

2.3 INDOOR OCCUPANCY SENSORS

A. General Requirements for Sensors: Wall- or ceiling-mounted, solid-state indoor occupancy sensors with a separate power pack when identified on plans.

B. LINE VOLTAGE


2. Operation: Unless otherwise indicated, turn lights on when coverage area is occupied, and turn them off when unoccupied; with a time delay for turning lights off, adjustable over a minimum range of 1 to 15 minutes.

3. Sensor Output: Contacts rated for 1200-VA at 120v, and 2700-VA at 277v, Sensor is line powered. a. A second contact for separate timed control of fans.

4. Mounting:

a. Sensor: Suitable for mounting in any position on a standard outlet box. b. Relay: Externally mounted through a 1/2-inch knockout in a standard electrical

enclosure. c. Time-Delay and Sensitivity Adjustments: Recessed and concealed behind hinged

door.


5. Indicator: Digital display, to show when motion is detected during testing and normal operation of sensor.

6. Bypass Switch: Override the "on" function in case of sensor failure. 7. Automatic Light-Level Sensor: Adjustable from 2 to 200 fc; turn lights off when selected

lighting level is present.

C. Dual-Technology Type: Ceiling mounted; detect occupants in coverage area using PIR and ultrasonic detection methods. The particular technology or combination of technologies that control on-off functions is selectable in the field by operating controls on unit.

1. Sensitivity Adjustment: Separate for each sensing technology. 2. Detector Sensitivity: Detect occurrences of 6-inch-minimum movement of any portion of a

human body that presents a target of not less than 36 sq. in., and detect a person of average size and weight moving not less than 12 inches in either a horizontal or a vertical manner at an approximate speed of 12 inches/s.

3. Detection Coverage (Standard Room): Detect occupancy anywhere within a circular area of 1000 sq. ft. when mounted on a 96-inch-high ceiling.

D. LOW VOLTAGE 1. Low voltage sensors shall be compatible with light system network and be an

addressable device residing on lighting control network as indicated on plans. 2. Sensitivity Adjustment: Separate for each sensing technology. 3. Detector Sensitivity: Detect occurrences of 6-inch-minimum movement of any portion of a

human body that presents a target of not less than 36 sq. in., and detect a person of average size and weight moving not less than 12 inches in either a horizontal or a vertical manner at an approximate speed of 12 inches/s.

4. Detection Coverage (Standard Room): Detect occupancy anywhere within a circular area of 1000 sq. ft. when mounted on a 96-inch-high ceiling.

2.4 SWITCHBOX-MOUNTED OCCUPANCY SENSORS

A. General Requirements for Sensors: Automatic-wall-switch occupancy sensor, suitable for mounting in a single gang switchbox.


2. Operating Ambient Conditions: Dry interior conditions, 32 to 120 deg F. 3. Switch Rating: Not less than 1200-VA at 120 V, 2700-VA, at 277 V.

a. Separate contact for timed control of fans.

2.5 DIMMER SWITCHES

A. Description: Wall box mounted lighting controller compatible with LED light fixtures.

1. Toggle and/or raise lower switches as indicated on plans. 2. Connected to light fixtures by CAT 5E communication cable with RJ45 connectors. 3. Line voltage phase forward control when indicated on plans. 4. Provide switch with specific functionality as indicated on drawings.


2.6 LIGHTING CONTACTORS

A. Description: Electrically operated and electrically held, combination-type lighting contactors with fusible switch, complying with NEMA ICS 2 and UL 508.

1. Current Rating for Switching: Listing or rating consistent with type of load served, including tungsten filament, inductive, and high-inrush ballast (ballast with 15 percent or less total harmonic distortion of normal load current).

2. Fault Current Withstand Rating: Equal to or exceeding the available fault current at the point of installation.

3. Enclosure: Comply with NEMA 250. 4. Provide with control and pilot devices as scheduled, matching the NEMA type specified

for the enclosure.

2.7 CONDUCTORS AND CABLES

A. Power Wiring to Supply Side of Remote-Control Power Sources: Not smaller than No. 12 AWG. Comply with requirements in Section 26 05 19 "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables."

B. Classes 2 and 3 Control Cable: Multiconductor cable with stranded-copper conductors not smaller than No. 18 AWG. Comply with requirements in Section 26 05 19 "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables."

C. Class 1 Control Cable: Multiconductor cable with stranded-copper conductors not smaller. 14 AWG. Comply with requirements in Section 26 05 19 "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables."

D. Low Voltage network systems to use CAT-5E or as required by manufacturer.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 SENSOR INSTALLATION

A. Coordinate layout and installation of ceiling-mounted devices with other construction that penetrates ceilings or is supported by them, including light fixtures, HVAC equipment, smoke detectors, fire-suppression systems, and partition assemblies.

B. Install and aim sensors in locations to achieve not less than 90 percent coverage of areas indicated. Do not exceed coverage limits specified in manufacturer's written instructions.

3.2 CONTACTOR INSTALLATION

A. Mount electrically held lighting contactors with elastomeric isolator pads to eliminate structure-borne vibration, unless contactors are installed in an enclosure with factory-installed vibration isolators.


3.3 WIRING INSTALLATION

A. Wiring Method: Comply with Section 26 05 19 "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables." Minimum conduit size is 1/2 inch.

B. Wiring within Enclosures: Comply with NECA 1. Separate power-limited and nonpower-limited conductors according to conductor manufacturer's written instructions.

C. Size conductors according to lighting control device manufacturer's written instructions unless otherwise indicated.

D. Splices, Taps, and Terminations: Make connections only on numbered terminal strips in junction, pull, and outlet boxes; terminal cabinets; and equipment enclosures.

3.4 FUNCTIONALITY

A. Functionality of each space shall be provided by the Architect as part of the submittal review.

3.5 IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify components and power and control wiring according to Section 26 05 53 "Identification for Electrical Systems."

1. Identify controlled circuits in lighting contactors. 2. Identify circuits or luminaires controlled by photoelectric and occupancy sensors at each

sensor.

B. Label time switches and contactors with a unique designation.


A. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to evaluate lighting control devices and perform tests and inspections.

B. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to test and inspect components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections.

C. Perform the following tests and inspections:

1. Operational Test: After installing time switches and sensors, and after electrical circuitry has been energized, start units to confirm proper unit operation.

2. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment.

D. Lighting control devices will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections.

E. Prepare test and inspection reports.


3.7 ADJUSTING

A. Occupancy Adjustments: When requested within 12 months from date of Substantial Completion, provide on-site assistance in adjusting sensors to suit actual occupied conditions. Provide up to two visits to Project during other-than-normal occupancy hours for this purpose.

1. For occupancy and motion sensors, verify operation at outer limits of detector range. Set time delay to suit Owner's operations.

2. For daylighting controls, adjust set points and deadband controls to suit Owner's operations.

3. Align high-bay occupancy sensors using manufacturer's laser aiming tool.

3.8 DEMONSTRATION

A. Coordinate demonstration of products specified in this Section with demonstration requirements for lighting. 1. Demonstrate all lighting controls to Architect at a mutually agreed upon time prior to

training of owner’s personnel.

B. Train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain lighting control devices.


31-18-01/DHH Bathroom Renovations 26 27 26 - 1 WIRING DEVICES March 18, 2021

SECTION 26 27 26 - WIRING DEVICES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Receptacles, receptacles with integral GFCI, and associated device plates. 2. Weather-resistant receptacles. 3. Snap switches and wall-box dimmers. 4. Solid-state fan speed controls. 5. Wall-switch and exterior occupancy sensors. 6. Communications outlets.

1.2 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS

A. Coordination: 1. Receptacles for Owner-Furnished Equipment: Match plug configurations.



B. Shop Drawings: List of legends and description of materials and process used for premarking wall plates.





PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Manufacturers' Names: Shortened versions (shown in parentheses) of the following manufacturers' names are used in other Part 2 articles: 1. Cooper Wiring Devices; Division of Cooper Industries, Inc. (Cooper). 2. Hubbell Incorporated; Wiring Device-Kellems (Hubbell). 3. Leviton Mfg. Company Inc. (Leviton). 4. Pass & Seymour/Legrand (Pass & Seymour).

B. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of wiring device and associated wall plate from single source from single manufacturer.

2.2 GENERAL WIRING-DEVICE REQUIREMENTS

A. Wiring Devices, Components, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

http://www.specagent.com/LookUp/?ulid=2848&mf=04&src=wd







C. Devices that are manufactured for use with modular plug-in connectors may be substituted under the following conditions: 1. Connectors shall comply with UL 2459 and shall be made with stranding building wire. 2. Devices shall comply with the requirements in this Section.

2.3 STRAIGHT-BLADE RECEPTACLES

A. Convenience Receptacles, 125 V, 20 A: Comply with NEMA WD 1, NEMA WD 6 Configuration 5-20R, UL 498, and FS W-C-596. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:

a. Cooper; 5351 (single), CR5362 (duplex). b. Hubbell; HBL5351 (single), HBL5352 (duplex). c. Leviton; 5891 (single), 5352 (duplex). d. Pass & Seymour; 5361 (single), 5362 (duplex).

2.4 GFCI RECEPTACLES

A. General Description: 1. Straight blade, feed-through type. 2. Comply with NEMA WD 1, NEMA WD 6, UL 498, UL 943 Class A, and FS W-C-596. 3. Include indicator light that shows when the GFCI has malfunctioned and no longer provides

proper GFCI protection.

B. Duplex GFCI Convenience Receptacles, 125 V, 20 A: 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:

a. Cooper; VGF20. b. Hubbell; GFR5352L. c. Pass & Seymour; 2095. d. Leviton; 7590.

2.5 TOGGLE SWITCHES

A. Comply with NEMA WD 1, UL 20, and FS W-S-896.

B. Switches, 120/277 V, 20 A: 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:

1) Single Pole: 2) Cooper; AH1221. 3) Hubbell; HBL1221. 4) Leviton; 1221-2. 5) Pass & Seymour; CSB20AC1. 6) Two Pole:

7) Cooper; AH1222. 8) Hubbell; HBL1222. 9) Leviton; 1222-2. 10) Pass & Seymour; CSB20AC2. 11) Three Way:

12) Cooper; AH1223. 13) Hubbell; HBL1223. 14) Leviton; 1223-2. 15) Pass & Seymour; CSB20AC3.






























16) Four Way:

17) Cooper; AH1224. 18) Hubbell; HBL1224. 19) Leviton; 1224-2. 20) Pass & Seymour; CSB20AC4.

C. Pilot-Light Switches, 20 A: 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:

a. Cooper; AH1221PL for 120 and 277 V. b. Hubbell; HBL1201PL for 120 and 277 V. c. Leviton; 1221-LH1. d. Pass & Seymour; PS20AC1RPL for 120 V, PS20AC1RPL7 for 277 V.

2. Description: Single pole, with neon-lighted handle, illuminated when switch is "off."

2.6 OCCUPANCY SENSORS

A. See Specification 26 09 23 - Lighting Control Devices

2.7 WALL PLATES

A. Single and combination types shall match corresponding wiring devices. 1. Plate-Securing Screws: Metal with head color to match plate finish. 2. Material for Finished Spaces: 0.05-inch-hick, anodized aluminum. 3. Material for Unfinished Spaces: Galvanized steel. 4. Material for Damp Locations: Cast aluminum with spring-loaded lift cover, and listed and

labeled for use in wet and damp locations.

B. Wet-Location, Weatherproof Cover Plates: NEMA 250, complying with Type 3R, weather-resistant, die-cast aluminum with lockable cover.

2.8 FINISHES

A. Device Color: 1. Wiring Devices Connected to Normal Power System: As selected by Architect unless

otherwise indicated or required by NFPA 70 or device listing. 2. TVSS Devices: Blue.

B. Wall Plate Color: For plastic covers, match device color.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Comply with NECA 1, including mounting heights listed in that standard, unless otherwise indicated.

B. Coordination with Other Trades: 1. Protect installed devices and their boxes. Do not place wall finish materials over device

boxes and do not cut holes for boxes with routers that are guided by riding against outside of boxes.

2. Keep outlet boxes free of plaster, drywall joint compound, mortar, cement, concrete, dust, paint, and other material that may contaminate the raceway system, conductors, and cables.













3. Install device boxes in brick or block walls so that the cover plate does not cross a joint unless the joint is troweled flush with the face of the wall.

4. Install wiring devices after all wall preparation, including painting, is complete.

C. Conductors: 1. Do not strip insulation from conductors until right before they are spliced or terminated on

devices. 2. Strip insulation evenly around the conductor using tools designed for the purpose. Avoid

scoring or nicking of solid wire or cutting strands from stranded wire. 3. The length of free conductors at outlets for devices shall meet provisions of NFPA 70,

Article 300, without pigtails. 4. Existing Conductors:

a. Cut back and pigtail, or replace all damaged conductors. b. Straighten conductors that remain and remove corrosion and foreign matter. c. Pigtailing existing conductors is permitted, provided the outlet box is large enough.

D. Device Installation: 1. Replace devices that have been in temporary use during construction and that were

installed before building finishing operations were complete. 2. Keep each wiring device in its package or otherwise protected until it is time to connect

conductors. 3. Do not remove surface protection, such as plastic film and smudge covers, until the last

possible moment. 4. Connect devices to branch circuits using pigtails that are not less than 6 inchesin length. 5. When there is a choice, use side wiring with binding-head screw terminals. Wrap solid

conductor tightly clockwise, two-thirds to three-fourths of the way around terminal screw. 6. Use a torque screwdriver when a torque is recommended or required by manufacturer. 7. When conductors larger than No. 12 AWG are installed on 15- or 20-A circuits, splice

No. 12 AWG pigtails for device connections. 8. Tighten unused terminal screws on the device. 9. When mounting into metal boxes, remove the fiber or plastic washers used to hold device-

mounting screws in yokes, allowing metal-to-metal contact.

E. Receptacle Orientation: 1. Install ground pin of vertically mounted receptacles down, and on horizontally mounted

receptacles to the right.

F. Device Plates: Do not use oversized or extra-deep plates. Repair wall finishes and remount outlet boxes when standard device plates do not fit flush or do not cover rough wall opening.

G. Dimmers: 1. Install dimmers within terms of their listing. 2. Verify that dimmers used for fan speed control are listed for that application. 3. Install unshared neutral conductors on line and load side of dimmers according to

manufacturers' device listing conditions in the written instructions.

H. Arrangement of Devices: Unless otherwise indicated, mount flush, with long dimension vertical and with grounding terminal of receptacles on top. Group adjacent switches under single, multigang wall plates.

I. Adjust locations of service poles to suit arrangement of partitions and furnishings.


3.2 GFCI RECEPTACLES

A. Install non-feed-through-type GFCI receptacles where protection of downstream receptacles is not required.


A. Perform the following tests and inspections: 1. Test Instruments: Use instruments that comply with UL 1436. 2. Test Instrument for Convenience Receptacles: Digital wiring analyzer with digital readout or

illuminated digital-display indicators of measurement.

B. Tests for Convenience Receptacles: 1. Line Voltage: Acceptable range is 105 to 132 V. 2. Percent Voltage Drop under 15-A Load: A value of 6 percent or higher is unacceptable. 3. Ground Impedance: Values of up to 2 ohms are acceptable. 4. GFCI Trip: Test for tripping values specified in UL 1436 and UL 943. 5. Using the test plug, verify that the device and its outlet box are securely mounted. 6. Tests shall be diagnostic, indicating damaged conductors, high resistance at the circuit

breaker, poor connections, inadequate fault current path, defective devices, or similar problems. Correct circuit conditions, remove malfunctioning units and replace with new ones, and retest as specified above.

C. Wiring device will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.

D. Prepare test and inspection reports.


31-18-01/DHH Bathroom Renovations 26 28 13 - 1 FUSES March 18, 2021

SECTION 26 28 13 - FUSES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Cartridge fuses rated 600 V ac and less for use in the following:

a. Control circuits. b. Motor-control centers. c. Panelboards. d. Switchboards. e. Enclosed controllers. f. Enclosed switches.





PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS


1. Bussmann, an Eaton business. 2. Mersen USA.

2.2 CARTRIDGE FUSES

A. Characteristics: NEMA FU 1, current-limiting, nonrenewable cartridge fuses with voltage ratings consistent with circuit voltages.

1. Type RK-1: 600-V, zero- to 600-A rating, 200 kAIC, time delay. 2. Type RK-5: 600-V, zero- to 600-A rating, 200 kAIC, time delay.

B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

C. Comply with NEMA FU 1 for cartridge fuses.




31-18-01/DHH Bathroom Renovations 26 28 13 - 2 FUSES March 18, 2021

D. Comply with NFPA 70.

E. Coordinate fuse ratings with utilization equipment nameplate limitations of maximum fuse size and with system short-circuit current levels.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install fuses in fusible devices. Arrange fuses so rating information is readable without removing fuse.

B. Install spare-fuse cabinet(s) in location shown on the Drawings or as indicated in the field by Owner.

3.2 IDENTIFICATION

A. Install labels complying with requirements for identification specified in Section 26 05 53 "Identification for Electrical Systems" and indicating fuse replacement information inside of door of each fused switch and adjacent to each fuse block, socket, and holder.


31-18-01/DHH Bathroom Renovations 26 28 16 - 1 ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND March 18, 2021 CIRCUIT BREAKERS

SECTION 26 28 16 - ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Fusible switches. 2. Nonfusible switches. 3. Receptacle switches. 4. Shunt trip switches. 5. Molded-case circuit breakers (MCCBs). 6. Enclosures.

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. NC: Normally closed.

B. NO: Normally open.

C. SPDT: Single pole, double throw.


A. Product Data: For each type of enclosed switch, circuit breaker, accessory, and component indicated.

B. Shop Drawings: For enclosed switches and circuit breakers. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work. 1. Wiring Diagrams: For power, signal, and control wiring.


A. Seismic Qualification Certificates: For enclosed switches and circuit breakers, accessories, and components, from manufacturer.






1. Fuses: Equal to 10 percent of quantity installed for each size and type, but no fewer than three of each size and type.

2. Fuse Pullers: Two for each size and type.





PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 FUSIBLE SWITCHES

A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated on Drawings or comparable product by one of the following: 1. Square D; a brand of Schneider Electric. 2. Cutler Hammer. 3. General Electric.

B. Type HD, Heavy Duty, Single Throw, 460-V ac, 800 A and Smaller: UL 98 and NEMA KS 1, horsepower rated, with cartridge fuse interiors to accommodate specified fuses, lockable handle with capability to accept two padlocks, and interlocked with cover in closed position.

C. Accessories: 1. Equipment Ground Kit: Internally mounted and labeled for copper and aluminum ground

conductors. 2. Neutral Kit: Internally mounted; insulated, capable of being grounded and bonded; labeled

for copper and aluminum neutral conductors. 3. Class R Fuse Kit: Provides rejection of other fuse types when Class R fuses are specified. 4. Lugs: Suitable for number, size, and conductor material. 5. Electrical interlock kit, 1 N.O. contact.

2.2 NONFUSIBLE SWITCHES


B. Type HD, Heavy Duty, Single Throw, 600 A and Smaller: UL 98 and NEMA KS 1, horsepower rated, lockable handle with capability to accept two padlocks, and interlocked with cover in closed position.

C. Accessories: 1. Equipment Ground Kit: Internally mounted and labeled for copper and aluminum ground

conductors. 2. Neutral Kit: Internally mounted; insulated, capable of being grounded and bonded; labeled

for copper and aluminum neutral conductors. 3. Lugs: Suitable for number, size, and conductor material. 4. Electrical Interlock kit, 1 N.O. contact.






2.3 MOLDED-CASE CIRCUIT BREAKERS


B. General Requirements: Comply with UL 489, NEMA AB 1, and NEMA AB 3, with interrupting capacity to comply with available fault currents.

C. Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers: Inverse time-current element for low-level overloads and instantaneous magnetic trip element for short circuits. Adjustable magnetic trip setting for circuit-breaker frame sizes 250 A and larger.

D. Features and Accessories: 1. Standard frame sizes, trip ratings, and number of poles. 2. Lugs: Suitable for number, size, trip ratings, and conductor material. 3. Application Listing: Appropriate for application; Type SWD for switching fluorescent lighting

loads; Type HID for feeding fluorescent and high-intensity discharge lighting circuits.

2.4 ENCLOSURES

A. Enclosed Switches and Circuit Breakers: NEMA AB 1, NEMA KS 1, NEMA 250, and UL 50, to comply with environmental conditions at installed location. 1. Indoor, Dry and Clean Locations: NEMA 250, Type 1. 2. Indoor, Damp or Wet locations (any below grade): NEMA 250, Type 4 3. Outdoor Locations: NEMA 250, Type 4.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install individual wall-mounted switches and circuit breakers with tops at uniform height unless otherwise indicated.

B. Temporary Lifting Provisions: Remove temporary lifting eyes, channels, and brackets and temporary blocking of moving parts from enclosures and components.

C. Install fuses in fusible devices.

D. Comply with NECA 1.

3.2 IDENTIFICATION

A. Comply with requirements in Section 26 05 53 "Identification for Electrical Systems." 1. Identify field-installed conductors, interconnecting wiring, and components; provide warning

signs. 2. Label each enclosure with engraved metal or laminated-plastic nameplate.


A. Perform tests and inspections.




B. Acceptance Testing Preparation: 1. Test insulation resistance for each enclosed switch and circuit breaker, component,

connecting supply, feeder, and control circuit. 2. Test continuity of each circuit.

C. Tests and Inspections: 1. Perform each visual and mechanical inspection and electrical test stated in NETA

Acceptance Testing Specification. Certify compliance with test parameters. 2. Correct malfunctioning units on-site, where possible, and retest to demonstrate compliance;

otherwise, replace with new units and retest.

D. Enclosed switches and circuit breakers will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections.

E. Prepare test and inspection reports, including a certified report that identifies enclosed switches and circuit breakers and that describes scanning results. Include notation of deficiencies detected, remedial action taken, and observations after remedial action.


31-18-01/DHH Bathroom Renovations 26 29 13 - 1 ENCLOSED CONTROLLERS March 18, 2021

SECTION 26 29 13 - ENCLOSED CONTROLLERS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes the following enclosed controllers rated 600 V and less: 1. Full-voltage manual. 2. Full-voltage magnetic.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. CPT: Control power transformer.

B. MCCB: Molded-case circuit breaker.

C. MCP: Motor circuit protector.

D. N.C.: Normally closed.

E. N.O.: Normally open.

F. OCPD: Overcurrent protective device.

G. SCR: Silicon-controlled rectifier.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of enclosed controller. Include manufacturer's technical data on features, performance, electrical characteristics, ratings, and enclosure types and finishes.

B. Shop Drawings: For each enclosed controller. Include dimensioned plans, elevations, sections, details, and required clearances and service spaces around controller enclosures. 1. Show tabulations of the following:

a. Each installed unit's type and details. b. Factory-installed devices. c. Nameplate legends. d. Short-circuit current rating of integrated unit. e. Listed and labeled for integrated short-circuit current (withstand) rating of OCPDs

in combination controllers by an NRTL acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. f. Features, characteristics, ratings, and factory settings of individual OCPDs in

combination controllers. 2. Wiring Diagrams: For power, signal, and control wiring.

C. Qualification Data: For qualified testing agency.

D. Field quality-control reports.


E. Operation and Maintenance Data: For enclosed controllers to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. In addition to items specified in Division 01 Section "Operation and Maintenance Data," include the following: 1. Routine maintenance requirements for enclosed controllers and installed components. 2. Manufacturer's written instructions for testing and adjusting circuit breaker and MCP trip

settings. 3. Manufacturer's written instructions for setting field-adjustable overload relays. 4. Manufacturer's written instructions for testing, adjusting, and reprogramming reduced-

voltage solid-state controllers.

F. Load-Current and Overload-Relay Heater List: Compile after motors have been installed, and arrange to demonstrate that selection of heaters suits actual motor nameplate full-load currents.

G. Load-Current and List of Settings of Adjustable Overload Relays: Compile after motors have been installed, and arrange to demonstrate that switch settings for motor running overload protection suit actual motors to be protected.


A. Testing Agency Qualifications: Member company of NETA or an NRTL. 1. Testing Agency's Field Supervisor: Currently certified by NETA to supervise on-site

testing.

B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

C. Comply with NFPA 70.

1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Store enclosed controllers indoors in clean, dry space with uniform temperature to prevent condensation. Protect enclosed controllers from exposure to dirt, fumes, water, corrosive substances, and physical damage.

B. If stored in areas subject to weather, cover enclosed controllers to protect them from weather, dirt, dust, corrosive substances, and physical damage. Remove loose packing and flammable materials from inside controllers; connect factory-installed space heaters to temporary electrical service.


A. Environmental Limitations: Rate equipment for continuous operation under the following conditions unless otherwise indicated: 1. Ambient Temperature: Not less than minus 22 degrees F and not exceeding 104

degrees F 2. Altitude: Not exceeding 6600 feet

B. Interruption of Existing Electrical Systems: Do not interrupt electrical systems in facilities occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide temporary electrical service according to requirements indicated: 1. Notify Owner no fewer than two days in advance of proposed interruption of electrical

systems. 2. Indicate method of providing temporary utilities. 3. Do not proceed with interruption of electrical systems without Owner's written permission. 4. Comply with NFPA 70E.


1.8 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate layout and installation of enclosed controllers with other construction including conduit, piping, equipment, and adjacent surfaces. Maintain required workspace clearances and required clearances for equipment access doors and panels.

B. Coordinate sizes and locations of concrete bases with actual equipment provided. Cast anchor-bolt inserts into bases. Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified in Division 03.

C. Coordinate installation of roof curbs, equipment supports, and roof penetrations.

1.9 EXTRA MATERIALS

A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. Fuses for Fused Switches: Equal to 10 percent of quantity installed for each size and

type, but no fewer than three of each size and type. 2. Control Power Fuses: Equal to 10 percent of quantity installed for each size and type, but

no fewer than two of each size and type. 3. Indicating Lights: Two of each type and color installed. 4. Auxiliary Contacts: Furnish one spare(s) for each size and type of magnetic controller

installed. 5. Power Contacts: Furnish three spares for each size and type of magnetic contactor

installed.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 FULL-VOLTAGE CONTROLLERS

A. General Requirements for Full-Voltage Controllers: Comply with NEMA ICS 2, general purpose, Class A.

B. Motor-Starting Switches: "Quick-make, quick-break" toggle or push-button action; marked to show whether unit is off or on. 1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product

indicated on Drawings or comparable product by one of the following: a. Eaton Electrical Inc.; Cutler-Hammer Business Unit. b. General Electric Company; GE Consumer & Industrial - Electrical Distribution. c. Rockwell Automation, Inc.; Allen-Bradley brand. d. Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc. e. Square D; a brand of Schneider Electric.

2. Configuration: Nonreversing or reversing as required for application. 3. Surface mounting. 4. Red pilot light.

C. Fractional Horsepower Manual Controllers: "Quick-make, quick-break" toggle or push-button action; marked to show whether unit is off, on, or tripped. 1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product

indicated on Drawings or comparable product by one of the following: a. Eaton Electrical Inc.; Cutler-Hammer Business Unit. b. General Electric Company; GE Consumer & Industrial - Electrical Distribution. c. Rockwell Automation, Inc.; Allen-Bradley brand. d. Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc.


e. Square D; a brand of Schneider Electric. 2. Configuration: Nonreversing or reversing as required for application. 3. Overload Relays: Inverse-time-current characteristics; NEMA ICS 2, Class 10 tripping

characteristics; heaters matched to nameplate full-load current of actual protected motor; external reset push button; bimetallic type or; melting alloy type.

4. Surface mounting. 5. Red pilot light.

D. Integral Horsepower Manual Controllers: "Quick-make, quick-break" toggle or push-button action; marked to show whether unit is off, on, or tripped. 1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product

indicated on Drawings or comparable product by one of the following: a. Eaton Electrical Inc.; Cutler-Hammer Business Unit. b. General Electric Company; GE Consumer & Industrial - Electrical Distribution. c. Rockwell Automation, Inc.; Allen-Bradley brand. d. Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc. e. Square D; a brand of Schneider Electric.

2. Configuration: Nonreversing or reversing as required for application. 3. Overload Relays: Inverse-time-current characteristics; NEMA ICS 2, Class 10 tripping

characteristics; heaters and sensors in each phase, matched to nameplate full-load current of actual protected motor and having appropriate adjustment for duty cycle; external reset push button; bimetallic type or melting alloy type.

4. Surface mounting. 5. Red pilot light. 6. (1) N.O. and (1) N.C. auxiliary contact.

E. Magnetic Controllers: Full voltage, across the line, electrically held. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers

offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Eaton Electrical Inc.; Cutler-Hammer Business Unit. b. General Electric Company; GE Consumer & Industrial - Electrical Distribution. c. Rockwell Automation, Inc.; Allen-Bradley brand. d. Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc. e. Square D; a brand of Schneider Electric.

2. Configuration: Nonreversing or reversing as required for application. 3. Contactor Coils: Pressure-encapsulated type with coil transient suppressors.

a. Operating Voltage: Depending on contactor NEMA size and line-voltage rating, manufacturer's standard matching control power or line voltage.

4. Power Contacts: Totally enclosed, double-break, silver-cadmium oxide; assembled to allow inspection and replacement without disturbing line or load wiring.

5. Control Circuits: 24 or 120 V ac; obtained from integral CPT, with primary and secondary fuses, with CPT of sufficient capacity to operate integral devices and remotely located pilot, indicating, and control devices. a. CPT Spare Capacity: 50 VA.

6. Solid-State Overload Relay: a. Switch or dial selectable for motor running overload protection. b. Sensors in each phase. c. Class 10 tripping characteristic selected to protect motor against voltage and

current unbalance and single phasing. d. Class II ground-fault protection, with start and run delays to prevent nuisance trip

on starting. e. Analog communication module.

7. N.O., isolated overload alarm contact. 8. Provide Hand – Off – Auto switch on controller. 9. External overload reset push button.


F. Combination Magnetic Controller: Factory-assembled combination of magnetic controller, OCPD, and disconnecting means. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers

offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Eaton Electrical Inc.; Cutler-Hammer Business Unit. b. General Electric Company; GE Consumer & Industrial - Electrical Distribution. c. Rockwell Automation, Inc.; Allen-Bradley brand. d. Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc. e. Square D; a brand of Schneider Electric.

2. Fusible Disconnecting Means: a. NEMA KS 1, heavy-duty, horsepower-rated, fusible switch with clips or bolt pads to

accommodate Class J or Class R fuses. b. Lockable Handle: Accepts three padlocks and interlocks with cover in closed

position. c. Auxiliary Contacts: N.O./N.C., arranged to activate before switch blades open. d. Provide Hand – Off – Auto selector switch on controller.

3. MCCB Disconnecting Means: a. UL 489, NEMA AB 1, and NEMA AB 3, with interrupting capacity to comply with

available fault currents; thermal-magnetic MCCB, with inverse time-current element for low-level overloads and instantaneous magnetic trip element for short circuits.

b. Front-mounted, adjustable magnetic trip setting for circuit-breaker frame sizes 250 A and larger.

c. Lockable Handle: Accepts three padlocks and interlocks with cover in closed position.

d. Auxiliary contacts "a" and "b" arranged to activate with MCCB handle. e. Provide Hand – Off – Auto selector switch on controller. f. N.O. alarm contact that operates only when MCCB has tripped.

2.2 ENCLOSURES

A. Enclosed Controllers: NEMA ICS 6, to comply with environmental conditions at installed location. 1. Dry and Clean Indoor Locations: Type 1. 2. Outdoor Locations: Type 3R or Type 4X. 3. Other Wet or Damp Indoor Locations: Type 4. 4. Indoor Locations Subject to Dust, Falling Dirt, and Dripping Noncorrosive Liquids

(Mechanical Rooms): Type 12.

2.3 ACCESSORIES

A. General Requirements for Control Circuit and Pilot Devices: NEMA ICS 5; factory installed in controller enclosure cover unless otherwise indicated. 1. Selector Switch, Hand-Off-Auto..

B. Reversible N.C./N.O. auxiliary contact(s).

C. Control Relays: Auxiliary and adjustable solid-state time-delay relays.

D. Phase-Failure, Phase-Reversal, and Undervoltage and Overvoltage Relays: Solid-state sensing circuit with isolated output contacts for hard-wired connections. Provide adjustable undervoltage, overvoltage, and time-delay settings. (Only required for Motors 50 HP or greater).


E. Breather and drain assemblies, to maintain interior pressure and release condensation in Type 4, Type 4X, Type 7, or Type 9 enclosures installed outdoors or in unconditioned interior spaces subject to humidity and temperature swings.

F. Space heaters, with N.C. auxiliary contacts, to mitigate condensation in Type 3R, Type 4X, or Type 12 enclosures installed outdoors or in unconditioned interior spaces subject to humidity and temperature swings.

G. Sun shields installed on fronts, sides, and tops of enclosures installed outdoors and subject to direct and extended sun exposure.

H. Cover gaskets for Type 1 enclosures.

I. Spare control wiring terminal blocks, quantity as indicated; wired.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas and surfaces to receive enclosed controllers, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

B. Examine enclosed controllers before installation. Reject enclosed controllers that are wet, moisture damaged, or mold damaged.

C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 SCHEDULE

A. Provide combination magnetic controllers for all applications.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. Wall-Mounted Controllers: Install enclosed controllers on walls with tops at uniform height unless otherwise indicated, and by bolting units to wall or mounting on lightweight structural-steel channels bolted to wall. For controllers not at walls, provide freestanding racks complying with Division 26 Section "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems."

B. Temporary Lifting Provisions: Remove temporary lifting eyes, channels, and brackets and temporary blocking of moving parts from enclosures and components.

C. Install fuses in each fusible-switch enclosed controller.

D. Install fuses in control circuits if not factory installed. Comply with requirements in Division 26 Section "Fuses."

E. Install heaters in thermal overload relays. Select heaters based on actual nameplate full-load amperes after motors have been installed.

F. Install, connect, and fuse thermal-protector monitoring relays furnished with motor-driven equipment.

G. Comply with NECA 1.


3.4 IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify enclosed controllers, components, and control wiring. Comply with requirements for identification specified in Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems." 1. Identify field-installed conductors, interconnecting wiring, and components; provide

warning signs. 2. Label each enclosure with engraved nameplate. 3. Label each enclosure-mounted control and pilot device.

3.5 CONTROL WIRING INSTALLATION

A. Install wiring between enclosed controllers and remote devices and facility's central control system. Comply with requirements in Division 26 Section "Control-Voltage Electrical Power Cables."

B. Bundle, train, and support wiring in enclosures.

C. Connect selector switches and other automatic-control selection devices where applicable. 1. Connect selector switches to bypass only those manual- and automatic-control devices

that have no safety functions when switch is in manual-control position. 2. Connect selector switches with enclosed-controller circuit in both manual and automatic

positions for safety-type control devices such as low- and high-pressure cutouts, high-temperature cutouts, and motor overload protectors.


A. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections.

B. Acceptance Testing Preparation: 1. Test insulation resistance for each enclosed controller, component, connecting supply,

feeder, and control circuit. 2. Test continuity of each circuit.

C. Tests and Inspections: 1. Inspect controllers, wiring, components, connections, and equipment installation. Test

and adjust controllers, components, and equipment. 2. Test continuity of each circuit. 3. Verify that voltages at controller locations are within plus or minus 10 percent of motor

nameplate rated voltages. If outside this range for any motor, notify Owner before starting the motor(s).

4. Test each motor for proper phase rotation. 5. Perform each electrical test and visual and mechanical inspection stated in

NETA Acceptance Testing Specification. Certify compliance with test parameters. 6. Correct malfunctioning units on-site, where possible, and retest to demonstrate

compliance; otherwise, replace with new units and retest. 7. Test and adjust controls, remote monitoring, and safeties. Replace damaged and

malfunctioning controls and equipment.

D. Enclosed controllers will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections.

3.7 ADJUSTING

A. Set field-adjustable switches, auxiliary relays, time-delay relays, timers, and overload-relay pickup and trip ranges.


B. Adjust the trip settings of MCPs and thermal-magnetic circuit breakers with adjustable instantaneous trip elements. Initially adjust to six times the motor nameplate full-load ampere ratings and attempt to start motors several times, allowing for motor cool down between starts. If tripping occurs on motor inrush, adjust settings in increments until motors start without tripping. Do not exceed eight times the motor full-load amperes (or 11 times for NEMA Premium Efficient motors if required). Where these maximum settings do not allow starting of a motor, notify Owner before increasing settings.

3.8 PROTECTION

A. Temporary Heating: Apply temporary heat to maintain temperature according to manufacturer's written instructions until enclosed controllers are ready to be energized and placed into service.

B. Replace controllers whose interiors have been exposed to water or other liquids prior to Substantial Completion.

3.9 DEMONSTRATION

A. Train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain enclosed controllers, and to use and reprogram microprocessor-based, reduced-voltage solid-state controllers.


31-18-01/DHH Bathroom Renovations 26 51 19 - 1 LED INTERIOR LIGHTING March 18, 2021

SECTION 26 51 19 - LED INTERIOR LIGHTING

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Interior solid-state luminaires that use LED technology. 2. Lighting fixture supports.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. CCT: Correlated color temperature.

B. CRI: Color Rendering Index.

C. Fixture: See "Luminaire."

D. IP: International Protection or Ingress Protection Rating.

E. LED: Light-emitting diode.

F. Lumen: Measured output of lamp and luminaire, or both.

G. Luminaire: Complete lighting unit, including lamp, reflector, and housing.



1. Arrange in order of luminaire designation. 2. Include data on features, accessories, and finishes. 3. Include physical description and dimensions of luminaires. 4. Include emergency lighting units, including batteries and chargers. 5. Include life, output (lumens, CCT, and CRI), and energy efficiency data. 6. Photometric data and adjustment factors based on laboratory tests.

a. Manufacturers' Certified Data: Photometric data certified by manufacturer's laboratory with a current accreditation under the National Voluntary Laboratory Accreditation Program for Energy Efficient Lighting Products.

b. Testing Agency Certified Data: For indicated luminaires, photometric data certified by a qualified independent testing agency. Photometric data for remaining luminaires shall be certified by manufacturer.

B. Shop Drawings: For nonstandard or custom luminaires.

1. Include plans, elevations, sections, and mounting and attachment details. 2. Include details of luminaire assemblies. Indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required

clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field connection.


3. Include diagrams for power, signal, and control wiring.

C. Product Schedule: For luminaires and lamps. Use same designations indicated on Drawings.


A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For luminaires and lighting systems to include in operation and maintenance manuals.

1. Provide a list of all lamp types used on Project; use ANSI and manufacturers' codes.



1. Lamps: Ten for every 100 of each type and rating installed. Furnish at least one of each type.

2. Diffusers and Lenses: One for every 100 of each type and rating installed. Furnish at least one of each type.

3. Globes and Guards: One for every 20 of each type and rating installed. Furnish at least one of each type.


A. Provide luminaires from a single manufacturer for each luminaire type.


A. Protect finishes of exposed surfaces by applying a strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping.

1.9 WARRANTY

A. Warranty: Manufacturer and Installer agree to repair or replace components of luminaires that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.

B. Warranty Period: Five year(s) from date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 LUMINAIRE REQUIREMENTS


B. NRTL Compliance: Luminaires for hazardous locations shall be listed and labeled for indicated class and division of hazard by an NRTL.

C. FM Global Compliance: Luminaires for hazardous locations shall be listed and labeled for indicated class and division of hazard by FM Global.

D. Recessed Fixtures: Comply with NEMA LE 4.


E. CRI of minimum 80. CCT as indicated by model number on plans.

F. Rated lamp life of 80,000 hours.

G. Internal driver.

H. Nominal Operating Voltage: 120 V ac.

1. Lens Thickness: At least 0.125 inch minimum unless otherwise indicated.

I. Housings:

1. Extruded-aluminum housing and heat sink.

2.2 METAL FINISHES

A. Variations in finishes are unacceptable in the same piece. Variations in finishes of adjoining components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and if they can be and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast.

2.3 LUMINAIRE FIXTURE SUPPORT COMPONENTS

A. Comply with requirements in Section 26 05 29 "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems" for channel and angle iron supports and nonmetallic channel and angle supports.

B. Single-Stem Hangers: 1/2-inch steel tubing with swivel ball fittings and ceiling canopy. Finish same as luminaire.

C. Wires: ASTM A 641/A 641 M, Class 3, soft temper, zinc-coated steel, 12 gage.

D. Rod Hangers: 3/16-inch minimum diameter, cadmium-plated, threaded steel rod.

E. Hook Hangers: Integrated assembly matched to luminaire, line voltage, and equipment with threaded attachment, cord, and locking-type plug.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

B. Examine roughing-in for luminaire to verify actual locations of luminaire and electrical connections before fixture installation. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 TEMPORARY LIGHTING

A. If approved by the Architect, use selected permanent luminaires for temporary lighting. When construction is sufficiently complete, clean luminaires used for temporary lighting and install new lamps.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. Comply with NECA 1.


B. Install luminaires level, plumb, and square with ceilings and walls unless otherwise indicated.

C. Supports:

1. Sized and rated for luminaire weight. 2. Able to maintain luminaire position after cleaning and relamping. 3. Provide support for luminaire without causing deflection of ceiling or wall. 4. Luminaire mounting devices shall be capable of supporting a horizontal force of 100 percent

of luminaire weight and vertical force of 400 percent of luminaire weight.

D. Flush-Mounted Luminaire Support:

1. Secured to outlet box. 2. Attached to ceiling structural members at four points equally spaced around circumference

of luminaire. 3. Trim ring flush with finished surface.

E. Wall-Mounted Luminaire Support:

1. Attached to structural members in walls. 2. Do not attach luminaires directly to gypsum board.

F. Ceiling-Mounted Luminaire Support:

1. Ceiling mount with two 5/32-inch-diameter aircraft cable supports. 2. Ceiling mount with hook mount.

G. Suspended Luminaire Support:

1. Pendants and Rods: Where longer than 48 inches, brace to limit swinging. 2. Stem-Mounted, Single-Unit Luminaires: Suspend with twin-stem hangers. Support with

approved outlet box and accessories that hold stem and provide damping of luminaire oscillations. Support outlet box vertically to building structure using approved devices.

3. Continuous Rows of Luminaires: Use tubing or stem for wiring at one point and wire support for suspension for each unit length of luminaire chassis, including one at each end.

4. Do not use ceiling grid as support for pendant luminaires. Connect support wires or rods to building structure.

H. Ceiling-Grid-Mounted Luminaires:

1. Secure to any required outlet box. 2. Secure luminaire to the luminaire opening using approved fasteners in a minimum of four

locations, spaced near corners of luminaire. 3. Use approved devices and support components to connect luminaire to ceiling grid and

building structure in a minimum of four locations, spaced near corners of luminaire.

I. Comply with requirements in Section 26 05 19 "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables" for wiring connections.

3.4 IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify system components, wiring, cabling, and terminals. Comply with requirements for identification specified in Section 26 05 53 "Identification for Electrical Systems."




1. Operational Test: After installing luminaires, switches, and accessories, and after electrical circuitry has been energized, test units to confirm proper operation.

2. Test for Emergency Lighting: Interrupt power supply to demonstrate proper operation. Verify transfer from normal power to battery power and retransfer to normal.

B. Luminaire will be considered defective if it does not pass operation tests and inspections.



31-18-01/DHH Bathroom Renovations 31 10 00 - 1 SITE CLEARING March 18, 2021

SECTION 31 10 00 - SITE CLEARING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Protecting existing vegetation to remain. 2. Stripping and stockpiling topsoil. 3. Removing above- and below-grade site improvements. 4. Temporary erosion and sedimentation control.

1.2 MATERIAL OWNERSHIP

A. Except for materials indicated to be stockpiled or otherwise remain Owner's property, cleared materials shall become Contractor's property and shall be removed from Project site.


A. Traffic: Minimize interference with adjoining roads, streets, walks, and other adjacent occupied or used facilities during site-clearing operations.

1. Do not close or obstruct streets, walks, or other adjacent occupied or used facilities without permission from Owner and authorities having jurisdiction.

2. Provide alternate routes around closed or obstructed trafficways if required by Owner or authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Salvageable Improvements: Carefully remove items indicated to be salvaged and store on Owner's premises where indicated. Damaged items to be salvaged shall be repaired or replaced at the Contractor’s expense.

C. Utility Locator Service: Contractor shall employ a private utility location company to locate underground utilities prior to excavation. Contractor shall also notify utility locator service for area where Project is located before site clearing.

D. Do not commence site clearing operations until temporary erosion- and sedimentation-control measures are in place.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. Satisfactory Soil Material: Requirements for satisfactory soil material are specified in Section 31 20 00 "Earth Moving."

1. Obtain approved borrow soil material off-site when satisfactory soil material is not available on-site.


PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Protect and maintain benchmarks and survey control points from disturbance during construction. Disturbed benchmarks and control points shall be reset at the Contractors expense.

B. Locate and clearly identify building/structures, signs, trees, shrubs, and other vegetation to remain or be relocated.

C. Protect existing site improvements to remain from damage during construction.

1. Restore damaged improvements to their original condition, as acceptable to Owner.

3.2 TEMPORARY EROSION AND SEDIMENTATION CONTROL

A. Comply with the requirements of the soil erosion and sedimentation control permit and Part 91 of the Natural Resources and Environmental Protection Act 1994 PA 451, as Amended.

B. Provide temporary erosion- and sedimentation-control measures to prevent soil erosion and discharge of soil-bearing water runoff or airborne dust to adjacent properties and walkways, according to erosion- and sedimentation-control Drawings and requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.

C. Verify that flows of water redirected from construction areas or generated by construction activity do not enter or cross protection zones.

D. Inspect, maintain, and repair erosion- and sedimentation-control measures during construction until permanent vegetation has been established.

E. Remove erosion and sedimentation controls, and restore and stabilize areas disturbed during removal.

F. Refer to project drawings for additional requirements.

3.3 TREE AND PLANT PROTECTION

A. General: Protect trees and plants remaining on-site according to project drawings and requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Repair or replace trees, shrubs, and other vegetation indicated to remain or be relocated that are damaged by construction operations, in a manner approved by Owner

3.4 EXISTING UTILITIES

A. Interrupting Existing Utilities: Do not interrupt utilities serving facilities occupied by Owner or others, unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide temporary utility services according to requirements indicated:

1. Notify Engineer not less than two days in advance of proposed utility interruptions.


2. Do not proceed with utility interruptions without Owner's written permission.

3.5 TOPSOIL STRIPPING

A. Remove sod and grass before stripping topsoil.

B. Strip topsoil in a manner to prevent intermingling with underlying subsoil or other waste materials. Provide additional topsoil from off-site source as required.

C. Stockpile topsoil away from edge of excavations without intermixing with subsoil or other materials. Grade and shape stockpiles to drain surface water. Cover and place silt fence at base to prevent windblown dust and erosion by water.

3.6 SITE IMPROVEMENTS

A. Remove existing above- and below-grade improvements as indicated and necessary to facilitate new construction.

3.7 PERMITS

A. Contractor shall be responsible for securing all necessary permits for completing the earth moving activities. A copy of each permit shall be supplied to the Engineer. 1. Houghton County Soil Erosion and Sedimentation Control Permit

3.8 DISPOSAL OF SURPLUS AND WASTE MATERIALS

A. Remove surplus soil material, unsuitable topsoil, obstructions, demolished materials, and waste materials including trash and debris, and legally dispose of them off Owner's property.


31-18-01/DHH Bathroom Renovations 31 20 00 - 1 EARTH MOVING March 18, 2021

SECTION 31 20 00 - EARTH MOVING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Excavating and filling for rough grading the Site. 2. Preparing subgrades for turf and grasses. 3. Excavating and backfilling for buildings and structures. 4. Excavating and backfilling trenches for utilities and pits for buried utility structures.

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. Backfill: Soil material used to fill an excavation.

1. Initial Backfill: Backfill placed beside and over pipe in a trench, including haunches to support sides of pipe.

2. Final Backfill: Backfill placed over initial backfill to fill a trench.

B. Base Course: Aggregate layer placed between the subbase course and hot-mix asphalt paving.

C. Bedding Course: Aggregate layer placed over the excavated subgrade in a trench before laying pipe.

D. Borrow Soil: Satisfactory soil imported from off-site for use as fill or backfill.

E. Drainage Course: Aggregate layer supporting the slab-on-grade that also minimizes upward capillary flow of pore water.

F. Excavation: Removal of material encountered above subgrade elevations and to lines and dimensions indicated.

1. Authorized Additional Excavation: Excavation below subgrade elevations or beyond indicated lines and dimensions as directed by Architect. Authorized additional excavation and replacement material will be paid for according to Contract provisions for changes in the Work.

2. Unauthorized Excavation: Excavation below subgrade elevations or beyond indicated lines and dimensions without direction by Architect. Unauthorized excavation, as well as remedial work directed by Architect, shall be without additional compensation.

G. Fill: Soil materials used to raise existing grades.

H. Structures: Buildings, footings, foundations, retaining walls, slabs, tanks, curbs, mechanical and electrical appurtenances, or other man-made stationary features constructed above or below the ground surface.

I. Subbase Course: Aggregate layer placed between the subgrade and base course for hot-mix asphalt pavement, or aggregate layer placed between the subgrade and a cement concrete pavement or a cement concrete or hot-mix asphalt walk.


J. Subgrade: Uppermost surface of an excavation or the top surface of a fill or backfill immediately below subbase, drainage fill, drainage course, or topsoil materials.

K. Utilities: On-site underground pipes, conduits, ducts, and cables as well as underground services within buildings.


A. Material test reports.


A. Utility Locator Service: Contractor shall employ a private utility location company to locate underground utilities prior to excavation. Contractor shall also notify utility locator service for area where Project is located before beginning earth moving operations.

B. Do not commence earth-moving operations until temporary soil erosion and sedimentation control measures specified in Section 31 10 00 “Site Clearing” are in place.

C. Traffic: Minimize interference with adjoining roads, streets, walks, and other adjacent occupied or used facilities during earth-moving operations. 1. Do not close or obstruct streets, walks, or other adjacent occupied or used facilities without

permission from Owner and authorities having jurisdiction. 2. Provide alternate routes around closed or obstructed traffic or pedestrian ways if required

by Owner or authorities having jurisdiction.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SOIL MATERIALS

A. General: Provide borrow soil materials when sufficient satisfactory soil materials are not available from excavations.

B. Satisfactory Soils: Soil Classification Groups GW, GP, GM, SW, SP, and SM according to ASTM D 2487, or a combination of these groups; free of rock or gravel larger than 3 inches in any dimension, debris, waste, frozen materials, vegetation, and other deleterious matter.

1. Maximum percentage passing No. 200 sieve: 12%

C. Unsatisfactory Soils: Soil Classification Groups GC, SC, CL, ML, OL, CH, MH, OH, and PT according to ASTM D 2487, or a combination of these groups.

1. Unsatisfactory soils also include satisfactory soils not maintained within 2 percent of optimum moisture content at time of compaction.

D. Subbase Material: Naturally or artificially graded mixture of natural or crushed gravel, crushed stone, and natural or crushed sand; ASTM D2940/D2940M; with at least 90 percent passing a 1-1/2-inch sieve and not more than 12 percent passing a No. 200 sieve.


E. Base Course: Naturally or artificially graded mixture of natural or crushed gravel, crushed stone, and natural or crushed sand; ASTM D2940/D2940M; with at least 95 percent passing a 1-1/2-inch sieve and not more than 8 percent passing a No. 200 sieve.

F. Engineered Fill: Naturally or artificially graded mixture of natural or crushed gravel, crushed stone, and natural or crushed sand; ASTM D2940/D2940M; with at least 90 percent passing a 1-1/2-inch sieve and not more than 12 percent passing a No. 200 sieve.

G. Bedding Course: Naturally or artificially graded mixture of natural or crushed gravel, crushed stone, and natural or crushed sand; ASTM D2940/D2940M; except with 100 percent passing a 1-inch sieve and not more than 8 percent passing a No. 200 sieve.

H. Drainage Course: Narrowly graded mixture of crushed stone, or crushed or uncrushed gravel; ASTM D448; coarse-aggregate grading Size 57; with 100 percent passing a 1-1/2-inch sieve and zero to 5 percent passing a No. 8 sieve.

2.2 ACCESSORIES

A. Warning Tape: Acid- and alkali-resistant, polyethylene film warning tape manufactured for marking and identifying underground utilities, 6 inches wide and 4 mils thick, continuously inscribed with a description of the utility; colored to comply with local practice or requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Detectable Warning Tape: Acid- and alkali-resistant, polyethylene film warning tape manufactured for marking and identifying underground utilities, a minimum of 6 inches wide and 4 mils thick, continuously inscribed with a description of the utility, with metallic core encased in a protective jacket for corrosion protection, detectable by metal detector when tape is buried up to 30 inches deep; colored to comply with local practice or requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Protect structures, utilities, sidewalks, pavements, and other facilities from damage caused by settlement, lateral movement, undermining, washout, and other hazards created by earth-moving operations.

B. Protect and maintain erosion and sedimentation controls during earth-moving operations.

C. Protect subgrades and foundation soils from freezing temperatures and frost. Remove temporary protection before placing subsequent materials.

3.2 EXCAVATION, GENERAL

A. Unclassified Excavation: Excavate to subgrade elevations regardless of the character of surface and subsurface conditions encountered. Unclassified excavated materials may include rock, soil materials, and obstructions. No changes in the Contract Sum or the Contract Time will be authorized for rock excavation or removal of obstructions.


1. If excavated materials intended for fill and backfill include unsatisfactory soil materials and rock, replace with satisfactory soil materials.

3.3 EXCAVATION FOR STRUCTURES

A. Excavate to indicated elevations and dimensions within a tolerance of plus or minus 1 inch. If applicable, extend excavations a sufficient distance from structures for placing and removing concrete formwork, for installing services and other construction, and for inspections.

1. Excavations for Footings and Foundations: Do not disturb bottom of excavation. Excavate by hand to final grade just before placing concrete reinforcement. Trim bottoms to required lines and grades to leave solid base to receive other work.

3.4 SUBGRADE INSPECTION

A. Reconstruct subgrades damaged by freezing temperatures, frost, rain, accumulated water, or construction activities, as directed by Architect, without additional compensation.

3.5 UNAUTHORIZED EXCAVATION

A. Fill unauthorized excavation under foundations or wall footings by extending bottom elevation of concrete foundation or footing to excavation bottom, without altering top elevation. Lean concrete fill, with 28-day compressive strength of 2500 psi, may be used when approved by Architect.

1. Fill unauthorized excavations under other construction, pipe, or conduit as directed by Architect.

3.6 STORAGE OF SOIL MATERIALS

A. Stockpile borrow soil materials and excavated satisfactory soil materials without intermixing. Place, grade, and shape stockpiles to drain surface water. Cover to prevent windblown dust.

1. Stockpile soil materials away from edge of excavations. Do not store within drip line of remaining trees.

3.7 UTILITY TRENCH BACKFILL

A. Place backfill on subgrades free of mud, frost, snow, or ice.

B. Place and compact bedding course on trench bottoms and where indicated. Shape bedding course to provide continuous support for bells, joints, and barrels of pipes and for joints, fittings, and bodies of conduits.

C. Initial Backfill: Place and compact initial backfill of subbase material, free of particles larger than 1 inch in any dimension, to a height of 12 inches over the pipe or conduit.

1. Carefully compact initial backfill under pipe haunches and compact evenly up on both sides and along the full length of piping or conduit to avoid damage or displacement of piping or conduit. Coordinate backfilling with utilities testing.


D. Final Backfill: Place and compact final backfill of satisfactory soil to final subgrade elevation.

E. Warning Tape: Install warning tape directly above utilities, 12 inches below finished grade, except 6 inches below subgrade under pavements and slabs.

3.8 SOIL FILL

A. Plow, scarify, bench, or break up sloped surfaces steeper than 1 vertical to 4 horizontal so fill material will bond with existing material.

B. Place and compact fill material in layers to required elevations as follows:

1. Under grass and planted areas, use satisfactory soil material. 2. Under building slabs, use engineered fill. 3. Under and around footings and foundations, use engineered fill.

3.9 SOIL MOISTURE CONTROL

A. Uniformly moisten or aerate subgrade and each subsequent fill or backfill soil layer before compaction to within 2 percent of optimum moisture content.

1. Do not place backfill or fill soil material on surfaces that are muddy, frozen, or contain frost or ice.

2. Remove and replace, or scarify and air dry, otherwise satisfactory soil material that exceeds optimum moisture content by 2 percent and is too wet to compact to specified dry unit weight.

3.10 COMPACTION OF SOIL BACKFILLS AND FILLS

A. Place backfill and fill soil materials in layers not more than 8 inches in loose depth for material compacted by heavy compaction equipment and not more than 4 inches in loose depth for material compacted by hand-operated tampers.

B. Place backfill and fill soil materials evenly on all sides of structures to required elevations and uniformly along the full length of each structure.

C. Compact soil materials to not less than the following percentages of maximum dry unit weight according to ASTM D 1557:

1. Under turf or unpaved areas, scarify and recompact top 6 inches below subgrade and compact each layer of backfill or fill soil material at 85 percent.

D. For utility trenches, compact each layer of initial and final backfill soil material at 85 percent outside of a 1:1 influence of pavement, building slabs and walkways. Compact each layer of initial and final backfill soil material at 95 percent within a 1:1 influence of pavement, building slabs and walkways

3.11 GRADING

A. General: Uniformly grade areas to a smooth surface, free of irregular surface changes. Comply with compaction requirements and grade to cross sections, lines, and elevations indicated.


B. Site Rough Grading: Slope grades to direct water away from buildings and to prevent ponding. Finish subgrades to elevations required to achieve indicated finish elevations, within the following subgrade tolerances:

C. Turf or Unpaved Areas: Plus or minus 1 inch.


A. Special Inspections: Owner may engage a qualified special inspector to perform inspections:

B. Testing Agency: Owner may engage a qualified geotechnical engineering testing agency to perform tests and inspections.

C. Allow testing agency to inspect and test subgrades and each fill or backfill layer. Proceed with subsequent earth moving only after test results for previously completed work comply with requirements.

D. When testing agency reports that subgrades, fills, or backfills have not achieved degree of compaction specified, scarify and moisten or aerate, or remove and replace soil materials to depth required; recompact and retest until specified compaction is obtained.

3.13 PROTECTION

A. Protecting Graded Areas: Protect newly graded areas from traffic, freezing, and erosion. Keep free of trash and debris.

B. Repair and reestablish grades to specified tolerances where completed or partially completed surfaces become eroded, rutted, settled, or where they lose compaction due to subsequent construction operations or weather conditions.

C. Where settling occurs before Project correction period elapses, remove finished surfacing, backfill with additional soil material, compact, and reconstruct surfacing.

1. Restore appearance, quality, and condition of finished surfacing to match adjacent work, and eliminate evidence of restoration to greatest extent possible.

3.14 DISPOSAL OF SURPLUS AND WASTE MATERIALS

A. Remove surplus satisfactory soil and waste materials, including unsatisfactory soil, trash, and debris, and legally dispose of them off Owner's property.


31-18-01/DHH Bathroom Renovations 32 92 00 - 1 TURF AND GRASSES March 18, 2021

SECTION 32 92 00 - TURF AND GRASSES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Seeding. 2. Sodding 3. Topsoil. 4. Fertilizer. 5. Mulch Blanket


1. Section 31 10 00 "Site Clearing" for stripping and stockpiling of materials. 2. Section 31 20 00 "Earth Moving" for excavation, filling and backfilling, and rough grading.




A. Seed and Other Packaged Materials: Deliver packaged materials in original, unopened containers showing weight, certified analysis, name and address of manufacturer, and indication of compliance with state and Federal laws, as applicable.

B. Sod: Harvest, deliver, store, and handle sod according to requirements in "Specifications for Turfgrass Sod Materials" and "Specifications for Turfgrass Sod Transplanting and Installation" sections in TPI's "Guideline Specifications to Turfgrass Sodding." Deliver sod within 24 hours of harvesting and in time for planting promptly. Protect sod from breakage and drying.


A. Planting Restrictions: Plant seed between May 1 and September 20. Coordinate planting periods with initial maintenance periods to provide required maintenance from date of planting completion.

B. Weather Limitations: Proceed with planting only when existing and forecasted weather conditions permit planting to be performed when beneficial and optimum results may be obtained. Apply products during favorable weather conditions according to manufacturer's written instructions.

1.5 MAINTENANCE SERVICE

A. Initial Turf Maintenance Service: Provide full maintenance by skilled employees of landscape Installer. Maintain as required in Part 3. Begin maintenance immediately after each area is planted and continue until acceptable turf is established but for not less than the following periods:


1. Seeded Turf: 60 days from date of planting completion.

a. When initial maintenance period has not elapsed before end of planting season, or if turf is not fully established, continue maintenance during next planting season.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 TOPSOIL

A. Cultivated top layer of soil profile or manufactured soil that meets the definition of topsoil.

1. All topsoil material shall be passed through a 1 inch screen prior to placement. 2. Topsoil samples may be taken from stockpiles by the Engineer for submission to a

testing laboratory. Topsoil that does not meet the required specifications shall be removed from the project site by the Contractor and shall be replaced with suitable topsoil that meets the testing requirements.

3. ASTM D 5268 topsoil. Verify suitability of soil to produce viable planting soil. Clean soil of roots, plants, sod, stones, clods, clay lumps, pockets of coarse sand, concrete slurry, concrete layers or chunks, cement, plaster, building debris, and other extraneous materials harmful to plant growth.

2.2 SEED

A. Grass Seed: Fresh, clean, dry, new-crop seed complying with AOSA's "Journal of Seed Technology; Rules for Testing Seeds" for purity and germination tolerances.

B. Seed Species: State-certified seed of grass species as follows:

1. MDOT Type THM Mix (20% Perennial Rye, 30% Kentucky Blue, 50% Red Fescue).

2.3 SOD

A. Certified Number 1 Quality/Premium, including limitations on thatch, weeds, diseases, nematodes, and insects, complying with "Specifications for Turfgrass Sod Materials" in TPI's "Guideline Specifications to Turfgrass Sodding." Furnish viable sod of uniform density, color, and texture that is strongly rooted and capable of vigorous growth and development when planted.

B. Turfgrass Species: Sod of grass species as follows, with not less than 85 percent germination, not less than 95 percent pure seed, and not more than 0.5 percent weed seed:

1. Full Sun: Kentucky bluegrass (Poa pratensis), a minimum of three cultivars. 2. Sun and Partial Shade: Proportioned by weight as follows:

a. 50 percent Kentucky bluegrass (Poa pratensis). b. 30 percent chewings red fescue (Festuca rubra variety). c. 10 percent perennial ryegrass (Lolium perenne). d. 10 percent redtop (Agrostis alba).

3. Shade: Proportioned by weight as follows: a. 50 percent chewings red fescue (Festuca rubra variety). b. 35 percent rough bluegrass (Poa trivialis). c. 15 percent redtop (Agrostis alba).


2.4 FERTILIZERS

A. Slow-Release Fertilizer: Granular or pelleted fertilizer consisting of 50 percent water-insoluble nitrogen, phosphorus, and potassium

1. MDOT Class A fertilizer. 228 pounds per acre.

2.5 MULCHES

A. Straw Mulch: Provide air-dry, clean, mildew- and seed-free, salt hay or threshed straw of wheat, rye, oats, or barley.

B. Mulch Blankets (slopes less than 1:2 or areas indicated on plans): Mulch blankets shall be one of the following or an approved equal:

1. S1 Erosion Control Blanket – BonTerra America 2. Contech ERO-MAT – Contech Construction Products 3. Erosion Control Blankets DS-75 – North American Green

C. High Velocity Mulch Blankets (slopes of 1:2 or steeper or areas indicated on plans): High velocity mulch blankets shall be one of the following or an approved equal:

1. S2 Erosion Control Blanket – Bon Terra America 2. Contech High Velocity ERO-MAT – Contech Construction Products 3. ECS High Impact Excelsior Blanket – Erosion Control Systems, Inc. 4. ECS High Velocity Straw Mat – Erosion Control Systems, Inc. 5. Erosion Control Blanket DS-150 – North American Green

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 TURF AREA PREPARATION

A. Newly Graded Subgrades: Loosen subgrade to a minimum depth of 4 inches. Remove stones larger than 1 inch in any dimension and sticks, roots, rubbish, and other extraneous matter and legally dispose of them off Owner's property.

1. Apply fertilizer directly to subgrade before loosening. 2. Thoroughly blend planting soil off-site before spreading or spread topsoil, apply soil

amendments and fertilizer on surface, and thoroughly blend planting soil. 3. Spread planting soil to a depth of 3 inches but not less than required to meet finish

grades after light rolling and natural settlement. Do not spread if planting soil or subgrade is frozen, muddy, or excessively wet.

B. Unchanged Subgrades: If turf is to be planted in areas unaltered or undisturbed by excavating, grading, or surface-soil stripping operations, prepare surface soil as follows:

1. Remove existing grass, vegetation, and turf. Do not mix into surface soil. 2. Loosen surface soil to a depth of at least 6 inches. Apply soil amendments and fertilizers

according to planting soil mix proportions and mix thoroughly into top 3 inches of soil. Till soil to a homogeneous mixture of fine texture.

a. Apply fertilizer directly to surface soil before loosening.


3. Remove stones larger than 1 inch in any dimension and sticks, roots, trash, and other extraneous matter.

4. Legally dispose of waste material, including grass, vegetation, and turf, off Owner's property.

C. Finish Grading: Grade planting areas to a smooth, uniform surface plane with loose, uniformly fine texture. Grade to within plus or minus 1/2 inch of finish elevation. Roll and rake, remove ridges, and fill depressions to meet finish grades. Limit finish grading to areas that can be planted in the immediate future.

D. Moisten prepared area before planting if soil is dry. Water thoroughly and allow surface to dry before planting. Do not create muddy soil.

E. Before planting, obtain Engineer's acceptance of finish grading; restore planting areas if eroded or otherwise disturbed after finish grading.

3.2 SEEDING

A. Do not broadcast when wind velocity exceeds 5 mph. Evenly distribute seed by sowing equal quantities in two directions at right angles to each other. Do not seed against existing trees. Limit extent of seed to outside edge of planting saucer.

B. Sow seed at a total rate of 3 to 4 lb/1000 sq. ft.

C. Rake seed lightly into top 1/8 inch of soil, roll lightly, and water with fine spray.

D. Protect seeded areas: 1. Slopes not exceeding 1:6 by spread straw mulch. Spread uniformly at a minimum rate of

2 tons/acre to form a continuous blanket 1-1/2 inches in loose thickness over seeded areas. Spread by hand, blower, or other suitable equipment.

2. Slopes less than 1:2 by place mulch blanket. 3. Slopes greater than or equal to 1:2 by place high velocity mulch blanket. 4. Anchor straw mulch or mulch blanket by crimping into soil with suitable mechanical

equipment.

E. Protect seeded areas from hot, dry weather or drying winds by applying planting soil within 24 hours after completing seeding operations. Soak areas, scatter mulch uniformly to a thickness of 3/16 inch, and roll surface smooth.

3.3 SODDING

A. Lay sod within 24 hours of harvesting unless a suitable preservation method is accepted by Engineer prior to delivery time. Do not lay sod if dormant or if ground is frozen or muddy.

B. Lay sod to form a solid mass with tightly fitted joints. Butt ends and sides of sod; do not stretch or overlap. Stagger sod strips or pads to offset joints in adjacent courses. Avoid damage to soil or sod during installation. Tamp and roll lightly to ensure contact with soil, eliminate air pockets, and form a smooth surface. Work sifted soil or fine sand into minor cracks between pieces of sod; remove excess to avoid smothering sod and adjacent grass.

1. Lay sod across slopes exceeding 1:3. 2. Anchor sod on slopes exceeding 1:6 with wood pegs spaced as recommended by sod

manufacturer but not less than two anchors per sod strip to prevent slippage.


C. Saturate sod with fine water spray within two hours of planting. During first week after planting, water daily or more frequently as necessary to maintain moist soil to a minimum depth of 1-1/2 inches below sod.

3.4 CLEANUP AND PROTECTION

A. Promptly remove soil and debris created by turf work from paved areas. Clean wheels of vehicles before leaving site to avoid tracking soil onto roads, walks, or other paved areas.

B. Remove surplus soil and waste material, including excess subsoil, unsuitable soil, trash, and debris, and legally dispose of them off Owner's property.

C. Erect temporary fencing or barricades and warning signs as required to protect newly planted areas from traffic. Maintain fencing and barricades throughout initial maintenance period and remove after plantings are established.

D. Remove nondegradable erosion-control measures after grass establishment period.

3.5 MAINTENANCE SERVICE

A. Turf Maintenance Service: Provide full maintenance by skilled employees of landscape Installer. Maintain as required in "Turf Maintenance" Article. Begin maintenance immediately after each area is planted and continue until acceptable turf is established, but for not less than the following periods: 1. Seeded Turf: 60 days from date of Substantial Completion.

a. When initial maintenance period has not elapsed before end of planting season, or if turf is not fully established, continue maintenance during next planting season.

B. Sodded Turf: 30 days from date of Substantial Completion.


A

PP

EN

DIX

Mat ID Area/Room # Material Identification Material Sub Description Friability Asbestos Fibers Non-Asbestos Fibers Comments/Other

201-CW-ABasementEntryway / G21 0-4 Fiberglass Pipe Insulation Canvas Covered Friable ND

65% Cellulose 25% Fibrous Glass 10% Other

203-CNV-ABasementStore Room / 17A 8-12 Fiberglass Pipe insulation Canvas Friable ND


206-WHT-ABasementStorage / G33 4-8 Fibrous Pipe Insulation White Friable 75% Chrysotile ND 25% Other

206-WHT-BBasementStorage / G32A 4-8 Fibrous Pipe Insulation White Friable 75% Chrysotile 25% Other

206-WHT-CBasementMechanical / G34A 4-8 Fibrous Pipe Insulation White Friable 75% Chrysotile 25% Other

207-CW-ABasementEntryway / G21 8-12 Fibrous Pipe Insulation Canvas Covered Friable 80% Chrysotile 20% Other

207-CW-BBasementEntryway / G21 8-12 Fibrous Pipe Insulation Canvas Covered Friable 80% Chrysotile 20% Other

207-CW-CBasementEntryway / G21 8-12 Fibrous Pipe Insulation Canvas Covered Friable 65% Chrysotile 35% Other

209-CW-ABasementStorage / G33 0-4 Aircell Pipe Insulation Canvas Covered Friable 10% Chrysotile


209-CW-BBasementStorage / G32A 0-4 Aircell Pipe Insulation Canvas Covered Friable 10% Chrysotile


209-CW-CFloor 01Storage / 116B 0-4 Aircell Pipe Insulation Canvas Covered Friable 10% Chrysotile


210-CW-ABasementShop / G06 4-8 Aircell Pipe Insulation Canvas Covered Friable 60% Chrysotile 20% Cellulose 20% Other

210-CW-BBasementMechanical / G34A 4-8 Aircell Pipe Insulation Canvas Covered Friable 60% Chrysotile 20% Cellulose 20% Other

210-CW-CBasementStorage / G07 4-8 Aircell Pipe Insulation Canvas Covered Friable 15% Chrysotile

65% Cellulose 10% Synthetics 10% Other

213-CW-ABasementStorage / G32A 0-4 Felt Pipe Insulation Canvas Covered Friable 40% Chrysotile

40% Cellulose 10% Fibrous Glass

10% OtherGrey Layer

213-CW-ABasementStorage / G32A 0-4 Felt Pipe Insulation Canvas Covered Friable ND 90% Cellulose

10% OtherBrown Layer

213-CW-ABasementStorage / G32A 0-4 Felt Pipe Insulation Canvas Covered Friable 30% Chrysotile 50% Cellulose

20% OtherBlack Layer

213-CW-BBasementLaundry Room / 039 0-4 Felt Pipe Insulation Canvas Covered Friable 30% Chrysotile 50% Cellulose


213-CW-BBasementLaundry Room / 039 0-4 Felt Pipe Insulation Canvas Covered Friable 40% Chrysotile


10% OtherGrey Layer

213-CW-BBasementLaundry Room / 039 0-4 Felt Pipe Insulation Canvas Covered Friable ND 90% Cellulose


213-CW-CBasementShop / G05 0-4 Felt Pipe Insulation Canvas Covered Friable 30% Chrysotile 50% Cellulose 20% Other

213-CW-CBasementShop / G05 0-4 Felt Pipe Insulation Canvas Covered Friable 40% Chrysotile


10% OtherGrey Layer

213-CW-CBasementShop / G05 0-4 Felt Pipe Insulation Canvas Covered Friable ND 90% Cellulose


223-GRY-ABasementStorage / G33 4-8 White Fibrous Pipe Fittings Gray Friable 40% Chrysotile 40% Fibrous Glass 20% Other

223-GRY-BBasementMechanical / G34A 4-8 White Fibrous Pipe Fittings Gray Friable 40% Chrysotile 40% Fibrous Glass 20% Other

223-GRY-CBasementStorage / G32A 4-8 White Fibrous Pipe Fittings Gray Friable 40% Chrysotile 40% Fibrous Glass 20% Other

224-H-ABasementEntryway / G21 8-12 White Fibrous Pipe Fittings Hard Friable 65% Chrysotile 35% Other

226-H-ABasementStorage / G33 0-4 Fittings on Aircell Line Hard Friable 40% Chrysotile 40% Fibrous Glass 20% Other

226-H-BBasementStorage / G32A 0-4 Fittings on Aircell Line Hard Friable 40% Chrysotile 40% Fibrous Glass 20% Other

226-H-CFloor 01Storage / 116B 0-4 Fittings on Aircell Line Hard Friable 65% Chrysotile 35% Other

227-H-ABasementStorage / G07 4-8 Fittings on Aircell Line Hard Friable 35% Chrysotile 50% Cellulose 15% Other

227-H-BBasementWomen's Restroom / G10B 4-8 Fittings on Aircell Line Hard Friable 35% Chrysotile 50% Cellulose 15% Other

227-H-CBasementStorage / G33 4-8 Fittings on Aircell Line Hard Friable 35% Chrysotile 50% Cellulose 15% Other

230-H-ABasementStorage / G32A 0-4 Fittings on Felt Line Hard Friable 25% Chrysotile


230-H-BBasementLaundry Room / 039 0-4 Fittings on Felt Line Hard Friable 25% Chrysotile


230-H-CFloor 01Storage / 116C 0-4 Fittings on Felt Line Hard Friable 25% Chrysotile


234-GCP-AFloor 04Attic / West Duct Insulation Gray Corragated Paper Friable 65% Chrysotile 15% Cellulose 20% Other

234-GCP-BFloor 04Attic / West Duct Insulation Gray Corragated Paper Friable 65% Chrysotile 15% Cellulose 20% Other

234-GCP-CFloor 04Attic / West Duct Insulation Gray Corragated Paper Friable 65% Chrysotile 15% Cellulose 20% Other

236-CNV-ABasementStorage / G01A Vibration Joints Canvas Friable ND 95% Cellulose 5% Other

236-CNV-BBasementBoiler Room / G22 Vibration Joints Canvas Friable ND 95% Cellulose 5% Other

236-CNV-CFloor 04Attic / West Vibration Joints Canvas Friable ND


246-H-ABasementStore Room / 17 0-4 Fittings on Fiberglass Line Hard Friable

15% Chrysotile 15% Amosite 60% Fibrous Glass 10% Other

246-H-BBasementStore Room / 17A 0-4 Fittings on Fiberglass Line Hard Friable


246-H-CBasementGarbage / G21A 0-4 Fittings on Fiberglass Line Hard Friable


248-H-ABasementStore Room / 17 8-12 Fittings on Fiberglass Line Hard Friable

30% Chrysotile 40% Amosite 30% Other

248-H-BBasementStore Room / 17A 8-12 Fittings on Fiberglass Line Hard Friable


248-H-CBasementStore Room / 17A 8-12 Fittings on Fiberglass Line Hard Friable


259-GBI-AFloor 04Attic / West Attic Insulation Gray Blown In Friable ND 90% Cellulose 10% Other

259-GBI-BFloor 04Attic / West Attic Insulation Gray Blown In Friable ND 90% Cellulose 10% Other

259-GBI-CFloor 04Attic / East Attic Insulation Gray Blown In Friable ND 90% Cellulose 10% Other

301-HP-AFloor 01Lobby / 130 1x1 Ceiling Tile Hole Pattern Friable ND


301-HP-BFloor 01Lobby / 116 1x1 Ceiling Tile Hole Pattern Friable ND


301-HP-CBasementLounge / G04 1x1 Ceiling Tile Hole Pattern Friable ND


301-LHP-ABasementHallway / East G44 1x1 Ceiling Tile Large Hole Pattern Friable ND 90% Cellulose 10% Other

301-LHP-BFloor 01Office / 181 1x1 Ceiling Tile Large Hole Pattern Friable ND 90% Cellulose 10% Other

301-LHP-CBasementOffice / G34 1x1 Ceiling Tile Large Hole Pattern Friable ND 90% Cellulose 10% Other

301-TPH-AFloor 01Lobby / 130 1x1 Ceiling Tile Textured Pinhole Friable ND


301-TPH-BBasement to Floor 01Stairway / South East 1x1 Ceiling Tile Textured Pinhole Friable ND


301-TPH-CBasement-Floor 03Stairway / South East 1x1 Ceiling Tile Textured Pinhole Friable ND


302-ME-ABasementHallway / East G44 2x2 Ceiling Tile Molded Edges Friable ND


302-ME-BBasementOffice / G34 2x2 Ceiling Tile Molded Edges Friable ND


302-ME-CBasementOffice / G44 2x2 Ceiling Tile Molded Edges Friable ND


302-SR-ABasementLaundry Room / G01 2x2 Ceiling Tile Sheet Rock Friable ND


302-SR-BFloor 01Kitchen / 100 2x2 Ceiling Tile Sheet Rock Friable ND


302-SR-CFloor 01Bathroom / East 2x2 Ceiling Tile Sheet Rock Friable ND


302-WP-AFloor 02Bathroom / West 2x2 Ceiling Tile Worm Pinhole Friable ND 90% Fibrous Glass 10% Other

302-WP-BFloor 03Bathroom / East 2x2 Ceiling Tile Worm Pinhole Friable ND 90% Fibrous Glass 10% Other

302-WP-CFloor 02Bathroom / East 2x2 Ceiling Tile Worm Pinhole Friable ND 90% Fibrous Glass 10% Other

303-PPH-ABasementWomen's Restroom / East 2x4 Ceiling Tile Pitted Pinhole Friable ND


303-PPH-BBasementWomen's Restroom / East 2x4 Ceiling Tile Pitted Pinhole Friable ND


303-PPH-CBasementMen's Restroom / East 2x4 Ceiling Tile Pitted Pinhole Friable ND


303-TP-ABasementLounge / G04 2x4 Ceiling Tile Textured Pinhole Friable ND


303-TP-BBasementLounge / G04 2x4 Ceiling Tile Textured Pinhole Friable ND


303-TP-CBasementLounge / G04 2x4 Ceiling Tile Textured Pinhole Friable ND


303-WHP-AFloor 01Hallway East / North/South 2x4 Ceiling Tile Worm Track Pinhole Friable ND


303-WHP-BBasementConference Room / G03A 2x4 Ceiling Tile Worm Track Pinhole Friable ND


303-WHP-CBasementKitchen / G03B 2x4 Ceiling Tile Worm Track Pinhole Friable ND


303-WP-AFloor 03Dorm Room / 320 2x4 Ceiling Tile Worm Pinhole Friable ND


303-WP-BFloor 01Hallway West / North/South 2x4 Ceiling Tile Worm Pinhole Friable ND


303-WP-CFloor 02Hallways / All 2x4 Ceiling Tile Worm Pinhole Friable ND


304-PK-AFloor 01Hallway East / North/South Ceiling Tile Adhesive Pucks Friable

NDAdhesive 100% Other

304-PK-BFloor 02Hallways / All Ceiling Tile Adhesive Pucks Friable


304-PK-CBasementHallway / East G44 Ceiling Tile Adhesive Pucks Friable


305-TC-ABasementWomen's Restroom / East Sheetrock & Taping Compound Textured Wall Friable ND 10% Cellulose 90% Other

305-TC-BBasementHallway / East G44 Sheetrock & Taping Compound Textured Wall Friable ND 10% Cellulose 90% Other

305-TC-CBasementMen's Restroom / East Sheetrock & Taping Compound Textured Wall Friable ND 10% Cellulose 90% Other

305-WC-ABasementStorage / G22B Sheetrock & Taping Compound Walls And/Or Ceiling Friable ND 10% Cellulose 90% Other

305-WC-BFloor 01Kitchen / 100 Sheetrock & Taping Compound Walls And/Or Ceiling Friable ND 10% Cellulose 90% Other

305-WC-CFloor 01Office / 136 Sheetrock & Taping Compound Walls And/Or Ceiling Friable ND 10% Cellulose 90% Other

306-RT-ABasementCloset / G34 Plaster Rough Trowled Ceiling Friable ND 100% Other

306-RT-BFloor 03Dorm Room / 372 Plaster Rough Trowled Ceiling Friable ND 100% Other

306-RT-CFloor 02Hallways / All Plaster Rough Trowled Ceiling Friable ND 100% Other

306-RWC-ABasementOffice / G34 Plaster Rough walls and/or Ceiling Friable ND 100% Other

306-RWC-BFloor 01Hallway East / East/West Plaster Rough walls and/or Ceiling Friable ND 100% Other

306-RWC-CBasementLaundry Room / G01 Plaster Rough walls and/or Ceiling Friable ND 100% Other

306-WC-AFloor 02Dorm Room / 242 Plaster Walls And/Or Ceiling Friable ND 100% Other

306-WC-BFloor 03Dorm Room / 322 Plaster Walls And/Or Ceiling Friable ND 100% Other

306-WC-CBasementBathroom / G27A Plaster Walls And/Or Ceiling Friable ND 100% Other

308-2BK-ABasementLaundry Room / G01 Base Cove & Mastic 2" Black Non-Friable ND

100% OtherBase Cove Layer

308-2BK-ABasementLaundry Room / G01 Base Cove & Mastic 2" Black Non-Friable

NDMastic 5% Cellulose

95% OtherMastic Layer

308-2BK-BBasementLaundry Room / G01 Base Cove & Mastic 2" Black Non-Friable ND


308-2BK-BBasementLaundry Room / G01 Base Cove & Mastic 2" Black Non-Friable



308-2BK-CBasementLaundry Room / G01 Base Cove & Mastic 2" Black Non-Friable ND


308-2BK-CBasementLaundry Room / G01 Base Cove & Mastic 2" Black Non-Friable



308-2BR-AFloor 01Dorm Room / 164 Base Cove & Mastic 2" Brown Non-Friable



308-2BR-AFloor 01Dorm Room / 164 Base Cove & Mastic 2" Brown Non-Friable ND


308-2BR-BFloor 02Dorm Room / 250 Base Cove & Mastic 2" Brown Non-Friable ND


308-2BR-BFloor 02Dorm Room / 250 Base Cove & Mastic 2" Brown Non-Friable



308-2BR-CFloor 03Dorm Room / 341 Base Cove & Mastic 2" Brown Non-Friable ND


308-2BR-CFloor 03Dorm Room / 341 Base Cove & Mastic 2" Brown Non-Friable



308-5BR-ABasementOffice / G34 Base Cove & Mastic 5" Brown Non-Friable ND


308-5BR-ABasementOffice / G34 Base Cove & Mastic 5" Brown Non-Friable

NDMastic


308-5BR-BFloor 01Dining Room / 105 Base Cove & Mastic 5" Brown Non-Friable ND


308-5BR-BFloor 01Dining Room / 105 Base Cove & Mastic 5" Brown Non-Friable

NDMastic


308-5BR-CFloor 01Office / 100A Base Cove & Mastic 5" Brown Non-Friable ND


308-5BR-CFloor 01Office / 100A Base Cove & Mastic 5" Brown Non-Friable

NDMastic


308-5TN-ABasementBreak Room / G27 Base Cove & Mastic 5" Tan Non-Friable ND


308-5TN-ABasementBreak Room / G27 Base Cove & Mastic 5" Tan Non-Friable

NDMastic


308-5TN-BBasementBathroom / G27A Base Cove & Mastic 5" Tan Non-Friable

NDMastic


308-5TN-BBasementBathroom / G27A Base Cove & Mastic 5" Tan Non-Friable ND


308-5TN-CBasementBathroom / G27A Base Cove & Mastic 5" Tan Non-Friable ND


308-5TN-CBasementBathroom / G27A Base Cove & Mastic 5" Tan Non-Friable

NDMastic


308-BLK-ABasementKitchen / G03B Base Cove & Mastic Black Non-Friable ND


308-BLK-ABasementKitchen / G03B Base Cove & Mastic Black Non-Friable

NDMastic


308-BLK-BFloor 01Office / 115 Base Cove & Mastic Black Non-Friable ND


308-BLK-BFloor 01Office / 115 Base Cove & Mastic Black Non-Friable

NDMastic


308-BLK-CBasementKitchen / G03B Base Cove & Mastic Black Non-Friable ND


308-BLK-CBasementKitchen / G03B Base Cove & Mastic Black Non-Friable

NDMastic


308-BRN-ABasementStorage / 035B Base Cove & Mastic Brown Non-Friable



308-BRN-ABasementStorage / 035B Base Cove & Mastic Brown Non-Friable ND


308-BRN-BBasementStorage / G22B Base Cove & Mastic Brown Non-Friable



308-BRN-BBasementStorage / G22B Base Cove & Mastic Brown Non-Friable ND


308-BRN-CBasementStorage / G22A Base Cove & Mastic Brown Non-Friable ND


308-BRN-CBasementStorage / G22A Base Cove & Mastic Brown Non-Friable



308-GRY-ABasementVending Area / G29 Base Cove & Mastic Gray Non-Friable ND


308-GRY-ABasementVending Area / G29 Base Cove & Mastic Gray Non-Friable



308-GRY-BBasementVending Area / G29 Base Cove & Mastic Gray Non-Friable ND


308-GRY-BBasementVending Area / G29 Base Cove & Mastic Gray Non-Friable



308-GRY-CBasementVending Area / G29 Base Cove & Mastic Gray Non-Friable ND


308-GRY-CBasementVending Area / G29 Base Cove & Mastic Gray Non-Friable



309-CSC-AFloor 02Dorm Room / 290 Mastic - Carpet Carpet Squares Clear Adhesive Friable

NDMastic 10% Cellulose 90% Other

309-CSC-BFloor 01Dorm Room / 166 Mastic - Carpet Carpet Squares Clear Adhesive Friable


309-CSC-CFloor 03Dorm Room / 369 Mastic - Carpet Carpet Squares Clear Adhesive Friable


309-TN-ABasementBreak Room / G27 Mastic - Carpet Tan Friable


309-TN-BFloor 02Hallways / All Mastic - Carpet Tan Friable


309-TN-CFloor 01Dorm Room / 172 Mastic - Carpet Tan Friable


310-BM-ABasementKitchen / G03B 12x12 Floor Tile & Mastic Black Marbled Friable ND

100% OtherTile Layer

310-BM-ABasementKitchen / G03B 12x12 Floor Tile & Mastic Black Marbled Friable

5% Chrysotile Mastic 5% Cellulose


310-BM-BFloor 01Janitorial Closet / IE 12x12 Floor Tile & Mastic Black Marbled Friable ND


310-BM-BFloor 01Janitorial Closet / IE 12x12 Floor Tile & Mastic Black Marbled Friable



310-BM-CBasement-Floor 03Stairway / North Center 12x12 Floor Tile & Mastic Black Marbled Friable ND


310-BM-CBasement-Floor 03Stairway / North Center 12x12 Floor Tile & Mastic Black Marbled Friable



310-YLW-ABasementLaundry Room / G01 12x12 Floor Tile & Mastic Yellow Friable ND


310-YLW-ABasementLaundry Room / G01 12x12 Floor Tile & Mastic Yellow Friable



310-YLW-BBasementLaundry Room / G01 12x12 Floor Tile & Mastic Yellow Friable



310-YLW-BBasementLaundry Room / G01 12x12 Floor Tile & Mastic Yellow Friable ND


310-YLW-CBasementLaundry Room / G01 12x12 Floor Tile & Mastic Yellow Friable ND


310-YLW-CBasementLaundry Room / G01 12x12 Floor Tile & Mastic Yellow Friable



311-BKS-AFloor 02Dorm Room / 264 9x9 Floor Tile & Mastic Black W/Red & Tan Streaks Friable ND


311-BKS-AFloor 02Dorm Room / 264 9x9 Floor Tile & Mastic Black W/Red & Tan Streaks Friable ND


311-BKS-AFloor 02Dorm Room / 264 9x9 Floor Tile & Mastic Black W/Red & Tan Streaks Friable


90% OtherYellow Layer

311-BKS-BFloor 01Office / 181A 9x9 Floor Tile & Mastic Black W/Red & Tan Streaks Friable ND


311-BKS-BFloor 01Office / 181A 9x9 Floor Tile & Mastic Black W/Red & Tan Streaks Friable ND


311-BKS-BFloor 01Office / 181A 9x9 Floor Tile & Mastic Black W/Red & Tan Streaks Friable



311-BKS-CFloor 01Office / 127 9x9 Floor Tile & Mastic Black W/Red & Tan Streaks Friable ND


311-BKS-CFloor 01Office / 127 9x9 Floor Tile & Mastic Black W/Red & Tan Streaks Friable ND


311-BKS-CFloor 01Office / 127 9x9 Floor Tile & Mastic Black W/Red & Tan Streaks Friable



311-BLK-AFloor 01Hallway West / North/South 9x9 Floor Tile & Mastic Black Friable

NDMastic


94% OtherBlack Mastic

311-BLK-AFloor 01Hallway West / North/South 9x9 Floor Tile & Mastic Black Friable

NDMastic

3% Cellulose 3% Synthetics

94% OtherYellow Mastic

311-BLK-AFloor 01Hallway West / North/South 9x9 Floor Tile & Mastic Black Friable 3% Chrysotile

97% OtherTile Layer

311-BLK-BFloor 02Hallways / All 9x9 Floor Tile & Mastic Black Friable

NDMastic



311-BLK-BFloor 02Hallways / All 9x9 Floor Tile & Mastic Black Friable

NDMastic



311-BLK-BFloor 02Hallways / All 9x9 Floor Tile & Mastic Black Friable 3% Chrysotile

97% OtherTile Layer

311-BLK-CFloor 03Hallway / All 9x9 Floor Tile & Mastic Black Friable 3% Chrysotile

97% OtherTile Layer

311-BLK-CFloor 03Hallway / All 9x9 Floor Tile & Mastic Black Friable

NDMastic



311-BLK-CFloor 03Hallway / All 9x9 Floor Tile & Mastic Black Friable

NDMastic



311-BRM-ABasementWieght Room / G30 9x9 Floor Tile & Mastic Brown Modeled Friable ND


311-BRM-ABasementWieght Room / G30 9x9 Floor Tile & Mastic Brown Modeled Friable



311-BRM-ABasementWieght Room / G30 9x9 Floor Tile & Mastic Brown Modeled Friable



311-BRM-BBasementWieght Room / G30 9x9 Floor Tile & Mastic Brown Modeled Friable



311-BRM-BBasementWieght Room / G30 9x9 Floor Tile & Mastic Brown Modeled Friable ND


311-BRM-BBasementWieght Room / G30 9x9 Floor Tile & Mastic Brown Modeled Friable



311-BRM-CBasementWieght Room / G30 9x9 Floor Tile & Mastic Brown Modeled Friable



311-BRM-CBasementWieght Room / G30 9x9 Floor Tile & Mastic Brown Modeled Friable



311-BRM-CBasementWieght Room / G30 9x9 Floor Tile & Mastic Brown Modeled Friable ND


311-BRW-ABasementStorage / G22A 9x9 Floor Tile & Mastic Brown W/Red & White Streaks Friable 3% Chrysotile

97% OtherTile Layer

311-BRW-ABasementStorage / G22A 9x9 Floor Tile & Mastic Brown W/Red & White Streaks Friable



311-BRW-BFloor 02Dorm Room / 252 9x9 Floor Tile & Mastic Brown W/Red & White Streaks Friable 3% Chrysotile

97% OtherTile Layer

311-BRW-BFloor 02Dorm Room / 252 9x9 Floor Tile & Mastic Brown W/Red & White Streaks Friable



311-BRW-CFloor 03Dorm Room / 319 9x9 Floor Tile & Mastic Brown W/Red & White Streaks Friable 3% Chrysotile

97% OtherTile Layer

311-BRW-CFloor 03Dorm Room / 319 9x9 Floor Tile & Mastic Brown W/Red & White Streaks Friable



312-BLK-ABasementBreak Room / G27 Mastic - Floor Tile Black Friable

8% Chrysotile Mastic 92% Other

312-BLK-BFloor 01Dorm Room / 166 Mastic - Floor Tile Black Friable


312-BLK-CBasementOffice / G44 Mastic - Floor Tile Black Friable


319-WCP-AFloor 04Attic / East Brick Deck White Chaulk Pannel Friable ND 100% Other

319-WCP-BFloor 04Attic / East Brick Deck White Chaulk Pannel Friable ND 100% Other

319-WCP-CFloor 04Attic / West Brick Deck White Chaulk Pannel Friable ND 100% Other

321-GDS-AFloor 01Kitchen / 100 Caulk Gray Duct Sealent Non-Friable ND 100% Other

321-GDS-BFloor 01Kitchen / 100 Caulk Gray Duct Sealent Non-Friable ND 100% Other

321-GDS-CFloor 01Kitchen / 100 Caulk Gray Duct Sealent Non-Friable ND 100% Other

338-BLK-ABasementMechanical / G34A Asphalt Water Proofing Black Friable ND 100% Other

338-BLK-BBasementMechanical / G34A Asphalt Water Proofing Black Friable ND 100% Other

338-BLK-CBasementMechanical / G34A Asphalt Water Proofing Black Friable ND 100% Other

341-BLK-ABasement-Floor 03Stairway / South Center Stair Tread Black Non-Friable ND

100% OtherTread Layer

341-BLK-ABasement-Floor 03Stairway / South Center Stair Tread Black Non-Friable



341-BLK-BBasement-Floor 03Stairway / North Center Stair Tread Black Non-Friable ND


341-BLK-BBasement-Floor 03Stairway / North Center Stair Tread Black Non-Friable



341-BLK-CBasement-Floor 03Stairway / South West Stair Tread Black Non-Friable



341-BLK-CBasement-Floor 03Stairway / South West Stair Tread Black Non-Friable ND


Area Room # Location Sub Location Comment 1 Comment 2 Comment 3 Mat ID Material

Sub ID

Material Description Material Sub Description Material

Code

Asbestos

Content

Quantity Unit Abatement Date Qty Abated Contractor Friability Condition Condition

Rating

AHERA

Category

Water Air Vib Acc

Basement

G27A Bathroom Above Ceiling Limited Visibility 209 CW 0-4 Aircell Pipe Insulation Canvas Covered T YES 4 LF F N L L L L

G27A Bathroom 209 CW 0-4 Aircell Pipe Insulation Canvas Covered T YES 16 LF F N L L L H

G27A Bathroom 306 WC Plaster Walls And/Or Ceiling M ND 320 SF 0 NA

G27A Bathroom 308 5TN Base Cove & Mastic 5" Tan M ND 24 LF 0 NA

G27A Bathroom 309 TN Mastic - Carpet Tan M ND 100 SF 0 NA

G27A Bathroom 312 BLK Mastic - Floor Tile Black M YES 100 SF N N L L L L

G27A Bathroom 315 WHT Ceramic Tile White M PRE 60 SF N N L L L H NA

G27A Bathroom 315 WHT Ceramic Tile White M PRE 280 SF N N L L L H NA

Basement

G22 Boiler Room 201 WR 0-4 Fiberglass Pipe Insulation White Replacement NS 0 NA


G22 Boiler Room 203 WR 8-12 Fiberglass Pipe insulation White Replacement NS 0 NA


G22 Boiler Room 219 OFRI 4-8 PVC Fittings On Fiberglass Replacement Insulation NS 0 NA

G22 Boiler Room 236 CNV Vibration Joints Canvas T ND 2 EA 0 NA

G22 Boiler Room 253 OFRI 0-4 PVC Fittings Fiberglass Filled On Fiberglass Replacement Insulation NS 0 NA

G22 Boiler Room 254 BT Fiberglass Batting NS 0 NA

Basement



G22 Boiler Room 258 GW Manufactured Thermal Blankets for Fitting Gray and White T PRE 20 EA NA

G27 Break Room Above Ceiling Limited Visibility 210 CW 4-8 Aircell Pipe Insulation Canvas Covered T YES 3 LF F N L L L L

G27 Break Room Above Ceiling Limited Visibility 213 CW 0-4 Felt Pipe Insulation Canvas Covered T YES 3 LF F N L L L L

G27 Break Room Above Ceiling Limited Visibility 227 H 4-8 Fittings on Aircell Line Hard T YES 1 EA F N L L L L

G27 Break Room 202 WR 4-8 Fiberglass Pipe Insulation White Replacement NS 0 NA

Basement

G27 Break Room 209 CW 0-4 Aircell Pipe Insulation Canvas Covered T YES 1 LF F N L L L H

G27 Break Room 210 CW 4-8 Aircell Pipe Insulation Canvas Covered T YES 3 LF F N L L L H

G27 Break Room 213 CW 0-4 Felt Pipe Insulation Canvas Covered T YES 9 LF F N L L L H

G27 Break Room 227 H 4-8 Fittings on Aircell Line Hard T YES 3 EA F N L L L H

G27 Break Room 230 H 0-4 Fittings on Felt Line Hard T YES 4 EA F N L L L H

G27 Break Room 230 H 0-4 Fittings on Felt Line Hard T YES 2 EA F N L L L L

G27 Break Room 255 OFRI 4-8 PVC Fitting Fiberglass Filled On Fiberglass Replacement Insulation NS 0 NA

G27 Break Room 306 WC Plaster Walls And/Or Ceiling M ND 850 SF 0 NA

Basement

G27 Break Room 308 5TN Base Cove & Mastic 5" Tan M ND 38 LF 0 NA

G27 Break Room 309 TN Mastic - Carpet Tan M ND 160 SF 0 NA

G27 Break Room 312 BLK Mastic - Floor Tile Black M YES 160 SF N N L L L L

G34 Closet Above Ceiling INACCESSIBLE 306 RT Plaster Rough Trowled Ceiling M ND 33 SF 0 NA

G34 Closet 206 WHT 4-8 Fibrous Pipe Insulation White T YES 12 LF F N L L L M

G34 Closet 210 CW 4-8 Aircell Pipe Insulation Canvas Covered T YES 5 LF F N L L L M

G34 Closet 213 CW 0-4 Felt Pipe Insulation Canvas Covered T YES 3 LF F N L L L M

G34 Closet 223 GRY 4-8 White Fibrous Pipe Fittings Gray T YES 4 EA F N L L L M

Basement

G34 Closet 227 H 4-8 Fittings on Aircell Line Hard T YES 2 EA F N L L L M

G34 Closet 230 H 0-4 Fittings on Felt Line Hard T YES 1 EA F N L L L M

G34 Closet 301 LHP 1x1 Ceiling Tile Large Hole Pattern M ND 33 SF 0 NA

G34 Closet 306 RWC Plaster Rough walls and/or Ceiling M ND 220 SF 0 NA

G34 Closet 310 BM 12x12 Floor Tile & Mastic Black Marbled M YES 33 SF N N L L L H

G03A Conference Room Above Ceiling Limited Visibility 206 WHT 4-8 Fibrous Pipe Insulation White T YES 8 LF F N L L L L

G03A Conference Room Above Ceiling Limited Visibility 209 CW 0-4 Aircell Pipe Insulation Canvas Covered T YES 3 LF F N L L L L

Basement

G03A Conference Room Above Ceiling Limited Visibility 210 CW 4-8 Aircell Pipe Insulation Canvas Covered T YES 8 LF F N L L L L

G03A Conference Room Above Ceiling Limited Visibility 213 CW 0-4 Felt Pipe Insulation Canvas Covered T YES 16 LF F N L L L L

Damage Potential

ND = None Detected, NSMP = No Suspect Materials Present, NT = Not Tested,

NS = Not Suspect, PRE = Presumed, TR = Trace (<1%)

G03A Conference Room Above Ceiling Limited Visibility 226 H 0-4 Fittings on Aircell Line Hard T YES 2 EA F N L L L L

G03A Conference Room Above Ceiling Limited Visibility 254 BT Fiberglass Batting NS 0 NA

G03A Conference Room Above Ceiling Limited Visibility 306 WC Plaster Walls And/Or Ceiling M ND 112 SF 0 NA

G03A Conference Room 230 H 0-4 Fittings on Felt Line Hard T YES 2 EA F N L L L L

G03A Conference Room 303 WHP 2x4 Ceiling Tile Worm Track Pinhole M ND 112 SF 0 NA

Basement

G03A Conference Room 306 RWC Plaster Rough walls and/or Ceiling M ND 240 SF 0 NA

G03A Conference Room 309 TN Mastic - Carpet Tan M ND 352 SF 0 NA

G24 Electrical 201 WR 0-4 Fiberglass Pipe Insulation White Replacement NS 0 NA

G24 Electrical 202 WR 4-8 Fiberglass Pipe Insulation White Replacement NS 0 NA

G25 Electrical Above Ceiling Limited Visibility 209 CW 0-4 Aircell Pipe Insulation Canvas Covered T YES 4 LF F N L L L L

G25 Electrical 226 H 0-4 Fittings on Aircell Line Hard T YES 2 EA F D L L L L

G25 Electrical 306 WC Plaster Walls And/Or Ceiling M ND 192 SF 0 NA

G03 Entryway 206 WHT 4-8 Fibrous Pipe Insulation White T YES 5 LF F N L L L L

Basement

G03 Entryway 209 CW 0-4 Aircell Pipe Insulation Canvas Covered T YES 5 LF F N L L L L

G03 Entryway 210 CW 4-8 Aircell Pipe Insulation Canvas Covered T YES 5 LF F N L L L H

G03 Entryway 213 CW 0-4 Felt Pipe Insulation Canvas Covered T YES 3 LF F N L L L L

G03 Entryway 223 GRY 4-8 White Fibrous Pipe Fittings Gray T YES 2 EA F N L L L H

G03 Entryway 226 H 0-4 Fittings on Aircell Line Hard T YES 1 EA F N L L L H

G03 Entryway 227 H 4-8 Fittings on Aircell Line Hard T YES 2 EA F N L L L H

G03 Entryway 230 H 0-4 Fittings on Felt Line Hard T YES 2 EA F N L L L H

G03 Entryway 304 PK Ceiling Tile Adhesive Pucks M ND 480 SF 0 NA

Basement

G03 Entryway 306 RWC Plaster Rough walls and/or Ceiling M ND 1184 SF 0 NA

G03 Entryway 308 5BR Base Cove & Mastic 5" Brown M ND 70 LF 0 NA

G03 Entryway 310 BM 12x12 Floor Tile & Mastic Black Marbled M YES 480 SF N N L L L H

G21 Entryway 201 CW 0-4 Fiberglass Pipe Insulation Canvas Covered T ND 14 LF 0 NA

G21 Entryway 201 WR 0-4 Fiberglass Pipe Insulation White Replacement NS 0 NA

G21 Entryway 202 WR 4-8 Fiberglass Pipe Insulation White Replacement NS 0 NA

G21 Entryway 203 WR 8-12 Fiberglass Pipe insulation White Replacement NS 0 NA

G21 Entryway 207 CW 8-12 Fibrous Pipe Insulation Canvas Covered T YES 14 LF F D L L L H

Basement

G21 Entryway 210 CW 4-8 Aircell Pipe Insulation Canvas Covered T YES 28 LF F D L L L H

G21 Entryway 213 CW 0-4 Felt Pipe Insulation Canvas Covered T YES 45 LF F N L L L H

G21 Entryway 224 H 8-12 White Fibrous Pipe Fittings Hard T YES 1 EA F N L L L H

G21 Entryway 230 H 0-4 Fittings on Felt Line Hard T YES 1 EA F N L L L H

G21 Entryway 246 H 0-4 Fittings on Fiberglass Line Hard T YES 2 EA F N L L L H

G21 Entryway 253 OFRI 0-4 PVC Fittings Fiberglass Filled On Fiberglass Replacement Insulation NS 0 NA

G21 Entryway 256 OFRI 8-12 PVC Fittings Fiberglass Filled On Fiberglass Replacement Insulation NS 0 NA

G21 Entryway 306 WC Plaster Walls And/Or Ceiling M ND 460 SF 0 NA

Basement

G21 Entryway 318 STL Fire Door Steel M PRE 1 EA N N L L L H

G09 Garbage 210 CW 4-8 Aircell Pipe Insulation Canvas Covered T YES 11 LF F N L L L H

G09 Garbage 213 CW 0-4 Felt Pipe Insulation Canvas Covered T YES 21 LF F N L L L H

G09 Garbage 230 H 0-4 Fittings on Felt Line Hard T YES 4 EA F N L L L H

G09 Garbage 318 STL Fire Door Steel M PRE 1 EA N N L L L H

G21A Garbage 201 CW 0-4 Fiberglass Pipe Insulation Canvas Covered T ND 16 LF 0 NA

G21A Garbage 210 CW 4-8 Aircell Pipe Insulation Canvas Covered T YES 19 LF F N L L L H

G21A Garbage 213 CW 0-4 Felt Pipe Insulation Canvas Covered T YES 52 LF F D L L L H

Basement

G21A Garbage 227 H 4-8 Fittings on Aircell Line Hard T YES 2 EA F D L L L H

G21A Garbage 230 H 0-4 Fittings on Felt Line Hard T YES 9 EA F D L L L H

G21A Garbage 246 H 0-4 Fittings on Fiberglass Line Hard T YES 2 EA F N L L L H

G21A Garbage 318 STL Fire Door Steel M PRE 1 EA N N L L L H

1 Hallway 201 WR 0-4 Fiberglass Pipe Insulation White Replacement NS 0 NA

1 Hallway 206 WHT 4-8 Fibrous Pipe Insulation White T YES 10 LF F D L L L H

1 Hallway 209 CW 0-4 Aircell Pipe Insulation Canvas Covered T YES 10 LF F N L L L H

1 Hallway 213 CW 0-4 Felt Pipe Insulation Canvas Covered T YES 18 LF F N L L L H

Basement

1 Hallway 253 OFRI 0-4 PVC Fittings Fiberglass Filled On Fiberglass Replacement Insulation NS 0 NA

2 Hallway 201 CW 0-4 Fiberglass Pipe Insulation Canvas Covered T ND 29 LF 0 NA



2 Hallway 213 CW 0-4 Felt Pipe Insulation Canvas Covered T YES 41 LF F N L L L H

2 Hallway 226 H 0-4 Fittings on Aircell Line Hard T YES 7 EA F N L L L H

2 Hallway 230 H 0-4 Fittings on Felt Line Hard T YES 1 EA F N L L L H

2 Hallway 246 H 0-4 Fittings on Fiberglass Line Hard T YES 8 EA F N L L L H

Basement

East G44 Hallway Above Ceiling Limited Visibility 201 WR 0-4 Fiberglass Pipe Insulation White Replacement NS 0 NA

East G44 Hallway Above Ceiling Limited Visibility 210 CW 4-8 Aircell Pipe Insulation Canvas Covered T YES 48 LF F N L L L L

East G44 Hallway Above Ceiling Limited Visibility 213 CW 0-4 Felt Pipe Insulation Canvas Covered T YES 6 LF F N L L L L

East G44 Hallway Above Ceiling Limited Visibility 227 H 4-8 Fittings on Aircell Line Hard T YES 4 EA F N L L L L

East G44 Hallway Above Ceiling Limited Visibility 230 H 0-4 Fittings on Felt Line Hard T YES 4 EA F N L L L L

East G44 Hallway Above Ceiling Limited Visibility 301 LHP 1x1 Ceiling Tile Large Hole Pattern M ND 327 SF 0 NA

East G44 Hallway Above Ceiling Limited Visibility 304 PK Ceiling Tile Adhesive Pucks M ND 327 SF 0 NA

Basement

East G44 Hallway Above Ceiling Limited Visibility 306 RT Plaster Rough Trowled Ceiling M ND 327 SF 0 NA

East G44 Hallway 302 ME 2x2 Ceiling Tile Molded Edges M ND 327 SF 0 NA

East G44 Hallway 305 TC Sheetrock & Taping Compound Textured Wall M ND 304 SF 0 NA

East G44 Hallway 306 RWC Plaster Rough walls and/or Ceiling M ND 840 SF 0 NA

East G44 Hallway 308 5BR Base Cove & Mastic 5" Brown M ND 62 LF 0 NA

East G44 Hallway 309 TN Mastic - Carpet Tan M ND 322 SF 0 NA

East G44 Hallway 310 BM 12x12 Floor Tile & Mastic Black Marbled M YES 327 SF N N L L L L

035A Janitorial Closet 213 CW 0-4 Felt Pipe Insulation Canvas Covered T YES 21 LF F N L L L H

Basement

035A Janitorial Closet 230 H 0-4 Fittings on Felt Line Hard T YES 7 EA F N L L L H

035A Janitorial Closet 306 WC Plaster Walls And/Or Ceiling M ND 128 SF 0 NA

G02A Janitorial Closet 210 CW 4-8 Aircell Pipe Insulation Canvas Covered T YES 5 LF F N L L L H

G02A Janitorial Closet 213 CW 0-4 Felt Pipe Insulation Canvas Covered T YES 1 LF F N L L L H

G02A Janitorial Closet 306 WC Plaster Walls And/Or Ceiling M ND 200 SF 0 NA

G03B Kitchen Above Ceiling Limited Visibility 209 CW 0-4 Aircell Pipe Insulation Canvas Covered T YES 28 LF F N L L L L

G03B Kitchen Above Ceiling 306 WC Plaster Walls And/Or Ceiling M ND 242 SF 0 NA

G03B Kitchen 206 WHT 4-8 Fibrous Pipe Insulation White T YES 11 LF F N L L L L

Basement

G03B Kitchen 210 CW 4-8 Aircell Pipe Insulation Canvas Covered T YES 11 LF F N L L L L

G03B Kitchen 213 CW 0-4 Felt Pipe Insulation Canvas Covered T YES 28 LF F N L L L L

G03B Kitchen 226 H 0-4 Fittings on Aircell Line Hard T YES 6 EA F N L L L L

G03B Kitchen 230 H 0-4 Fittings on Felt Line Hard T YES 4 EA F N L L L L

G03B Kitchen 303 WHP 2x4 Ceiling Tile Worm Track Pinhole M ND 528 SF 0 NA

G03B Kitchen 306 RWC Plaster Rough walls and/or Ceiling M ND 528 SF 0 NA

G03B Kitchen 308 BLK Base Cove & Mastic Black M ND 44 LF 0 NA

G03B Kitchen 310 BM 12x12 Floor Tile & Mastic Black Marbled M YES 242 SF N N L L L H

Basement

G03B Kitchen 335 BLK Stainless Sink Black NS 0 NA

39 Laundry Room 206 WHT 4-8 Fibrous Pipe Insulation White T YES 24 LF F N L L L M

39 Laundry Room 209 CW 0-4 Aircell Pipe Insulation Canvas Covered T YES 45 LF F N L L L M

39 Laundry Room 210 CW 4-8 Aircell Pipe Insulation Canvas Covered T YES 12 LF F D L L L M

39 Laundry Room 213 CW 0-4 Felt Pipe Insulation Canvas Covered T YES 150 LF F D L L L M

39 Laundry Room 226 H 0-4 Fittings on Aircell Line Hard T YES 28 EA F D L L L M

39 Laundry Room 230 H 0-4 Fittings on Felt Line Hard T YES 11 EA F N L L L H

39 Laundry Room 316 D Concrete Deck NS 0 NA

Basement

39 Laundry Room 316 F Concrete Floor NS 0 NA

40 Laundry Room 209 CW 0-4 Aircell Pipe Insulation Canvas Covered T YES 70 LF F N L L L H

40 Laundry Room 210 CW 4-8 Aircell Pipe Insulation Canvas Covered T YES 22 LF F N L L L H

40 Laundry Room 213 CW 0-4 Felt Pipe Insulation Canvas Covered T YES 73 LF F N L L L H

40 Laundry Room 226 H 0-4 Fittings on Aircell Line Hard T YES 19 EA F N L L L H

40 Laundry Room 230 H 0-4 Fittings on Felt Line Hard T YES 6 EA F N L L L H

40 Laundry Room 316 D Concrete Deck NS 0 NA

40 Laundry Room 316 F Concrete Floor NS 0 NA

Basement

G01 Laundry Room Above Ceiling Limited Visibility 201 WR 0-4 Fiberglass Pipe Insulation White Replacement NS 0 NA

G01 Laundry Room Above Ceiling Limited Visibility 206 WHT 4-8 Fibrous Pipe Insulation White T YES 50 LF F N L L L L

G01 Laundry Room Above Ceiling Limited Visibility 209 CW 0-4 Aircell Pipe Insulation Canvas Covered T YES 60 LF F N L L L L

G01 Laundry Room Above Ceiling Limited Visibility 210 CW 4-8 Aircell Pipe Insulation Canvas Covered T YES 120 LF F N L L L L

G01 Laundry Room Above Ceiling Limited Visibility 230 H 0-4 Fittings on Felt Line Hard T YES 12 EA F N L L L L

G01 Laundry Room 209 CW 0-4 Aircell Pipe Insulation Canvas Covered T YES 26 LF F N L L L H

G01 Laundry Room 210 CW 4-8 Aircell Pipe Insulation Canvas Covered T YES 204 LF F D L L L H

Basement

G01 Laundry Room 213 CW 0-4 Felt Pipe Insulation Canvas Covered T YES 132 LF F N L L L L

G01 Laundry Room 226 H 0-4 Fittings on Aircell Line Hard T YES 15 EA F D L L L H

G01 Laundry Room 226 H 0-4 Fittings on Aircell Line Hard T YES 12 EA F N L L L L

G01 Laundry Room 227 H 4-8 Fittings on Aircell Line Hard T YES 2 EA F N L L L L

G01 Laundry Room 302 SR 2x2 Ceiling Tile Sheet Rock M ND 726 SF 0 NA

G01 Laundry Room 304 PK Ceiling Tile Adhesive Pucks M ND 1632 SF 0 NA

G01 Laundry Room 306 RWC Plaster Rough walls and/or Ceiling M ND 21912 SF 0 NA

G01 Laundry Room 308 2BK Base Cove & Mastic 2" Black M ND 160 LF 0 NA

Basement

G01 Laundry Room 310 YLW 12x12 Floor Tile & Mastic Yellow M YES 1632 SF N N L L L H



G10 Laundry Room 213 CW 0-4 Felt Pipe Insulation Canvas Covered T YES 34 LF F N L L L H

G10 Laundry Room 226 H 0-4 Fittings on Aircell Line Hard T YES 1 EA F N L L L H

G10 Laundry Room 230 H 0-4 Fittings on Felt Line Hard T YES 7 EA F N L L L H

G04 Lounge 301 HP 1x1 Ceiling Tile Hole Pattern M ND 520 SF 0 NA

G04 Lounge 303 TP 2x4 Ceiling Tile Textured Pinhole M ND 260 SF 0 NA

Basement

G04 Lounge 304 PK Ceiling Tile Adhesive Pucks M ND 260 SF 0 NA

G04 Lounge 306 RWC Plaster Rough walls and/or Ceiling M ND 1860 SF 0 NA

G04 Lounge 309 TN Mastic - Carpet Tan M ND 500 SF 0 NA

G04 Lounge 310 BM 12x12 Floor Tile & Mastic Black Marbled M YES 500 SF N N L L L L

G32 Lounge 210 CW 4-8 Aircell Pipe Insulation Canvas Covered T YES 86 LF F N L L L L

G32 Lounge INACCESSIBLE 301 EMB 1x1 Ceiling Tile Embossed M PRE 1200 SF F N L L L L

G32 Lounge 306 WC Plaster Walls And/Or Ceiling M ND 4400 SF 0 NA

G32 Lounge 309 TN Mastic - Carpet Tan M ND 2800 SF 0 NA

Basement

G32 Lounge 317 GRY Terrazzo Gray M PRE 2800 SF N N L L L L

G23 Mechanical 202 WR 4-8 Fiberglass Pipe Insulation White Replacement NS 0 NA


G23 Mechanical 203 WR 8-12 Fiberglass Pipe insulation White Replacement NS 0 NA


G23 Mechanical 210 CW 4-8 Aircell Pipe Insulation Canvas Covered T YES 1 LF F N L L L L

G23 Mechanical 253 OFRI 0-4 PVC Fittings Fiberglass Filled On Fiberglass Replacement Insulation NS 0 NA

G23 Mechanical 255 OFRI 4-8 PVC Fitting Fiberglass Filled On Fiberglass Replacement Insulation NS 0 NA

Basement

G23 Mechanical 258 GW Manufactured Thermal Blankets for Fittin Gray and White T PRE 5 EA NA





G26 Mechanical 226 H 0-4 Fittings on Aircell Line Hard T YES 4 EA F D L L L L

G26 Mechanical 227 H 4-8 Fittings on Aircell Line Hard T YES 2 EA F N L L L L

G26 Mechanical 253 OFRI 0-4 PVC Fittings Fiberglass Filled On Fiberglass Replacement Insulation NS 0 NA

Basement

G26 Mechanical 255 OFRI 4-8 PVC Fitting Fiberglass Filled On Fiberglass Replacement Insulation NS 0 NA

G34A Mechanical 201 WR 0-4 Fiberglass Pipe Insulation White Replacement NS 0 NA

G34A Mechanical 206 WHT 4-8 Fibrous Pipe Insulation White T YES 18 LF F N L L L H

G34A Mechanical 209 CW 0-4 Aircell Pipe Insulation Canvas Covered T YES 4 LF F N L L L H

G34A Mechanical 210 CW 4-8 Aircell Pipe Insulation Canvas Covered T YES 22 LF F N L L L H

G34A Mechanical 213 CW 0-4 Felt Pipe Insulation Canvas Covered T YES 26 LF F N L L L H

G34A Mechanical 223 GRY 4-8 White Fibrous Pipe Fittings Gray T YES 1 EA F N L L L H

G34A Mechanical 226 H 0-4 Fittings on Aircell Line Hard T YES 3 EA F N L L L H

Basement

G34A Mechanical 227 H 4-8 Fittings on Aircell Line Hard T YES 4 EA F N L L L H

G34A Mechanical 230 H 0-4 Fittings on Felt Line Hard T YES 2 EA F N L L L H

G34A Mechanical 236 BV Vibration Joints Black Vinyl T NS 2 EA 0 NA

G34A Mechanical 253 OFRI 0-4 PVC Fittings Fiberglass Filled On Fiberglass Replacement Insulation NS 0 NA

G34A Mechanical 306 WC Plaster Walls And/Or Ceiling M ND 560 SF 0 NA

G34A Mechanical 338 BLK Asphalt Water Proofing Black M ND 6 SF 0 NA

East Men's Restroom Above Ceiling Limited Visibility 213 CW 0-4 Felt Pipe Insulation Canvas Covered T YES 40 LF F N L L L L

East Men's Restroom Above Ceiling Limited Visibility 230 H 0-4 Fittings on Felt Line Hard T YES 4 EA F N L L L L

Basement

East Men's Restroom 201 WR 0-4 Fiberglass Pipe Insulation White Replacement NS 0 NA

East Men's Restroom 303 PPH 2x4 Ceiling Tile Pitted Pinhole M ND 112 SF 0 NA

East Men's Restroom 305 TC Sheetrock & Taping Compound Textured Wall M ND 312 SF 0 NA

East Men's Restroom 306 WC Plaster Walls And/Or Ceiling M ND 168 SF 0 NA

East Men's Restroom 315 GRP Ceramic Tile Gray Pentagone M PRE 112 SF N N L L L H NA

G10A Men's Restroom 201 WR 0-4 Fiberglass Pipe Insulation White Replacement NS 0 NA

G10A Men's Restroom 202 WR 4-8 Fiberglass Pipe Insulation White Replacement NS 0 NA

G10A Men's Restroom 209 CW 0-4 Aircell Pipe Insulation Canvas Covered T YES 20 LF F D L L L H

Basement

G10A Men's Restroom 213 CW 0-4 Felt Pipe Insulation Canvas Covered T YES 20 LF F N L L L H

G10A Men's Restroom 226 H 0-4 Fittings on Aircell Line Hard T YES 2 EA F D L L L H

G10A Men's Restroom 230 H 0-4 Fittings on Felt Line Hard T YES 4 EA NA

G10A Men's Restroom 253 OFRI 0-4 PVC Fittings Fiberglass Filled On Fiberglass Replacement Insulation NS 0 NA

G10A Men's Restroom 306 WC Plaster Walls And/Or Ceiling M ND 400 SF 0 NA

G10A Men's Restroom Was already removed at time of sampling. 310 BKM 12x12 Floor Tile & Mastic Black Modeled NS 0 NA

G10A Men's Restroom Was already removed at time of sampling. 310 BRM 12x12 Floor Tile & Mastic Brown Modeled NS 0 5

Basement

G10A Men's Restroom Was already removed at time of sampling. 311 BRM 9x9 Floor Tile & Mastic Brown Modeled YES N N L L L H NA

G10A Men's Restroom 315 WHT Ceramic Tile White M PRE 20 SF N N L L L H NA

38 Office 206 WHT 4-8 Fibrous Pipe Insulation White T YES 10 LF F N L L L H

38 Office 209 CW 0-4 Aircell Pipe Insulation Canvas Covered T YES 40 LF F N L L L H


38 Office 213 CW 0-4 Felt Pipe Insulation Canvas Covered T YES 18 LF F N L L L H

38 Office 226 H 0-4 Fittings on Aircell Line Hard T YES 21 EA F N L L L H

38 Office 230 H 0-4 Fittings on Felt Line Hard T YES 2 EA F N L L L H

Basement

G34 Office Above Ceiling Limited Visibility 206 WHT 4-8 Fibrous Pipe Insulation White T YES 18 LF F N L L L L

G34 Office Above Ceiling Limited Visibility 213 CW 0-4 Felt Pipe Insulation Canvas Covered T YES 18 LF F N L L L L

G34 Office Above Ceiling Limited Visibility 301 LHP 1x1 Ceiling Tile Large Hole Pattern M ND 180 SF 0 NA

G34 Office Above Ceiling INACCESSIBLE 306 RT Plaster Rough Trowled Ceiling M ND 180 SF 0 NA

G34 Office 302 ME 2x2 Ceiling Tile Molded Edges M ND 180 SF 0 NA

G34 Office 306 RWC Plaster Rough walls and/or Ceiling M ND 80 SF 0 NA

G34 Office 308 5BR Base Cove & Mastic 5" Brown M ND 20 LF 0 NA

Basement

G34 Office 309 TN Mastic - Carpet Tan M ND 180 SF 0 NA

G34 Office 310 BM 12x12 Floor Tile & Mastic Black Marbled M YES 180 SF N N L L L L

G44 Office Above Ceiling Limited Visibility 201 WR 0-4 Fiberglass Pipe Insulation White Replacement NS 0 NA

G44 Office Above Ceiling Limited Visibility 203 WR 8-12 Fiberglass Pipe insulation White Replacement NS 0 NA

G44 Office Above Ceiling Limited Visibility 253 OFRI 0-4 PVC Fittings Fiberglass Filled On Fiberglass Replacement Insulation NS 0 NA

G44 Office Above Ceiling Limited Visibility 255 OFRI 4-8 PVC Fitting Fiberglass Filled On Fiberglass Replacement Insulation NS 0 NA

G44 Office Above Ceiling Limited Visibility 256 OFRI 8-12 PVC Fittings Fiberglass Filled On Fiberglass Replacement Insulation NS 0 NA

Basement

G44 Office Above Ceiling INACCESSIBLE 306 RT Plaster Rough Trowled Ceiling M ND 864 SF 0 NA

G44 Office 202 WR 4-8 Fiberglass Pipe Insulation White Replacement NS 0 NA

G44 Office 301 LHP 1x1 Ceiling Tile Large Hole Pattern M ND 864 SF 0 NA

G44 Office 302 ME 2x2 Ceiling Tile Molded Edges M ND 864 SF 0 NA

G44 Office 306 RWC Plaster Rough walls and/or Ceiling M ND 1080 SF 0 NA

G44 Office 308 5BR Base Cove & Mastic 5" Brown M ND 120 LF 0 NA

G44 Office 309 TN Mastic - Carpet Tan M ND 864 SF 0 NA

G44 Office 312 BLK Mastic - Floor Tile Black M YES 864 SF N N L L L L

Basement

G05 Shop 206 WHT 4-8 Fibrous Pipe Insulation White T YES 38 LF F N L L L H

G05 Shop 209 CW 0-4 Aircell Pipe Insulation Canvas Covered T YES 29 LF F N L L L H

G05 Shop 213 CW 0-4 Felt Pipe Insulation Canvas Covered T YES 66 LF F N L L L H

G05 Shop 223 GRY 4-8 White Fibrous Pipe Fittings Gray T YES 1 EA F N L L L H

G05 Shop 226 H 0-4 Fittings on Aircell Line Hard T YES 11 EA F N L L L H

G05 Shop 230 H 0-4 Fittings on Felt Line Hard T YES 4 EA F N L L L H

G06 Shop 206 WHT 4-8 Fibrous Pipe Insulation White T YES 45 LF F N L L M H


Basement




G06 Shop 230 H 0-4 Fittings on Felt Line Hard T YES 3 EA F N L L L H

G06 Shop 306 RWC Plaster Rough walls and/or Ceiling M ND 250 SF 0 NA

G08 Shop 201 CW 0-4 Fiberglass Pipe Insulation Canvas Covered T ND 6 LF 0 NA

G08 Shop 201 WR 0-4 Fiberglass Pipe Insulation White Replacement NS 0 NA

G08 Shop 209 CW 0-4 Aircell Pipe Insulation Canvas Covered T YES 3 LF F D L L L H

Basement




G08 Shop 230 H 0-4 Fittings on Felt Line Hard T YES 19 EA F D L L L H

G08 Shop 253 OFRI 0-4 PVC Fittings Fiberglass Filled On Fiberglass Replacement Insulation NS 0 NA

35 Storage 213 CW 0-4 Felt Pipe Insulation Canvas Covered T YES 4 LF F N L L L H

35 Storage 230 H 0-4 Fittings on Felt Line Hard T YES 1 EA F D L L L H

35 Storage 306 WC Plaster Walls And/Or Ceiling M ND 80 SF 0 NA

Basement

35 Storage 316 D Concrete Deck NS 0 NA

35 Storage 316 F Concrete Floor NS 0 NA

035B Storage 306 WC Plaster Walls And/Or Ceiling M ND 450 SF 0 NA

035B Storage 308 BRN Base Cove & Mastic Brown M ND 32 LF 0 NA

36 Storage 201 WR 0-4 Fiberglass Pipe Insulation White Replacement NS 0 NA

36 Storage 206 WHT 4-8 Fibrous Pipe Insulation White T YES 35 LF F D L L L H

36 Storage 209 CW 0-4 Aircell Pipe Insulation Canvas Covered T YES 55 LF F D L L L H

36 Storage 213 CW 0-4 Felt Pipe Insulation Canvas Covered T YES 55 LF F D L L L H

Basement

36 Storage 226 H 0-4 Fittings on Aircell Line Hard T YES 17 EA F D L L L H

36 Storage 230 H 0-4 Fittings on Felt Line Hard T YES 14 EA F N L L L H

36 Storage 236 BKR Vibration Joints Black Rubber NS 0 NA

36 Storage 250 SF Foam Board Insulation Silver Faced NS 0 NA

36 Storage 253 OFRI 0-4 PVC Fittings Fiberglass Filled On Fiberglass Replacement Insulation NS 0 NA



37 Storage 206 WHT 4-8 Fibrous Pipe Insulation White T YES 14 LF F N L L L M

Basement

37 Storage 209 CW 0-4 Aircell Pipe Insulation Canvas Covered T YES 30 LF F N L L L M

37 Storage 213 CW 0-4 Felt Pipe Insulation Canvas Covered T YES 18 LF F N L L L M

37 Storage 226 H 0-4 Fittings on Aircell Line Hard T YES 5 EA F N L L L M

37 Storage 230 H 0-4 Fittings on Felt Line Hard T YES 4 EA F N L L L H



G01A Storage 201 WR 0-4 Fiberglass Pipe Insulation White Replacement NS 0 NA

G01A Storage 209 CW 0-4 Aircell Pipe Insulation Canvas Covered T YES 28 LF F N L L L M

Basement


G01A Storage 213 CW 0-4 Felt Pipe Insulation Canvas Covered T YES 22 LF F N L L L M

G01A Storage 226 H 0-4 Fittings on Aircell Line Hard T YES 9 EA F D L L L M

G01A Storage 227 H 4-8 Fittings on Aircell Line Hard T YES 4 EA F D L L L M

G01A Storage 230 H 0-4 Fittings on Felt Line Hard T YES 5 EA F N L L L L

G01A Storage 236 CNV Vibration Joints Canvas T ND 1 EA 0 NA

G01A Storage 253 OFRI 0-4 PVC Fittings Fiberglass Filled On Fiberglass Replacement Insulation NS 0 NA

G01B Storage 209 CW 0-4 Aircell Pipe Insulation Canvas Covered T YES 14 LF F N L L L M

Basement

G01B Storage 210 CW 4-8 Aircell Pipe Insulation Canvas Covered T YES 110 LF F N L L L M

G01B Storage 213 CW 0-4 Felt Pipe Insulation Canvas Covered T YES 29 LF F N L L L M

G01B Storage 226 H 0-4 Fittings on Aircell Line Hard T YES 6 EA F N L L L M

G01B Storage 227 H 4-8 Fittings on Aircell Line Hard T YES 14 EA F N L L L M

G01B Storage 230 H 0-4 Fittings on Felt Line Hard T YES 3 EA F D L L L M

G02 Storage 201 WR 0-4 Fiberglass Pipe Insulation White Replacement NS 0 NA


G02 Storage 209 CW 0-4 Aircell Pipe Insulation Canvas Covered T YES 33 LF F N L L L H

Basement


G02 Storage 213 CW 0-4 Felt Pipe Insulation Canvas Covered T YES 79 LF F N L L L H

G02 Storage 226 H 0-4 Fittings on Aircell Line Hard T YES 8 EA F N L L L H


G02 Storage 230 H 0-4 Fittings on Felt Line Hard T YES 4 EA F D L L L H

G02 Storage 253 OFRI 0-4 PVC Fittings Fiberglass Filled On Fiberglass Replacement Insulation NS 0 NA


G07 Storage 209 CW 0-4 Aircell Pipe Insulation Canvas Covered T YES 18 LF F D L L L H

Basement


G07 Storage 213 CW 0-4 Felt Pipe Insulation Canvas Covered T YES 128 LF F D H L L H

G07 Storage 226 H 0-4 Fittings on Aircell Line Hard T YES 17 EA F D L L L H


G07 Storage 230 H 0-4 Fittings on Felt Line Hard T YES 22 EA F D L L L H

G07 Storage 236 RB Vibration Joints Rubber T NS 2 EA 0 NA

G11 Storage 201 CW 0-4 Fiberglass Pipe Insulation Canvas Covered T ND 20 LF 0 NA


Basement

G11 Storage 213 CW 0-4 Felt Pipe Insulation Canvas Covered T YES 23 LF F N L L L H

G11 Storage 230 H 0-4 Fittings on Felt Line Hard T YES 4 EA F N L L L H

G11 Storage 246 H 0-4 Fittings on Fiberglass Line Hard T YES 4 EA F D L L L H

G22A Storage 305 TC Sheetrock & Taping Compound Textured Ceiling M ND 100 SF 0 NA

G22A Storage 305 WC Sheetrock & Taping Compound Walls And/Or Ceiling M ND 240 SF 0 NA

G22A Storage 308 BRN Base Cove & Mastic Brown M ND 80 LF 0 NA

G22A Storage 311 BRW 9x9 Floor Tile & Mastic Brown W/Red & White Streaks M YES 200 SF N N L L L H

G22B Storage 305 TC Sheetrock & Taping Compound Textured Ceiling M ND 990 SF 0 NA

Basement

G22B Storage 305 WC Sheetrock & Taping Compound Walls And/Or Ceiling M ND 120 SF 0 NA

G22B Storage 308 BRN Base Cove & Mastic Brown M ND 32 LF 0 NA

G22B Storage 311 BRW 9x9 Floor Tile & Mastic Brown W/Red & White Streaks M YES 90 SF N N L L L H

G32A Storage 202 WR 4-8 Fiberglass Pipe Insulation White Replacement NS 0 NA

G32A Storage 206 WHT 4-8 Fibrous Pipe Insulation White T YES 55 LF F N L L L M


G32A Storage 213 CW 0-4 Felt Pipe Insulation Canvas Covered T YES 22 LF F D L L L M

G32A Storage 223 GRY 4-8 White Fibrous Pipe Fittings Gray T YES 13 EA F N L L L M

Basement

G32A Storage 226 H 0-4 Fittings on Aircell Line Hard T YES 10 EA F N L L L M

G32A Storage 230 H 0-4 Fittings on Felt Line Hard T YES 4 EA F D L L L M


G33 Storage 206 WHT 4-8 Fibrous Pipe Insulation White T YES 34 LF F D L L L M

G33 Storage 209 CW 0-4 Aircell Pipe Insulation Canvas Covered T YES 41 LF F D L L L M

G33 Storage 210 CW 4-8 Aircell Pipe Insulation Canvas Covered T YES 17 LF F N L L L M

G33 Storage 223 GRY 4-8 White Fibrous Pipe Fittings Gray T YES 4 EA F D L L L M

G33 Storage 226 H 0-4 Fittings on Aircell Line Hard T YES 20 EA F D L L L M

Basement

G33 Storage 227 H 4-8 Fittings on Aircell Line Hard T YES 2 EA F N L L L M

G33 Storage 253 OFRI 0-4 PVC Fittings Fiberglass Filled On Fiberglass Replacement Insulation NS 0 NA

17 Store Room 201 CW 0-4 Fiberglass Pipe Insulation Canvas Covered T ND 160 LF 0 NA

17 Store Room 201 WR 0-4 Fiberglass Pipe Insulation White Replacement NS 0 NA

17 Store Room 203 CNV 8-12 Fiberglass Pipe insulation Canvas T ND 28 LF 0 NA

17 Store Room 209 CW 0-4 Aircell Pipe Insulation Canvas Covered T YES 12 LF F N L L L H

17 Store Room 210 CW 4-8 Aircell Pipe Insulation Canvas Covered T YES 52 LF F N L L L H

17 Store Room 213 CW 0-4 Felt Pipe Insulation Canvas Covered T YES 55 LF F N L L L H

Basement

17 Store Room 226 H 0-4 Fittings on Aircell Line Hard T YES 6 EA F D L L L H

17 Store Room 227 H 4-8 Fittings on Aircell Line Hard T YES 1 EA F D L L L H

17 Store Room 230 H 0-4 Fittings on Felt Line Hard T YES 6 EA F N L L L H

17 Store Room 246 H 0-4 Fittings on Fiberglass Line Hard T YES 33 EA F N L L L H

17 Store Room 248 H 8-12 Fittings on Fiberglass Line Hard T YES 2 EA F D L L L H

17 Store Room 253 OFRI 0-4 PVC Fittings Fiberglass Filled On Fiberglass Replacement Insulation NS 0 NA

17A Store Room Location inferred, NOVA group has "0.708333333333333" in original 201 CW 0-4 Fiberglass Pipe Insulation Canvas Covered T ND 225 LF 0 NA

17A Store Room 203 CNV 8-12 Fiberglass Pipe insulation Canvas T ND 45 LF 0 NA

Basement

17A Store Room 246 H 0-4 Fittings on Fiberglass Line Hard T YES 91 EA F D L L L H

17A Store Room 248 H 8-12 Fittings on Fiberglass Line Hard T YES 5 EA F N L L L H

G29 Vending Area 201 WR 0-4 Fiberglass Pipe Insulation White Replacement NS 0 NA

G29 Vending Area 202 WR 4-8 Fiberglass Pipe Insulation White Replacement NS 0 NA

G29 Vending Area 209 CW 0-4 Aircell Pipe Insulation Canvas Covered T YES 1 LF F N L L L M

G29 Vending Area 210 CW 4-8 Aircell Pipe Insulation Canvas Covered T YES 14 LF F N L L L M

G29 Vending Area 226 H 0-4 Fittings on Aircell Line Hard T YES 1 EA F N L L L M

G29 Vending Area 227 H 4-8 Fittings on Aircell Line Hard T YES 4 EA F D L L L M

Basement

G29 Vending Area 253 OFRI 0-4 PVC Fittings Fiberglass Filled On Fiberglass Replacement Insulation NS 0 NA

G29 Vending Area 255 OFRI 4-8 PVC Fitting Fiberglass Filled On Fiberglass Replacement Insulation NS 0 NA

G29 Vending Area 306 WC Plaster Walls And/Or Ceiling M ND 600 SF 0 NA

G29 Vending Area 308 GRY Base Cove & Mastic Gray M ND 70 LF 0 NA

G29A Vending Area 201 WR 0-4 Fiberglass Pipe Insulation White Replacement NS 0 NA

G29A Vending Area 202 WR 4-8 Fiberglass Pipe Insulation White Replacement NS 0 NA

G29A Vending Area 210 CW 4-8 Aircell Pipe Insulation Canvas Covered T YES 21 LF F N L L L M

G29A Vending Area 253 OFRI 0-4 PVC Fittings Fiberglass Filled On Fiberglass Replacement Insulation NS 0 NA

Basement

G29A Vending Area 255 OFRI 4-8 PVC Fitting Fiberglass Filled On Fiberglass Replacement Insulation NS 0 NA

G29A Vending Area 304 PK Ceiling Tile Adhesive Pucks M ND 400 SF 0 NA

G29A Vending Area 306 RT Plaster Rough Trowled Ceiling M ND 600 SF 0 NA

G29A Vending Area 306 RWC Plaster Rough walls and/or Ceiling M ND 450 SF 0 NA

G29A Vending Area 308 5BR Base Cove & Mastic 5" Brown M ND 100 LF 0 NA

G29A Vending Area 310 BM 12x12 Floor Tile & Mastic Black Marbled M YES 600 SF N N L L L H

G29A Vending Area 310 YLW 12x12 Floor Tile & Mastic Yellow M YES 49 SF N N L L L H

G30 Wieght Room 209 CW 0-4 Aircell Pipe Insulation Canvas Covered T YES 10 LF F N L L L H

Basement

G30 Wieght Room 210 CW 4-8 Aircell Pipe Insulation Canvas Covered T YES 126 LF F N L L L H

G30 Wieght Room 213 CW 0-4 Felt Pipe Insulation Canvas Covered T YES 9 LF F N L L L H

G30 Wieght Room 226 H 0-4 Fittings on Aircell Line Hard T YES 20 EA F D L L L H

G30 Wieght Room 227 H 4-8 Fittings on Aircell Line Hard T YES 2 EA F D L L L H

G30 Wieght Room 304 PK Ceiling Tile Adhesive Pucks M ND 760 SF 0 NA

G30 Wieght Room 306 RT Plaster Rough Trowled Ceiling M ND 760 SF 0 NA

G30 Wieght Room 306 RWC Plaster Rough walls and/or Ceiling M ND 1200 SF 0 NA

G30 Wieght Room 308 BRN Base Cove & Mastic Brown M ND 122 LF 0 NA

Basement

G30 Wieght Room 309 TN Mastic - Carpet Tan M ND 760 SF 0 NA

G30 Wieght Room 311 BRM 9x9 Floor Tile & Mastic Brown Modeled M YES 760 SF N N L L L L

East Women's Restroom Above Ceiling Limited Visibility 201 WR 0-4 Fiberglass Pipe Insulation White Replacement NS 0 NA

East Women's Restroom Above Ceiling Limited Visibility 210 CW 4-8 Aircell Pipe Insulation Canvas Covered T YES 20 LF F N L L L L

East Women's Restroom 201 WR 0-4 Fiberglass Pipe Insulation White Replacement NS 0 NA

East Women's Restroom 209 CW 0-4 Aircell Pipe Insulation Canvas Covered T YES 13 LF F N L L L L

East Women's Restroom 213 CW 0-4 Felt Pipe Insulation Canvas Covered T YES 9 LF F N L L L L

East Women's Restroom 226 H 0-4 Fittings on Aircell Line Hard T YES 9 EA F D L L L L

Basement

East Women's Restroom 230 H 0-4 Fittings on Felt Line Hard T YES 3 EA F N L L L L

East Women's Restroom 253 OFRI 0-4 PVC Fittings Fiberglass Filled On Fiberglass Replacement Insulation NS 0 NA

East Women's Restroom 303 PPH 2x4 Ceiling Tile Pitted Pinhole M ND 140 SF 0 NA

East Women's Restroom 305 TC Sheetrock & Taping Compound Textured Wall M ND 216 SF 0 NA

East Women's Restroom 306 WC Plaster Walls And/Or Ceiling M ND 356 SF 0 NA

East Women's Restroom 315 WHT Ceramic Tile White M PRE 140 SF N N L L L H NA

G10B Women's Restroom 210 CW 4-8 Aircell Pipe Insulation Canvas Covered T YES 25 LF F N L L L H

G10B Women's Restroom 213 CW 0-4 Felt Pipe Insulation Canvas Covered T YES 10 LF F N L L L H

Basement

G10B Women's Restroom 227 H 4-8 Fittings on Aircell Line Hard T YES 1 EA F D L L L H

G10B Women's Restroom 230 H 0-4 Fittings on Felt Line Hard T YES 3 EA F N L L L H

G10B Women's Restroom 306 WC Plaster Walls And/Or Ceiling M ND 400 SF 0 NA

G10B Women's Restroom Was already removed at time of sampling. 310 BRM 12x12 Floor Tile & Mastic Brown Modeled NS 0 NA

G10B Women's Restroom Was already removed at time of sampling. 311 BRM 9x9 Floor Tile & Mastic Brown Modeled YES N N L L L H NA

G10B Women's Restroom 315 WHT Ceramic Tile White M PRE 20 SF N N L L L H NA

Basement to Floor 01

South East Stairway 209 CW 0-4 Aircell Pipe Insulation Canvas Covered T YES 22 LF F N L L L H

South East Stairway 301 TPH 1x1 Ceiling Tile Textured Pinhole M ND 380 SF 0 NA

South East Stairway 306 RWC Plaster Rough walls and/or Ceiling M ND 460 SF 0 NA

South East Stairway 317 GRY Terrazzo Gray M PRE 280 SF N N L L L H

Basement-Floor 03

North Center Stairway 301 TPH 1x1 Ceiling Tile Textured Pinhole M ND 400 SF 0 NA

North Center Stairway 306 RWC Plaster Rough walls and/or Ceiling M ND 720 SF 0 NA

North Center Stairway 310 BM 12x12 Floor Tile & Mastic Black Marbled M YES 400 SF N N L L L H

North Center Stairway 317 GRY Terrazzo Gray M PRE 50 SF N N L L L H

North Center Stairway 341 BLK Stair Tread Black M ND 200 SF 0 NA

North East Stairway 301 TPH 1x1 Ceiling Tile Textured Pinhole M ND 400 SF 0 NA

North East Stairway 306 RWC Plaster Rough walls and/or Ceiling M ND 720 SF 0 NA

North East Stairway 310 BM 12x12 Floor Tile & Mastic Black Marbled M YES 400 SF N N L L L H 1

Basement-Floor 03

North East Stairway 317 GRY Terrazzo Gray M PRE 50 SF N N L L L H

North East Stairway 341 BLK Stair Tread Black M ND 200 SF 0 NA

North West Stairway 301 TPH 1x1 Ceiling Tile Textured Pinhole M ND 400 SF 0 NA

North West Stairway 306 RWC Plaster Rough walls and/or Ceiling M ND 720 SF 0 NA

North West Stairway 310 BM 12x12 Floor Tile & Mastic Black Marbled M YES 400 SF N N L L L H

North West Stairway 317 GRY Terrazzo Gray M PRE 50 SF N N L L L H

North West Stairway 341 BLK Stair Tread Black M ND 200 SF 0 NA

South Center Stairway 301 TPH 1x1 Ceiling Tile Textured Pinhole M ND 400 SF 0 NA

Basement-Floor 03

South Center Stairway 306 RWC Plaster Rough walls and/or Ceiling M ND 720 SF 0 NA

South Center Stairway 310 BM 12x12 Floor Tile & Mastic Black Marbled M YES 400 SF N N L L L H

South Center Stairway 317 GRY Terrazzo Gray M PRE 50 SF N N L L L H

South Center Stairway 341 BLK Stair Tread Black M ND 200 SF 0 NA

South West Stairway 301 TPH 1x1 Ceiling Tile Textured Pinhole M ND 400 SF 0 NA

South West Stairway 306 RWC Plaster Rough walls and/or Ceiling M ND 720 SF 0 NA

South West Stairway 310 BM 12x12 Floor Tile & Mastic Black Marbled M YES 400 SF N N L L L H

South West Stairway 317 GRY Terrazzo Gray M PRE 50 SF N N L L L H

Basement-Floor 03

South West Stairway 341 BLK Stair Tread Black M ND 200 SF 0 NA

South East Stairway 301 TPH 1x1 Ceiling Tile Textured Pinhole M ND 400 SF 0 NA

South East Stairway 310 BM 12x12 Floor Tile & Mastic Black Marbled M YES 400 SF N N L L L H

South East Stairway 317 GRY Terrazzo Gray M PRE 50 SF N N L L L H

South East Stairway 341 BLK Stair Tread Black M ND 200 SF 0 NA

Floor 01

123 Bathroom 306 WC Plaster Walls And/Or Ceiling M ND 120 SF 0 NA

123 Bathroom 315 WF Ceramic Tile White Floor M PRE 20 SF N N L L L H NA

123 Bathroom 315 WW Ceramic Tile White Wall M PRE 160 SF N N L L L H NA

East Bathroom 201 WR 0-4 Fiberglass Pipe Insulation White Replacement NS 0 NA

East Bathroom 253 OFRI 0-4 PVC Fittings Fiberglass Filled On Fiberglass Replacement Insulation NS 0 NA

East Bathroom 302 SR 2x2 Ceiling Tile Sheet Rock M ND 160 SF 0 NA

East Bathroom 306 WC Plaster Walls And/Or Ceiling M ND 500 SF 0 NA

East Bathroom 315 GFS Ceramic Tile Gray Floor Square M PRE 496 SF N N L L L H NA

Floor 01

East Bathroom 315 WW Ceramic Tile White Wall M PRE 896 SF N N L L L H NA




103 Bathroom 209 CW 0-4 Aircell Pipe Insulation Canvas Covered T YES 10 LF F N L L L H




Floor 01





127 Bathroom 315 WF Ceramic Tile White Floor M PRE 120 SF NA

127 Bathroom 315 WHT Ceramic Tile White M PRE 120 SF NA

127 Bathroom 315 WW Ceramic Tile White Wall M PRE 896 SF NA

105 Dining Room INACCESSIBLE 301 FSB 1x1 Ceiling Tile Framed Sunburst M PRE 1440 SF F N L L L L

Floor 01

105 Dining Room 306 RWC Plaster Rough walls and/or Ceiling M ND 2080 SF 0 NA

105 Dining Room 306 WC Plaster Walls And/Or Ceiling M ND 450 SF 0 NA

105 Dining Room 308 5BR Base Cove & Mastic 5" Brown M ND 208 LF 0 NA

105 Dining Room 309 TN Mastic - Carpet Tan M ND 1470 SF 0 NA

105 Dining Room 315 12ET Ceramic Tile 12" Earth Tones M PRE 900 SF N N L L L H NA

105 Dining Room 316 F Concrete Floor NS 0 NA

123 Dorm Room 209 CW 0-4 Aircell Pipe Insulation Canvas Covered T YES 1 LF F N L L L H

123 Dorm Room 226 H 0-4 Fittings on Aircell Line Hard T YES 2 EA F N L L L H

Floor 01

123 Dorm Room 306 WC Plaster Walls And/Or Ceiling M ND 680 SF 0 NA

123 Dorm Room 309 TN Mastic - Carpet Tan M ND 160 SF 0 NA

123 Dorm Room 311 BLK 9x9 Floor Tile & Mastic Black M YES 160 SF N N L L L L


101 Dorm Room 308 2BR Base Cove & Mastic 2" Brown M ND 46 LF 0 NA


101 Dorm Room 311 BKS 9x9 Floor Tile & Mastic Black W/Red & Tan Streaks M ND 220 SF 0 NA


Floor 01



jksturos

Text Box

ND

jksturos

Text Box

ND

jksturos

Text Box

ND

jksturos

Text Box

ND

jksturos

Text Box

ND

jksturos

Text Box

ND

jksturos

Text Box

ND

jksturos

Text Box

ND

jksturos

Text Box

ND

jksturos

Text Box

ND

jksturos

Text Box

ND

jksturos

Text Box

ND

jksturos

Text Box

ND



102 Dorm Room 311 BRW 9x9 Floor Tile & Mastic Brown W/Red & White Streaks M YES 160 SF N N L L L L




Floor 01









Floor 01









Floor 01









Floor 01





111 Dorm Room 311 BLK 9x9 Floor Tile & Mastic Black M YES 160 SF NA

129 Conference Room Inferred (added July 2012) 309 TN Mastic - Carpet Tan M ND 160 SF 14-Jun-11 300 SF Northwoods Enivronmental 0 NA

129 Conference Room Inferred (added July 2012) 311 BRW 9x9 Floor Tile & Mastic Brown W/Red & White Streaks M YES 160 SF 14-Jun-11 300 SF Northwoods Enivronmental N N L L L L




Floor 01







147 Dorm Room 309 TN Mastic - Carpet Tan M ND 160 SF 2-Jul-10 160 SF Northwoods Environmental 0 NA


Floor 01









Floor 01


148 Dorm Room 311 BRW 9x9 Floor Tile & Mastic Brown W/Red & White Streaks M YES 160 SF N N L L L H

149 Dorm Room 209 CW 0-4 Aircell Pipe Insulation Canvas Covered T YES 31 LF L L L H NA






Floor 01






151 Dorm Room 209 CW 0-4 Aircell Pipe Insulation Canvas Covered T YES 2 LF F N L L L L



Floor 01








Floor 01


01-Jan-05 160 Northwoods

156 Dorm Room Above Ceiling INACCESSIBLE 306 WC Plaster Walls And/Or Ceiling M ND 680 SF 0 NA




156 Dorm Room 309 CSC Mastic - Carpet Carpet Squares Clear Adhesive M ND 160 SF 0 NA

156 Dorm Room 311 BRW 9x9 Floor Tile & Mastic Brown W/Red & White Streaks M YES 160 SF NA

Floor 01






158 Dorm Room 311 BRW 9x9 Floor Tile & Mastic Brown W/Red & White Streaks M YES 160 SF N N L L L L 01-Jan-05 160 Northwoods


Floor 01









Floor 01









Floor 01








Floor 01






164 Dorm Room 311 BLK 9x9 Floor Tile & Mastic Black M YES 260 SF NA



Floor 01









Floor 01

166 Dorm Room 312 BLK Mastic - Floor Tile Black M YES 100 SF NA 01-Jan-03 100 Northwoods





167 Dorm Room 311 BRM 9x9 Floor Tile & Mastic Brown Modeled M YES 260 SF NA


Floor 01









Floor 01



171 Dorm Room 209 CW 0-4 Aircell Pipe Insulation Canvas Covered T YES 10 LF F N L L L L

171 Dorm Room 226 H 0-4 Fittings on Aircell Line Hard T YES 1 EA F N L L L L





Floor 01







173 Dorm Room 309 TN Mastic - Carpet Tan M ND 160 SF 14-Jun-11 160 SF Northwoods Enivronmental 0 NA

173 Dorm Room 311 BRW 9x9 Floor Tile & Mastic Brown W/Red & White Streaks M YES 160 SF 14-Jun-11 160 SF Northwoods Enivronmental N N L L L L

Floor 01









Floor 01



176 Dorm Room 209 CW 0-4 Aircell Pipe Insulation Canvas Covered T YES 11 LF NA






Floor 01









Floor 01









Floor 01









Floor 01






188 Dorm Room 311 BRW 9x9 Floor Tile & Mastic Brown W/Red & White Streaks M YES 160 SF F N L L L L



Floor 01




East Entryway 306 WC Plaster Walls And/Or Ceiling M ND 200 SF 0 NA

East Entryway 315 BSF Ceramic Tile Black Slate Floor M PRE 40 SF N N L L L H NA

East Entryway 340 W Marble Walls NS 0 NA

West Entryway 306 WC Plaster Walls And/Or Ceiling M ND 200 SF 0 NA

West Entryway 315 BSF Ceramic Tile Black Slate Floor M PRE 40 SF N N L L L H NA

Floor 01

West Entryway 340 W Marble Walls NS 0 NA

Center Hallway Chase Limited Visibility 209 CW 0-4 Aircell Pipe Insulation Canvas Covered T YES 11 LF F N L L L L

Center Hallway Chase 226 H 0-4 Fittings on Aircell Line Hard T YES 3 EA F N L L L L

East/West Hallway East Above Ceiling 306 RT Plaster Rough Trowled Ceiling M ND 696 SF 0 NA

East/West Hallway East 303 WP 2x4 Ceiling Tile Worm Pinhole M ND 696 SF 0 NA

East/West Hallway East 304 PK Ceiling Tile Adhesive Pucks M ND 696 SF 0 NA

East/West Hallway East 306 RWC Plaster Rough walls and/or Ceiling M ND 2320 SF 0 NA

East/West Hallway East 309 TN Mastic - Carpet Tan M ND 690 SF 0 NA

Floor 01

East/West Hallway East 310 BM 12x12 Floor Tile & Mastic Black Marbled M YES 8 SF N N L L L H

East/West Hallway East 311 BLK 9x9 Floor Tile & Mastic Black M YES 690 SF N N L L L L

North/South Hallway East Above Ceiling 304 PK Ceiling Tile Adhesive Pucks M ND 552 SF 0 NA

North/South Hallway East 303 WHP 2x4 Ceiling Tile Worm Track Pinhole M ND 952 SF 0 NA

North/South Hallway East 306 RWC Plaster Rough walls and/or Ceiling M ND 600 SF 0 NA

North/South Hallway East 309 TN Mastic - Carpet Tan M ND 552 SF 0 NA

North/South Hallway East 311 BLK 9x9 Floor Tile & Mastic Black M YES 552 SF N N L L L L

North/South Hallway West Above Ceiling 306 RT Plaster Rough Trowled Ceiling M ND 252 SF 0 NA

Floor 01

North/South Hallway West 303 WP 2x4 Ceiling Tile Worm Pinhole M ND 252 SF 0 NA

North/South Hallway West 304 PK Ceiling Tile Adhesive Pucks M ND 252 SF 0 NA

North/South Hallway West 309 TN Mastic - Carpet Tan M ND 252 SF 0 NA

North/South Hallway West 311 BLK 9x9 Floor Tile & Mastic Black M YES 252 SF N N L L L L

IE Janitorial Closet 306 WC Plaster Walls And/Or Ceiling M ND 120 SF 0 NA

IE Janitorial Closet 310 BM 12x12 Floor Tile & Mastic Black Marbled M YES 9 SF N N L L L H

J12 Janitorial Closet 209 CW 0-4 Aircell Pipe Insulation Canvas Covered T YES 1 LF F N L L L H

J12 Janitorial Closet 213 CW 0-4 Felt Pipe Insulation Canvas Covered T YES 1 LF F D L L L H

Floor 01

J12 Janitorial Closet 306 WC Plaster Walls And/Or Ceiling M ND 190 SF 0 NA

Paper Chute East Janitorial Closet 306 WC Plaster Walls And/Or Ceiling M ND 65 SF 0 NA

Paper Chute East Janitorial Closet 310 BM 12x12 Floor Tile & Mastic Black Marbled M YES 4 SF N N L L L H

100 Kitchen Above Ceiling 321 GDS Caulk Gray Duct Sealent M ND 10 SF 0 NA

100 Kitchen 201 WR 0-4 Fiberglass Pipe Insulation White Replacement NS 0 NA

100 Kitchen 253 OFRI 0-4 PVC Fittings Fiberglass Filled On Fiberglass Replacement Insulation NS 0 NA

100 Kitchen 302 SR 2x2 Ceiling Tile Sheet Rock M ND 1938 SF 0 NA

100 Kitchen 305 WC Sheetrock & Taping Compound Walls And/Or Ceiling M ND 450 SF 0 NA

Floor 01

100 Kitchen 306 WC Plaster Walls And/Or Ceiling M ND 850 SF 0 NA

100 Kitchen 315 12ET Ceramic Tile 12" Earth Tones M PRE 900 SF N N L L L H NA

100 Kitchen 315 44ER Ceramic Tile 4x4"Earth Red M PRE 1200 SF N N L L L H NA

100 Kitchen 315 46T Ceramic Tile 4X6" Tan Wall M PRE 650 SF N N L L L H NA

100 Kitchen 315 4BW Ceramic Tile 4" Brown Wall M PRE 1200 SF N N L L L L NA

114 Kitchen 226 H 0-4 Fittings on Aircell Line Hard T YES 2 EA F N L L L H

114 Kitchen 306 RWC Plaster Rough walls and/or Ceiling M ND 42 SF 0 NA

114 Kitchen 306 WC Plaster Walls And/Or Ceiling M ND 11 SF 0 NA

Floor 01

114 Kitchen Was already removed at time of sampling. 310 BMA 12x12 Floor Tile & Mastic Brown Marble NS 0 NA

North Entry Kitchen 305 WC Sheetrock & Taping Compound Walls And/Or Ceiling M ND 90 SF 0 NA

113 Living Room 209 CW 0-4 Aircell Pipe Insulation Canvas Covered T YES 11 LF F N L L L H

113 Living Room 209 CW 0-4 Aircell Pipe Insulation Canvas Covered T YES 2 LF F D L L L H

113 Living Room 306 RWC Plaster Rough walls and/or Ceiling M ND 752 SF 0 NA

113 Living Room 309 TN Mastic - Carpet Tan M ND 192 SF 0 NA

113 Living Room Was already removed at time of sampling. 311 BLK 9x9 Floor Tile & Mastic Black YES N N L L L L NA

Floor 01

116 Lobby 301 HP 1x1 Ceiling Tile Hole Pattern M ND 485 SF 0 NA

116 Lobby 301 TPH 1x1 Ceiling Tile Textured Pinhole M ND 34 SF 0 NA

116 Lobby 306 RWC Plaster Rough walls and/or Ceiling M ND 960 SF 0 NA

116 Lobby 315 CS Ceramic Tile Cobble Stone M PRE 485 SF N N L L L H NA

130 Lobby 301 HP 1x1 Ceiling Tile Hole Pattern M ND 560 SF 0 NA

130 Lobby 301 TPH 1x1 Ceiling Tile Textured Pinhole M ND 35 SF 0 NA

130 Lobby 306 RWC Plaster Rough walls and/or Ceiling M ND 1120 SF 0 NA

130 Lobby 315 CS Ceramic Tile Cobble Stone M PRE 560 SF N N L L L H NA

Floor 01

100A Office 305 WC Sheetrock & Taping Compound Walls And/Or Ceiling M ND 104 SF 0 NA

100A Office 308 5BR Base Cove & Mastic 5" Brown M ND 21 LF 0 NA

100A Office 309 TN Mastic - Carpet Tan M ND 40 SF 0 NA

100A Office 316 F Concrete Floor NS 0 NA

100B Office 305 WC Sheetrock & Taping Compound Walls And/Or Ceiling M ND 90 SF 0 NA

100B Office 308 5BR Base Cove & Mastic 5" Brown M ND 32 LF 0 NA

100B Office 309 TN Mastic - Carpet Tan M ND 90 SF 0 NA

100B Office 316 F Concrete Floor NS 0 NA

Floor 01

100C Office Above Ceiling 224 H 8-12 White Fibrous Pipe Fittings Hard T YES 1 EA F N L L L L

100C Office 302 SR 2x2 Ceiling Tile Sheet Rock M ND 80 SF 0 NA

100C Office 306 WC Plaster Walls And/Or Ceiling M ND 320 SF 0 NA

100C Office 308 5BR Base Cove & Mastic 5" Brown M ND 32 LF 0 NA

100C Office 309 TN Mastic - Carpet Tan M ND 80 SF 0 NA

100C Office 316 F Concrete Floor NS 0 NA

115 Office 301 FSB 1x1 Ceiling Tile Framed Sunburst M PRE 200 SF F N L L L L

115 Office 306 RWC Plaster Rough walls and/or Ceiling M ND 600 SF 0 NA

Floor 01

115 Office 306 WC Plaster Walls And/Or Ceiling M ND 20 SF 0 NA

115 Office 308 BLK Base Cove & Mastic Black M ND 4 LF 0 NA

115 Office 309 TN Mastic - Carpet Tan M ND 200 SF 0 NA

115 Office 311 BLK 9x9 Floor Tile & Mastic Black M YES 200 SF N N L L L L

117 Office 301 FSB 1x1 Ceiling Tile Framed Sunburst M PRE 690 SF F N L L L L




Floor 01

117 Office 311 BKS 9x9 Floor Tile & Mastic Black W/Red & Tan Streaks M ND 936 SF 0 NA


127 Office 226 H 0-4 Fittings on Aircell Line Hard T YES 1 EA F N L L L H





136 Office 226 H 0-4 Fittings on Aircell Line Hard T YES 2 EA F D L L L M

Floor 01

136 Office 305 WC Sheetrock & Taping Compound Walls And/Or Ceiling M ND 160 SF 0 NA


136 Office 309 CSC Mastic - Carpet Carpet Squares Clear Adhesive M ND 288 SF 0 NA

136 Office 310 BM 12x12 Floor Tile & Mastic Black Marbled M YES 288 SF N N L L L L 01-Jan-04 288 Northwoods


181 Office 301 LHP 1x1 Ceiling Tile Large Hole Pattern M ND 150 SF 0 NA

181 Office 305 WC Sheetrock & Taping Compound Walls And/Or Ceiling M ND 100 SF 0 NA

Floor 01




181A Office 209 CW 0-4 Aircell Pipe Insulation Canvas Covered T YES 11 LF F N L L L H

181A Office 226 H 0-4 Fittings on Aircell Line Hard T YES 2 EA F N L L L M

181A Office 301 LHP 1x1 Ceiling Tile Large Hole Pattern M ND 160 SF 0 NA

181A Office 306 WC Plaster Walls And/Or Ceiling M ND 520 SF 0 NA

181A Office 309 TN Mastic - Carpet Tan M ND 160 SF 0 NA

Floor 01

181A Office 311 BKS 9x9 Floor Tile & Mastic Black W/Red & Tan Streaks M ND 160 SF 0 NA

181B Office 209 CW 0-4 Aircell Pipe Insulation Canvas Covered T YES 11 LF F N L L L H

181B Office 226 H 0-4 Fittings on Aircell Line Hard T YES 2 EA F N L L L M

181B Office 301 LHP 1x1 Ceiling Tile Large Hole Pattern M ND 170 SF 0 NA

181B Office 306 WC Plaster Walls And/Or Ceiling M ND 540 SF 0 NA

181B Office 309 TN Mastic - Carpet Tan M ND 170 SF 0 NA

181B Office 311 BKS 9x9 Floor Tile & Mastic Black W/Red & Tan Streaks M ND 170 SF 0 NA


Floor 01

191 Office 226 H 0-4 Fittings on Aircell Line Hard T YES 2 EA F N L L L M


191 Office 309 CSC Mastic - Carpet Carpet Squares Clear Adhesive M ND 192 SF 0 NA

191 Office 312 BLK Mastic - Floor Tile Black M YES 192 SF N N L L L L 01-Jan-04 192 Northwoods

116A Storage 306 WC Plaster Walls And/Or Ceiling M ND 65 SF 0 NA

116A Storage 308 2BR Base Cove & Mastic 2" Brown M ND 6 LF 0 NA

116A Storage 310 BM 12x12 Floor Tile & Mastic Black Marbled M YES 6 SF N N L L L M

Floor 01

116B Storage Above Ceiling 209 CW 0-4 Aircell Pipe Insulation Canvas Covered T YES 4 LF F D L L L L 3 1

116B Storage Above Ceiling 213 CW 0-4 Felt Pipe Insulation Canvas Covered T YES 6 LF F N L L L L

116B Storage Above Ceiling 226 H 0-4 Fittings on Aircell Line Hard T YES 2 EA F N L L L L

116B Storage Above Ceiling 230 H 0-4 Fittings on Felt Line Hard T YES 6 EA F D L L L L

116B Storage 302 SR 2x2 Ceiling Tile Sheet Rock M ND 30 SF 0 NA

116B Storage 306 WC Plaster Walls And/Or Ceiling M ND 172 SF 0 NA

116B Storage 316 F Concrete Floor NS 0 NA

Floor 01

116C Storage Above Ceiling Limited Visibility 213 CW 0-4 Felt Pipe Insulation Canvas Covered T YES 40 LF F D L L L L

116C Storage Above Ceiling Limited Visibility 230 H 0-4 Fittings on Felt Line Hard T YES 9 EA F SD L L L L

116C Storage 302 SR 2x2 Ceiling Tile Sheet Rock M ND 72 SF 0 NA

116C Storage 306 WC Plaster Walls And/Or Ceiling M ND 340 SF 0 NA

136A Storage 209 CW 0-4 Aircell Pipe Insulation Canvas Covered T YES 1 LF F N L L L L

136A Storage 226 H 0-4 Fittings on Aircell Line Hard T YES 1 EA F N L L L L


136A Storage 315 WF Ceramic Tile White Floor M PRE 20 SF N N L L L M NA

Floor 01

136A Storage 315 WW Ceramic Tile White Wall M PRE 50 SF N N L L L M NA



189 Storage 209 CW 0-4 Aircell Pipe Insulation Canvas Covered T YES 30 LF F N L L L H

189 Storage 226 H 0-4 Fittings on Aircell Line Hard T YES 4 EA F N L L L H


Office Supplies Store Room 306 WC Plaster Walls And/Or Ceiling M ND 120 SF 0 NA

Office Supplies Store Room 311 BKS 9x9 Floor Tile & Mastic Black W/Red & Tan Streaks M ND 12 SF 0 NA

Floor 02

East Bathroom Above Ceiling Limited Visibility 209 CW 0-4 Aircell Pipe Insulation Canvas Covered T YES 6 LF F N L L L L

East Bathroom Above Ceiling Limited Visibility 209 CW 0-4 Aircell Pipe Insulation Canvas Covered T YES 6 LF F N L L L L

East Bathroom Above Ceiling Limited Visibility 213 CW 0-4 Felt Pipe Insulation Canvas Covered T YES 15 LF F N L L L L

East Bathroom Above Ceiling Limited Visibility 226 H 0-4 Fittings on Aircell Line Hard T YES 2 EA F N L L L L

East Bathroom Above Ceiling Limited Visibility 230 H 0-4 Fittings on Felt Line Hard T YES 8 EA F N L L L L

East Bathroom 201 WR 0-4 Fiberglass Pipe Insulation White Replacement NS 0 NA

East Bathroom 226 H 0-4 Fittings on Aircell Line Hard T YES 2 EA F N L L L L

Floor 02

East Bathroom 302 WP 2x2 Ceiling Tile Worm Pinhole M ND 160 SF 0 NA





West Bathroom 302 WP 2x2 Ceiling Tile Worm Pinhole M ND 160 SF 0 NA

West Bathroom 306 WC Plaster Walls And/Or Ceiling M ND 500 SF 0 NA

West Bathroom 315 GFS Ceramic Tile Gray Floor Square M PRE 496 SF N N L L L H NA

Floor 02

West Bathroom 315 WW Ceramic Tile White Wall M PRE 896 SF N N L L L H NA

Center Bathroom 301 HP 1x1 Ceiling Tile Hole Pattern M ND 160 SF 0 NA

Center Bathroom 306 WC Plaster Walls And/Or Ceiling M ND 500 SF 0 NA

Center Bathroom 315 GFS Ceramic Tile Gray Floor Square M PRE 496 SF N N L L L H NA

Center Bathroom 315 WW Ceramic Tile White Wall M PRE 896 SF N N L L L H NA




Floor 02


201 Dorm Room 309 TN Mastic - Carpet Tan M ND 160 SF 2-Jun-10 160 SF Northwoods Environmental 0 NA







Floor 02





203 Dorm Room 309 TN Mastic - Carpet Tan M ND 160 SF 0 NA 01-Jun-07 160 Northwoods

203 Dorm Room 311 BRW 9x9 Floor Tile & Mastic Brown W/Red & White Streaks M YES 160 SF N N L L L H 01-Jun-07 160 Northwoods

Floor 02









Floor 02








Floor 02


jksturos

Text Box

ND

jksturos

Text Box

ND

jksturos

Text Box

ND

jksturos

Text Box

ND

jksturos

Text Box

ND

jksturos

Text Box

ND

01-Jun-07 160 Northwoods

206 Dorm Room 311 BRW 9x9 Floor Tile & Mastic Brown W/Red & White Streaks M YES 160 SF N N L L L L 01-Jun-07 160 Northwoods





Floor 02









Floor 02






214 Dorm Room 311 BRW 9x9 Floor Tile & Mastic Brown W/Red & White Streaks M YES 160 SF 14-Jun-11 160 SF Northwoods Enivronmental N N L L L L



Floor 02









Floor 02









Floor 02









Floor 02









Floor 02









Floor 02









Floor 02









Floor 02







Floor 02









Floor 02









Floor 02









Floor 02









Floor 02









Floor 02







238B Dorm Room 209 CW 0-4 Aircell Pipe Insulation Canvas Covered T YES 10 LF F N L L L H

238B Dorm Room 226 H 0-4 Fittings on Aircell Line Hard T YES 1 EA NA

Floor 02

238B Dorm Room 306 WC Plaster Walls And/Or Ceiling M ND 450 SF 0 NA

238B Dorm Room 309 TN Mastic - Carpet Tan M ND 224 SF 0 NA

238B Dorm Room 311 BKS 9x9 Floor Tile & Mastic Black W/Red & Tan Streaks M ND 224 SF 0 NA






Floor 02







240 Dorm Room 311 BKS 9x9 Floor Tile & Mastic Black W/Red & Tan Streaks M ND 260 SF 14-Jun-11 260 SF Northwoods Enivronmental 0 NA


Floor 02





241 Dorm Room 311 BRW 9x9 Floor Tile & Mastic Brown W/Red & White Streaks M YES 160 SF 14-Jun-11 160 SF Northwoods Enivronmental N N L L L H




Floor 02


242 Dorm Room 311 BRW 9x9 Floor Tile & Mastic Brown W/Red & White Streaks M YES 160 SF 14-Jun-11 160 SF Northwoods Enivronmental N N L L L H

243 Dorm Room Above Ceiling 304 PK Ceiling Tile Adhesive Pucks M ND 315 SF 0 NA






Floor 02









Floor 02









Floor 02









Floor 02









Floor 02









Floor 02









Floor 02







Floor 02




253 Dorm Room 311 BRW 9x9 Floor Tile & Mastic Brown W/Red & White Streaks M YES 160 SF 14-Jun-11 160 SF Northwoods Enivronmental F N L L L L





Floor 02







Floor 02







Floor 02




257 Dorm Room 209 CW 0-4 Aircell Pipe Insulation Canvas Covered T YES 10 LF NA



Floor 02


257 Dorm Room 309 CSC Mastic - Carpet Carpet Squares Clear Adhesive M ND 160 SF 2-Jun-10 160 SF Northwoods Environmental 0 NA







Floor 02









Floor 02







Floor 02





261 Dorm Room 311 BRW 9x9 Floor Tile & Mastic Brown W/Red & White Streaks M YES 160 SF N N L L L H 01-Jun-07 160 Northwoods


Floor 02









Floor 02







264 Dorm Room 311 BKS 9x9 Floor Tile & Mastic Black W/Red & Tan Streaks M ND 260 SF 14-Jun-11 260 SF Northwoods Enivronmental 0 NA


Floor 02









Floor 02


266 Dorm Room 311 BKS 9x9 Floor Tile & Mastic Black W/Red & Tan Streaks M ND 2600 SF 0 NA 01-Jan-03 2600 Northwoods






Floor 02








269 Dorm Room 226 H 0-4 Fittings on Aircell Line Hard T YES 11 EA F D L L L H

Floor 02







Floor 02


270 Dorm Room 311 BRW 9x9 Floor Tile & Mastic Brown W/Red & White Streaks M YES 260 SF NA







Floor 02









Floor 02







274 Dorm Room 311 BRW 9x9 Floor Tile & Mastic Brown W/Red & White Streaks M YES 160 SF 14-Jun-11 160 SF Northwoods Environmental N N L L L L


Floor 02









Floor 02




280 Dorm Room 209 CW 0-4 Aircell Pipe Insulation Canvas Covered T YES 11 LF N N L L L H





Floor 02









Floor 02




287 Dorm Room Inferred (added July 2012) 309 TN Mastic - Carpet Tan M ND 160 SF 2-Jun-10 160 SF Northwoods Environmental 0 NA






Floor 02









Floor 02

All Hallways Above Ceiling 304 PK Ceiling Tile Adhesive Pucks M ND 3060 SF 0 NA

All Hallways Above Ceiling Limited Visibility 306 RT Plaster Rough Trowled Ceiling M ND 3060 SF 0 NA

All Hallways 303 WP 2x4 Ceiling Tile Worm Pinhole M ND 3060 SF 0 NA

All Hallways 306 RWC Plaster Rough walls and/or Ceiling M ND 5100 SF 0 NA

All Hallways 309 TN Mastic - Carpet Tan M ND 3060 SF 0 NA

All Hallways 311 BLK 9x9 Floor Tile & Mastic Black M YES 3060 SF N N L L L L



Floor 02


289 Storage 209 CW 0-4 Aircell Pipe Insulation Canvas Covered T YES 1 LF F N L L L M

289 Storage 226 H 0-4 Fittings on Aircell Line Hard T YES 1 EA F N L L L M


? Community Room Inferred (added July 2012) 309 TN Mastic - Carpet Tan M ND ? SF 2-Jun-10 All Northwoods Environmental 0 NA

Floor 03

Center Bathroom 303 WP 2x4 Ceiling Tile Worm Pinhole M ND 160 SF 0 NA

Center Bathroom 306 WC Plaster Walls And/Or Ceiling M ND 500 SF 0 NA

Center Bathroom 315 GFS Ceramic Tile Gray Floor Square M PRE 496 SF N N L L L H NA

Center Bathroom 315 WW Ceramic Tile White Wall M PRE 896 SF N N L L L H NA





Floor 03

West Bathroom 306 WC Plaster Walls And/Or Ceiling M ND 500 SF 0 NA

West Bathroom 315 GFS Ceramic Tile Gray Floor Square M PRE 496 SF N N L L L H NA

West Bathroom 315 WW Ceramic Tile White Wall M PRE 896 SF N N L L L H NA




jksturos

Text Box

ND

jksturos

Text Box

ND

jksturos

Text Box

ND

jksturos

Text Box

ND

jksturos

Text Box

ND

jksturos

Text Box

ND



Floor 03









Floor 03









Floor 03









Floor 03







Floor 03








Floor 03





320 Dorm Room Above Ceiling Limited Visibility 304 PK Ceiling Tile Adhesive Pucks M ND 40 SF 0 NA

320 Dorm Room Above Ceiling Limited Visibility 306 RT Plaster Rough Trowled Ceiling M ND 40 SF 0 NA

320 Dorm Room 303 WP 2x4 Ceiling Tile Worm Pinhole M ND 40 SF 0 NA


Floor 03








322 Dorm Room 311 BRW 9x9 Floor Tile & Mastic Brown W/Red & White Streaks M YES 140 SF F N L L L L

Floor 03









Floor 03









Floor 03









Floor 03







Floor 03









Floor 03







Floor 03









Floor 03





342 Dorm Room 304 PK Ceiling Tile Adhesive Pucks M ND 260 SF 0 NA

342 Dorm Room 306 RT Plaster Rough Trowled Ceiling M ND 260 SF 0 NA



Floor 03








Floor 03







Floor 03


346 Dorm Room 311 BRW 9x9 Floor Tile & Mastic Brown W/Red & White Streaks M YES 140 SF N N L L L H 01-Jan-05 140 Northwoods





Floor 03

347 Dorm Room 311 BKS 9x9 Floor Tile & Mastic Black W/Red & Tan Streaks M ND 260 SF 0 NA 01-Jan-04 260 Northwoods





Floor 03







Floor 03









Floor 03









Floor 03









Floor 03









Floor 03









Floor 03







Floor 03

366 Dorm Room 311 BRW 9x9 Floor Tile & Mastic Brown W/Red & White Streaks M YES 140 SF 10-Aug-09 140 SF Northwoods Environmental N N L L L L






Floor 03









Floor 03


372 Dorm Room Above Ceiling 304 PK Ceiling Tile Adhesive Pucks M ND 40 SF 0 NA

372 Dorm Room Above Ceiling 306 RT Plaster Rough Trowled Ceiling M ND 40 SF 0 NA

372 Dorm Room 303 WP 2x4 Ceiling Tile Worm Pinhole M ND 40 SF 0 NA





Floor 03








Floor 03







Floor 03









Floor 03









Floor 03



All Hallway 303 WP 2x4 Ceiling Tile Worm Pinhole M ND 3060 SF 0 NA

All Hallway 304 PK Ceiling Tile Adhesive Pucks M ND 3060 SF 0 NA

All Hallway 306 RT Plaster Rough Trowled Ceiling M ND 3060 SF 0 NA

All Hallway 306 RWC Plaster Rough walls and/or Ceiling M ND 5100 SF 0 NA

Floor 03

All Hallway 309 TN Mastic - Carpet Tan M ND 3060 SF 0 NA

All Hallway 311 BLK 9x9 Floor Tile & Mastic Black M YES 3060 SF N N L L L L

338B Lounge 301 HP 1x1 Ceiling Tile Hole Pattern M ND 708 SF 0 NA

338B Lounge 306 WC Plaster Walls And/Or Ceiling M ND 704 SF 0 NA

338B Lounge 309 TN Mastic - Carpet Tan M ND 210 SF 0 NA

338B Lounge 311 BRW 9x9 Floor Tile & Mastic Brown W/Red & White Streaks M YES 210 SF N N L L L L



Floor 03


387 Storage 309 TN Mastic - Carpet Tan M ND 14 SF 0 NA

387 Storage 311 BRW 9x9 Floor Tile & Mastic Brown W/Red & White Streaks M YES 140 SF N N L L L L


315 Store Room 306 WC Plaster Walls And/Or Ceiling M ND 704 SF 0 NA

? Community Room Inferred (added July 2012) 309 TN Mastic - Carpet Tan M ND ? SF 2-Jun-10 All Northwoods Environmental 0 NA

Floor 04

East Attic 236 CNV Vibration Joints Canvas T ND 1 EA 0 NA

East Attic 259 GBI Attic Insulation Gray Blown In T ND 1700 SF 0 NA

East Attic 319 WCP Brick Deck White Chaulk Pannel M ND 2000 SF 0 NA

West Attic 234 GCP Duct Insulation Gray Corragated Paper T YES 900 SF F D L L L L

West Attic 236 CNV Vibration Joints Canvas T ND 3 EA 0 NA

West Attic 259 GBI Attic Insulation Gray Blown In T ND 1700 SF 0 NA

West Attic 319 WCP Brick Deck White Chaulk Pannel M ND 2000 SF 0 NA

Floor 04Houghton Hall1400 Townsend Dr.Houghton,MI H04-2114

June 2005

5Consulting Group, Inc.N aov

EnvironmentalArchitectureEngineering

234-GCP-A,B,C236-CNV-C

259-GBI-A,B

259-GBI-C

319-WCP-A,B

319-WCP-C